ca roscoe ver6

User Guide 6.0

CA-Roscoe

SP3

This documentation and related computer software program (hereinafter referred to as the “Documentation”) is for the end user’s informational purposes only and is subject to change or withdrawal by Computer Associates International, Inc. (“CA”) at any time.

This documentation may not be copied, transferred, reproduced, disclosed or duplicated, in whole or in part, without the prior written consent of CA. This documentation is proprietary information of CA and protected by the copyright laws of the United States and international treaties.

Notwithstanding the foregoing, licensed users may print a reasonable number of copies of this documentation for their own internal use, provided that all CA copyright notices and legends are affixed to each reproduced copy. Only authorized employees, consultants, or agents of the user who are bound by the confidentiality provisions of the license for the software are permitted to have access to such copies.

This right to print copies is limited to the period during which the license for the product remains in full force and effect. Should the license terminate for any reason, it shall be the user’s responsibility to return to CA the reproduced copies or to certify to CA that same have been destroyed.

To the extent permitted by applicable law, CA provides this documentation “as is” without warranty of any kind, including without limitation, any implied warranties of merchantability, fitness for a particular purpose or noninfringement. In no event will CA be liable to the end user or any third party for any loss or damage, direct or indirect, from the use of this documentation, including without limitation, lost profits, business interruption, goodwill, or lost data, even if CA is expressly advised of such loss or damage.

The use of any product referenced in this documentation and this documentation is governed by the end user’s applicable license agreement.

The manufacturer of this documentation is Computer Associates International, Inc.

Provided with “Restricted Rights” as set forth in 48 C.F.R. Section 12.212, 48 C.F.R. Sections 52.227-19(c)(1) and (2) or DFARS Section 252.227-7013(c)(1)(ii) or applicable successor provisions.

2001 Computer Associates International, Inc.

All trademarks, trade names, service marks, and logos referenced herein belong to their respective companies.

Contents

About This Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii

Part I. Getting Started (General Information)

Chapter 1. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

Chapter 2. Commands and Command Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12.1 Command Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

2.1.1 Primary Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22.1.2 Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

2.2 Command Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52.2.1 Using Reserved Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

2.2.1.1 Using the Double Comma (,,) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52.2.1.2 Using the Asterisk (*) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62.2.1.3 Using the Minus Sign (-) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62.2.1.4 Using the Plus Sign (+) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

2.2.2 Using String Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72.2.2.1 String Delimiters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

2.3 Command Execution Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-92.4 Correcting Invalid/Incomplete Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10

2.4.1.1 Handling Erroneous Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-102.4.1.2 Handling Erroneous Primary Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-112.4.1.3 Handling Invalid PF/PA Key Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-112.4.1.4 Handling Confirmation Messages/Information Displays . . . . . 2-12

2.5 Displaying Previously Executed Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13| 2.6 Eliminating Duplicate Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15

Chapter 3. Controlling Character Recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13.1 Defining the Language Character Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23.2 Controlling Character Recognition and Treatment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

3.2.1 Entering and Editing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33.2.2 Specifying Character Strings With Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

3.3 Controlling Non-Displayable Character Translation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Chapter 4. Defining Column Boundaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14.1 Setting Temporary Boundaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24.2 Setting Session Boundaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

4.2.1 Using the STATUS DISPLAY or STATUS AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

Contents iii

4.2.1.1 When to Use STATUS DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34.2.1.2 When to Use STATUS AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

4.2.2 Using the SET BOUNDS Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44.2.3 Using the BOUNDS Line Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

Chapter 5. Defining the Display Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15.1 General Comments About Modifying the Display Format . . . . . . . . . . 5-25.2 Defining Display Margins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

5.2.1 Setting Temporary Margins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35.2.2 Setting Session Margins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

5.2.2.1 Using the STATUS DISPLAY and STATUS AWS Display . . . . 5-45.2.2.2 When to Use STATUS DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45.2.2.3 When to Use STATUS AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

5.2.3 Using the SET DISPLAY Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55.3 Defining Sequence Number Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-65.4 Defining Data Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Chapter 6. Displaying Session Attributes/Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16.1 Displaying/Changing Display and Boundary Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26.2 Displaying/Changing Session Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46.3 Display Site-Defined Attribute Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-126.4 Display Time and Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-146.5 Synopsis of Session Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15

Chapter 7. Printing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17.1 Identifying Data to be Printed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27.2 Qualifying the Data to be Printed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

7.2.1 Controlling Sequence Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37.2.2 Formatting the Printed Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37.2.3 Naming and Referencing Print Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

7.2.3.1 Naming Print Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-67.2.3.2 Referencing Print Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

7.2.4 Printing Multiple Copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-67.2.5 Printing Selected Lines/Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7

7.2.5.1 Limiting Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-77.2.5.2 Limiting Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7

7.2.6 Requesting Completion Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-87.2.7 Using a System Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9

7.3 Controlling Printing Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-107.3.1 Changing a Printing Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10

7.3.1.1 Changing for a Single Request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-107.3.1.2 Changing for the Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10

7.3.2 Displaying Printing Location Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-117.3.3 Obtaining Information About Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12

7.4 Controlling and Monitoring Print Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-137.4.1 Cancelling Request(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-137.4.2 Displaying Print Request Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-137.4.3 Holding/Releasing Request(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-147.4.4 Rerouting Request(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14

Chapter 8. Selecting a Screen Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

iv CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

8.1 Screen Format Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28.1.1 The Command Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38.1.2 The System Control Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38.1.3 The Execution Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

8.2 Splitting the Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-78.2.1 Invoking a Full-Screen Split . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-78.2.2 Invoking a Partial-Screen Split . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-98.2.3 Resplitting Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-108.2.4 Swapping Active Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-108.2.5 Terminating Split Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11

8.3 Changing the Screen Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-128.4 Locking the Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13

Chapter 9. Sending/Receiving Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19.1 Receiving Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29.2 Transmitting Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4

9.2.1 Using the SEND Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-49.2.2 Using the BulletinBoard System (BBS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5

Chapter 10. Signing On and Off CA-Roscoe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-110.1 Signing On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

10.1.1 Using the CA-Roscoe Sign-on Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-210.1.2 Accessing CA-Roscoe from VTAM Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-310.1.3 Accessing CA-Roscoe Through XTPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4

10.1.3.1 CA-Roscoe From CA-Roscoe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-410.1.3.2 CA-Roscoe From CICS Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-610.1.3.3 CA-Roscoe From TSO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7

10.2 Customizing Sign On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-810.2.1 Changing/Creating a Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-810.2.2 Creating a Sign-on Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10

10.3 Signing Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1210.3.1 Automatic Signoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1210.3.2 Explicit Signoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13

Chapter 11. Using/Customizing PF/PA Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-111.1 The Default PF/PA Key Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-211.2 Using PF/PA Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4

11.2.1 Types of Assignments: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-411.3 Reviewing Processing Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-711.4 Changing Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

11.4.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-911.4.2 Assigning Commands/Keyword Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10

11.4.2.1 Assignment Limitations: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1011.4.2.2 Assignment Techniques: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10

11.4.3 Assigning Keyword Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1311.4.3.1 Scroll Function Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1311.4.3.2 Special Purpose Function Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15

Chapter 12. Using the Training Aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-112.1 The CA-Roscoe Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Contents v

12.2 The HELP Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-312.3 The Online Tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6

Part II. The AWS (Creating and Manipulating Data)

Chapter 13. AWS: Introducing the AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-113.1 Attaching an AWS to the Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-213.2 Attaching an AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-313.3 Bringing Data Into an AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-413.4 Changing AWS Names/Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-513.5 Creating an AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-613.6 Detaching an AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-813.7 Discarding an AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-913.8 Positioning the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10

13.8.1 Positioning via the Internal Pointer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1013.8.2 Positioning to Specific Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11

13.8.2.1 Using Primary Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1113.8.2.2 Using Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12

13.9 Reattaching the Current AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1313.10 Selecting an AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14

Chapter 14. AWS: Changing Data Within an AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-114.1 Adding Character Strings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2

14.1.1 Inserting a String Within a Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-214.1.2 Prefixing or Suffixing a Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2

14.2 Reordering AWS Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-314.3 Editing Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4

14.3.1 Using a Primary Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-414.3.2 Using Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

14.4 Editing Character Strings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-614.4.1 Using a Primary Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-614.4.2 Using Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-714.4.3 Tracking Edited Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8

Chapter 15. AWS: Copying Data Within and Into an AWS . . . . . . . . 15-115.1 Copying Data Within the Active AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2

15.1.1 Using a Primary Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-215.1.1.1 To copy a single line: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-315.1.1.2 To copy a range of lines: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-315.1.1.3 To duplicate the copied lines at the destination: . . . . . . . . . 15-3

15.1.2 Using Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-315.1.2.1 Copy Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-315.1.2.2 Using Overlay Destination Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . 15-615.1.2.3 Repeat Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-7

15.2 Copying Data to an AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-815.2.1 Alternate Form of Screen Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-915.2.2 Copying All or a Range of Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1015.2.3 Copying Based on a Character String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-10

15.3 Copying Data Between Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1215.3.1 Copying All or a Range of Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-13

vi CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

15.3.2 Copying Based on a Character String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-13

Chapter 16. AWS: Deleting Data From an AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-116.1 Using Primary Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2

16.1.1 Deleting by Line Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-216.1.2 Deleting by Presence/Absence of a String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-3

16.2 Using Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-416.3 Using 3270 Hardware Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-6

16.3.1 Using the ERASE EOF Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-616.3.2 Using the DELETE Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-7

Chapter 17. AWS: Displaying/Changing AWS Information . . . . . . . . 17-1

Chapter 18. AWS: Entering and Formatting Data in an AWS . . . . . . 18-118.1 Entering Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-2

18.1.1 Using Primary Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-218.1.1.1 Opening the Execution Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-318.1.1.2 Using Power Typing Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-6

18.1.2 Using Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-818.1.2.1 Opening the Execution Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-818.1.2.2 Using SET AUTOINSERT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-918.1.2.3 Using Power Typing Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-10

18.1.3 Using a Mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1118.1.3.1 Defining a Mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1118.1.3.2 Inserting a Mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-11

18.1.4 Using a PF Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1318.1.5 Using the Command Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-14

18.2 Formatting Inserted Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1518.2.1 Using Automatic Indentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1518.2.2 Using the Software Tab Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-16

18.2.2.1 Setting Tabs and Defining a Tab Character . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1618.2.2.2 Using Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-17

Chapter 19. AWS: Formatting Data Within an AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-119.1 Centering Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-2


19.2 Controlling Capitalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-519.2.1 Using a Primary Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-519.2.2 Using a Line Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-6

19.3 Reformatting Text Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-719.3.1 Using a Primary Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-719.3.2 Using a Line Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-8

19.4 Shifting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-1019.4.1 Using Primary Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-1019.4.2 Using Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-11

19.5 Splitting and Joining Text Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-1319.5.1 Using Primary Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-13

19.5.1.1 Splitting Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-1319.5.1.2 Joining Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-15

Contents vii

19.5.2 Using Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-1719.5.2.1 Splitting Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-1719.5.2.2 Joining Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-18

Chapter 20. AWS: Locating Data Within an AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-120.1 Finding Specific Occurrences of a String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-2

20.1.1 Using Primary Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-320.1.2 Using Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-5

20.2 Including/Excluding Lines Containing a String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-620.2.1 Using Primary Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-6

20.2.1.1 INCL and EXCL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-620.2.1.2 SEARCH and OMIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-7

20.2.2 Using Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-820.3 Customizing the Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-10

20.3.1 Translating the Search String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-1020.3.2 Delimiting the Search String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-1020.3.3 Qualifying the Search String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-1020.3.4 Specifying the String in Hexadecimal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-1120.3.5 Positioning the Resulting Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-13

Chapter 21. AWS: Moving Data Within an AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-121.1 Using a Primary Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-221.2 Using Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-3

21.2.1.1 Using Overlay Destination Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . 21-5

Chapter 22. AWS: Renumbering Data in the AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-122.1.1 Renumbering Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-122.1.2 Display Sequence Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-222.1.3 Include Sequence Numbers in the Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-222.1.4 Set AWS Sequence Number Attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-322.1.5 Including CA-Roscoe Sequence Numbers With PRINT/SUBMIT . . 22-3

Chapter 23. AWS: Saving and Updating a Library Member . . . . . . . 23-123.1 Creating a Library Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-2

23.1.1 A CA-Roscoe library member name MUST: . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-223.1.2 Member Name Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-323.1.3 Assigning a Description and/or Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-4

23.2 Updating a Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-5

Part III. Data Sets (Browsing and Maintaining Data Sets)

Chapter 24. Data Sets: Introducing the Data Set Facility . . . . . . . . . . 24-124.1 Attaching the Data Set Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-2

24.1.1 Using Wildcard Characters to Create a Catalog or VTOC SelectionList . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-8

24.1.2 Using Wildcard Characters to Create a CA-Librarian, PDS or VolumeSelection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-9

24.2 Using Data Set Facility Function Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-1024.3 Using Data Set Facility Selection Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-12

24.3.1 Entering Function Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-13

viii CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

24.3.2 Refreshing a Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-15

Chapter 25. Data Sets: Attaching a Data Set Object at the Terminal . . . 25-125.1 Attaching a CA-Librarian Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-2

25.1.1 Using a Primary Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-225.1.2 Using the Data Set Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-325.1.3 Selection List Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-4

25.1.3.1 Selecting Alternate Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-425.1.3.2 Display Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-525.1.3.3 Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-5

25.2 Attaching a Catalog Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-725.2.1 Using a Primary Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-725.2.2 Using the Data Set Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-825.2.3 Selection List Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-9


25.3 Attaching a Generation Data Group Data Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-1425.4 Attaching a PDS Member/CA-Librarian Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-15

25.4.1 Using a Primary Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-1525.4.2 Using the Data Set Facility Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-1625.4.3 Using a Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-1725.4.4 Attached Data Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-17

25.5 Attaching a PDS Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-1825.5.1 Using a Primary Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-1825.5.2 Using the Data Set Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-1925.5.3 Selection List Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-20

25.5.3.1 Load Library Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-2025.5.3.2 Selecting Alternate Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-2125.5.3.3 Display Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-2125.5.3.4 Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-2125.5.3.5 Non-Load Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-2325.5.3.6 Selecting Alternate Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-2425.5.3.7 Display Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-2425.5.3.8 Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-24

25.6 Attaching a Sequential Data Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-2625.6.1 Using a Primary Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-2625.6.2 Using the Data Set Facility Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-2625.6.3 Using a Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-2725.6.4 Attached Data Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-27

25.7 Attaching a Volume Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-2825.7.1 Using a Primary Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-2825.7.2 Using the Data Set Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-2925.7.3 Selection List Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-30


25.8 Attaching a VTOC Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-3325.8.1 Using a Primary Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-3325.8.2 Using the Data Set Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-34

Contents ix

25.8.3 Selection List Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-3525.8.3.1 Selecting Alternate Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-3625.8.3.2 Display Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-3625.8.3.3 Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-36

25.9 Selecting the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-38

Chapter 26. Data Sets: Browsing Data Set Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-126.1 Detaching Data Set Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-226.2 Locating Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-3

26.2.1 Locating Specific Occurrences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-326.2.2 Including/Excluding List Containing a String . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-426.2.3 Customizing the Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-5

26.2.3.1 Translating the Search String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-526.2.3.2 Delimiting the Search String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-526.2.3.3 Qualifying the Search String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-626.2.3.4 Specifying the Hexadecimal Representation of a String . . . . . 26-626.2.3.5 Screen Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-7

26.3 Positioning the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-826.3.1 Positioning to Specific Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-826.3.2 Positioning to Name Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-8

26.4 Reattaching a Data Set Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-10

Chapter 27. Data Sets: Performing Data Management Tasks . . . . . . . 27-127.1 Allocating a Data Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-2

27.1.1 Using a Primary Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-227.1.2 Using a Function Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-3

27.1.2.1 Allocate Function Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-427.1.2.2 Allocate SMS Function Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-7

27.2 Cataloging a Data Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-1127.3 Copying a Data Set Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-13

27.3.1 Using Primary Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-1327.3.1.1 Copying a Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-1427.3.1.2 Copying Unattached Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-15

27.3.2 Using a Function Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-1627.3.3 Using a Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-20

27.4 Compressing a Partitioned Data Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-2127.5 Define Alias . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-22


27.6 Define GDG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-2527.6.1 Using a Primary Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-2527.6.2 Using a Function Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-25

27.7 Delete Data Set/Member/Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-2827.7.1 Using a Primary Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-2927.7.2 Using a Function Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-2927.7.3 Using a Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-3327.7.4 Delete Confirmation Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-33

27.8 Inquiring About a Data Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-3627.9 Inquiring About a Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-4027.10 Printing a Data Set Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-44

27.10.1 Using a Primary Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-44

x CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

27.10.1.1 Printing a Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-4527.10.2 Using a Function Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-4627.10.3 Using a Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-51

27.11 Releasing Allocated Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-5227.12 Renaming Data Sets/Members/Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-53

27.12.1 Using a Primary Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-5327.12.2 Using a Function Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-5427.12.3 Using a Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-57

27.12.3.1 Renaming Members/Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-5727.12.3.2 Renaming Data Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-57

27.13 Uncataloging a Data Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-5827.14 Writing to a Data Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-59

Part IV. Jobs (Submitting and Managing Jobs)

Chapter 28. Jobs: Introducing Job Output Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-128.1 Check Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-2

28.1.1 JCL Syntax Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-228.1.2 COBOL Syntax Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-3

28.2 Submitting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-428.2.1 Controlling Notification Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-428.2.2 Controlling Sequence Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-528.2.3 Expanding +INC Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-628.2.4 Expanding -INC Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-7

28.3 Using the Job Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-928.3.1 Wildcard Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-1128.3.2 Using Job Facility Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-12

28.4 Using Job Selection Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-1328.4.1 Job Facility Operator Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-15

Chapter 29. Jobs: Displaying Job-Related Information . . . . . . . . . . . 29-129.1 Displaying Job Execution Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-229.2 Displaying Class/Destination Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-429.3 Displaying Initiator Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-529.4 Displaying Job Queue Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-629.5 Displaying Job-Specific Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-7

Chapter 30. Jobs: Viewing Job Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-130.1 Attaching Job Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-2

30.1.1 Using a Primary Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-230.1.1.1 Using the Job Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-330.1.1.2 Using a Job Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-430.1.1.3 When Can a Job be Viewed? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-430.1.1.4 What is the SYSOUT class? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-530.1.1.5 What Is the Current Status of the Submitted Job? . . . . . . . . 30-630.1.1.6 Who Can Attach a Job? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-6

30.2 Browsing Job Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-730.2.1 Detaching Job Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-7

30.2.1.1 Using Primary Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-7

Contents xi

30.2.1.2 Using the Job Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-830.2.2 Locating Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-8

30.2.2.1 Locating Specific Occurrences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-830.2.2.2 Including/Excluding Lists Containing a String . . . . . . . . . . 30-930.2.2.3 Customizing the Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-1030.2.2.4 Specifying the Hexadecimal Representation of a String . . . . . 30-1130.2.2.5 Screen Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-11

30.2.3 Positioning the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-1230.2.3.1 Positioning Between Multiple Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-1230.2.3.2 Positioning Within a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-1330.2.3.3 Positioning to Named Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-13

30.2.4 Reattaching Job Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-1530.2.4.1 Using the Job Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-16

30.3 Performing Output Management Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-1730.3.1 Altering File Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-17

30.3.1.1 Using Primary Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-1730.3.1.2 Using the Job Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-1830.3.1.3 Using a Job Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-19

30.3.2 Copying Job Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-2030.3.2.1 Using Primary Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-2030.3.2.2 Using the Job Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-2030.3.2.3 Using a Job Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-22

30.3.3 Displaying File Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-2330.3.3.1 Using a Primary Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-2330.3.3.2 Using the Job Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-25

30.3.4 Printing Job Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-2630.3.4.1 Using Primary Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-2630.3.4.2 Using the Job Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-2630.3.4.3 Using the Job Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-29

30.3.5 Canceling a Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-3030.3.5.1 Using Primary Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-3030.3.5.2 Using the Job Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-3030.3.5.3 Using the Job Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-31

Part V. The Library System (Browsing and Managing Local Data)

Chapter 31. Library: Introducing the Library Facility . . . . . . . . . . . 31-131.1 Notes About the Library System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-231.2 Attaching the Library Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-331.3 Using Library Facility Function Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-631.4 Using the Library Facility Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-7

31.4.1 Entering Function Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-831.4.2 Refreshing a Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-10

Chapter 32. Library: Attaching Library Data at the Terminal . . . . . . 32-132.1 Attaching a Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-2

32.1.1 Using a Primary Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-232.1.2 Using the Library Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-532.1.3 Format of Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-6

32.1.3.1 Selecting Alternate Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-7

xii CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

32.1.3.2 Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-732.1.4 Reordering the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-9

32.2 Attaching a Member Directly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-1032.2.1 Using a Primary Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-1032.2.2 Using the Library Facility Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-1132.2.3 Using a Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-1132.2.4 Format of Member Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-12


Chapter 33. Library: Browsing Attached Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-133.1 Detaching the Library Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-233.2 Locating Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-3

33.2.1 Locating Specific Occurrences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-333.2.2 Including/Excluding Lists Containing a String . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-433.2.3 Customizing the Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-5

33.2.3.1 Translating the Search String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-533.2.3.2 Delimiting the Search String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-533.2.3.3 Qualifying the Search String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-633.2.3.4 Specifying the Hexadecimal Representation of a String . . . . . 33-633.2.3.5 Screen Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-7

33.3 Positioning the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-833.3.1 Positioning to Specific Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-833.3.2 Positioning to Named Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-8

33.4 Reattaching the Library Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-10

Chapter 34. Library: Performing Library Management Tasks . . . . . . 34-134.1 Altering Member Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-2

34.1.1 Using a Primary Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-234.1.2 Using a Function Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-334.1.3 Using a Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-3

34.2 Copying a Member/Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-534.2.1 Using Primary Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-5

34.2.1.1 Copying Unattached Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-734.2.2 Using a Function Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-834.2.3 Using a Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-9

34.3 Delete a Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-1134.3.1 Using a Primary Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-1134.3.2 Using a Function Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-1234.3.3 Using a Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-1334.3.4 Delete Confirmation Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-14

34.4 Inquiring About a Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-1534.5 Printing a Library Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-17


34.6 Renaming Library Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-2234.6.1 Using a Primary Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-2234.6.2 Using a Function Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-2234.6.3 Using a Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-23

Contents xiii

Part VI. Additional Facilities

Chapter 35. BBS - BulletinBoard System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-135.1 Beginning a Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-2

35.1.1 What can you do? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-235.2 Message Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-335.3 Viewing a Thread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-5

35.3.1 Viewing a Thread Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-635.4 Create a Thread or Thread Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-835.5 BulletinBoard Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-11

35.5.1 The Utility Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-1235.5.2 Setting BulletinBoard Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-1335.5.3 View News Announcements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-1535.5.4 Prune a BBS Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-16

| 35.5.5 Deleting an Unwanted Thread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-1635.5.6 Print a Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-1735.5.7 Print a Thread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-18

35.6 CA-Roscoe User Dialog Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-2035.6.1 Send a Message to Another CA-Roscoe User . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-2035.6.2 The ZMsg Mode and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-2135.6.3 ZMsg Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-2235.6.4 Viewing Messages on ZMsg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-2435.6.5 Sending a Message to a CA-Roscoe User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-2535.6.6 Set ZMsg Message Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-2735.6.7 Locate Another CA-Roscoe User VIA CA-SysView Interface . . . . 35-28

Chapter 36. CA-Roscoe and DB2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-1

Chapter 37. DMF - Dialog Management Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37-1

Chapter 38. ETSO - Application Execution System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-138.1 Determining Executable Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-238.2 Executing Applications Under ETSO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-3

38.2.1 Allocating Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-438.2.1.1 Allocating an AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-438.2.1.2 Allocating a Library Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-438.2.1.3 Allocating the Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-538.2.1.4 Allocating Data Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-5

38.2.2 Querying and Freeing Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-738.2.3 Initiating Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-8

38.3 Executing Distributed Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-938.4 Executing TSO Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-10

Chapter 39. RPF - Roscoe Programming Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-1

Chapter 40. SKETCH - CICS/IMS Panel Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-1

Appendixes

xiv CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

Appendix A. Using Typewriter Devices With CA-Roscoe . . . . . . . . . . . A-1A.1 Beginning a Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2A.2 Establishing Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3A.3 Signing On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4A.4 Ending a CA-Roscoe Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6A.5 Using a Typewriter Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7A.6 Using CA-Roscoe Commands and Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9A.7 Using the Data Set Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10A.8 Viewing Job Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-11A.9 Non-Executable Commands and Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X-1

Contents xv

xvi CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

About This Guide

This CA-Roscoe User Guide provides a task-oriented description of CA-Roscoe. Itdescribes how you can use CA-Roscoe commands and facilities to perform a variety ofactivities.

About This Guide xvii

Organization

Chapter Description

1 Introduces CA-Roscoe.

2 Provides general information about CA-Roscoe commands.

3 Describes how to control character recognition.

4 Describes how to define column boundaries.

5 Describes how to define the display format.

6 Describes how to display and change the display andcolumn boundaries and session attributes. Also describeshow to display site-defined attribute values, the time, andthe date.

7 Describes how to print data at a system or 328x-type printer.

8 Describes the CA-Roscoe screen format, how to split thescreen, change screen sizes and lock the screen.

9 Describes how to send and receive messages.

10 Describes how sign on and off CA-Roscoe.

11 Describes how to use and customize PF and PA keyassignments.

12 Describes how to obtain additional information aboutCA-Roscoe.

13 Introduces the AWS and describes how to attach, change,create, detach, discard, position, and reattach an AWS.

14 Describes how to change data within an AWS by adding orchanging character strings.

15 Describes how to copy data within and into an AWS.

16 Describes how to delete data from an AWS.

17 Describes how to display and change AWS information.

18 Describes how to enter data into an AWS and format thatdata.

19 Describes how to format text within the AWS.

20 Describes how to locate all or specific occurrences of datawithin an AWS.

21 Describes how to move data within an AWS.

22 Describes how to renumber the contents of an AWS.

23 Describes how to save and update data as a library member.

24 Introduces the Data Set Facility.

xviii CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

Chapter Description

25 Describes how to attach data or a Selection List.

26 Describes how to locate data, position the display, detach adata set object, and then reattach it.

27 Describes how to perform a variety of data managementtasks. These tasks include allocating, cataloging, copying,compressing, deleting, inquiring, printing, releasing,renaming, uncataloging, and writing data.

28 Introduces the job output facilities and describes how tosyntax check and submit jobs for execution.

29 Describes how to display job execution status,class/destination status, initiator status, and job queue status.

30 Describes how to attach job output, browse the job, andperform such tasks as altering file attributes, copying output,displaying file attributes and printing the job at a system or328x-type printer.

31 Introduces the Library Facility.

32 Describes how to attach data or a Selection List.

33 Describes how to locate data, position the display, detachdata, and then reattach it.

34 Describes how to perform such library management tasks asaltering attributes, copying, deleting, inquiring, printing, andrenaming members.

35 Introduces the BulletinBoard System.

36 Introduces CA-Roscoe/DB2.

37 Introduces the Dialog Management Facility.

38 Introduces the Extended Time Sharing Option (ETSO).

39 Introduces the ROSCOE Programming Facility (RPF).

40 Introduces SKETCH.

APPENDIX A Describes how to use typewriter devices with CA-Roscoe.

About This Guide xix

Summary of Revisions in this Edition

CA-Roscoe supports the six-digit job number support added with z/OS JES2/JES3 1.2.See Chapter 29, “Jobs: Displaying Job-Related Information” on page 29-1 and 30.1.1,“Using a Primary Command” on page 30-2 for more information.

xx CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

Summary of Revisions

■ Displaying Session Attributes/Information:

The STATUS SESSION display now includes the new field:

SPLIT Contains current split screen setting.

■ The Job Facility:

CA-Roscoe 6.0 contains a panel-driven RPF system to facilitate job processing. Itis invoked using the AJOB command, and is referred to as the Job Facility. TheJob Facility can be used to:

– attach jobs

– display a job's execution status

– display job-related information

– alter file attributes

– copy jobs

– print jobs

– cancel jobs

About This Guide xxi

CA-Roscoe Publications

The following publications are supplied with CA-Roscoe. They are divided into aUser Series and a System Series.

User SeriesName

Contents

Command ReferenceGuide

Describes all CA-Roscoe primary and line commandsand Monitor commands.

Extended DevelopmentTools Guide

Describes how: 1) the Application ProgrammingInterface (API) can be used by applications executingunder ETSO to take advantage of CA-Roscoefacilities, and 2) the interactive facilities provided bySKETCH can be used to generate and maintain panelsused in programs running under CICS or IMS.

Getting Started Guide Introduces CA-Roscoe to non-programmers.

Reference Summary Summarizes all CA-Roscoe primary and linecommands and Monitor commands.

Reference Summary (forRPF)

Summarizes all Roscoe Programming Facility (RPF)commands, functions, expressions and variables.

Release Guide Provides a summary of the enhancements included inthis release.

RPF Language Guide Describes all components of the RPF language andhow to write RPF programs. It also describes theDialog Management Facility (DMF) which can beused to develop, maintain and execute panel-drivenRPF applications.

User Guide Provides task-oriented descriptions of how to useCA-Roscoe.

xxii CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

System SeriesName

Contents

CA-ACTIVATOR 2.1Supplement

Presents CA-ACTIVATOR installation procedures.

Extended Facilities forSystem ProgrammersGuide

Describes how sites can make extensions to theirCA-Roscoe system. This includes creating site-writtenMonitor routines and customizing security and otheronline exits.

Installation Guide Describes the steps to follow when installing orupgrading CA-Roscoe.

Messages and CodesGuide

Explains all messages that might be received byindividuals using CA-Roscoe and/or by the individualresponsible for maintaining CA-Roscoe.

Programs and UtilitiesGuide

Describes CA-Roscoe execution requirements. Alsodescribes maintenance and reporting programs for theaccounting facility, Active Work Space (AWS), librarysystem, and user profile system.

Security AdministrationGuide

Describes implementation of internal and externalsecurity to protect your CA-Roscoe system.

System CommandsGuide

Describes commands used to control and monitorCA-Roscoe and to obtain performance informationabout that execution.

System Reference Guide Intended for the individual responsible for maintainingCA-Roscoe. It describes CA-Roscoe and itscomponents.

About This Guide xxiii

Related Publications

The following manuals are included in the CA90s Services Documentation set:

The following manuals relate to CA-Roscoe and are available from ComputerAssociates.

Title Contents

CA90s Services Reference Guide Operating Instructions for the CA90sServices.

CA90s Services Installation andMaintenance Guide

Installation procedure and installationJCL for CA90s Services.

CA90s Services Message Guide Messages and codes for CA90sServices.

CA90s Services CA-ACTIVATOR 2.1Supplement

Proceduresa for usingCA-ACTIVATOR to install andmaintain CA90s Services.

CA90s Services CA-ACTIVATORImplementation and User Guide

Installation and upgrade instructions,and operating instructions forCA-ACTIVATOR.

CA-ViewPoint User Guide Contains information and examples forimplementing and using ViewPoint.

Title Contents

CA-Earl Reference Guide Contains detailed information aboutCA-Earl statements, parameters, andcoding rules. Also explains theCA-Earl Reporting Service.

CA-Earl User Guide Designed for users interested inlearning about CA-Earl. It presents anintroduction to CA-Earl features andcapabilities.

CA-Earl Systems Programmer Guide Lists the installation options forCA-Earl and instructions for modifyingthem. Also describes sizerequirements and program execution.

CA-Earl Examples Guide Contains sample programs that show avariety of common applications.

xxiv CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

CA90s Services

CA90s Services are a common set of services that may be used by any MVSComputer Associates product. These services are maintained separately from theproduct and are documented and installed separately as well. CA-Roscoe usesCAIRIM for installation services and security.

Licensing Management Program (LMP)

CA-Roscoe now interfaces with CAIRIM services to determine product licensingauthorization.

About This Guide xxv

Reading Syntax Diagrams

The formats of all statements and some basic language elements are illustrated usingsyntax diagrams. Read syntax diagrams from left to right and top to bottom.

The following terminology, symbols, and concepts are used in syntax diagrams.

Keywords: Appear in uppercase letters, for example, COMMAND or PARM.These words must be entered exactly as shown.

Variables: Appear in italicized lowercase letters, for example, variable.

Required Keywords and Variables: Appear on a main line.

Optional Keywords and Variables: Appear below a main line.

Default Keywords and Variables: Appear above a main line.

Double Arrowheads Pointing to the Right: Indicate the beginning of astatement.

Double Arrowheads Pointing to Each Other: Indicate the end of a statement.

Single Arrowheads Pointing to the Right: Indicate a portion of a statement, orthat the statement continues in another diagram.

Punctuation Marks or Arithmetic Symbols: If punctuation marks or arithmeticsymbols are shown with a keyword or variable, they must be entered as part of thestatement or command. Punctuation marks and arithmetic symbols can include:

The following is an example of a statement without parameters.

Statement Without Parameters

��──COMMAND─────────────────────────────────────────────────────��

You must write:

COMMAND

, comma > greater than symbol

. period < less than symbol

( open parenthesis = equal sign

) close parenthesis ¬ not sign

+ addition − subtraction

* multiplication / division

xxvi CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

Required parameters appear on the same horizontal line (the main path of the diagram)as the command or statement. The parameters must be separated by one or moreblanks.

Statement With Required Parameters

��──COMMAND──PARM1──PARM2───────────────────────────────────────��

You must write:

COMMAND PARM1 PARM2

Delimiters such as parentheses around parameters or clauses must be included.

Delimiters Around Parameters

��──COMMAND─ ──(PARM1) ──PARM2='variable' ─────────────────────────��

If the word “variable” is a valid entry, you must write:

COMMAND (PARM1) PARM2='variable'

Where you see a vertical list of parameters as shown in the following example, youmust choose one of the parameters. This indicates that one entry is required and onlyone of the displayed parameters is allowed in the statement.

Choice of Required Parameters

��──COMMAND─ ──┬ ┬─PARM1─ ─────────────────────────────────────────�� ├ ┤─PARM2─ └ ┘─PARM3─

You can choose one of the parameters from the vertical list, such as in the followingexamples:

COMMAND PARM1 COMMAND PARM2 COMMAND PARM3

A single optional parameter appears below the horizontal line that marks the mainpath. When a required parameter in a syntax diagram has a default value, it indicatesthe value for the parameter if the command is not specified. If you specify thecommand, you must code the parameter and specify one of the displayed values.

Default Value for a Required Parameter

┌ ┐─YES─��──COMMAND─ ──PARM1= ──┴ ┴─NO── ─PARM2─────────────────────────────��

If you specify the command, you must write one of the following:

About This Guide xxvii

COMMAND PARM1=NO PARM2COMMAND PARM1=YES PARM2

Optional Parameter

��──COMMAND─ ──┬ ┬─────────── ─────────────────────────────────────�� └ ┘─PARAMETER─

You can choose (or not) to use the optional parameter, as shown in the followingexamples:

COMMAND COMMAND PARAMETER

If you have a choice of more than one optional parameter, the parameters appear in avertical list below the main path.

Choice of Optional Parameters

��──COMMAND─ ──┬ ┬─────── ─────────────────────────────────────────�� ├ ┤─PARM1─ └ ┘─PARM2─

You can choose any of the parameters from the vertical list, or you can write thestatement without an optional parameter, such as in the following examples:

COMMAND COMMAND PARM1 COMMAND PARM2

For some statements, you can specify a single parameter more than once. A repeatsymbol (a backward-pointing arrow above the main horizontal line) indicates that youcan specify multiple parameters. The following examples include the repeat symbol.

Repeatable Variable Parameter

┌ ┐────────────��──COMMAND─ ───

!┴─variable─ ──────────────────────────────────────��

In the above example, the word “variable” is in lowercase italics, indicating that it is avalue you supply, but it is also on the main path, which means that you are required tospecify at least one entry. The repeat symbol indicates that you can specify aparameter more than once. Assume that you have three values named VALUEX,VALUEY, and VALUEZ for the variable. Some of your choices are:

COMMAND VALUEXCOMMAND VALUEX VALUEYCOMMAND VALUEX VALUEX VALUEZ

xxviii CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

If the repeat symbol contains punctuation such as a comma, you must separatemultiple parameters with the punctuation. The following example includes the repeatsymbol, a comma, and parentheses.

Separator with Repeatable Variable and Delimiter

┌ ┐─,────────��──COMMAND──(─ ───

!┴─variable─ ─)─────────────────────────────────��

In the above example, the word “variable” is in lowercase italics, indicating that it is avalue you supply. It is also on the main path, which means that you must specify atleast one entry. The repeat symbol indicates that you can specify more than onevariable and that you must separate the entries with commas. The parentheses indicatethat the group of entries must be enclosed within parentheses. Assume that you havethree values named VALUEA, VALUEB, and VALUEC for the variable. Some ofyour choices are:

COMMAND (VALUEC) COMMAND (VALUEB,VALUEC) COMMAND (VALUEB,VALUEA) COMMAND (VALUEA,VALUEB,VALUEC)

The following example shows a list of parameters with the repeat symbol.

Optional Repeatable Parameters

┌ ┐─────────── ┌ ┐─────────── ┌ ┐───────────��──COMMAND─ ───

!┴┬ ┬─────── ───

!┴┬ ┬─────── ───

!┴┬ ┬─────── ─────────────��

└ ┘─PARM1─ └ ┘─PARM2─ └ ┘─PARM3─

Some choices you can make include:

COMMAND PARM1COMMAND PARM1 PARM2 PARM3COMMAND PARM1 PARM1 PARM3

When a parameter in a syntax diagram is above the line, for example, YES in thefollowing diagram, its special treatment indicates it is the default value for theparameter. If you do not include the parameter when you write the statement, theresult is the same as if you had actually specified the parameter with the default value.

Default Value for a Parameter

��──COMMAND─ ──┬ ┬───────────────── ─PARM2─────────────────────────�� │ │┌ ┐─YES─

└ ┘──PARM1= ──┴ ┴─NO──

Because YES is the default in the example above, if you write:

COMMAND PARM2

About This Guide xxix

you have written the equivalent of:

COMMAND PARM1=YES PARM2

In some syntax diagrams, a set of several parameters is represented by a singlereference, as in this example:

Variables Representing Several Parameters

��──COMMAND─ ──┬ ┬───────────────────── ───────────────────────────�� ├ ┤─PARM1───────────────

└ ┘─┤ parameter-block ├─

parameter-block:├─ ──┬ ┬────────────────── ─────────────────────────────────────────┤

├ ┤─PARM2──────────── └ ┘──PARM3 ──┬ ┬───────

├ ┤─PARM4─ └ ┘─PARM5─

The “parameter-block” can be displayed in a separate syntax diagram.

Choices you can make from this syntax diagram therefore include (but are not limitedto) the following:

COMMAND PARM1 COMMAND PARM3

COMMAND PARM3 PARM4

Note: Before you can specify PARM4 or PARM5 in this command, you must specifyPARM3.

A note in a syntax diagram is similar to a footnote except that the note appears at thebottom of the diagram box.

��──COMMAND─ ──┬ ┬───────── ───────────────────────────────────────�� └ ┘ ─PARM1───(1)

Note:1 This is a note about the item.

xxx CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

Part I. Getting Started (General Information)

Chapter 1. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

Chapter 2. Commands and Command Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12.1 Command Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

2.1.1 Primary Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22.1.2 Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

2.2 Command Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52.2.1 Using Reserved Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52.2.2 Using String Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

2.3 Command Execution Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-92.4 Correcting Invalid/Incomplete Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-102.5 Displaying Previously Executed Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13

| 2.6 Eliminating Duplicate Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15

Chapter 3. Controlling Character Recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13.1 Defining the Language Character Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23.2 Controlling Character Recognition and Treatment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

3.2.1 Entering and Editing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33.2.2 Specifying Character Strings With Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

3.3 Controlling Non-Displayable Character Translation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Chapter 4. Defining Column Boundaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14.1 Setting Temporary Boundaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24.2 Setting Session Boundaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

4.2.1 Using the STATUS DISPLAY or STATUS AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34.2.2 Using the SET BOUNDS Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44.2.3 Using the BOUNDS Line Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

Chapter 5. Defining the Display Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15.1 General Comments About Modifying the Display Format . . . . . . . . . . 5-25.2 Defining Display Margins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

5.2.1 Setting Temporary Margins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35.2.2 Setting Session Margins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45.2.3 Using the SET DISPLAY Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

5.3 Defining Sequence Number Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-65.4 Defining Data Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Chapter 6. Displaying Session Attributes/Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16.1 Displaying/Changing Display and Boundary Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26.2 Displaying/Changing Session Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46.3 Display Site-Defined Attribute Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-126.4 Display Time and Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14

6.5 Synopsis of Session Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15

Chapter 7. Printing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17.1 Identifying Data to be Printed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27.2 Qualifying the Data to be Printed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

7.2.1 Controlling Sequence Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37.2.2 Formatting the Printed Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37.2.3 Naming and Referencing Print Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-67.2.4 Printing Multiple Copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-67.2.5 Printing Selected Lines/Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-77.2.6 Requesting Completion Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-87.2.7 Using a System Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9

7.3 Controlling Printing Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-107.3.1 Changing a Printing Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-107.3.2 Displaying Printing Location Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-117.3.3 Obtaining Information About Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12

7.4 Controlling and Monitoring Print Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-137.4.1 Cancelling Request(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-137.4.2 Displaying Print Request Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-137.4.3 Holding/Releasing Request(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-147.4.4 Rerouting Request(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14

Chapter 8. Selecting a Screen Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18.1 Screen Format Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

8.1.1 The Command Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38.1.2 The System Control Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38.1.3 The Execution Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

8.2 Splitting the Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-78.2.1 Invoking a Full-Screen Split . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-78.2.2 Invoking a Partial-Screen Split . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-98.2.3 Resplitting Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-108.2.4 Swapping Active Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-108.2.5 Terminating Split Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11

8.3 Changing the Screen Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-128.4 Locking the Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13

Chapter 9. Sending/Receiving Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19.1 Receiving Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29.2 Transmitting Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4

9.2.1 Using the SEND Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-49.2.2 Using the BulletinBoard System (BBS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5

Chapter 10. Signing On and Off CA-Roscoe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-110.1 Signing On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

10.1.1 Using the CA-Roscoe Sign-on Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-210.1.2 Accessing CA-Roscoe from VTAM Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-310.1.3 Accessing CA-Roscoe Through XTPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4

10.2 Customizing Sign On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-810.2.1 Changing/Creating a Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8

CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

10.2.2 Creating a Sign-on Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1010.3 Signing Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12

10.3.1 Automatic Signoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1210.3.2 Explicit Signoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13

Chapter 11. Using/Customizing PF/PA Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-111.1 The Default PF/PA Key Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-211.2 Using PF/PA Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4

11.2.1 Types of Assignments: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-411.3 Reviewing Processing Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-711.4 Changing Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

11.4.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-911.4.2 Assigning Commands/Keyword Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1011.4.3 Assigning Keyword Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13

Chapter 12. Using the Training Aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-112.1 The CA-Roscoe Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-212.2 The HELP Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-312.3 The Online Tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6

Chapter 1. Introduction

CA-Roscoe is an online program development system that you can use to performtasks such as:

■ Entering and editing data,■ Saving the data in the CA-Roscoe library or an OS data set for later use,■ Submitting the data as a jobstream for background execution,■ Viewing the files comprising a job, and■ Browsing and maintaining OS data sets.

CA-Roscoe can be used at any 3270-type terminal (such as the IBM 3278 or 3290)and at typewriter devices (such as the IBM 3767 or any device that operates in amanner similar to a teletype terminal).

The sample screen displays used in this manual assume that you are using a 3270-typeterminal. While the content of the displays is accurate, the width of the displays hasbeen modified so that they will fit within the margins of this manual.

If you are using a typewriter device, refer to Appendix A for additional informationabout using that device with CA-Roscoe.

Chapter 1. Introduction 1-1

1-2 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

Chapter 2. Commands and Command Components

This chapter describes:

■ The types of commands supported by CA-Roscoe (line commands and primarycommands).

■ Conventions for using CA-Roscoe commands. This includes:

– Using reserved characters.

– Using reserved words.

– Using a string operand with a command (like how the string may be specifiedand, if necessary, what characters to use as string delimiters).

– The execution hierarchy used to evaluate commands.

– How to correct invalid and incomplete commands.

– How to redisplay previously executed commands.

Chapter 2. Commands and Command Components 2-1

2.1 Command Types

2.1 Command Types

CA-Roscoe supports both primary commands and line commands.

Primary Commands Entered in the Command Area of the screen. Monitorcommands and RPF program names are also entered in theCommand Area.

Line Commands Entered in the sequence number field of the Execution Area tomodify the contents of the active AWS. To use linecommands, the screen display format must have anunprotected sequence number field. You can establish thisformat by changing the modifiable STATUS DISPLAY screenor by entering:

SET DISPLAY AWS NUMX

If you use line commands frequently, you may want to addthis command to your sign-on program.

The following example shows a screen where SET DISPLAY AWS NUMX is ineffect. Here, primary and line commands are used together. When the ENTER key ispressed, a line for data entry will be inserted after line 3600, and then all occurrencesof PRT will be changed to PART.

SET DISPLAY AWS NUMX Display Format

7 8 EDIT /PRT/PART/

>

> AWS(PRI.INVLIST) SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72

> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....

...... ============================= T O P =================

==34== RECORD CONTAINS 133 CHARACTERS

==35== LABEL RECORDS ARE OMITTED

I=36== DATA RECORD IS INVENTORY-REPORT-LINE.

==37== =1 INVENTORY-REPORT-LINE.

==38== =5 CARRIAGE-CONTROL PIC X.

==39== =5 FILLER PIC X(9).

2.1.1 Primary Commands

You can enter one or more primary commands on each line of the Command Area.When entering multiple commands on a line, you must remember that:

1. Each command must be complete within the line (for example, commands cannotbe continued).

2. When multiple commands are typed on a line, they must be separated by acommand delimiter. The default delimiter is usually the ampersand (&). Thefollowing illustrates how the ampersand is used to separate commands on a line.


2.1 Command Types

Using the Command Delimiter

7 8RENUMBER & UPDATE INVLIST_

>


> <...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5...

...... ================================ T O P ==============

===1== IDENTIFICATION DIVISION.

2.1.2 Line Commands

You may enter one line command in any of the lines comprising the sequence numberfield. Note that at the top and bottom of an AWS, the sequence number field contains'......'. These periods are unprotected, and allow you to enter a line command before thefirst line of that AWS or after the last line of that AWS.

Line commands can have numeric or string operands.

■ A numeric operand is entered with the command in the sequence number field. Itindicates the number of times an operation is to occur (for example, D3, in thefollowing example deletes lines 3400 through 3600).

■ A string operand is entered in the data portion of the line containing thecommand. It must always be delimited. When the command is executed, theoriginal data are restored. (INCL, in the following example displays everyoccurrence of the string DIVISION, from line 3700 through the end of that AWS.)

Placement of Line Command Operands

7 8

>


> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....

...... ============================= T O P =================

D3 4== RECORD CONTAINS 133 CHARACTERS


==36== DATA RECORD IS INVENTORY-REPORT-LINE.

INCL== /DIVISION/TORY-REPORT-LINE.


When using a string operand, the line command can be placed anywhere within thesequence number field.


2.1 Command Types

When using a numeric operand, the following evaluation hierarchy is performed:

■ If all or part of the sequence number field following the command is deleted, thecommand is interpreted as entered. (See lines 200 and 300 in the followingexample.)

■ If the sequence number field following the command is not deleted, the positionof the cursor affects command interpretation.

– If the cursor is in the sequence number field, all numeric values up to thecursor are treated as part of the command. (See lines 500 and 600 in thefollowing example.)

– If the cursor is in the first displayed position within the data portion of theline, all numeric values following the command within the sequence numberfield are treated as part of the command. (See lines 800 and 900 in thefollowing example.)

– If the cursor is in any other position within the data portion of the line, onlythose numeric values that differ from those originally displayed in thesequence number field are treated as part of the command. (See lines 1100and 1200 in the following example.)

The first two examples shown below indicate how the deletion of all or part of thesequence number field following a line command eliminates the concern about cursorpositioning. The remaining examples show how the cursor position can affectcommand interpretation.

Using Line Commands With Numeric Operands

7 8 > ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....

...... ============================= T O P =================

===1==

D2_ Cmd is D2; 2 lines deleted

==D3 = _ Cmd is D3; 3 lines deleted

===4==

D5=5== Cmd is D5; 5 lines deleted (cursor after

D5=6== Cmd is D5; 5= lines deleted (cursor one

===7== forward from cmd)

===8D9 _ Cmd is D9; 9 lines deleted

==D9== _ Cmd is D9; 9== lines deleted

==1===

=D11== _ Cmd is D; 1 line deleted

D212== _ Cmd is D2; 1 line deleted


2.2 Command Conventions


This section describes the characters that can be used in CA-Roscoe commands. Italso discusses how to:

■ Use the special CA-Roscoe reserved characters.■ Use CA-Roscoe reserved words.■ Specify a string operand with a command.

The characters that may be used in CA-Roscoe commands fall into the categoriesshown in the following table.

Type Characters Included

Alphabetic Uppercase and lowercase character plus the nationalcurrency symbols. (See Chapter 3, “Controlling CharacterRecognition.”)

Numeric 0-9

Special All characters appearing on a standard terminal keyboard,except the alphabetic and numeric characters and thecomma, asterisk and space.

Binary All EBCDIC bit combinations that cannot be entered from astandard keyboard.

Separator Space. A space is used to separate a command from its firstoperand and to separate operands from each other.

Reserved Double comma (,,), asterisk (*), minus sign (-) and the plussign (+). (See the next section, 2.2.1, “Using ReservedCharacters.”)

2.2.1 Using Reserved Characters

This section describes the special functions provided by the reserved characters ,,(double comma), * (asterisk), - (minus sign) and + (plus sign).

2.2.1.1 Using the Double Comma (,,)

The double comma can be used in a command to represent the last line of the activeAWS, library member, attached data set object or attached job output file. Forexample, to display line 500 through the end of the active AWS, you would enter:

ATTACH 5== ,,



To copy lines 800 through the end of the library member INVLIST to the bottom ofthe active AWS, you would enter:

COPY INVLIST 8== ,, B

2.2.1.2 Using the Asterisk (*)

The asterisk can be used to indicate:

■ The name of the last fetched, saved or updated library member. For example, toupdate the contents of the last fetched member, you would enter:

UPDATE Q

■ The line at which the pointer is currently positioned in an AWS, library memberor attached job output file. For example, to display the contents of the active AWSbeginning with the line at which the pointer is currently positioned, enter:

ATTACH Q ,,

■ The last display of attached data when used with the keywords AWS, JOB or LIB.For example, if you have been viewing job output, you can reattach the activeAWS and begin the display with the last displayed screen by entering:

ATTACH AWS Q

■ Command deferral. Any primary command, Monitor command, or RPF programthat follows an asterisk is not executed until the asterisk is deleted. For example,assume you want to copy lines 500 through 800 to a specific location within theactive AWS, but you do not know the line number of that location. By precedingthe command with an asterisk, as in:

Q COPY 5== 8==

you can type the line numbers you know and then scroll through the active AWSto determine the destination line number. The command preceded by the asteriskand any subsequent commands will not be executed until you remove the asterisk.

2.2.1.3 Using the Minus Sign (-)

Use the minus sign to reexecute the last executed primary command, Monitorcommand or RPF program. For example, if you have just issued the commandDISPLAY ROS+ to see the status of all jobs whose names begin with ROS, enter:

-

to reexecute the same command.



2.2.1.4 Using the Plus Sign (+)

Use the plus sign to redisplay one or more previously executed primary commands,Monitor commands, or RPF program names. For example, assume the last commandyou executed was:

ATTACH DSN ROSCOE.TEST(SOURCE1)

To redisplay this command so that you can modify it, all you need enter is:

+

Optionally, you may include a number with the + to specify which previously executedcommand you want displayed. For additional information about using the plus sign,see the section, 2.5, “Displaying Previously Executed Commands” on page 2-13.

2.2.2 Using String Operands

Many of the CA-Roscoe primary and line commands have string operands. Thenotation conventions show this operand as:

charstr Any sequence of printable entities specified in character format, or

string Any sequence of entities specified in either character format or itshexadecimal representation.

If the syntax of a command shows the operand as either /charstr/ or /string/, it must bebound by a special character that delimits the operand.



2.2.2.1 String Delimiters

The special character used to delimit the operand and the special character used as thecommand delimiter cannot be used within the string.

For consistency, the CA-Roscoe documentation uses the slash (/) as a string delimiter.Other valid characters include:

| vertical bar'%' percent sign¬ logical not - if not used as the default tab character& ampersand - if not used as the default command delimiter( left parentheses) right parentheses_ underscore- dash or minus sign+ plus sign= equal sign! exclamation point¢ cent sign: colon' '

semi-colon" quotation mark' apostrophe} right brace{ left brace? question mark< less than sign> greater than sign. period


2.3 Command Execution Hierarchy

2.3 Command Execution Hierarchy

When the ENTER key is pressed, the Execution Area is examined first.

■ If line commands have not been entered, all changes made to the data displayed inthe Execution Area are recorded.

■ If line commands have been entered, they are validated. If any error isencountered, execution halts until the error is corrected, no changes made to thedisplayed data are recorded and no line or primary commands are executed.

If the line commands are all valid, changes made to the displayed data arerecorded and the line commands are executed.

The contents of the Command Area is then examined.

As each word is encountered, it is evaluated according to the hierarchy shown in thefollowing example.

Primary Command Evaluation Hierarchy

7 8

--<-- DOES THE 'WORD' MATCH A PRIMARY COMMAND OR COMMAND ->--

| NO ABBREVIATION? YES |

| |

|-<-- DOES THE 'WORD' MATCH THE FIRST THREE CHARACTERS -->-|

| NO OF A MONITOR COMMAND NAME? YES |

| |

|-<-- DOES THE 'WORD' MATCH THE NAME OF A MEMBER IN THE -->-|

| NO USER'S LIBRARY? YES |

| |

|-<-- DOES THE 'WORD' MATCH THE NAME OF A MEMBER IN THE -->-|

| NO SITE/USER EXECUTION LIBRARY? YES |

| |

ß ß

DISPLAY EXECUTE

ERROR MESSAGE

U V

Note: If you press a PF/PA key instead of the ENTER key, the PF/PA key isevaluated before any other action is taken. See Chapter 11,“Using/Customizing PF/PA Keys” for additional information.


2.4 Correcting Invalid/Incomplete Commands


This section describes how to handle erroneous line commands and primarycommands. Notice that the following example contains an invalid line command (likeINCX) and an incomplete primary command (like FETCH with no member name).

Invalid/Incomplete Commands

7 8FETCH & ATTACH

>


> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....

...... ============================= T O P =================


===2== PROGRAM-ID. INVLIST.

DD=3== DD=4== INCX /WS-END-OF-FILE-SWITCH/

2.4.1.1 Handling Erroneous Line Commands

Line commands are evaluated before primary commands. Also, all line commands areevaluated before any is executed. If one or more errors are found, a message isdisplayed in the data portion of the affected line(s) and halts processing. No changesto the data are applied; no line commands are executed; no primary commands areexecuted. The following example illustrates the type of message displayed when aninvalid command is encountered.

Invalid Line Command Message

7 8FETCH & ATTACH

>


> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....

...... ============================= T O P =================



DD=3== DD=4==

INCX <<< ATX!1 INVALID COMMAND >>> -

To correct a line command, you can:

1. Overtype it with a valid command. (In the previous figure, you could overtypeINCX with INCL.)

When the ENTER key is pressed, any changes made to the displayed data arerecorded and the line commands are executed.



2. Blank out the sequence number field using the DELETE key, the ERASE EOFkey or the space bar.

When the ENTER key is pressed, the line containing the error is restored, changesmade to the displayed data are recorded and any other line commands areexecuted.

3. Use the RESET line command.

RESET causes all outstanding line commands (both valid and invalid) and allchanges made to the currently displayed data to be ignored.

2.4.1.2 Handling Erroneous Primary Commands

After evaluating and executing any line commands that may have been entered, eachprimary command is evaluated before it is executed. If no errors are found, thecommands are executed in the order in which they are encountered.

If an invalid or incomplete command is found, the command containing the error andany subsequent commands are not executed. As illustrated in the following example amessage is displayed and the cursor is positioned to the beginning of the command inerror. (Valid commands preceding the command in error are executed, and are nolonger displayed.)

Sample Incomplete Primary Command

7 8FETCH & ATTACH

> CMD13 INSUFFICIENT NUMBER OF OPERANDS SPECIFIED > AWS(PRI.INVLIST) SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72

> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....

...... ============================= T O P =================



===3== ENVIRONMENT DIVISION.

You can now correct that command. You can also add, delete or change any commandthat is displayed. You can even insert commands ahead of the corrected command.When you press the ENTER key, the commands are executed.

2.4.1.3 Handling Invalid PF/PA Key Assignment

If a PF/PA key assignment is invalid, the commands comprising the assignment, plusany others entered in the Command Area, are displayed. For example, if PF1 isassigned:

SET DISPLAY XXX

that command is displayed when you press PF1. (A message explaining the error isdisplayed on the Response Line.)



To continue execution, you can correct the displayed command and press the ENTERkey. (You should correct the PF key assignment as soon as possible.)

Note that if the length of the unexecuted commands exceeds the length of a line in theCommand Area and the Command Area is comprised of:

■ One Line: unexecuted commands that do not fit on that line are truncated.

■ Two or Three Lines: unexecuted commands that do not fit on the first line aredisplayed on the second and subsequent lines.

2.4.1.4 Handling Confirmation Messages/Information Displays

Some CA-Roscoe commands write confirmation messages (like SUBMIT) or displayinformation (like ATTACH). When one of these commands is encountered in a seriesof commands, execution halts when that command is executed.

To execute any remaining commands, press the ENTER key again.


2.5 Displaying Previously Executed Commands


You can display a list of the most recently executed commands by issuing thecommand:

STATUS COMMAND

For example, assume that you have just executed the following series of commands:

IMPORT DSN=ROSCOE.TEST(SAMPLE1)

RENUMBER 1= 1=

SAVE WIDGET

EDIT /AAA/BBB/

UPDATE Q

The following example illustrates the display that might be produced if you nowentered the command STATUS COMMAND.

STATUS COMMAND: Sample Display

7 8 _

>

>

....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.

COMMAND BUFFER IS 256 BYTES AND CONTAINS 8 COMMANDS

1 STATUS COMMAND

2 UPDATE Q

3 EDIT /AAA/BBB/

4 SAVE WIDGET

5 RENUMBER 1= 1=

6 IMPORT DSN=ROSCOE.TEST(SAMPLE1)

7 rpf-program-name

8 EXEC pfx.rpf-program-name

U V

The executed commands are stored in a command buffer. (The size of the buffer isdefined by site management.) When the contents of the buffer are displayed, it beginswith the most recently executed command (like STATUS COMMAND), and includesall of the commands that are currently stored within the buffer area.

This list of commands is useful when, for example, you want to redisplay or reexecutea previously executed command.

To redisplay:

■ The last executed primary command, Monitor command, or RPF program:

Use the plus sign (+), as in:



+

You then have the option of modifying or reexecuting the command by enteringthe minus sign (-). (See 2.2.1, “Using Reserved Characters” on page 2-5 foradditional information.) For example, if the last executed command was SUBMITABC, you can use the plus sign to redisplay the command, modify it and thenpress the ENTER key to submit another job.

■ A series of commands: repeatedly execute the + to scroll back through theprevious commands.

■ A specific command:

Specify a value with the +, where the value is the relative number of thepreviously executed command.

If you do not remember the position of the command in a command series, enterSTATUS COMMAND to display a list of the most recently executed commands.

Using the series of commands shown in the previous figure, you can redisplay theIMPORT command by entering:

+6

Optionally, you can display a maximum of three previously executed commands,as in:

+6,3


2.6 Eliminating Duplicate Commands

| 2.6 Eliminating Duplicate Commands

| Optionally, you can indicate to CA-Roscoe to save or not save the command in the| command recall buffer if the command is equal to the previous command. This option| called "DUPCR" can be set as a system wide variable and defaults that duplicate| commands will always be saved.

| Users can designate that duplicate commands not be saved by entering:

| SET DUPCR NO

| To save duplicate commands, enter:

| SET DUPCR YES


Chapter 3. Controlling Character Recognition

This chapter describes how to:

■ Change the language character set you are using.■ Control uppercase/lowercase character recognition and treatment.■ Control the translation of non-displayable characters.

Chapter 3. Controlling Character Recognition 3-1

3.1 Defining the Language Character Set

3.1 Defining the Language Character Set

As distributed, it is assumed that you will be entering, editing and displaying data thatconforms to the U.S. English character set. (U.S. English characters include uppercaseA through Z, lowercase a through z, plus the symbols @, # and $.)

If the terminals at your site support a different language character set, your sitemanagement will have established that language character set as the default.

If your site management has designated that multiple character sets may be used, youwill be told which ones are supported. To change from one character set to another,you can use either:

■ The SET CHARSET command, or■ The modifiable displays provided by the STATUS SESSION and STATUS AWS

commands.


3.2 Controlling Character Recognition and Treatment

3.2 Controlling Character Recognition and Treatment

You can use the SET MODE command or the modifiable screen provided by theSTATUS DISPLAY or STATUS AWS command to define how CA-Roscoe is torecognize and translate:

■ Data that you enter or edit in an AWS.■ Character strings specified with commands such as EDIT, FIRST, INCL, and so

on.

3.2.1 Entering and Editing Data

To control character translation, you can set the mode to:

BASIC All alphabetic data that you enter or edit will be translated touppercase characters. This is normally the default when you signon.

XTENDED All alphabetic data that you enter or edit will be retained exactly asyou entered it (it can contain a combination of uppercase andlowercase characters).

STANDARD Resets the translation mode to your company's default.

Data that is in an AWS may be retranslated using a variety of primary or linecommands. See Chapter 19, “AWS: Formatting Data Within an AWS” for additionalinformation.

3.2.2 Specifying Character Strings With Commands

The current translation mode setting also affects how characters strings specified withCA-Roscoe commands are treated. For example, if you enter the command:

first division

and the current setting is:

■ BASIC - the string is treated as though it was entered in all uppercase characters(the search is for the first occurrence of the string DIVISION).

■ XTENDED - the string is not translated (the search is for the string division).

Chapter 3. Controlling Character Recognition 3-3

3.3 Controlling Non-Displayable Character Translation

3.3 Controlling Non-Displayable Character Translation

You can also use the SET MODE command to define how CA-Roscoe is to translatenon-displayable characters.

By default, non-displayable characters are translated to blanks when data on the sameline is typed or changed. To control this translation, you can set the mode to:

NOPRESERVE Non-displayable characters will be translated to blanks whenother data on the same line is typed. This is the default whenyou sign on.

PRESERVE Non-displayable characters will not be translated to blanks whenother data on the same line is typed.


Chapter 4. Defining Column Boundaries

This chapter describes how you can change column boundaries for:

■ The execution of a single command, or

■ The remainder of your terminal session. When you alter the boundaries for yoursession, you can use:

– The modifiable displays provided by the STATUS DISPLAY command andSTATUS AWS commands, or

– The SET BOUNDS primary command, or

– The BOUNDS line command, when an AWS is attached.

By default, the operation of primary and line commands that edit, locate or shift dataextends the full width of the line. Thus, if you enter:

FIRST PROCEDURE

the full width of every line is searched until either: 1) the string is found, or 2) theend of the data or the search limit is reached.

Chapter 4. Defining Column Boundaries 4-1

4.1 Setting Temporary Boundaries

4.1 Setting Temporary Boundaries

You can change the default boundaries for the execution of a single primary command.To do so, specify the appropriate column numbers with the command. For example,

FIRST 2= 3= FILLER

displays the first occurrence of FILLER within columns 20 through 30 of the currentlyattached data. After the command is executed, the previously established or defaultboundaries are reestablished.

Note: Once a character string has been specified with the commands EXCL, FIRST,INCL, LAST, NEXT and PREV, the string is remembered until you change it.For example, if you issued the command:

FIRST FILLER

and you now want to find the next occurrence of the same string withincolumns 50 through 70, all you need enter is:

NEXT 5= 7=

The display will begin with the next line containing

FILLER

within columns 50 and 70 and the previously established or default boundariesare reestablished.


4.2 Setting Session Boundaries


To change column boundaries for your terminal session, you can use:

■ The modifiable display produced by the STATUS DISPLAY command,■ The SET BOUNDS command or■ The BOUNDS line command (when an AWS is attached).

Once set, they will remain in effect until you change them or end your session.

4.2.1 Using the STATUS DISPLAY or STATUS AWS

Both STATUS DISPLAY and STATUS AWS provide modifiable screens which canbe used to change column boundaries.

4.2.1.1 When to Use STATUS DISPLAY

The modifiable screen provided by STATUS DISPLAY contains the display formatsused when the active AWS, a data set object, job output file or library member isattached.

To change a column boundary, position the cursor to the appropriate LEFT BOUNDSor RIGHT BOUNDS field. Then, overtype the displayed value with the appropriatecolumn number.

For example, suppose the boundary settings for the active AWS are 10 and 72. Tochanges these values to 1 and 80, respectively, type 1 in the LEFT BOUNDS field,and then position the cursor to the RIGHT BOUNDS field and type 80 there. (WhenSTATUS DISPLAY is issued, the cursor is automatically placed in the LEFTBOUNDS field for AWS.) The next time you attach the contents of the active AWS,your column boundaries will be set to 1 and 80.

4.2.1.2 When to Use STATUS AWS

When you are working with multiple AWSs, use the STATUS AWS command todisplay information about the active, and all existing, AWSs that you are using. Inaddition to the current display format information, this modifiable display providesinformation about all attributes associated with the AWSs. See Chapter 17, “AWS:Displaying/Changing AWS Information” for details.



4.2.2 Using the SET BOUNDS Command

To change column boundaries:

■ For the currently attached data:

Enter the SET BOUNDS command with the appropriate left and right columnboundary values, as in:

SET BOUNDS 5= 8=

In this example, the action of subsequent commands that edit, locate and shift dataaffect only the contents of columns 50 through 80.

■ For a particular type of attached data:

Include the AWS, DSN, JOB, or LIB keyword(s) with the SET BOUNDScommands. In the following example, the first SET BOUNDS command changesthe boundaries for data in the active AWS or an attached library member; thesecond command changes the boundaries for an attached data set object:

SET BOUNDS AWS LIB 1 8=

SET BOUNDS DSN 2== 25=

To reset column boundaries:

■ For the currently attached data, enter:

SET BOUNDS or SET BOUNDS OFF

■ For data that is not currently attached, you must include the appropriate keyword,as in:

SET BOUNDS LIB OFF

To set or reset the column boundaries for all forms of attached data, use the ALLkeyword with the command, as in:

SET BOUNDS ALL 9= 12= or SET BOUNDS ALL OFF

To illustrate the use of temporary and session boundaries, assume you have attachedan AWS and are currently editing its contents. If you enter the commands:

SET BOUNDS 1= 5= & EDIT /ABC/XYZ/

FILL 1 6 /XXXXXX/ & FIRST AAA

then SET BOUNDS sets the boundaries to columns 10 through 50. EDIT changesevery occurrence of ABC within those columns to XYZ. FILL temporarily overridesthe boundaries so that the string XXXXXX can be placed in columns 1 through 6.Finally, FIRST uses the session boundaries (columns 10 through 50) to locate the firstoccurrence of the string AAA.



4.2.3 Using the BOUNDS Line Command

When setting column boundaries for the active AWS, you can use the BOUNDS linecommand. To do this,

■ Type BOUNDS in the sequence number field of a line.

■ Then place the special characters < and > in the data portion of the same line atthe positions where the boundaries are to be set.

The following example shows how you would set the boundaries to columns 9 and 43,respectively.

BOUNDS Line Command: Setting Column Boundaries

7 8 >


> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+

...... ============================= T O P =============

BOUNDS ID<NTIFICATION DIVISION. >


BOUNDS Line Command: Resulting Column Boundaries

7 8 >


> ..<1....+....2....+....3....+....4..>.+....5....+

...... ============================= T O P =============




When positioning the characters < and >:

■ If the desired location contains data, overtype the character with the appropriatespecial character. The character will be redisplayed when the command isexecuted.

■ If no data appear in the appropriate location (the character is to be placed on ablank line or after the last character of a line containing data), use the space bar toposition to the appropriate location. (The data in the Execution Area is evaluatedprior to the execution of any line command and null spaces are deleted.)

The Scale Line in the previous example reflects the designated column boundarylocations (the < and > are displayed in the appropriate positions on the Scale Line).

When the display is invoked by SET DISPLAY NUMX, the Scale Line always reflectsthe column boundaries, whether they are set by the SET BOUNDS primary commandor the BOUNDS line command.


Chapter 5. Defining the Display Format

This chapter describes how you can change:

■ The display margins either temporarily or for the terminal session.

■ The sequence number display.

■ The format in which the data are displayed (for example, character format only, orcharacter and its hexadecimal representation).

Chapter 5. Defining the Display Format 5-1

5.1 General Comments About Modifying the Display Format

5.1 General Comments About Modifying the Display Format

You can use the SET DISPLAY command or the modifiable screen provided by theSTATUS DISPLAY command to perform any of these changes. (When working withone or more AWSs, you can also use the modifiable display provided by the STATUSAWS command.)

When using the SET DISPLAY command, you can include one or more changes withthe command. For example, you could enter:

SET DISPLAY 1= 5= (to change display margins)

SET DISPLAY NUMX (to change sequence number display)

SET DISPLAY CHAR (to change data format display)

or

SET DISPLAY 1= 5= NUMX CHAR

Subsequent sections describe how to change each specific display format component.


5.2 Defining Display Margins


By default, the display margins begin with column one and extend the width of theterminal screen. You can change these display margins: 1) temporarily, or 2) for theremainder of your session.

When changing the display margins:

■ The margin values must be between 1 and the maximum line length (for example,255 for an AWS, library member or job output; the LRECL length for a data setobject).

■ The value of the right margin must be equal to or greater than the value of the leftmargin.

The resulting display begins with the right margin and continues until the left marginor the maximum width of the screen is filled.

5.2.1 Setting Temporary Margins

You can temporarily change the display margins by:

1. Pressing the PF key to which the SCROLL RIGHT or SCROLL LEFT function isassigned, or

2. Replacing either or both of the values in the COLS field on the SystemInformation Line, where the first value identifies the left margin and the secondfield identifies the right margin.

When you specify a new margin setting, leading zeros are not required; if they areomitted, eliminate the old value so that the field contains only your new marginsetting.

These margins apply only to what is currently attached and remain in effect until theattachment is changed. For example, if an AWS is currently attached and you pressthe PF key to which SCROLL RIGHT is assigned, the new display margins will:

■ Remain in effect while the current AWS contents is displayed.

■ Revert to the previous setting when you:

– Delete or replace the contents of this AWS. The margins revert to thepreviously established margins.



– Attach a data set object, job or library member. The margins revert to the: 1)previous setting if you are reattaching, or 2) default setting if the designateddata was not previously attached.

Note: Operands of the search-related commands (such as FIRST or INCL), allow youto designate the screen positioning that is to occur when a match is found.Depending on the positioning requested through the command, your displaymargins may change when one of these commands is executed.

5.2.2 Setting Session Margins

You can change the display margins for the remainder of your session by issuing theSET DISPLAY command or changing the modifiable screen provided by the STATUSDISPLAY or STATUS AWS command.

5.2.2.1 Using the STATUS DISPLAY and STATUS AWS Display

Display margins can be changed using the modifiable screen provided by the STATUSDISPLAY or STATUS AWS command.

5.2.2.2 When to Use STATUS DISPLAY

The modifiable screen provided by STATUS DISPLAY contains the display formatsused when the active AWS, a data set object, job output file or library member isattached.

To change a display margin, position the cursor to the appropriate SET DISPLAYLEFT or SET DISPLAY RIGHT field. Then, overtype the displayed value with theappropriate column number.

For example, assume the display margins for the active AWS are 10 and 50. Tochange these values to 1 and 72, respectively, type 1 in the SET DISPLAY LEFT fieldand type 1; then position the cursor to the SET DISPLAY RIGHT field and type 72.When you reattach the active AWS, your display margins will be set to 1 and 72.

5.2.2.3 When to Use STATUS AWS

When you are working with multiple AWSs, use the STATUS AWS command displayinformation about the active, and all existing, AWSs that you are using. In addition tothe current display format information, this modifiable display provides informationabout all attributes associated with the AWSs. See Chapter 17, “AWS:Displaying/Changing AWS Information” for details.



5.2.3 Using the SET DISPLAY Command

The SET DISPLAY command can be used to:

■ Change both the left and right margins: Specify two numeric values with thecommand, as in:

SET DISPLAY 1= 5=

■ Change only the left display margin: Specify a single numeric value, as in:

SET DISPLAY 1=

The display will begin with column ten and extend the width of the terminalscreen.

■ Change only the right display margin: Specify a numeric value prefixed with acomma:

SET DISPLAY ,9=

The display will end with column 90 and show as much of the preceding data aswill fit within the width of the line.

■ Reset the display margins to begin with the column 1:

SET DISPLAY

All of the preceding examples affect the data that is currently displayed. To set displaymargins for data that is not currently displayed, include the keyword ALL or anycombination of the keywords AWS, DSN, JOB or LIB. For example, to set all displaymargins to 50 through 80, you would enter:

SET DISPLAY ALL 5= 8=

If you then specified,

SET DISPLAY AWS LIB 7 72

the display margins in effect when you attach the active AWS or a library memberwill be set to columns 7 through 72; while the display margins for job output and dataset objects will remain set at columns 50 through 80.


5.3 Defining Sequence Number Display

5.3 Defining Sequence Number Display

You can control the display of sequence numbers using:

■ The modifiable screen provided by the STATUS DISPLAY or STATUS AWScommand.

■ The SET DISPLAY command.

In all cases, specify the keywords NUM, NUMX, NONUM and NUM2, with:

NUM Each line begins with a six digit protected sequence number fieldthat is followed by data.

NUMX Each line begins with a six digit unprotected sequence number fieldthat is followed by data. NUMX must be in effect if you want touse line commands to edit the contents of the active AWS.

NONUM Each line contains only data; no sequence numbers are displayed.

NUM2 Two lines are displayed for each data line. The first line containsthe six digit protected sequence number field; the second linecontains only data.

Notes:

■ If you include the FLIP operand when you assign SET DISPLAY to a PF key,you can bounce the display between sequence number display settings. Forexample, if you assign PF2 the value:

LET PF2 = 'SET DISPLAY FLIP NONUM NUMX'

The display format will change every time you press PF2.

■ You can use ALL or any combination of the keywords AWS, DSN, JOB and LIBto qualify the scope of the SET DISPLAY command. For example, to enable theuse of line commands when editing the active AWS and to prohibit the display ofsequence numbers with all other forms of attached data, you would enter:

SET DISPLAY AWS NUMX DSN JOB LIB NONUM

Since the display margins and data display operands are not included with thesecommands, those that are currently in effect will remain unchanged.


5.4 Defining Data Display


By default, data are displayed in its character format. If the data contain non-printablecharacters, they are not displayed.

You can change the data display format to have the data displayed in both its characterformat and its hexadecimal representation by:

■ Changing the modifiable STATUS DISPLAY or STATUS AWS screen byovertyping the appropriate field with either CHAR or HEX.

■ Specifying the HEX or CHAR operand with the SET DISPLAY command.

The following example illustrates the display before issuing the SET DISPLAY HEXcommand.

Character Display

7 8SET DISPLAY HEX_

>

> AWS() SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72

> <...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5.

...... ============================= T O P ===============

===1== HOWARD THOMAS W

===2== SMITHSON SALLY S

===3== WALTERS JOHN

=============================== B O T T O M ==============

The following example illustrates the display that results after issuing the commandSET DISPLAY HEX. (SET DISPLAY CHAR returns the data to character format.)

Character and Hex Display

7 8 >


> <...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5.

...... ============================= T O P ===============

===1== HOWARD THOMAS W

4CDECDC4444444ECDDCE4444E4! =866194=======386412====6=1 ---------------------------------------------------

===2== SMITHSOM SALLY S

4EDCECEDD44444ECDDE44444E4! =24938265=====21338=====2=2 ---------------------------------------------------

===3== WALTERS JOHN

4ECDECDE444444DDCD44444444! =6133592======1685======!=1 ---------------------------------------------------



The highlighted areas in the previous example indicate the hexadecimal representationof the data shown in the upper screen. Notice that columns 27 and 29 contain datathat is not displayable or modifiable in its character format.

When data are displayed in HEX format, the resulting data are:

■ Modifiable when displaying the contents of the active AWS. You can modify:

– Printable characters on the character line. (Non-printable characters areshown as blanks, which are not modifiable.)

To ensure your changes are properly applied, no character translation occurswhen SET DISPLAY HEX is in effect. This means that even if you havespecified SET MODE BASIC, lowercase characters will not be translated touppercase characters.

– Hexadecimal representation on the two vertical hexadecimal lines. Theselines are always modifiable.

Since there can be no confusion about the hexadecimal representation of acharacter, lowercase characters are translated to uppercase when SET MODEBASIC is in effect.

■ Not modifiable when a library member, job output file or data set object isdisplayed.

Notes:

■ If you include the FLIP operand when you assign SET DISPLAY to a PF key,you can bounce the display between its character and hexadecimal formats. Forexample, if you assign PF1 the value:

LET PF1 = 'SET DISPLAY FLIP CHAR'

The display format will change every time you press PF1.

■ As with the other forms of SET DISPLAY, you can use the ALL, AWS, DSN,JOB and LIB keywords to qualify the scope of the command. These operands areuseful when you want to designate the data display format for data that is notcurrently attached.


Chapter 6. Displaying Session Attributes/Information

This chapter describes how you can:

■ Display and change screen display and column boundary settings.■ Display and change session attributes.■ Display site-specified system attributes.■ Display the current time and date.

At any time during your session, you can display information about the attributes thatare currently in effect. For example, to display the current column search boundariesand display margins, you would enter:

STATUS DISPLAY

You can change most of the session attributes using either modifiable displays orprimary commands. (The section, 6.5, “Synopsis of Session Attributes” on page 6-15contains a list of the primary commands, associated STATUS displays and a briefdescription of the attributes affected.)

Changing these attributes allows you to customize your session to meet your ownunique needs. If you find that you always want certain attributes to be in effect, youcan include the appropriate primary commands in a sign-on program. (A sign-onprogram is executed every time you sign on to CA-Roscoe or split the screen. SeeChapter 10, “Signing On and Off CA-Roscoe” for additional information.)

Note: For information about displaying and changing AWS attributes, seeChapter 17, “AWS: Displaying/Changing AWS Information.”

Chapter 6. Displaying Session Attributes/Information 6-1

6.1 Displaying/Changing Display and Boundary Settings


To see information about the display formats and column boundaries that are currentlyin effect, enter the command:

STATUS DISPLAY

This display is modifiable. To produce a non-modifiable display, include the LISToperand with the command, as in:

STATUS DISPLAY LIST

The following example illustrates the type of information provided by STATUSDISPLAY.

STATUS DISPLAY Command: Sample Display

7 8 >

> AWS() SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===79 A<name>

>....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6

ROSCOE BOUNDS/DISPLAY STATUS

SET CURRENT

BOUNDS DISPLAY DISPLAY

LEFT RIGHT LEFT RIGHT LEFT RIGHT

AWS: 1 8= 1 72 1 72 NUMX CHAR CJUST

LIB: 1 8= 1 72 1 72 NUM CHAR CJUST

JOB: 1 255 1 72 1 72 NUM CHAR CJUST

DSN: 1 32767 1 72 1 72 NUM CHAR CJUST

MODE ===> BASIC CURSOR ===> INIT

U V

Note: STATUS DISPLAY provides information about the active AWS. Whenworking with one or more AWSs, use the STATUS AWS command to displayand change the display formats and column boundaries or all existing AWSs.See Chapter 17, “AWS: Displaying/Changing AWS Information” onpage 17-1 for additional information.

See Chapter 5, “Defining the Display Format” for information.



BOUNDS Contains: Current or default left and right column boundary settingsto be used by any command that locates, edits or shifts data.

Change: Overtype field BOUNDS LEFT or RIGHT withappropriate column number; use SET BOUNDS command. (If anAWS is attached, the STATUS AWS command or BOUNDS linecommand may be used.) See Chapter 4, “Defining ColumnBoundaries” for information.

SET DISPLAY Contains: Left and right display margins established by default, thelast executed SET DISPLAY command, or the last change to thisdisplay.

Change: Overtype SET DISPLAY LEFT or RIGHT withappropriate column number(s); use SET DISPLAY command. (If anAWS is attached, the STATUS AWS command can be used.)

CURRENT DISPLAYContains: Left and right display margins temporarily set by the lastcommand locating data outside of the SET DISPLAY boundaries orby the values typed in the COLS field.

Change: This field is not modifiable.

num Contains: Current or default sequence number display setting.

Change: Overtype field with NUM, NUMX, NUM2 or NONUM;use SET DISPLAY command. (If an AWS is attached, theSTATUS AWS command can be used.)

char Contains: Current or default data display mode.

Change: Overtype field with CHAR or HEX; use SET DISPLAYcommand. (If an AWS is attached, the STATUS AWS command canbe used.)

cjust Contains: Current or default screen positioning to occur as a resultof executing a FIRST, LAST, NEXT, PREV, INCL, or EXCLprimary command.

Change: Overtype field with CENTERED, LOCKED, JUSTIFIEDor CJUSTIFIED; use SET SEARCH command. (If an AWS isattached, the STATUS AWS command can be used.)

MODE Contains: Current or default character translation mode.

Change: Overtype field with BASIC, XTENDED or STANDARD;use SET MODE command. (If an AWS is attached, the STATUSAWS command can be used.)

CURSOR Contains: Current or default location at which the cursor ispositioned after a command is executed.

Change: Overtype field with HOME, INIT or DATA; use SETCURSOR command.


6.2 Displaying/Changing Session Attributes


To display information about your terminal session, enter the command:

STATUS SESSION

To begin the display with the line containing a specific attribute, include the first oneto four characters of the field name. For example, to begin the display with the linecontaining DATE FMT, you could enter:

STATUS SESSION D or

STATUS SESSION DA or

STATUS SESSION DAT or

STATUS SESSION DATE

You can reposition the display by:

■ Using PF keys to scroll the display forward or backward.

■ Placing the cursor at the line containing the desired field and pressing the PF keyassigned to forward or backward scrolling. (To do this, the SCRL field on theSystem Information Line must be set to CSR.) The resulting display begins withthe line at which the cursor was positioned.

Finally, you can produce a non-modifiable display by including the LIST operand withthe command, as in:

STATUS SESSION LIST

Unless noted otherwise, an attribute shown in the modifiable display can be changedusing the appropriate SET command or by overtyping the field. (Note that some of theattributes have site-defined default and maximum values. To display these values, usethe STATUS SYSTEM command.)



The following example illustrates the type of information provided by the STATUSSESSION command at a 43-line terminal.

STATUS SESSION Command Display

7 8| > APPLID(A=4IROS3) USER(PH,DORDA=2) L PENDING

| > AWS(PH.DUPCR) SCRL CSR COLS ====1 ===79 PAU(PH.RAMB) A<AMB>3

| >....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7..

| ROSCOE SESSION STATUS

| ATTACH ==> PAUSE

| AUTOFF ==> 24= ON AUTOINDENT ==> OFF

| AUTOINSERT ==> 1 OFF AWS TRANS ==> N

| CHAR SET ==> US ENGLISH CHAR TRANS ==> B

| CMD LINE ==> 3 1 COPYDEST ==> (NONE)

| CURREC ==> N/A DATE FMT ==> AMERICAN SHORT

| DELIMITER ==> & DSNCMLSTL ==> ERROR

| DSNCNT ==> 1===== DSNEMPTY ==> OFF

| DSNRECALL ==> NONE DUPCR ==> YES

| EDITCHNG ==> OFF ESCAPE ==> ..

| EXECPFX ==> DFLT HELPPFX ==> DFLT DFLT

| JOBCNT ==> 1====

| LANGUAGE ==> ENGLISH

| MASTER ==> NONE

| MAXREC ==> NONE MONLEVEL ==> ERROR

| MONTRAP ==> ON MSGLEVEL ==> INFO

| PFKDELIM ==> / RPSDEST ==> USPRNCPK

| RPSNOTIFY ==> OFF SAVE ATTR ==> SHARED

| SEARCH ==> NODBCS SEA MODE ==> NOMIX

| SEND ==> ALL SIGNON ==> PH.SIGX

| SPLIT ==> CSR STATS ==> ON

| STMTCNT ==> 4=96 SUBMIT ==> 8= INC SEQ

| TLOCK ==> 3= OFF LOGOFF WRITECNT ==> 5=

| U| V

ATTACH Contains: Current or default setting designating whetherexecution is to pause after an ATTACH command is executed.

Change: Overtype field with PAUSE or NOPAUSE; use SETATTACH command.

AUTOFF Contains: Two fields, where the first field shows the currentnumber of minutes of inactivity that is allowed before theterminal is automatically signed off, and the second fieldshows the status of the automatic sign-off facility.

Change: Overtype the first field with a numeric value notexceeding your site maximum and the second field with ON orOFF; use SET AUTOFF command. (STATUS SYSTEMshows the default and maximum values.)



AUTOINDENT Contains: Current or default setting indicating whether thecursor is to be automatically positioned under the firstcharacter of the preceding data line when lines are insertedthrough the INPUT primary command, the I or IB linecommand or the PF key to which the INPUT function isassigned.

Change: Overtype the field with ON or OFF; use SETAUTOINDENT command.

AUTOINSERT Contains: Current or default setting indicating the number ofdata entry lines to be inserted when all data entry linesinserted by the I or IB line command have been filled.

Change: When inactive, overtype first field with numericvalue indicating the number of lines to be inserted. Whenactive, overtype first field with numeric value or OFF.

| AWS TRANS Contains: Current or default setting of the AWS translate| parameter which determines whether non-displayable| characters are to be translated to blanks when other data on| the same line is entered or changed.

| Change: Overtype fields with N, or P; use SET MODE| PRESERVE.

CHAR SET Contains: Language character code representing the data thatthe user can enter and display at the terminal.

Change: Overtype field with a language code defined at yoursite; use SET CHARSET command. (If an AWS is attached,the STATUS AWS command can be used.)

| CHAR TRANS Contains: Current or default setting of the character set| translate options.

| Change: Overtype field with B(asic), X(tended) or S(tandard);| use SET MODE B/X command.

CMD LINE Contains: Two fields showing the current or default numberof lines comprising the Command Area in: 1) the currentpresentation area, and 2) each presentation area when thescreen is next split.

Change: Overtype field(s) with a numeric value between 1and 3; use SET CMDLINES command.

COPYDEST Contains: Name of the AWS that is to receive data copiedthrough :C or (NONE) if no AWS has been designated.

Change: Overtype field with the name of an existing AWS;use the SET COPYDEST command.

CURREC Contains: Total number of lines that you have saved in thelibrary, or N/A if you have no library line limit (for example,MAXREC is NONE).




DATE FMT Contains: Two fields, where the first field shows the currentor default format used when dates are displayed at theterminal, and the second field shows whether the year will bedisplayed as two or four digits.

Change: Overtype the first field with AMERICAN,EUROPEAN or INTERNATIONAL, and the second field withSHORT or LONG; use SET DATEFORM command.(STATUS SYSTEM shows the default values).

DELIMITER Contains: Current or default special character used to separate(for example, delimit) commands when multiple commandsare typed in the Command Area.

Change: Overtype field with any special character or OFF;use SET command.

DSNCMLST Contains: Current or default setting designating the type ofmessages that are to be directed to the member ZZZZZCMPfollowing COMPRESS requests.

Change: Overtype field with INFO or ERROR; use SETDSNCMLST.

DSNCNT Contains: Current or default number of lines to be searchedwithin an attached data set object.

Change: Overtype field with MAX or a numeric valueindicating the number of lines to be searched; use SETDSNCNT command. (STATUS SYSTEM shows the defaultand maximum values.)

DSNEMPTY Contains: Current or default setting designating whether theData Set Facility is to attempt to read data sets whose DSCBindicates that they are empty.

Change: Overtype field with ON or OFF; use SETDSNEMPTY command.

DSNRECALL Contains: Current or default setting designating the action tobe taken when an operation is to be performed on data setsmigrated by the IBM program product DFHSM.

Change: Overtype field with WAIT, NOWAIT or NONE; useSET DSNRECALL command.

| DUPCR Contains: Current or default setting of the retain duplicate| command option.

| Change: Overtype field with three character field "YES" or| "NO "; use the SET DUPCR command.

EDITCHNG Contains: Current or default setting indicating whether thesequence number field of lines affected by an edit operation isto contain a change indicator.



Change: Overtype field with ON or OFF; use SETEDITCHNG command.

ESCAPE Contains: Current or default escape character string used toexit an application executing under ETSO.

Change: Overtype field with a one- to three-character string;use SET ESCAPE command.

EXECPFX Contains: Current or default RPF execution library setting(s).

Change: Overtype field(s) with a prefix, DFLT or NONE; useSET EXECPFX command.

HELPPFX Contains: Current or default HELP library setting(s).

Change: Overtype field(s) with a prefix, DFLT or NONE; useSET HELPPFX command.

JOBCNT Contains: Current or default number of lines to be searchedwithin an attached job output.

Change: Overtype field with MAX or a numeric value notexceeding your site-defined maximum; use SET JOBCNTcommand. (STATUS SYSTEM shows the default andmaximum values.)

LANGUAGE Contains: Language used for displayed messages and HELPscreens.


MASTER Contains: Current or default status of CA-Librarian -INCstatement expansion. It shows NONE if this facility is notactive and no master file is in effect, or ON or OFF andmaster file name if this facility is active.

Change: Overtype first field with ON or OFF and secondfield with name of CA-Librarian master file (the name may bechanged but not deleted); use SET MASTER command.

MAXREC Contains: Maximum number of lines you may save in thelibrary, or NONE if there is no limit.


MONLEVEL Contains: Current or default setting designating whetherMonitor command informational messages are to be displayed.

Change: Overtype field with INFO or ERROR; use SETMONLEVEL command.

MONTRAP Contains: Current or default setting designating whetherMonitor command error messages and prompts are to bedisplayed.

Change: Overtype field with ON or OFF; use SETMONTRAP command.



MSGLEVEL Contains: Current or default setting designating whetherprimary command informational messages are to be displayed.

Change: Overtype field with INFO or ERROR; use SETMSGLEVEL command.

PFKDELIM Contains: Default or current special character used to separate(for example, delimit) commands when multiple commandsare assigned to a PF key.

Change: Overtype field with any special character; use SETPFKDELIM command.

RPSDEST Contains: Current or default printing location that is to beused when the PRINT command is issued, or

NO DFLT if no default location is assigned to thisterminal, or

NOT ACT if RPS is not currently active, or

NOT AUTH if this terminal is not authorized to use RPS,or

NOT AVAL if information cannot be obtained due to siteor RPS restrictions.

Change: Overtype field with any system or 328x-type printerlocation; use SET RPSDEST command. (Use the DESToperand of the PRINT command to change the printinglocation for a single execution of the command.)

RPSNOTIFY Contains: Default or current setting designating whethermessages are to be displayed when PRINT requests areprinted.

Change: Overtype field with ON or OFF; use SETRPSNOTIFY command.

SAVE ATTR Contains: Current or default access attribute setting usedwhen you create (for example, SAVE) a library member.

Change: Overtype field with SHARED or RESTRICTED; useSET SAVEATTR command.

SEARCH Contains: Current or default setting designating the DBCSformat status.

Change: Overtype field with DBCS or NODBCS; use SETSEARCH command.

| SEA MODE Contains: Current or default setting of the search mode.

| Change: Overtype field with 5-character "MIX " or| "NOMIX"; use SET MODE MIX/NOMIX command.



SEND Contains: Current or default setting controlling the display ofreceived SEND messages.

Change: Overtype field with ALL, OPER or NONE; use SETSEND command.

SIGNON Contains: Current user sign-on RPF.

Change: Overtype field with the correct RPF name.

SPLIT Contains: Current or default split screen setting.

Change: Overtype field with CSR, FULL, or PART; use SETSPLIT command.

STATS Contains: Current or default setting indicating whetherSPF-type directory information is to be added/updated to thePDS directory entry for a member.

Change: Overtype field with ON, ASIS or OFF; use SETSTATS command.

STMTCNT Contains: Current or default RPF program loop limit (thenumber of RPF statements that can be executed without anintervening read/write operation).

Change: Overtype field with MAX, RESET or a numericvalue not exceeding 32760; use SET STMTCNT command.(STATUS SYSTEM shows the default and maximum values.)

SUBMIT Contains: Three fields showing the current or default settingindicating the: 1) width of the data to be submitted, 2)expansion of embedded +INC statements, and 3) inclusion ofsequence numbers.

Change: Overtype the first field with CARD, PRT, WIDE ora numeric value between 8 and 254, the second field withINCLUDE or NOINCLUDE, and the third field with SEQ orNOSEQ; use SET SUBMIT command.



TLOCK Contains: Three fields showing: 1) number of minutes ofinactivity allowed before the Terminal Lock screen isdisplayed, 2) current or default status of the automatic terminallock facility, and 3) whether OFF may be entered from theTerminal Lock screen.

Change: Overtype the first field with a numeric value notexceeding your site-defined maximum, the second field withON or OFF, and the third field with LOGOFF or NOLOG;use SET TLOCK command. The NOW operand may only beused with SET TLOCK. (STATUS SYSTEM shows thedefault and maximum values.)

WRITECNT Contains: Current or default RPF program terminal write limit(the number of terminal writes that can be executed without anintervening read).

Change: Overtype field with numeric value not exceeding32760; use SET WRITECNT command.


6.3 Display Site-Defined Attribute Values


To produce a non-modifiable display containing site-defined default and maximumvalues for specific commands, enter the command:

STATUS SYSTEM

The following example illustrates the resulting display.

STATUS SYSTEM Command: Sample Display

7 8 _

>

>

....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.

ROSCOE SYSTEM STATUS

AUTOFF ===> ON AUTTLOCK ===> OFF

AUTOFF DEFAULT ===> 9= AUTTLOCK DEFAULT ===> 5

AUTOFF MAXIMUM ===> 24= AUTTLOCK MAXIMUM ===> 144=

JOBCNT DEFAULT ===> 999999 DSNCNT DEFAULT ===> 1=====

JOBCNT MAXIMUM ===> 999999 DSNCNT MAXIMUM ===> 999999

DATE FORMAT ===> AMERICAN SHORT

STMTCNT DEFAULT ===> 4=96 RCSESCPF ===> PF12

STMTCNT MAXIMUM ===> 3276= RCSESCCH ===> :

U V

AUTOFF Status of the automatic sign-off facility.

AUTOFF DEFAULT Site-defined default time period before the terminal issigned off.

AUTOFF MAXIMUM Maximum value that can be specified with the SETAUTOFF command.

AUTTLOCK Status of automatic terminal lock facility.

AUTTLOCK DEFAULT Site-defined default time period before the TerminalLock screen is displayed.

AUTTLOCK MAXIMUM Maximum value that can be specified with the SETTLOCK command.



DATE FORMAT Two position field showing:

1. Format for dates displayed at the terminal, and2. Code indicating the number of digits used to

represent the year.

DSNCNT DEFAULT Site-defined number of lines to be searched within adata set object if no value is specified with asearch-related command.

DSNCNT MAXIMUM Maximum value that can be specified with the SETDSNCNT command.

JOBCNT DEFAULT Site-defined number of lines to be searched within a jobif no value is specified with a search-related command.

JOBCNT MAXIMUM Maximum value that can be specified with the SETJOBCNT command.

RCSESCCH Site-defined special character used to prefix aone-character command that is to be used to direct inputto RCS.

RCSESCPF Site-defined PF key that is to be used to indicate directinput to RCS.

STMTCNT DEFAULT Site-defined default number of RPF statements that canbe executed without an intervening read/write operation.

STMTCNT MAXIMUM The maximum value that can be specified with the SETSTMTCNT command.


6.4 Display Time and Date

6.4 Display Time and Date

At any time during your session you can issue the TIME command. The followingexample shows the command itself, and the next example illustrates the informationthat is provided by this command.

TIME Command

7 8TIME>

> AWS(AAA.SHIPRATE) SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72

> ..<1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+

============================= T O P =============

=====1 IDENTIFICATION DIVISION

TIME Command: Sample Display

7 8 >

>

....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+..

=9/=6/88 15.3=.27 - ELAPSED =1:29:4= - CPU .34=

The information written to the terminal includes:

■ The current date,■ The current time,■ The elapsed time of your session, and■ The amount of CPU time for for your session.

After viewing this information, you can reattach the data you were working with, orissue any other CA-Roscoe command.


6.5 Synopsis of Session Attributes


This table identifies: 1) the primary commands you can use to change your sessionattributes, 2) the form of the STATUS command that produces the appropriatemodifiable display, and 3) a brief description of each attribute involved.

Command Status Command Attribute Affected

SET SESSION Special character used as commanddelimiter.

SET ATTACH SESSION Pausing of command execution afteran ATTACH command is executed.

SET AUTOFF SESSION Automatic sign-off facility control.

SETAUTOINDENT

SESSION Position of cursor when lines areinserted through the INPUTcommand, I or IB line command, orthe PF key assigned to the INPUTfunction.

SETAUTOINSERT

SESSION Number of lines to be insertedwhen lines inserted by I or IB linecommand are filled.

SET AWSDSPLY AWS Data protection and highlightingattributes for active AWS.

SET BOUNDS DISPLAYand AWS

Default column boundaries to beused with commands that edit,locate and shift data.

SET CHARSET SESSIONand AWS

Language character set representingdata user can enter and display.

SET CMDLINES SESSION Number of lines comprising theCommand Area of the screen.

SET COPYDEST SESSION Name of the AWS that is to receivedata copied through :C.

SET CURSOR DISPLAY Location at which the cursor ispositioned after a commandexecutes.

SET DATEFORM SESSION Format of dates displayed at theterminal.

SET DISPLAY DISPLAYand AWS

Display format including: 1) displaymargins, 2) sequence numberdisplay and 3) form in which dataare to be displayed.




SET DSNCMLST SESSION Type of messages to be directed tothe library member ZZZZZCMPwhen a COMPRESS request isexecuted.

SET DSNCNT SESSION Default number of lines to besearched within a data set object.

SET DSNEMPTY SESSION Data Set Facility attempts to readdata sets whose DSCB indicate theyare empty.

SETDSNRECALL

SESSION Action to be taken when anoperation is to be performed on datasets migrated by IBM DFHSM.

| SET DUPCR| SESSION| To determine if duplicate| commands are to be saved in the| command recall buffer.

SET EDITCHNG SESSION Lines affected by an edit operationare to be identified.

SET EOF AWS Extent of deletion to occur whenthe ERASE EOF key is pressed.

SET ESCAPE SESSION Escape sequence used to exit anapplication executing under ETSO.

SET EXECPFX SESSION RPF Execution Libraries.

SET FILL AWS Trailing character to be used withlines in active AWS.

SET JOBCNT SESSION Default number of lines to besearched within job output file.

SET MASTER SESSION Expansion of embeddedCA-Librarian -INC statements insubmitted jobs.

SET MODE DISPLAYand AWS

Character translation mode.

SET MONLEVEL SESSION Monitor command informationmessage display.

SET MONTRAP SESSION Error message and prompts displayissued by Monitor commandswithin an RPF program.

SET MSGLEVEL SESSION Primary command informationalmessage display.




SET PFKDELIM SESSION Special character used to delimitcommands assigned to a PF/PAkey.

SET RPSDEST SESSION Location at which data identifiedthrough the PRINT command is toprint.

SET RPSNOTIFY SESSION Display of notification messageswhen a PRINT request completes.

SET SAVEATTR SESSION Default access attribute used whencreating a library member.

SET SCROLL N/A SCRL field setting.

SET SEARCH DISPLAYand AWS

Screen positioning when FIRST,LAST, NEXT, PREV, INCL orEXCL are executed. Data in DBCSformat.

SET SEND SESSION Display of received SEND message.

SET STATS SESSION SPF-type directory information tobe added/updated.

SET STMTCNT SESSION RPF program loop limit.

SET SUBMIT SESSION Characteristics of submitted data,including inclusion of sequencenumbers, expansion of +INCstatements, and width of data.

SET SYSID N/A Display of CA-Roscoe ID.

SET TLOCK SESSION Automatic Terminal Lock facility.

SET USERID N/A Display of user ID.

SET WRITECNT SESSION RPF program terminal write limit.


Chapter 7. Printing Data

This chapter describes how you can print data at a system or 328x (or compatible)printer. The descriptions cover how to:

■ Identify the data you want to print. It can be all or part of:

– The currently displayed screen.

– The active AWS.

– One or more library members or the Library Selection List.

Also see Chapter 34, “Library: Performing Library Management Tasks” forinformation about printing data through the Library Facility Print Functionpanel or the Selection List.

– The currently attached job output file.

Also see Chapter 30, “Jobs: Viewing Job Output” for information aboutusing the modifiable STATUS JOB display to print job output.

– The currently attached data set object.

Also see Chapter 27, “Data Sets: Performing Data Management Tasks” forinformation about printing data through the Data Set Facility Print Functionpanel or a Selection List.

■ Qualify the data that you want printed (for example, printing multiple copies orprinting only selected lines or columns of the data).

■ Control printers and printing locations. This includes:

– Displaying information about available printers and printing locations.

– Directing your data to print at an alternate location (like a different system or328x-type printer).

■ Control and monitor the data after it has been scheduled for printing.

Chapter 7. Printing Data 7-1

7.1 Identifying Data to be Printed

7.1 Identifying Data to be Printed

As illustrated, you can print data from a variety of different sources.

Data from any of the sources identified in the previous figure can be combined as longas the total number does not exceed 12. To illustrate, the following example showshow you can combine data from eight different sources. This example also uses theINSEP operand to cause the data from each source to begin on a new page:

PRINT MEM1 DSN AWS 1= 4= AWS 9= 1== JOB LIB AAA.MEM2 SCR INSEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

You can also print a copy of the current screen display when an RPF program or otherapplication (like ETSO or CA-eMAIL+) is in control of the terminal. Assuming thatthe CA defaults are in effect, you can do this by entering:

:P

in any unprotected field and pressing PF12. (The cursor must immediately follow thecommand :P.)

If the CA defaults are not in effect, the STATUS SYSTEM display will identify thesite-defined:

■ Escape character: The field RSCESCCH identifies the character to use. Thedefault is a colon (:).

■ PF key: The field RCSESCPF identifies the PF key to use. The default is PF12.

Basic Command Description

PRINT <AWS> Prints the entire contents of the active AWS. The AWSneed not be attached. (The AWS keyword is optional.)

PRINT mem(s) Prints a maximum of 12 unattached library members. (Toprint a member that does not belong to you, include theowner's prefix.)

PRINT LIB Prints all of the currently attached library member orSelection List.

PRINT DSN Prints all of the currently attached data set object.

PRINT JOB Prints all of the currently attached job output file.

PRINT SCREEN Prints all of the currently displayed screen.


7.2 Qualifying the Data to be Printed


This section describes many of the PRINT command operands that you can use tocontrol how your data are printed. For a detailed description of all the operands, seethe CA-Roscoe Command Reference Guide.

7.2.1 Controlling Sequence Numbers

Use the NUM or NONUM operands of the PRINT command to designate whether theCA-Roscoe-generated sequence numbers are to be printed. For example, to print thecontents of the active AWS and have sequence numbers included in columns 1 through6, you would enter:

PRINT NUM

If you do not specify either of these operands when printing:

■ The contents of the active AWS, the current AWS sequence number attributecontrols whether sequence numbers are included.

■ An unattached library member, the member's sequence number attribute controlswhether sequence numbers are included.

■ An attached data set object, job output file or library member/Selection List, thecurrent display format governs whether sequence numbers are included (forexample, if SET DISPLAY NUM is in effect, sequence numbers are included).

■ Screen display, no sequence numbers are included.

7.2.2 Formatting the Printed Data

You can use the CAPS, TYPE and FORMAT operands to format the data to beprinted.

CAPS Operand:

CAPS causes alphabetic characters in the data to be printed in uppercase characters.For example:

PRINT INVLIST CAPS

prints any alphabetic characters in the library member named INVLIST in uppercase.(The data itself is not changed.)



TYPE Operand:

TYPE can be used to designate which printer control characters are to be recognized,where:

TYPE ANS Recognizes ANSI control characters.

TYPE DEF Recognizes CA-Roscoe formatting pseudo-commands. (This is thedefault.)

TYPE MCC Recognizes machine control characters.

When TYPE DEF is in effect, you can use:

■ CA-Roscoe formatting pseudo-commands with data that is in the active AWS.These commands, which must begin in column 1, include:

.SK v or To include v number of blank li :SK v output.

.TOP or :TOP To force a new page.

■ The TM and BM operands to change the site-defined top and bottom margins,respectively. For example, if you want to begin printing six lines from the top ofthe page (for example, have five blank lines precede the data) and stop printingnine lines from the bottom, you would enter:

PRINT TYPE DEF TM 5 BM 9

Notes:

– Use the PRINT DEVICE command to determine the default and current topand bottom margins.

– The left and right margins are determined by the placement of the data. In thefollowing screen, for example, the data extends from columns 5 through 53.



PRINT Command: Using Formatting Pseudo-Commands

7 8 PRINT TYPE DEF_

>

> AWS(PRI.INVLIST1) SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72

> <...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5...

================================ T O P ==============

===1== This data illustrates the use of the formatting

===2== pseudo-commands.

===3== :p.

===4== The preceding .SK 2 command causes two blank

===5== lines to be inserted in the printed output.

===6== :TOP

===7== The :TOP command causes a page EJECT to occur.

===8==

===9== The pseudo-commands must begin in the first posi-

==1=== tion of a line and be the only data on that line.

FORMAT Operand:

FORMAT can be used to specify the desired data format, where:

FORMAT DUMP Each line is formatted with offsets, hexadecimal data andEBCDIC data to the right of the line.

FORMAT CHEX Each line is formatted with offsets and hexadecimal data to theright of the line.

FORMAT VHEX Each line is formatted in character data with hexadecimal datashown vertically below.



7.2.3 Naming and Referencing Print Requests

When you execute the PRINT command, the data are scheduled for printing and aninformation message is displayed. The message contains:

RPS1= REQUEST tag, number SCHEDULED FOR LOCATION id

where:

tag Optional name that you can assign to the print request.number Print request number assigned by CA-Roscoe.id Location at which the request is scheduled for printing.

Note: A print request is any data that you direct to a system or 328x-type printer.

7.2.3.1 Naming Print Requests

You can assign a name (referred to as a tag) to a print request. If included, the tagmust be one- to eightcharacters in length, begin with an alphabetic character, and bebound by apostrophes, as in:

PRINT 'MASTER' DSN

Here, the name MASTER is assigned to the print request that prints the contents of thecurrently attached data set object.

7.2.3.2 Referencing Print Requests

To reference a scheduled print request (that is, to hold a request), you must includeeither the CA-Roscoe-assigned request number or the user-assigned tag name with theappropriate command. See 7.4, “Controlling and Monitoring Print Requests” onpage 7-13 for additional information.

7.2.4 Printing Multiple Copies

You can use the COPY operand of the PRINT command to specify how many copiesof the request are to be printed. (If the operand is omitted, one copy is printed.) Forexample, to print four copies of the member named INVLIST, enter:

PRINT INVLIST COPY 4



7.2.5 Printing Selected Lines/Columns

You can limit a print request to include only the data appearing within a selected rangeof lines or columns.

7.2.5.1 Limiting Lines

■ To print a range of lines within the active AWS, include the appropriate startingand ending line numbers with the command, as in:

PRINT 1== 5==

■ To print a range of lines within an attached data set object, job output file orlibrary member, specify the appropriate line numbers after identifying the data tobe printed, as in:

PRINT JOB 1== 5==

■ When printing data from multiple sources, identify the data to be printed and theappropriate line numbers, as in:

PRINT INVLIST 6== 1=== AWS 12== 23== DSN 1== 5==

■ To print any display that does not include line numbers (like the current screendisplay or a Data Set Facility Selection List), assume that the data are numberedfrom one by one. Thus, to print the first ten lines of the current screen display,

PRINT SCREEN 1 1=

7.2.5.2 Limiting Columns

You can also limit a print request to include only the data appearing within specificcolumns.

■ If the display includes a Scale Line (like the active AWS, a library member,attached job output file or data set object), use the Scale Line values to determinethe appropriate column numbers. For example, if you enter:

PRINT JOB COLS 1= 3=

only the data appearing within column 10 through 30 will be included in the printrequest.



■ If the display does not include a Scale Line (like the current screen display), theleft-most displayed position is assumed to be column one. Thus, if you enter:

PRINT SCREEN COLS 1 1=

only the data appearing in the first ten positions on the screen will be included inthe print request.

7.2.6 Requesting Completion Notification

Site management has the option of allowing you to receive a message at your terminalwhen your print request has printed. If your site is using this facility, you can overrideyour site default for:

■ A specific request using the NOTIFY or NONOTIFY operand. For example, ifyour site default prohibits notification messages, you can use the NOTIFY operandto override this setting for a specific request, as in:

PRINT INVLIST NOTIFY

■ For your terminal session using the modifiable STATUS SESSION display or theSET RPSNOTIFY command.

In the following example, SET RPSNOTIFY ON will display notification messageswhen the first two requests are printed. The NONOTIFY operand will prohibit themessage when the third request is printed.

SET RPSNOTIFY ON

PRINT

PRINT INVLIST

PRINT NONOTIFY



7.2.7 Using a System Printer

In addition to the facilities described thus far, you can use the following PRINTcommand operands when directing data to a system printer:

■ CLASS Operand:

CLASS can be used to designate which print class is to be used, as in:

PRINT JOB CLASS A

If you do not specify a print class, your site-defined default is used. (You can usethe PRINT DEVICE command to display information about the printer and theprint classes assigned to it. PRINT DEVICE is described in 7.3.3, “ObtainingInformation About Printers” on page 7-12.)

■ BURST Operand:

If the printer supports the burster-trimmer-stacker option, you can use this operandto have the output burst into separate sheets.

■ FCB Operand:

FCB can be used to specify the Forms Control Buffer to be used when producingthe output, as in:

PRINT JOB FCB B6==


7.3 Controlling Printing Locations


Printing locations are defined by your site management, and consist of one or more328x-type printers or a system printer. Your management can associate multipleprinting locations with each terminal.

When you issue the PRINT command, your data are directed to the default printinglocation associated with your terminal.

7.3.1 Changing a Printing Location

The majority of time, you will want to print your data at the default printing locationassociated with your terminal. There may be occasions, however, when you want toprint data at a different location (like at a system printer location if your default is a328x-type printer location or at another 328x-type printer location).

You can change your printing location for a single request or for the remainder of yourterminal session.

7.3.1.1 Changing for a Single Request

To specify an alternate location for a single request, use the DEST operand with thePRINT command. For example, to print the contents of the active AWS at thelocation identified as PR05, you would enter:

PRINT DEST PR=5

7.3.1.2 Changing for the Session

Use the SET RPSDEST command to alter the default printing location for the durationof your terminal session (or until you execute another SET RPSDEST command). Forexample, to change the default printing location to PR12, you would enter:

SET RPSDEST PR12 2



7.3.2 Displaying Printing Location Information

You can get information about your site-defined printing locations.

■ To display a list of all printing locations associated with your terminal, enter:

PRINT LOCATION

The first displayed location is the default location assigned to your terminal. Thecurrent printing location (which is either the default or an alternate you assigned)is preceded by an asterisk.

■ To display information about your default printing location, enter:

PRINT LOCATION Q

The resulting display provides information about the location to which your printrequests are normally directed. The information shows, for example, the maximumnumber of lines and copies you can print at that location.

When you issue the command:

STATUS SESSION

the field RPSDEST contains the name of your current (or default) printinglocation.

■ To display information about a specific location, enter the command followed bythe name of that location. For example, if you entered:

PRINT LOCATION PR17

Information associated with the printing location identified as PR17 is displayed.



7.3.3 Obtaining Information About Printers

To list the printers defined to CA-Roscoe, enter:

PRINT DEVICE

To display information about a specific printer, enter:

PRINT DEVICE printer-name

where printer-name is the name your site has assigned to that printer.

The display includes such information as the:

■ Current and default top and bottom margins.■ Current and default page length and width.

Note: If you need to use a non-standard size paper (like the paper width and/orlength differs from the default), include the PW and PL operands with thePRINT command. For example, if you are using paper that allows only 50print lines where each line can contain a maximum of 40 characters, youwould enter:

PRINT PL 5= PW 4=


7.4 Controlling and Monitoring Print Requests


This section describes a variety of ways you can control data that is scheduled forprinting.

7.4.1 Cancelling Request(s)

If, after scheduling a request, you decide that you do not want the request printed, youcan terminate it through the PRINT CANCEL command. For example, to cancel arequest that has been assigned the number 598, you would enter:

PRINT CANCEL 598

You can use the tag name in place of the request number, as in:

PRINT CANCEL MASTER

To terminate all of your own outstanding requests, enter:

PRINT CANCEL ALL

7.4.2 Displaying Print Request Status

Whether or not you use the notification facility (described in the section RequestingCompletion Notification), you can monitor the progress of your print requests using thePRINT STATUS command.

To check the status of all of your outstanding print requests, you can enter either:

PRINT STATUS or PRINT STATUS ALL

To check the status of a particular request, you must include the tag or print requestnumber of the desired request. For example, to check the status of a print requestwhose tag name is MASTER, enter:

PRINT STATUS MASTER

To check the status of the print request assigned the number 278, enter:

PRINT STATUS 278



7.4.3 Holding/Releasing Request(s)

You can use the PRINT HOLD command to hold any of your outstanding printrequest(s). To hold a request, specify its assigned request number or tag name. Forexample, to hold the request assigned the tag name of MASTER, you would enter:

PRINT HOLD MASTER

To hold all of your outstanding print requests, you would enter:

PRINT HOLD ALL

Having held one or more requests, you can release them using the PRINT RELEASEcommand, as in:

PRINT RELEASE MASTER

or

PRINT RELEASE 598

or

PRINT RELEASE ALL

You can use PRINT HOLD and PRINT RELEASE to rearrange the priorities of yourown print requests. The steps you follow are:

1. Hold all of your outstanding requests at the appropriate location.2. Release the print request you want printed first, then release your remaining print

requests.

7.4.4 Rerouting Request(s)

As long as a print request is outstanding (for example, it has not started to print), youcan change the location at which it is to be printed. For example, to reroute therequest named ABC from location PRT01 to PRT12, you would enter:

PRINT ROUTE DEST PRT=1 TO PRT12 'ABC'

This example assumes that the terminal's default printing location is PRT01 and thatABC was implicitly scheduled to print at that location. If you reroute a held request,the request is automatically released.


Chapter 8. Selecting a Screen Format

This chapter describes the basic format of the screen displayed during a CA-Roscoesession. It also discusses how you can:

■ Split the screen, (allowing two concurrent CA-Roscoe subsessions).■ Lock the screen by invoking the Terminal Lock Facility.

Chapter 8. Selecting a Screen Format 8-1

8.1 Screen Format Description


As illustrated in the following example the CA-Roscoe screen is segmented into aCommand Area �1�, System Control Area �2�, and Execution Area �3�.

ROSCOE Screen Format

7 8 _

�1�

>

> AWS(PRI.INVLIST) SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72 �2� > <...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.

================================ T O P ======================



===3==

===4==


===6==

===7== CONFIGURATION SECTION.

===8== SOURCE-COMPUTER. IBM-3=81.

===9== OBJECT-COMPUTER. IBM-3=81.

==1=== �3� ==11== INPUT-OUTPUT SECTION.

==12== FILE-CONTROL.

==13== SELECT INVENTORY-FILE

==14== ASSIGN TO UT-S-SYSIN.

==15== SELECT INVENTORY-REPORT

==16== ASSIGN TO UT-S-SYSPRINT.

U V

Note: This screen and all others shown in this manual are representations of theactual screens. The screen widths are modified to allow them to fit within themargins of this manual. This results in an abbreviated System Information andScale Line.



8.1.1 The Command Area

By default, the Command Area comprises the first three lines of the screen. You canchange the number of lines by specifying a value between 1 and 3 with the SETCMDLINES command.

This area is where you enter all primary commands, Monitor commands and RPFprogram names. You can enter one or more commands or program names per line.(See Chapter 2, “Commands and Command Components” for additional informationabout entering commands in this area.)

8.1.2 The System Control Area

The System Control Area consists of the following three lines:

1. Response Line

This protected line is used to display informational and error messages. The rightside of this line is also used to identify what may be pending (for example, datathat is attached but not currently displayed). The PENDING message is precededby one or more of the following codes:

D Data Set Facility is pending.

E Application executing under ETSO is suspended.

J Job output is pending.

L Library Facility is pending.

Sv Full-screen split has occurred. v will be 1 or 2 indicating whichfull-screen split is pending.

T Etso Subtask is active.

2. System Information Line

The System Information Line is used to display information about the currentlydisplayed data. (The line is blank when data are not being displayed.) This lineconsists of:

The Name Field

This protected field identifies the data currently displayed. The information ispresented in one of the following formats:

AWS() or AWS(pfx.mem)The contents of an AWS is displayed. The data is modified. Ifit is unnamed (the data has not been FETCHed from the libraryor SAVEd in it), only bounding parentheses are shown. If thedata are named, the prefixed member name is placed betweenthe parentheses.



DSN() dsn A data set object is displayed. The data are not modifiable;portions of selection lists and function panels are modifiable.The fully qualified name of the data set object is shown on theline below this keyword.

HLP(..HELP..) A HELP member is displayed. It is not modifiable.

JOB(name, no) Job output is displayed. The data are not modifiable. The jobname and number are bound by parentheses following thekeyword.

LIB(pfx.mem) Library facility data are displayed. The displayed member is notmodifiable; portions of the selection list and function panels aremodifiable. When a member is displayed, its prefixed name,bound by parentheses, follows the keyword.

STA(name, no) Information about the currently attached job output is displayed.Portions of the display are modifiable.

The right side of the display might also contain:

A<name> An AWS is attached. Its name is bound by < and >.

PGM(pfx.mem) An RPF program is executing. PGM is followed by the prefixedname of the library member containing the executing program.

PAU(pfx.mem) An RPF program is executing and is in a pause state. PAU isfollowed by the prefixed name of the library member containingthe executing program.

The SCRL Field

This modifiable field contains the value used by the PF keys that are assignedscrolling functions. You can change this value at any time by issuing the SETSCROLL command, or by positioning the cursor to the start of this field andentering one of the values shown in the following table.

PermanentValue

ScrollDirection

Action Taken When Key Pressed

FULL Forward/Backward Scroll one line less than the number oflines in the Execution Area.

Left/Right Scroll the width of the screen.

FRAM orPage

Forward/Backward Scroll the number of lines in theExecution Area.


HALF Forward/Backward Scroll one-half the number of lines inthe Execution Area.




Note that the display is unchanged if you attempt to scroll:

■ Forward or backward, and there are not a sufficient number of lines to beginor end the display with the designated line.

■ Left or right, and there are not a sufficient number of characters in theappropriate direction to begin or end the line with the designated column.

The following chart shows the temporary values that you can type in the SCRLfield.

PermanentValue

ScrollDirection


CSR Forward/Backward Scroll to begin or end the display withthe line containing the cursor.

Left/Right Scroll to begin or end the display withthe column containing the cursor.

v Forward/Backward Scroll the specified number of lines (vmay be 1 through 9999.)


TemporaryValue

ScrollDirection


MAX Forward/Backward Scroll the display to the first or lastline of the data.

Left/Right Scroll the display to the first or lastcolumn of the data.

PFv Forward/Backward,Left/Right

Execute the function assigned to thedesignated PF key.

The previous SCRL field value is restored after MAX or PFn is executed.



The COLS Field

This modifiable field contains numbers representing the left and right displaymargins. By default, the values are set to the maximum width permitted by thedisplay format and type of terminal being used.

To change the margins, you can: 1) use the SET DISPLAY command, or 2)position the cursor to the appropriate field and overtype the current value with thenew.

Note: Leading zeros are not required. If omitted, eliminate the old value so thatthe field contains only the new margin value.)

For additional information, see Chapter 5, “Defining the Display Format.”

3. The Scale Line

The last line in the System Control Area is reserved for the Scale Line. Thisprotected line reflects the current display margins. For example, if the left displaymargin is 7, the displayed data begins with column 7. The Scale Line also beginswith 7 and is aligned over the first displayed position.

When appropriate, special characters are placed on the Scale Line. They are:

< > Indicating the current left and right search boundaries.

¬ Indicating tab positions. The default tab character is ¬. If a differentcharacter is being used, that character will appear on the Scale Line.

* Indicating the location of both a search boundary and tab position.

8.1.3 The Execution Area

The remaining lines on the screen are used to enter, edit and display data. These linesare referred to as the Execution Area. The actual number and length of the displayedlines depends on the type of terminal being used.

When an AWS is attached, line commands can be used to enter and modify thedisplayed data. (For additional information about using line commands, see Chapter 2,“Commands and Command Components.”)


8.2 Splitting the Screen


You can divide the physical terminal screen into two logical presentation areas byperforming a:

■ Partial-screen split - both presentation areas are displayed, or■ Full-screen split - the active presentation area fills the screen.

When the screen is split, each presentation area represents a single CA-Roscoesubsession. Each subsession is allocated its own AWS and can be used to perform anycommand or function handled through the single display format. These subsessionsallow you to have two simultaneous independent CA-Roscoe sessions. (If there is asite sign-on program or if you have a sign-on program, these programs are executedeach time you split the screen.)

When you split the physical screen into two logical presentation areas, each screencontains:

■ A Command Area, consisting of one to three lines. (Use the SET CMDLINEScommand to specify the number of lines comprising this area.)

■ A System Control Area, containing a Response Line, System Information Line andScale Line.

■ An Execution Area, containing the maximum number of lines allowed asdetermined by the type of split screen you invoked.

The minimum size of a presentation area is 11 lines. The maximum size is determinedby the type of screen split being requested.

8.2.1 Invoking a Full-Screen Split

To request a full-screen split (as illustrated in the following example) position thecursor to the last line of the current screen and press PF1 or PF13. The screen is splitand the new presentation area fills the entire screen. An Sv PENDING messageidentifies the other presentation area that can be recalled at any time.

Note: PF1 or PF13 are the CA-Roscoe default PF key settings to split the screen.



Full-Screen Split - Before

7 8

>


> <....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.

...... ================================= T O P ======================

===1== AAAAA

...... ============================== B O T T O M ===================

Full Screen Split -- After

7 8-

> S1 PENDING

>

>....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7

To cause a full-screen split when a partial-screen split is currently in effect, move thecursor to the last line of the appropriate presentation area and press PF1 or PF13. Thatpresentation expands to to fill the terminal screen.

Alternate Full-Screen Split

If an RPF program or another application (like ETSO or CA-eMAIL+) is in control ofthe terminal, you can request a full-screen split by entering:

:S

in any unprotected field of the screen and pressing PF12. (The cursor mustimmediately follow the command.) Note that the colon and PF key assignment are theCA-Roscoe defaults. Use the STATUS SYSTEM command to determine if your sitemanagement has changed these defaults.



8.2.2 Invoking a Partial-Screen Split

When a partial-screen split is invoked, both presentation areas are displayed. Asillustrated in the following example, they are separated by a protected, highlighted linecontaining asterisks. The cursor is placed in the Command Area of the lower screen.

Continuing the previous example, if you want to:

■ divide the screen equally:

Position the cursor within the first or last 11 lines of the physical screen or to themiddle line of the screen and press PF1 or PF13. (If you position the cursor to thelast line, a full-screen split is invoked when you press the PF key.)

Partial-Screen Split

7 8 >


> <....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6..

...... ================================= T O P =======================

===1== AAAAA

...... ============================== B O T T O M ====================

) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) _ >

>

>....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7

U V

If the physical screen contains an even number of lines, the upper presentationarea will contain one more line than the lower presentation area.

■ divide the screen unequally:

Position the cursor to any line other than those used to perform an equal- orfull-screen split and press PF1 or PF13. (For example, if you position the cursorto the thirteenth line of a 43-line terminal screen and press PF1 or PF13, the upperscreen will contain 12 lines, the separator will be on the thirteenth line and thelower presentation area will use the remaining lines.



8.2.3 Resplitting Screens

With one exception, you can change the size of the presentation areas after the initialsplit by resplitting the screen. (The exception is that resplitting is not valid when a :Sor :W was used to create the current display.)

To resplit, press PF1 or PF13 after moving the cursor to:

■ The last line of a presentation area to cause a full-screen split.■ Within the first or last 11 lines of a presentation area to cause an equal

partial-screen split.■ Any other line to cause an unequal partial-screen split.

Note that you cannot change the screen size if an RPF program executing in eitherpresentation area contains the command SET SCREEN NOMODIFY.

8.2.4 Swapping Active Screens

Only one presentation area is active at a time. The active area is the one containingthe cursor. When you press the ENTER key or a PF/PA key, terminal input is readfrom the active presentation area. Commands or PF/PA key functions are executed inonly the active area. Any data or commands that you have typed in the inactivepresentation area remain displayed. No action is taken in the inactive screen.

When a partial-screen split is in effect, use the cursor positioning keys to move thecursor from one area to the other, the new presentation area becomes active; the oldpresentation area is inactive.

■ If the newly activated presentation area is less than three-fourths the size of thedeactivated presentation area, the sizes of the two areas are interchanged.

■ If the cursor is positioned to the line separating the two areas, both presentationareas are considered inactive.

You can activate one presentation area while deactivating the other by pressing PF2 orPF14, the CA-Roscoe default PF-key assignments for swapping. This bounces thecursor from the active presentation area to the inactive area. Thus, activating the newarea.

When a full-screen split is in effect, pressing PF2 or PF14 causes the logical screens tobe bounced, where the new screen contains the cursor and is, thus, the active screen.



Alternate Full-Screen Swap

When a full-screen split is in effect and an RPF program or another application (likeETSO or CA-eMAIL+) is in control of the terminal, you can swap the logical screensby entering:

:W


8.2.5 Terminating Split Screens

To terminate full- or partial-split screens, press PF3 or PF15, the CA-Roscoe defaultPF-key assignments for END. The presentation area:

■ Containing the cursor is terminated.

■ Not containing the cursor becomes the active presentation area and expands to fillthe screen.

You can end your CA-Roscoe session while the screens are split by entering OFF orOFFON in either presentation area.

If, when you terminate split screens or sign-off CA-Roscoe, there is data in an AWSwith a RECOVERABLE attribute, it is saved in a library member named SAVAWSnn,where nn is a unique identifier.

Alternate Full-Screen Split Termination

If a full-screen split is in effect and an RPF program or another application (like ETSOor CA-eMAIL+) is in control of the terminal, you can terminate split screen processingby entering:

:E



8.3 Changing the Screen Size

8.3 Changing the Screen Size

Depending on how 3270-type terminals are defined at your site, you may be able tochange the size of the physical or logical CA-Roscoe screen by issuing the SCREENcommand. For example,

SCREEN FLIP

allows you to bounce between the terminal's primary and alternate screen sizes.Additional operands of this command permit you to switch to a specific size, as in:

SCREEN 2

which changes the screen size to 24 rows by 80 columns. See the CA-RoscoeCommand Reference Guide for additional information about using this command.


8.4 Locking the Screen


There may be times when you need to leave your terminal for a few minutes and donot want to sign off or allow anyone to access your session. At these times, you canuse the SET TLOCK command to activate the Terminal Lock Facility. For example,if you enter:

SET TLOCK NOW

the terminal lock screen (as illustrated in the following example) is displayed.

Terminal Lock Screen

7 8 >

....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7.

|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||

||||| TLO=1 TERMINAL LOCKED ||||||||

||||| ||||||||

||||| KEY your-key DATE =9/19/94 ||||||||

||||| TERMID terminal-id TIME 14.35.5= ||||||||

||||| APPLID application-id VERSION 6.= ||||||||

||||| ||||||||

||||| To continue enter password => ||||||||

||||| To terminate enter 'OFF' => ||||||||

|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||

|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||

||||||||| ||||| ||||| || ||| ||||| |||||

|||||||| || |||| || ||||| ||||||||| |||||| || ||||| ||||||||||

|||CA-| || |||| || ||||| ||||||||| |||||| || ||||| |||||||||||

|||||| |||| || ||||| ||| |||||| || ||||| ||||||||

||||| ||| |||| || ||||||||||| ||| |||||| || ||||| |||||||||||||

|||| ||| ||| || ||||||||||| ||| |||||| || ||||| ||||||||||||||

||| ||| ||| ||| ||| || ||||| |||||||||

|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||

|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||

U V

When this screen is displayed, you must enter either your CA-Roscoe password (toresume your session) or the OFF command (to terminate your session).

Note: The Terminal Lock Facility is not available if you have no CA-Roscoepassword, are using a typewriter device, or are accessing CA-Roscoe through aterminal defined to CICS.

There are two other ways the Terminal Lock Screen can be displayed.

1. When an RPF program or another application (like ETSO or CA-EMAIL+) is incontrol of the terminal, you can force the Terminal Lock screen by:

■ Checking the STATUS SYSTEM display to verify the site-defined escapecharacter prefix (identified by the RCSESCCH field) and PF key (identifiedby the RCSESCPF field).



■ Assuming the defaults are in effect, entering in any unprotected field of thedisplay:

:L

and pressing PF12. (The cursor must immediately follow the command :L.)

2. Site management can force the terminal to be locked if there is no activity for asite-specified period of time. (If the CA-Roscoe Automatic Signoff Facility is inuse when the Terminal Lock screen is displayed, you will be signed offCA-Roscoe if there is no terminal activity within the site-specified time period.)

To display or change the site-defined time periods, issue the commands:

STATUS SYSTEM To display the site-defined default and maximum inactivityperiods. If your site management is not using the facility, itis noted on this display. (The AUTTLOCK values provideinformation about the Terminal Lock Facility; the AUTOFFvalues provide information about the Automatic SignoffFacility.)

STATUS SESSION To display and alter the current settings, where the TLOCKfield is for the Terminal Lock Facility and the AUTOFF fieldis for the Automatic Signoff Facility.

In addition to causing the Terminal Lock screen to be displayed, you can use the SETTLOCK command to: 1) activate the Terminal Lock Facility, if it is inactive and 2)change the site-defined inactivity period. See the CA-Roscoe Command ReferenceGuide for additional information about the SET TLOCK command.


Chapter 9. Sending/Receiving Messages

You can use the SEND command or the BulletinBoard System to direct a messagecontaining one or more lines to any other CA-Roscoe user.

Chapter 9. Sending/Receiving Messages 9-1

9.1 Receiving Messages


By default, SEND-related messages are displayed on the Response Line of yourterminal. You can use the SET SEND command to control whether these messages areto be displayed. For example, if you enter:

SET SEND OPER

only messages sent by the operator are displayed. (Regardless of the setting, themessages are always added to your library member ZZZZZMSG.)

To permit messages created by the SEND command to be displayed, you would enter:

SET SEND ALL

If you are signed on and receiving messages when someone sends you a message andit is a:

■ One-Line Message:

The message is displayed on the Response Line the next time you press theENTER key or a PF key. As shown in the following example, the message text ispreceded by the sender's prefix.

SEND Command: Receiving a One-Line Message

7 8

> pfx RECEIVED YOUR REPORT. THANKS, JOHN > AWS() SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72

> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....

...... ============================= T O P =================




■ Multi-Line Message:

The following example illustrates the format of the message you will receive thenext time you press the ENTER key or a PF key.

SEND Command: Receiving Multi-Line Message Notification

7 8 > MSG FROM USERID IN MEMBER: ABC.Z1!61525 COMMITTEE REPORT > AWS() SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72

> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....

...... ============================= T O P =================


The message contains variable information:

key Sender's sign-on key (USERID in the above example)

zmddhhmm Name of the member in your library that contains the message.This unique name consists of the character z, the month (inhexadecimal), the day, the hour and the minute the member wascreated. In the previous figure the member Z1061525 wascreated on January 6 at 3:25 PM. A member created onOctober 15 at 9:15 AM would be named ZA150915 (where thesecond character, A, represents the month October inhexadecimal).

string Optional note that the sender included with the SEND command(for example, COMMITTEE REPORT).

Whether or not you are signed on or receiving messages, an entry is always added tothe top of the your library member ZZZZZMSG. Each entry consists of two lines,where the first line indicates the date, time and sender's name. The second linecontains either: 1) the one-line message or 2) the name of the library member that wascreated to hold the multi-line message.


9.2 Transmitting Messages


You can direct: 1) a one-line message to the Response Line of another CA-Roscoeuser's terminal, or 2) a multi-line message to a special library member in another user'slibrary.

9.2.1 Using the SEND Command

To send a message using the SEND command, you must:

1. Identify the Recipient:

You can use either the sign-on key or prefix of the user to whom you want tosend the message. For example, to send a message to the user whose sign-on keyis JONES, you would enter:

SEND KEY=JONES ...

If JONES' prefix is JNS, you could send the message by entering:

SEND PFX=JNS ...

2. Specify the Message:

If the message is brief (no longer than 64 characters in length), you can include itwith the SEND command itself, as in:

SEND KEY=JONES 'RECEIVED YOUR REPORT. THANKS, JOHN'

The message must be delimited by a special character not found in the message.

If you want to send a multi-line message, you can place the text in either theactive AWS or a library member. Then, when you issue the SEND command, youmust identify the location of the message, as in:

SEND AWS KEY=JONES

In this example, the keyword AWS identifies the location of the message.

When you send a multi-line message, you can optionally include a note with thecommand, as in:

SEND MYREPORT KEY=JONES /COMMITTEE REPORT/

In this case, the contents of the member named MYREPORT is sent to therecipient identified as JONES. The message displayed on the recipient's ResponseLine will include the note COMMITTEE REPORT.



3. Qualify the Message:

There may be occasions when you want to control the transmission or display ofyour message. For example,

■ If you want your message transmitted only if the recipient is currently signedon and accepting messages, you can include the NOW operand with thecommand, as in:

SEND KEY=JONES 'MUST SEE YOU IMMEDIATELY' NOW

If the recipient is not signed on or is not receiving messages, you will receivea message stating that your message was not transmitted.

■ If you want to send a confidential message to another user and not have itdisplayed on the user's Response Line, you can include the NODSPLYoperands, as in:

SEND KEY=JONES 'THE PASSWORD IS ABLE' NODSPLY

In this case, the message is written directly to the recipient's library memberZZZZZMSG.

9.2.2 Using the BulletinBoard System (BBS)

To send a one-line message to another CA-Roscoe user using the BulletinBoardSystem, invoke the ZMsg Mode (PF12) from any BBS screen. This mode allows youto send messages to other CA-Roscoe users and still remain in your BulletinBoardsession. These messages are like any other CA-Roscoe one-line SEND messages.

Note: See BBS - BulletinBoard System on page 35-1 for more information aboutusing the ZMsg mode.

On the ZMsg screen, fill in the fields with the appropriate information. Enter theCA-Roscoe prefix or the key of the user you are sending the message to. If the key orprefix does not exist, you will receive an error message on the Error/Status line. Enterthe message text in the Message field.

To send the message, press ENTER. The message will be sent, and your messagefield will be immediately updated to include this information. The Status line on thetop of the screen tells you that the message was sent, and to what prefix.


Chapter 10. Signing On and Off CA-Roscoe


■ Sign on to CA-Roscoe.■ Customize your sign-on process by:

– Creating, changing and/or deleting your password.– Creating, changing and/or deleting your sign-on program.

■ Sign off CA-Roscoe either explicitly or automatically.

Chapter 10. Signing On and Off CA-Roscoe 10-1

10.1 Signing On

10.1 Signing On

In addition to describing the CA-Roscoe sign-on screen, this section providesinformation about how to bypass the sign-on screen when signing on from VTAMterminals or accessing CA-Roscoe from CICS terminals, a TSO session or anotherCA-Roscoe.

10.1.1 Using the CA-Roscoe Sign-on Screen

When the CA-Roscoe sign-on screen is displayed at a 3270-type terminal, the currentdate and time are shown on the right side of the screen. The version of CA-Roscoebeing executed is displayed in the lower right-hand corner of the screen.

The following example illustrates the CA-Roscoe sign-on screen that is displayed at3270-type terminals.

7 8

>APPLID(A=4IROS3)

>

....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7

||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||

|||| |||||||

|||| |||||||

|||| KEY _ DATE =9/19/92 |||||||

|||| PASSWORD TIME 14.35.49 |||||||

|||| GROUP CODE TERMID A=1IX=17 |||||||

|||| NEW PASSWORD > |||||||

|||| > (Repeat for verification) |||||||

||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||

|||||||| ||||| ||||| ||| ||| ||||| |||||

||||||| || |||| || ||||| ||||||||| |||||| || ||||| ||||||||||

||CA-| || |||| || ||||| ||||||||| |||||| || ||||| |||||||||||

||||| |||| || ||||| ||| |||||| || ||||| ||||||||

|||| ||| |||| || ||||||||||| ||| |||||| || ||||| ||||Ver 6.=||

||| ||| ||| || ||||||||||| ||| |||||| || ||||| ||||Glvl 94=4|

|| ||| ||| ||| ||| || ||||| |||||||||

||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||

|||| COPYRIGHT (C) 1994 COMPUTER ASSOCIATES INTERNATIONAL, INC. ||||||

||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||

U V

To sign on to CA-Roscoe, complete the following fields:

KEY (Required.) Enter the sign-on key assigned to you by sitemanagement. The cursor is positioned to this field when thesign-on screen is displayed.

PASSWORD (May be required.) Enter your password if you have beenassigned one.

A password protects you against unauthorized access. Thus,for security reasons, your password is not displayed when youenter it.


10.1 Signing On

GROUP CODE (Optional.) Enter the appropriate information.

This field provides a way for you to enter additional securityinformation requested by your site management. Data enteredin this field is not displayed.

NEW PASSWORD (Optional.) Enter a new password, if appropriate. To verifythat you have spelled your password correctly, reenter it onthe next line.

See 10.2.1, “Changing/Creating a Password” on page 10-8 foradditional information.

After completing the appropriate fields, press the ENTER key to have the informationtransmitted to CA-Roscoe. As soon as you are signed on:

■ The system sign-on message is displayed, if established by your site management.■ The system sign-on program is executed, if established by your site management.■ Your sign-on program is executed, if you have created one.

10.1.2 Accessing CA-Roscoe from VTAM Terminals

If the CA-Roscoe sign-on screen is not displayed, you must enter a VTAM applicationID to establish contact with CA-Roscoe.

Your site management will tell you what application ID to use. If the ID is, forexample, ROSCOE, you can display the CA-Roscoe sign-on screen by entering:

ROSCOE

and pressing the ENTER key. You can now sign on as described earlier.

You can bypass the CA-Roscoe sign-on screen by entering sign-on information withthe VTAM application ID. To do this, you would use the format:

��──applid──signonkey─ ──┬ ┬───────────────────────────── ─────────��└ ┘──/password ──┬ ┬───────────── /

└ ┘──/group-code

Examples:

If your sign-on key is SMITH and you have no password or group code, you wouldenter:

ROSCOE SMITH

If you sign-on key is SMITH and your password is MYPASS, you would enter:

ROSCOE SMITH/MYPASS

If any of the sign-on information is incorrect, the CA-Roscoe sign-on screen isdisplayed and all sign-on information must be reentered.


10.1 Signing On

10.1.3 Accessing CA-Roscoe Through XTPM

XTPM (External Teleprocessing Monitor) is a component of CA-Roscoe that allowsusers to access CA-Roscoe from terminals defined to CICS/VS, TSO, or anotherCA-Roscoe.

10.1.3.1 CA-Roscoe From CA-Roscoe

You can sign on to one CA-Roscoe from another CA-Roscoe at any time using theETSO CALL command in the form:

��──CALL──prog─ ──┬ ┬──────────────────── ──┬ ┬──────────── ─────────��└ ┘──signonkey/password └ ┘──ROSID=code

where prog is the name of a CA-Roscoe XTPM Interface module.

Note: The target CA-Roscoe must be the same release as the host CA-Roscoe (theone from which you are invoking sign-on.) You cannot sign on to aCA-Roscoe of another release level.

For example, if your sign-on key is MYSIGNON and your password is MINE, youmight enter:

CALL ROSXROS 'MYSIGNON/MINE'

Refer to Appendix B of the CA-Roscoe Installation Guide for detailed instructions oninstalling the CA-Roscoe XTPM Interface module.

Notes:

■ If you do not enter your sign-on key and password, either:

– The information is provided by your site security system and, thus, theCA-Roscoe sign-on screen is bypassed, or

– The CA-Roscoe sign-on screen is displayed.

■ There is an optional user group code:

– If specified explicitly, will be passed to the target CA-Roscoe.

– If specified implicitly with an asterisk (*), the user group code from yourcurrent CA-Roscoe session will be passed to the target CA-Roscoe.

– If your site security system is providing the sign-on information, the usergroup code from your current CA-Roscoe session will be passed to the targetCA-Roscoe.

■ ROSID= allows you to designate which CA-Roscoe you want to sign on to. Youmay omit ROSID= if:

– Your site is executing a single CA-Roscoe, or


10.1 Signing On

– You have no preference as to which CA-Roscoe you are signed on to whenyour site is executing multiple CA-Roscoe systems.

If your site is executing multiple CA-Roscoe systems, it is possible to bounce betweenthe host and target systems. For example, assume that:

■ You are currently executing on a host CA-Roscoe identified as ROS1. The RCSescape character is a semi-colon (;) and the RCS escape PF key is PF12 (asidentified by the RCSESCCH and RCSESCPF field of the STATUS SYSTEMdisplay).

■ You want to begin a session on a target CA-Roscoe identified as ROSA. Its RCSescape character is the colon (:) and its RCS escape PF key is PF12.

First, create a full-screen split. In the new screen, enter the CALL command with theappropriate program name and identify the target CA-Roscoe, as in:

��──CALL──prog─ ──┬ ┬────────────────────── ──ROSID=ROSA ───────────�� └ ┘ ─signonkey──/password─

You are now signed on to the CA-Roscoe identified as ROSA. To bounce back to theROS1, your host CA-Roscoe, enter: '; (Host CA-Roscoe RCS Escape Character)'

;W

and press PF12, where the ; is defined as the host CA-Roscoe RCS escape character.

When you are returned to ROS1, the ETSO application is viewed as suspended. Youcan execute CA-Roscoe commands, RPF programs, and so on. You can swap back tothe target CA-Roscoe at any time to continue your session on ROSA.

Since the target CA-Roscoe has a different RCS escape character, it is possible torequest a full-screen split on that CA-Roscoe. This gives you four CA-Roscoe screens,two on the host and two on the target. It is also possible for you to access yet anotherCA-Roscoe from the target.

When you end your target CA-Roscoe session you are returned to your hostCA-Roscoe session.

As can be seen by the preceding example, it is possible for you to access multipleCA-Roscoes from a single terminal.


10.1 Signing On

10.1.3.2 CA-Roscoe From CICS Terminals

From a terminal defined to CICS/VS, you can sign on to CA-Roscoe through: 1) amenu-driven or formatted site-defined screen, or 2) by entering a site-definedtransaction ID.

When using a transaction ID, the sign-on format is:

��──transid─ ──┬ ┬────────────────────────── ──┬ ┬──────────── ──────��└ ┘──signonkey ──┬ ┬─────────── └ ┘──ROSID=code

└ ┘─/password─

For example, if the CA-Roscoe transaction ID is ROSC, your sign-on key isMYSIGNON and your password is MINE, you might enter:

ROSC MYSIGNON/MINE

Notes:

■ See the CA-Roscoe Installation Guide for complete information about setting upCICS interface modules and TRANSID resources.




■ ROSID= allows you to designate which CA-Roscoe you want to sign on to. Youcan omit ROSID= if:



When you end your CA-Roscoe session, you are returned to CICS.


10.1 Signing On

10.1.3.3 CA-Roscoe From TSO

From the TSO READY prompt or from ISPF/PDF Option 6, you can accessCA-Roscoe using the sign-on format:

��──cpid─ ──┬ ┬────────────────────────── ──┬ ┬────────────────── ───�� └ ┘──signonkey ──┬ ┬─────────── └ ┘──ROSID= ──┬ ┬────── └ ┘─/password─ └ ┘─code─

where cpid is the name of a site-defined TSO Command Processor. For example, ifthe TSO Command Processor for CA-Roscoe is ROSF, your sign-on key isMYSIGNON and your password is MINE, you might enter:

ROSF MYSIGNON/MINE

Notes:




■ ROSID= allows you to designate which CA-Roscoe you want to sign on to. Youmay omit ROSID= if:



When you end your CA-Roscoe session, you are returned to TSO.

WARNING:

The TSO restriction on the use of PA1 is applicable during your CA-Roscoesession. If you should press the PA1 key, it is ignored.


10.2 Customizing Sign On


This section describes how you can create, change or delete your CA-Roscoe passwordand sign-on program. Note that your site management may restrict your ability toperform some or all of these actions.

10.2.1 Changing/Creating a Password

Your site management has the option of:

■ Requiring you to maintain a password. (This is to protect you against unauthorizedaccess.)

■ Controlling whether you can change or delete your password.■ Requiring you to change your password on a periodic basis.

If your site permits you to control your password, you have two different methods forcreating, changed and deleting it.

Method 1 - When Signing On

You can use the NEW PASSWORD fields on the CA-Roscoe sign-on screen to:

■ Create a Password.

Enter your password in the NEW PASSWORD field. To verify that the passwordis spelled correctly, reenter it on the next line. The password must be one to tencharacters in length and cannot contain a slash (/) as one of its characters.

■ Change a Password.

Enter your current password in the PASSWORD field. Then enter your newpassword in the NEW PASSWORD field (and on the following line forverification). The next time you sign on to CA-Roscoe, your new password willbe in effect.

■ Eliminate a Password.

Enter spaces in the NEW PASSWORD field and on the following line.

Method 2 - During a Session

Note: Your site management may prohibit the use of the PASSWORD primarycommand. If the use of PASSWORD is not restricted, you can use it at anytime during your terminal session.



You can use the PASSWORD command to:

■ Create a Password.

Enter the command PASSWORD and a one- to ten-character password that doesnot contain a slash (/). For example, to establish E637 as your password, youwould enter:

PASSWORD E637

■ Change a Password.

Enter the PASSWORD command followed by the new password. Your newpassword will be in effect the next time you sign on.

■ Eliminate a Password.

Enter the command PASSWORD with no operand, as in:

PASSWORD



10.2.2 Creating a Sign-on Program

Note: Site management has the option of designating whether you may create, changeor delete a sign-on program.

A sign-on program consists of one or more CA-Roscoe commands that are saved as alibrary member. If you have a sign-on program, it is executed every time you sign onto CA-Roscoe and every time you split the screen.

A sign-on program is useful when, for example, you want certain CA-Roscoe sessionattributes to always be in effect. Rather than entering the commands establishing eachattribute every time you sign on to CA-Roscoe, you can include the commands in alibrary member and then have the commands in that member automatically executedfor you. (See Chapter 6, “Displaying Session Attributes/Information” for additionalinformation.)

The following example contains a sample sign-on program. In addition to using someof the commands that set session attributes, it also changes the functions assigned tosome of the PF keys.

Sample Sign-on Program

7 8 SAVE MYSIGN_

>

> AWS( ) SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72

> <...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....6....+

...... ================================ T O P =====================

===1== <<MYSIGN>>

===2== SET MODE XTENDED : Set character translation

===3== SET DISPLAY ALL 1 72 NUM : Set display format

===4== SET DISPLAY AWS 7 8= NUMX : Set AWS display format

===5== TAB $ : Set tab character

===6== TAB 16 2= 42 : Set tab positions

===7== SET ; : Set command delimiter

===8== : PF key assignments follow

===9== LET AWS.PF13 = '+FETCH +C1+/ATTACH'

==1=== LET JOB.PF13 = '+ATTACH JOB +C1+'

==11== LET DSN.PF13 = '+ATTACH DSN +C1+'

==12== LET LIB.PF13 = '+ATTACH +C1+'

==13== LET PF14 = '+DETACH +C1+'

==14== LET PF15 = '+SCROLL +C1+ +C2+ +C3+'

============================= B O T T O M ==================

U V

When creating a library member that is to be your sign-on program:

■ Only one command may appear per line in the member.

■ The first line in the member should contain the library member name.

If you do include the name, it must be bound by angle brackets (<< and >>).(Notice line 100 in the previous figure contains <<MYSIGN>>, where MYSIGNis the name of the member.)



■ Comments may be included in the program.

A comment is indicated by a colon (:) that is preceded and followed by at leastone space. Any words following the colon are treated as comments and ignored.(Notice the use of comments in the sample sign-on program in the previousfigure.)

To establish or change the member containing your sign-on program, enter thecommand SIGNON followed by the appropriate library member name. For example:

SIGNON MYSIGN

establishes the library member named MYSIGN as your sign-on program. Onceestablished, the library member remains your sign-on program until you specifyanother one or eliminate the existing one.

To eliminate a sign-on program, enter the SIGNON command with no operand, as in:

SIGNON

Eliminating a sign-on program does not delete the library member. It simply preventsthe commands comprising that member from being executed each time you sign on toCA-Roscoe.


10.3 Signing Off

10.3 Signing Off

You can explicitly terminate your session at any time. You or your site may also usethe CA-Roscoe automatic sign-off facility to terminate a session that has been inactivefor a specified period of time.

If any existing AWS with a RECOVERABLE attribute contains data when you signoff (or are automatically signed off), the contents of each AWS is saved as a librarymember named SAVAWSnn, where nn is a unique ID.

10.3.1 Automatic Signoff

Sites have the option of using the CA-Roscoe automatic sign-off facility. When thisfacility is activated, you are automatically signed off if your terminal is inactive for asite-specified time period. Most sites set the time period so that few of their users areaffected.

To change the site-defined inactivity period:

■ Use the SET AUTOFF primary command, or■ Change the modifiable STATUS SESSION display.

The time that you specify may not exceed your site-defined maximum. (Use theSTATUS SYSTEM command to display the site-defined default and maximuminactivity time periods.)

If your site is not using this facility, it will be noted on the STATUS SYSTEMdisplay. You then have the option of activating and deactivating the facility using theSET AUTOFF command.


10.3 Signing Off

10.3.2 Explicit Signoff

You have two ways to explicitly terminate your session.

■ To sign off CA-Roscoe, enter:

OFF

If you are at a VTAM site, you can use operands of this command to terminate asession and begin another session, bypassing the VTAM logon screen andCA-Roscoe sign-on screen. (The CA-Roscoe Command Reference Guide,Reference Summary Guide and HELP facility described the operands that can beused with OFF.)

■ To sign off CA-Roscoe and cause the sign-on prompt screen to be displayed,enter:

OFFON

If you are using multiple CA-Roscoe sign-on keys, you can use the OFFONcommand to simultaneously sign off under one key and sign on under another. Forexample, suppose you are using the two sign-on keys JONES and BROWN. Ifyou are currently signed on under JONES, you can terminate your session andstart a new session under BROWN by entering:

OFFON BROWN


Chapter 11. Using/Customizing PF/PA Keys

This chapter describes:

■ The default PF/PA key assignments distributed with CA-Roscoe.

■ How to use the default assignments, especially when supplying variableinformation,

■ The processing hierarchy used to determine the PF/PA key assignment to be usedand then performing that assignment.

■ How to change your PF/PA key assignments.

Chapter 11. Using/Customizing PF/PA Keys 11-1

11.1 The Default PF/PA Key Assignments


The following chart shows the PF and PA key assignments provided with CA-Roscoe.You will notice that each key can have a maximum of four unique assignments.

Note: This manual assumes you are using the distributed default PF and PA keyassignments. Your site has the option of using these assignments or changingthem. You also have the option of changing the PF key assignments.

KEYS AWS DSN JOB LIB

PA1 Ignore Changes same same same

PA2 HELP PFKEYSROSCOE

same same same

PF1 SPLIT same same same

PF2 SWAP same same same

PF3 END same same same

PF4 ATTACH DSNC1

SELECT C1 ATTACHJOB * FILEC1

EXEC PFK4

PF5 ATTACH JOBC1 C2 C3

EXEC PFK5 ATTACHJOB * C1 C2C3

EXEC PFK5

PF6 Reexecute same same same

PF7 SCROLL BACKC1 C2

same same same

PF8 SCROLLFORWARD C1C2

same same same

PF9 GO same same same

PF10 SCROLL LEFTC1

same same same

PF11 SCROLL RIGHTC1

same same same

PF12 INPUT same same same

PF13 EXEC PFK13 same same same






KEYS AWS DSN JOB LIB


PF18 Reexecute same same same

PF19 SCROLL BACKC1 C2

same same same

PF20 SCROLLFORWARD C1C2

same same same

PF21 GO same same same

PF22 SCROLL LEFTC1

same same same

PF23 SCROLL RIGHTC1

same same same

PF24 INPUT same same same


11.2 Using PF/PA Keys


A PF or PA key can have a maximum of four unique assignments. The assignment itperforms depends on the type of data currently attached. As illustrated in the precedingchart a key may perform a different assignment depending on whether an AWS, a dataset, job output file or library member is attached.

11.2.1 Types of Assignments:

A PF or PA key assignment may be either fixed or variable.

■ Fixed Assignments:

A fixed assignment is complete unto itself. It needs no additional information toperform its assigned function. For example, PF1 is assigned the fixed function:

SPLIT

When you press this key, your physical CA-Roscoe screen is split into two logicalscreens. If PF1 were assigned the function:

SCROLL FORWARD 1= LINES

your display would be repositioned ten lines forward every time you pressed thiskey.

■ Variable Assignments:

A variable assignment lets you supply variable information. Depending on theparticular assignment, this information may either be optional or required. Assumethat PF8 is assigned the function:

SCROLL FORWARD C1 C2

where C1 and C2 are Command Line variables. When this PF key is pressed, thelines comprising the Command Area are read and any information found there isassigned sequentially to the variables in the assignment. For example, if youtyped:

5 LINES

in the Command Area and then pressed PF8, the key is treated as though the fixedassignment:

SCROLL FORWARD 5 LINES



This assignment also illustrates that you can supply:

– No Variable Input:

If no information is found in the Command Area and the assignment is validwithout further qualification, the function is performed (for example,SCROLL FORWARD is a valid assignment and, thus, is performed). If it isnot, a message is issued.

– An Insufficient Amount of Information:

If an insufficient amount of information is found in the Command Area, theavailable information is sequentially assigned to the variables and theassignment is checked to see if it is valid. If it is, the function is performedand any unused variables are ignored. For example, if the Command Areacontains:

MAX

when PF8 is pressed, the key is treated as though it had the assignment:

SCROLL FORWARD MAX

Since this is a valid assignment, it is performed. The unused variable (C2) isignored.

When using PF/PA keys with variable assignments, you can:

■ Terminate Variable Input:

You can use the command delimiter to end variable input. For example, supposeyou want to scroll to the bottom of the active AWS and renumber its contents.You can do this by typing:

MAX & RENUMBER

in the Command Area where the ampersand (&) is the command delimiter. Theassignment is treated as:

SCROLL FORWARD MAX

since the command delimiter terminates variable input. Thus, RENUMBER isrecognized as a command and is not treated as the value of the variable C2.

■ Include Spaces in a Variable:

To include a space with a value, bound the value with delimiters. For example,assume that PF8 is assigned the function:

SCROLL FORWARD C1

and you want to reposition the display by five lines. You can do this by typing:

'5 LINES'

in the Command Area and pressing PF8. For the assignment, 5 LINES is treatedas a single value; when the assignment is performed, it is treated as SCROLLFORWARD 5 LINES.

■ Enter Variables and Other Commands/Data:



When a PF/PA key with a variable assignment is pressed, the entire CommandArea is read to build a valid PF/PA key assignment. Thus, all of the informationneeded by a PF/PA key must appear on the same line and precede any othercommand or data.

When an assignment includes variables, the combined length of the assignmentafter the variables have been replaced by values plus any additionalcommands/data found in the Command Area must not exceed 255 characters inlength.


11.3 Reviewing Processing Hierarchy


Two actions are taken when you press a PA or PF key, where:

1. The assignment to be used is determined.

■ If you are currently using a Monitor command that has subcommands (likeDISPLAY) and there are special site assignments for that Monitor, theappropriate site-defined function is selected. If there are no site-definedassignments, the user-defined function is selected.

■ If you are not using such a Monitor command, the key is checked to see ifthere is a user-defined function. If there is, that function is selected. If there isnot, the site-assigned function is selected.

2. The assignment is performed.

■ If a PA key is pressed, the selected assignment is performed.

■ If a PF key is pressed, the Command Area is read for input, if needed, andfor any additional commands that may be entered there. The commands in theassignment (plus those entered from the terminal) are then executed.

The assignment (and associated commands) are executed until:

■ It is successfully completed.

■ The first command that causes an implicit or explicit pause (like DISPLAYwith MORE or ATTACH). Any unexecuted commands are displayed in theCommand Area of the screen. To resume execution of those commands, pressthe ENTER key.

Note: If the pause was caused by an RPF program containing a panel, thepanel overrides the display of unexecuted commands (the unexecutedcommands are lost).

■ An error is encountered. Any unexecuted commands are displayed. To resumeexecution, correct, change or delete the command in error and press theENTER key. (See Chapter 2, “Commands and Command Components” foradditional information about correcting invalid/incomplete commands.



11.4 Changing Assignments

Caution PA KEY Warning

When a PA key is pressed, 3270 hardware limitations prevent CA-Roscoe fromknowing: 1) any of the changes made to the screen, and 2) the current position ofthe cursor when split screens are in effect.

It is strongly recommended that you do not change the default PA keyassignments. If you do change the defaults, only commands can be assigned to PAkeys (no functions may be assigned). Exercise care when assigning commands,especially if you frequently split screens. Examples:

■ If UPDATE * is assigned to a PA key that is pressed, the command is issuedbut changes made to the screen are not applied to the library member (or tothat AWS).

■ If you assign DETACH JOB to a PA key and then split the screen to attachtwo jobs, the wrong job may be detached when you press the PA key. (Thelast known cursor position is used (for example, where the cursor was placedfor the last terminal write). CA-Roscoe does not know if you moved thecursor to a different screen.)

You have the option of changing any of the PF/PA key assignments provided by yoursite. New assignments:

■ Can be established at any time during a terminal session.

■ Remain in effect until you sign off or change them. If you decide that you alwayswant certain assignments to be in effect, you can add the commands establishingthose assignments to your signon program. Then, each time you sign on, thecommands are executed and the PF/PA functions are automatically reassigned foryou.



11.4.1 Syntax

The syntax to assign a function to a PF or PA key is:

��──LET─ ──┬ ┬──────── ──┬ ┬──PAv ─=──'string'───────────────────────��└ ┘─scope.─ └ ┘──PFv

scope Qualifies the operational range of this key. If omitted, the operationapplies to all forms of attached data. If specified, it must be one ofthe following:

AWS. Designates that the operation affects only the activeAWS.

DSN. Designates that the operation affects only the attacheddata set object.

JOB. Designates that the operation affects only the attachedjob output.

LIB. Designates that the operation affects only the attachedlibrary member.

PAv PA key whose assignment is to be changed, where v is a valuebetween 1 and 10.

PFv PF key whose assignment is to be changed, where v is a valuebetween 1 and 24.

'string' Function to be performed. It must be delimited by apostrophes. Itmay contain Command Line and/or RPF variables and, after thevariables have been replaced by their values, must not exceed 255characters in length. (See the next section for additional informationabout assigning functions.)



11.4.2 Assigning Commands/Keyword Functions

This section describes:

■ assignment limitations, and ■ assignment techniques.

11.4.2.1 Assignment Limitations:

PA Keys You can assign one or more commands or one of the designated keywordfunctions of a PA key.

PF Keys You can assign one or more commands or any keyword function to a PFkey. When assigning commands and keyword functions, you may includemultiple commands but only one function.

The keyword functions are described in the next section.

11.4.2.2 Assignment Techniques:

■ Assigning a Single Fixed Value:

The value to be assigned must be delimited by apostrophes ('), as in:

LET PF16 = 'SPLIT'

The function assigned to PF16 will be performed whenever the key is pressed.

You can qualify the assignment so that it applies to a specific form of attacheddata. To do this, include the appropriate qualifier (like AWS, DSN, JOB or LIB)with the PF key designation, as in:

LET AWS.PF16 = 'SET DISPLAY AWS FLIP NUMX'

Now, when you press PF16, the type of data currently attached is determined. If itis:

– The active AWS: you will bounce the display between an unprotectedsequence number field and no sequence number field.

– Any other form of attached data: the screen will be split.



■ Assigning Multiple Values:

When multiple commands are assigned to a PF/PA key, the commands must beseparated by a slash (/). For example, if you assigned:

LET JOB.PF8 = 'SET DISPLAY JOB NONUM/SET MODE BASIC/SET ;'

and then press this key when job output is attached, the display will excludesequence numbers, the character translation mode will be basic and the semicolon(;) will be the command delimiter.

Note: The slash (/) is the default separator character. You can change thischaracter using the SET PFKDELIM command or through the modifiableSTATUS SESSION display.

■ Assigning Commands With String Operands:

Commands that have string operands fall into one of two categories, 1) thoserequiring that the string always be delimited, and 2) those requiring that the stringbe delimited only if it could be confused for a keyword operand of that command.

When assigning commands with string operands, it is a good practice to delimitthe string. Note that the delimiter may be any special character except anapostrophe, the PF/PA key assignment delimiter or the command delimiter. In thefollowing example, the logical not sign (¬) is used to delimit the string JOB. (Ifthe delimiters where omitted, JOB would be treated as a keyword operand of theFIRST command.)

LET PF8 = 'SET DISPLAY NONUM/FIRST ¬JOB¬'

■ Assigning RPF Programs:

You can assign a RPF program name to a PF or PA key, as illustrated by:

LET PF9 = 'EXEC AAA.WIDGET'

or

LET PF9 = 'AAA.WIDGET'

or

LET PF9 = 'WIDGET'

If the RPF program name matches the name of a primary or Monitor command,use either the EXEC command or slash (/) to cause explicit program invocation.(If the program is in an Execution Library, the slash must be used.) Thefollowing assignment shows how you can renumber the active AWS and explicitlyexecute a program named FETCH when you press PF10:

LET PF1= = 'RENUMBER//FETCH'

Remember that the slashes in this example are serving two purposes. The firstslash separates the commands; the second slash explicitly invokes RPF programexecution.

■ Assigning Variable Values:

You can include Command Line and RPF variables in a PF key assignment. RPFvariables can be included in a PA key assignment.

– Defining Variables:



When variables are used within an assignment, the assignment must beginwith a special character (a plus sign in these examples) that is also used todelimit the variable portion of the assignment, as in:

LET PF4 = '+FETCH +C1+/ATTACH' or

LET PF5 = '+RENUMBER/SAVE +C1+'

If you omit the special character, the variable is not recognized. (In bothcases, C1 is assumed to be a library member name, not a Command Linevariable.)

Caution IMPORTANT:

When variables are used in an assignment, the length of the assignment,after all variable substitution has been performed, plus any othercommands/data specified in the Command Area may not exceed 255characters.

– Using Command Line Variables

You can assign a maximum of eight Command Line variables (named C1through C8) to any PF key. Command Line variables cannot be assigned toPA keys.

If you use Command Line variables in an assignment, you must providevariable information in the Command Area of the screen. For example,assume the following assignment is in effect:

LET PF4 = '+FETCH +C1+/ATTACH'

When PF4 is pressed, the Command Area is read for the needed variableinformation. If WIDGET appears in the Command Area, the assignment istreated as though the following commands were entered:

FETCH WIDGET & ATTACH

When you include multiple Command Line variables in an assignment, eachone must be delimited by the same special character, as in:

LET AWS.PF4 ='+ATTACH +C1+ +C2+ +C3+ +C4+'

So, when PF4 is pressed, the values found in the Command Area are assignedsequentially to the variables. A value need not be supplied for all of thevariables in an assignment. If the supplied values form a valid command, theremaining variables are ignored. For example, assume that the precedingdefinition is in effect and the Command Area contains:

JOB Q

This assignment is treated as though the command ATTACH JOB * wasentered. Since this is a valid command, the variables C3 and C4 are ignoredand the command is executed.

The same principles apply when using any of the predefined keywordfunctions instead of, or with, commands. For example, assume the followingdefinition is in effect:

LET PF12 = '+SCROLL +C1+ C2+ +C3+'



With this definition, you may enter any of the following:

FORWARD

BACKWARD HALF

FORWARD 5 LINES

■ RPF Variables

Any RPF system or storage variable can be included in a PF or PA key definition.When you use a storage variable (like L1 or P12), it must be assigned a valuebefore you press the associated PF key. For example, assume the followingdefinition is in effect:

LET AWS.PF5 = '+FETCH +L1+'

If L1 contains no value or a value that is inappropriate for the assignment, anerror message is displayed.

11.4.3 Assigning Keyword Functions

This section describes the keywords that you can use to designate:

1. The location to which the display is to be scrolled, or2. An action that is to be performed.

When assigning these keywords, they must always be delimited, as in:

LET AWS.PF1 = 'SCROLL BACK'

11.4.3.1 Scroll Function Assignments

The following functions can be used to position the display. Unless noted otherwise:

■ These functions can only be assigned to PF keys, and■ Any changes made to the current frame are applied.

Note: A frame is equivalent to the number of lines in the Execution Area. (Page is asynonym for frame.)

POSITION BOTTOM The display is positioned so that it ends with the lastdisplayable line.

POSITION TOP The display is positioned so that it begins with the firstdisplayable line.

SCROLL BACK The display is positioned backward based on the valuespecified in the SCRL field of the System InformationLine. If the number of remaining lines is less than theSCRL field value, the action is identical to POSITIONTOP.

SCROLL BACK Csr The display is positioned so that the line at which thecursor is positioned is the last displayed line. If thenumber of preceding lines is less than the size of theExecution Area, the display is unchanged.



SCROLL BACK [v] FRames or SCROLL BACK [v] PagesThe display is positioned backward one or v frames. Ifless than vframes precede the current frame, the actionis identical to POSITION TOP.

SCROLL BACK Full The display is positioned backward one line less thanthe total number of lines in the current frame (the firstline of the new display is the last line of the old). Ifless than a full frame of lines precede the current frame,the action is identical to POSITION TOP.

SCROLL BACK Half The display is positioned back one-half frame. If lessthan a half frame of lines precede the current frame, theaction is identical to POSITION TOP.

SCROLL BACK [v] [Lines]The display is positioned backward one or v lines. Ifless than vlines precede the current frame, the action isidentical to POSITION TOP.

SCROLL BACK Max Display positioning is identical to POSITION TOP.

SCROLL FORWARD The display is positioned forward based on the valuespecified in the SCRL field of the System InformationLine. If the number of remaining lines is less than theSCRL field value, the action is identical to POSITIONBOTTOM.

SCROLL FORWARD Csr The display is positioned forward so that the line atwhich the cursor is positioned is the first displayed line.

SCROLL FORWARD [v] FRames or SCROLL FORWARD [v] PagesThe display is positioned forward one or v frames. Ifless than vframes remain, the action is identical toPOSITION BOTTOM.

SCROLL FORWARD Full The display is positioned forward one line less than thetotal number of lines in the current frame (the last lineof the new display is the first line of the old). If lessthan a full frame of lines remain, the action is identicalto POSITION BOTTOM.

SCROLL FORWARD Half The display is positioned forward one-half frame. If lessthan a half frame of lines remain, the action is identicalto POSITION BOTTOM.

SCROLL FORWARD [v] [Lines]The display is positioned forward one or v lines. If lessthan v lines remain, the action is identical to POSITIONBOTTOM.

SCROLL FORWARD Max Display positioning is identical to POSITIONBOTTOM.



SCROLL LEFT The extent of the left shift is determined by subtractingthe left margin value from the right margin value, asspecified in the COLS field of the System InformationLine. This value is then subtracted from the left marginand the display is repositioned.

SCROLL LEFT v The display is shifted left that number of positions. (Itcannot be shifted beyond column 1.) The value must bepositive and greater than 0. If zero is specified, noshifting occurs.

SCROLL LEFT MAX The display is shifted left to begin with the first positionof the line.

SCROLL RIGHT The extent of the right shift is determined by subtractingthe left margin value from the right margin value, asspecified in the COLS field of the System InformationLine. This value is then added to the right margin andthe frame is repositioned.

SCROLL RIGHT v The display is shifted right that number of positions. (Itcannot be shifted beyond the rightmost margin for thetype of data being displayed; for example, 255 for anAWS.) The value must be positive and greater than 0.If zero is specified, no shifting occurs.

SCROLL RIGHT MAX The display is shifted right to end with the last positionof the line (for example, 255 when an AWS is attached;LRECL value when a data set is attached).

11.4.3.2 Special Purpose Function Assignments

The following functions control split-screen processing. They can only be assigned toPF keys.

END Split-screen processing is terminated; the two logical screens arereturned to a single physical screen.

SPLIT Split-screen processing is invoked; the physical screen is divided intotwo logical screens.

SWAP Active and inactive split screens are interchanged; the cursor is movedfrom one logical screen to the other.



The following functions can be assigned to a PF or PA key:

INPUT As a PA key assignment, changes made to the current frame areignored. Blank lines are inserted before the first line displayed in thecurrent screen.

Caution: After entering data, press a PF key or the ENTER key. If aPA key is pressed, all inserted lines will be lost.

As a PF key assignment, changes made to the current frame are applied.If the cursor is in the Execution Area, blank lines are inserted after theline at which the cursor is positioned. If the cursor is not in theExecution Area, blank lines are inserted before the first line displayedin the current screen.

REPEAT Changes made to the current frame are ignored. The attached dataremains attached.

As a PF key assignment, commands found in the Command Area areexecuted.

As a PA key assignment, commands found in the Command Area areignored if this function is assigned to a PA key.

The remaining functions can only be assigned to PF keys:

+ The last executed command is redisplayed.

- The last executed command is reexecuted.

ENTER The display is positioned based on the function assigned to the ENTERkey. Normally, the display retains its position.

QUIT Changes made to the current frame are ignored; attached data aredetached. Commands entered in the Command Area are executed.

Note: : See Chapter 2, “Commands and Command Components” for informationabout + and -.


Chapter 12. Using the Training Aids

This chapter describes the user documentation and online tools that are provided withCA-Roscoe.

Chapter 12. Using the Training Aids 12-1

12.1 The CA-Roscoe Documentation

12.1 The CA-Roscoe Documentation

In addition to this manual, each CA-Roscoe user should have access to:

■ CA-Roscoe Command Reference Guide for a detailed description of all CA-Roscoecommands.

■ CA-Roscoe Getting Started Guide for an introduction to CA-Roscoe oriented to:1) non-programmers, and 2) individuals familiar with IBM TSO ISPF/PDF.

■ CA-Roscoe RPF Language Guide for a description of the ROSCOE ProgrammingFacility (RPF).

Finally, each user should have a copy of the CA-Roscoe Reference Summary and,optionally, a copy of the RPF Reference Summary.


12.2 The HELP Facility


The online HELP facility is a quick and easy way to get information about CA-Roscoecommands and facilities. For example, to display information about the SAVEcommand, enter:

HELP SAVE

The following example illustrates part of the information that is displayed.



HELP Command: Sample Display

7 8 _

>

> HLP(...HELP...) SCROLL FULL DISPLAY ==1 =79

>....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6

SAVE

Function: Places contents of active AWS into library as a

member.

Syntax: SAVE mem < p<q> > < 'string' >

< NOSEQ/SEQ <s<l>>/COBOL >

< SHARED/EXECONLY/RESTRICTED >

mem Name to be assigned to member being created.

Must comply with naming conventions and not

currently exist in user's library.

p First line of AWS to be saved.

. . .

U V

As with all HELP displays, the information presented includes:

Function A one-sentence description of the command or facility.

Syntax The syntax of the command.

Level List of HELP members that provide additional and/or relatedinformation about the command or facility.

The following figure identifies the PF keys that are used to position within andbetween HELP displays.

Display PF Keys Action

If there is more informationavailable than fits on thecurrent screen

PF7/PF19 Scrolls to start of display.

PF8/PF20 Scrolls forward.

If the display indicates thatlevel information is available

PF10/PF22 Scrolls to prior level.

PF11/PF23 Scrolls to next level.



To obtain information about the HELP facility itself, enter the command:

HELP

Other HELP displays that you may want to review are:

HELP MESSAGE x Displays a description of the designated messages (like HELPMESSAGE CMD01).

HELP PFKEYS Displays information about: 1) PF/PA key assignments, 2)how to use the default assignments, and 3) how to change theassignments.

HELP NEW Displays information about the current release of CA-Roscoe.


12.3 The Online Tutorial

12.3 The Online Tutorial

The Tutorial provides a way for you to learn more about CA-Roscoe. It simulates anactual CA-Roscoe terminal session and introduces the most frequently used CA-Roscoecommands and facilities.

The Tutorial presents you with a menu of 12 independent learning modules. You cancomplete the modules in order, use only certain modules, or vary the order in whichyou complete the modules.

To obtain more information about the Tutorial, enter:

HELP TUTORIAL

The resulting HELP display explains how to invoke the Tutorial at your company.


Part II. The AWS (Creating and Manipulating Data)

Chapter 13. AWS: Introducing the AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-113.1 Attaching an AWS to the Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-213.2 Attaching an AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-313.3 Bringing Data Into an AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-413.4 Changing AWS Names/Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-513.5 Creating an AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-613.6 Detaching an AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-813.7 Discarding an AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-913.8 Positioning the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10

13.8.1 Positioning via the Internal Pointer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1013.8.2 Positioning to Specific Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11

13.9 Reattaching the Current AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1313.10 Selecting an AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14

Chapter 14. AWS: Changing Data Within an AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-114.1 Adding Character Strings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2

14.1.1 Inserting a String Within a Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-214.1.2 Prefixing or Suffixing a Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2

14.2 Reordering AWS Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-314.3 Editing Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4


14.4 Editing Character Strings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-614.4.1 Using a Primary Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-614.4.2 Using Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-714.4.3 Tracking Edited Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8

Chapter 15. AWS: Copying Data Within and Into an AWS . . . . . . . . 15-115.1 Copying Data Within the Active AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2


15.2 Copying Data to an AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-815.2.1 Alternate Form of Screen Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-915.2.2 Copying All or a Range of Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1015.2.3 Copying Based on a Character String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-10

15.3 Copying Data Between Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1215.3.1 Copying All or a Range of Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1315.3.2 Copying Based on a Character String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-13

Chapter 16. AWS: Deleting Data From an AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-116.1 Using Primary Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2

16.1.1 Deleting by Line Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2

16.1.2 Deleting by Presence/Absence of a String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-316.2 Using Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-416.3 Using 3270 Hardware Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-6

16.3.1 Using the ERASE EOF Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-616.3.2 Using the DELETE Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-7

Chapter 17. AWS: Displaying/Changing AWS Information . . . . . . . . 17-1

Chapter 18. AWS: Entering and Formatting Data in an AWS . . . . . . 18-118.1 Entering Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-2

18.1.1 Using Primary Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-218.1.2 Using Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-818.1.3 Using a Mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1118.1.4 Using a PF Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1318.1.5 Using the Command Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-14

18.2 Formatting Inserted Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1518.2.1 Using Automatic Indentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1518.2.2 Using the Software Tab Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-16

Chapter 19. AWS: Formatting Data Within an AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-119.1 Centering Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-2


19.2 Controlling Capitalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-519.2.1 Using a Primary Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-519.2.2 Using a Line Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-6

19.3 Reformatting Text Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-719.3.1 Using a Primary Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-719.3.2 Using a Line Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-8

19.4 Shifting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-1019.4.1 Using Primary Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-1019.4.2 Using Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-11

19.5 Splitting and Joining Text Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-1319.5.1 Using Primary Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-1319.5.2 Using Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-17

Chapter 20. AWS: Locating Data Within an AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-120.1 Finding Specific Occurrences of a String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-2

20.1.1 Using Primary Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-320.1.2 Using Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-5

20.2 Including/Excluding Lines Containing a String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-620.2.1 Using Primary Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-620.2.2 Using Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-8

20.3 Customizing the Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-1020.3.1 Translating the Search String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-1020.3.2 Delimiting the Search String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-1020.3.3 Qualifying the Search String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-1020.3.4 Specifying the String in Hexadecimal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-1120.3.5 Positioning the Resulting Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-13


Chapter 21. AWS: Moving Data Within an AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-121.1 Using a Primary Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-221.2 Using Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-3

Chapter 22. AWS: Renumbering Data in the AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-122.1.1 Renumbering Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-122.1.2 Display Sequence Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-222.1.3 Include Sequence Numbers in the Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-222.1.4 Set AWS Sequence Number Attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-322.1.5 Including CA-Roscoe Sequence Numbers With PRINT/SUBMIT . . 22-3

Chapter 23. AWS: Saving and Updating a Library Member . . . . . . . 23-123.1 Creating a Library Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-2

23.1.1 A CA-Roscoe library member name MUST: . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-223.1.2 Member Name Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-323.1.3 Assigning a Description and/or Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-4

23.2 Updating a Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-5

Chapter 13. AWS: Introducing the AWS

When you sign on to CA-Roscoe, an AWS (or Active Work Space) is automaticallyallocated for your use. If you split the screen, a second AWS is automatically allocatedfor that subsession (a split screen appears). These AWSs are named ROSn, where n isa unique identifier. (The name of the AWS that you are currently working with isshown at the right side of the System Information Line.) All data entry and editingthat you do during your CA-Roscoe session is done in one of these temporary workareas.

Note: See Chapter 8, “Selecting a Screen Format” on page 8-1 for information aboutthe CA-Roscoe split screen facility.

You can place data in an AWS by entering it from the terminal or copying it from theCA-Roscoe library, an attached job output file or an OS data set. After editing thedata, you can store it as a member in the CA-Roscoe library, print a copy of it at a328x-type or system printer, submit it to the operating system, write it to a data set ordelete it.

The data in an AWS is stored in the form of variable length records not exceeding 255characters in length. (Each line in an AWS is considered to be a record.) Theserecords are kept in order by six-digit sequence numbers that are created andmaintained externally from your data. The maximum number of records that you canhave in an AWS is set by your site management.

Any data remaining in an AWS when you sign off is automatically saved for you ifthe AWS has a RECOVERABLE attribute. The data is saved in the CA-Roscoe libraryas a member. One member is created for each recoverable AWS that you are using.The members are named SAVAWSnn, where nn is a unique identifier. These membersare also created in the event of a network shutdown or system failure. The next timeyou sign back on to CA-Roscoe, you can use these members to restore your AWS(s).

Chapter 13. AWS: Introducing the AWS 13-1

13.1 Attaching an AWS to the Terminal

13.1 Attaching an AWS to the Terminal

The rest of this chapter describes how you can:

■ Attach the currently active or a specific AWS.■ Bring data from a variety of sources into the AWS.■ Change the name and/or attributes of any existing AWS.■ Create one or more AWSs.■ Detach the active AWS.■ Discard (remove) an existing AWS.■ Position the display within the active AWS.■ Reattach the active AWS.■ Select an existing AWS for display.


13.2 Attaching an AWS

13.2 Attaching an AWS

The ATTACH command is used to bind an existing AWS to the terminal so that all orpart of its contents can be displayed and modified.

To view the entire contents of the currently active AWS, enter:

ATTACH

To view the entire contents of a specific AWS and make it the active AWS, you mightenter:

ATTACH AWS SAMPLE

where SAMPLE is the name assigned to an existing AWS.

When working with the currently active AWS, you can use ATTACH to:

■ Limit the display to a particular range of lines. For example, to view only lines200 through 800 of the currently active AWS, you would enter:

ATTACH 2== 8==

■ Begin the display with the first occurrence of a particular character string. Forexample, assume that the active AWS contains a COBOL program and you wantto begin the display with the line containing PROCEDURE DIVISION. To dothis, enter:

ATTACH 'PROCEDURE DIVISION'

The display begins with the first line in the active AWS that contains the specifiedstring. (Note that the string specified with ATTACH must be enclosed by a specialcharacter that is not found within the string itself.)


13.3 Bringing Data Into an AWS

13.3 Bringing Data Into an AWS

You can place data into an AWS by:

■ Entering data directly from the terminal - using the commands described inChapter 18, “AWS: Entering and Formatting Data in an AWS” on page 18-1.

■ Copying data into the AWS - using the commands described in Chapter 15,“AWS: Copying Data Within and Into an AWS” on page 15-1, you can copydata from:

– Another AWS.– The current screen display.– A library member.– An attached data set object.– An attached job output file.

Also refer to Chapter 27, “Data Sets: Performing Data Management Tasks” onpage 27-1 and Chapter 34, “Library: Performing Library Management Tasks” onpage 34-1 for additional commands that can be used to place data within an AWS.


13.4 Changing AWS Names/Attributes

13.4 Changing AWS Names/Attributes

You can change the name or attribute(s) of any existing AWS using the commands:

■ RENAME - to change the name of an existing AWS, as in:

RENAME AWS SAMPLE TEST

which renames the AWS named SAMPLE to TEST.

■ ALTER AWS - to change the attributes of an existing AWS, as in:

ALTER AWS TEST SPLIT ALTERAWS

which discards the AWS named TEST when the screen in which the CREATEcommand was entered is terminated. (Attributes that are not included with theALTER command remain unchanged. See 13.5, “Creating an AWS” onpage 13-6 for additional information about AWS attributes.

You can also use the modifiable display provided by the STATUS AWS command torename or change AWS attributes. See Chapter 17, “AWS: Displaying/ChangingAWS Information” on page 17-1 for details.


13.5 Creating an AWS


When you sign on to CA-Roscoe, you automatically have two AWSs assigned to youfor your session. (Their names are ROSn, where n is a unique identifier.)

You can use the CREATE command to name and define the attributes of one or moreadditional AWSs. The maximum number of additional AWSs that you can work withis set by site management.

To create an AWS, you might enter:

CREATE AWS SAMPLE

where SAMPLE is the name assigned to this AWS. You can use almost any one- toeight-character name that conforms to CA-Roscoe member naming conventions. (Therestricted names are FLIP, NEXT, PREV, ROSn, SYSn and TMPn (where n is anumeric value); B, F, N, P, T, and R are also restricted.)

Since no attributes are defined with the CREATE command in the preceding example,the default values are used. The attributes that you can assign to an AWS (and theirdefault values) are:

■ RECOVERABLE or NONRECOVERABLE

These define whether the contents of the AWS is to be backed up on disk andrecovered in the event of a session or system failure. The default isRECOVERABLE.

■ SESSION, SPLIT, RPF or LEVEL:

These define the retention period for the AWS, where:

SESSION Discards the AWS when you end your session. (Default)

SPLIT Discards the AWS when the screen in which the AWS wascreated is terminated.

RPF Discards the AWS when the RPF application containing theCREATE command terminates (In this case, application refersto the initiating RPF program and all of its subordinate RPFprograms.)

LEVEL Discards the AWS when the RPF program containing theCREATE command terminates.

■ ACTIVE or INACTIVE

These define whether the AWS is to become the active AWS for the screencontaining the command. The default is ACTIVE.



■ IMPLICIT or EXPLICIT

These define how the AWS is to be identified when a SELECT command isissued. The default is IMPLICIT. (See 13.10, “Selecting an AWS” on page 13-14for additional information.)

■ NEW, REUSE or RETAIN

These define the type of AWS being created, where:

NEW Indicates this is a new AWS. (Default)REUSE Reuses an existing AWS after deleting its contents.RETAIN Reuses an existing AWS while retaining its contents.

The attributes described thus far relate only to an AWS that you create. Once created,each AWS has its own attributes that affect how data are displayed and/or handled. Todisplay all of the attributes associated with each existing AWS, use the command:

STATUS AWS

Also see Chapter 17, “AWS: Displaying/Changing AWS Information” on page 17-1for a description of all AWS attributes.


13.6 Detaching an AWS

13.6 Detaching an AWS

The currently active AWS remains attached to the terminal until you:

■ CREATE another AWS with an ACTIVE attribute.■ ATTACH or SELECT another existing AWS.■ Execute a command (like ATTACH LIB) that causes output to the Execution

Area.■ Execute the DETACH command, explicitly releasing the AWS.■ Execute the DISCARD command, explicitly removing the current AWS.■ Press the CLEAR key.


13.7 Discarding an AWS

13.7 Discarding an AWS

You can remove a specific AWS by:

■ Explicitly identifying the AWS via the DISCARD command, as in:

DISCARD AWS TEST

where the AWS named TEST is removed and its contents deleted.

■ Implicitly removing it when activating another AWS, as in:

SELECT SAMPLE DISCARD

where the current AWS is discarded when the AWS named SAMPLE is activated.

You can also use the modifiable display provided by the STATUS AWS command todiscard one or more AWSs. (See Chapter 17, “AWS: Displaying/Changing AWSInformation” on page 17-1 for details.)

Finally, the retention attribute associated with an AWS also controls when that AWSwill be discarded. For example, if you create an AWS with the retention attribute ofSPLIT, that AWS will be discarded when the split screen in which the CREATEcommand was executed is terminated. (See 13.5, “Creating an AWS” on page 13-6 foradditional information.)


13.8 Positioning the Display


This section describes how you can position the display of the currently active AWS:

■ Based on the position of an internal pointer.■ To a specific line by using primary and line commands.

13.8.1 Positioning via the Internal Pointer

CA-Roscoe maintains internal pointers that are positioned to a line based on theexecution of a command. While pointer positioning occurs with all forms of attacheddata, it is most frequently used when manipulating the contents of an AWS. Forexample, if you enter the command DELETE 500, the AWS pointer is positioned tothe line following the deleted line. You can then reference that line by replacing acommand's line number operand with an asterisk (*). To illustrate how you might usepointer positioning, assume that you enter the commands:

DELETE 6== 9==

COPY Q 21==

ATTACH Q,,

The resulting display will begin with line 2101 because:

■ Lines 600 through 900 are deleted. The AWS pointer is positioned to the linefollowing the last deleted line (the line following 900).

■ The line at which the pointer is currently positioned is then copied after line 2100.The pointer is reset to the last copied line (the new line 2101).

■ The AWS contents are then redisplayed, beginning with the line at which thepointer is currently positioned.

This example assumes that all three commands appear in the Command Area when theENTER key is pressed. The results would be different if the active AWS is attachedand the commands are entered one at a time, where:

■ Lines 600 through 900 are deleted. The AWS pointer is positioned to the linefollowing the last deleted line. The data are then redisplayed. The redisplay ofattached data causes the pointer to be positioned to the first displayed line.

■ The line at which the pointer is currently positioned (the first line of the activeAWS) is then copied after line 2100. The data are again redisplayed. Again, theAWS pointer is positioned to the first displayed line.

■ The AWS contents are then explicitly redisplayed. The display begins with thefirst line of the active AWS.



When using the asterisk (*) to reference the current pointer position, you can qualify itwith a positive or negative value, as in:

*-5 References the line that is five lines after the current pointer position.

*+5 References the line that is five lines before the current pointer position.

For additional information, see the CA-Roscoe Command Reference Guide. Whenapplicable, the command descriptions include the position of the pointer after thecommand is executed.

13.8.2 Positioning to Specific Lines

This section describes how you can position the display to a specific line. Also seeChapter 20, “AWS: Locating Data Within an AWS” on page 20-1 for informationabout positioning the display to begin with a line that contains a specific characterstring.

13.8.2.1 Using Primary Commands

If the AWS that you are viewing exceeds the number of lines in your terminal screen,you can reposition the display by:

■ Pressing any of the scrolling PF keys.

■ Using the POINT command with the LINE operand. For example, to repositionthe display to begin with line 2500, you would enter:

POINT AWS LINE 25==

To position to the first or last line of the display, you would enter:

POINT AWS LINE T or POINT AWS LINE B

When browsing the STATUS AWS display, entering an * (asterisk) in the firstunprotected field for a specific entry repositions the display to begin with thatentry.



13.8.2.2 Using Line Commands

The line commands shown in the following figure can be used to reposition thedisplayed data. Simply enter the appropriate line command in the sequence numberfield of the display.

COMMAND ACTION AFTER COMMAND EXECUTED

v Display begins with line v (display begins with line 500 if that value istyped in the sequence number field of any line).

* Display begins with the line that contained the *. Can be qualifiedwith:

+v Display begins v number of lines after the line that contained thecommand.

-v Display begins v number of lines before the line that containedthe command.

+P [v] Display scrolled forward one or v number of pages, where a page equalsthe number of lines in the Execution Area.

-P [v] Display scrolled backward one or v number of pages.

T+ Display begins with the first line of the active AWS. Can be qualifiedwith:

v Display begins v number of lines after the first line of the activeAWS.

B- Display contains the last line of the active AWS. Can be qualified with:

v Display begins v number of lines before the last line of theactive AWS.


13.9 Reattaching the Current AWS

13.9 Reattaching the Current AWS

At any time during your terminal session, you can attach another AWS, a data setobject, job output, or a library member/selection list. After browsing that data, you canreturn to the AWS. For example, the following screens show how you can ATTACH alibrary member, displays it so you can browse it, and from there you can reATTACHthe data you have been viewing.

7 8 ATTACH INVLIST

>

> AWS(XYZ.SAMPLE) SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72 LINE ==1

> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+..

...... ============================== T O P ========================

=====1 IDENTIFICATION DIVISION.

=====2 PROGRAM-ID. SAMPLE.

=====3 ENVIRONMENT DIVISION.

7 8

ATTACH AWS )

>

> LIB(XYZ.INVREPT) SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72

> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+..

============================== T O P ========================


===2== PROGRAM-ID. INVREPT.


7 8 >

> AWS(XYZ.SAMPLE) SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72 LINE ==1

> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+..

============================== T O P ========================


=====2 PROGRAM-ID. SAMPLE.


When you reATTACH the AWS, the display begins with the first line of the priordisplay. To reattach at a different location within the same data, you can:

■ Use the AWS operand with the FIRST, NEXT, LAST and PREV commands tobegin the display with the line containing a specific string, as in:

FIRST AWS /DD/

■ Use the AWS operand with the INCL or EXCL command to begin the displaywith a list of lines containing (or not containing) a specific string, as in:

INCL AWS /DD/

■ Use the AWS operand of the POINT command to begin the display with aspecific line, as in:

POINT AWS LINE 72==


13.10 Selecting an AWS

13.10 Selecting an AWS

You can use the SELECT command to activate and display an existing AWS. TheAWS can be activated by:

■ Name. For example, to activate the AWS named SAMPLE, you would enter:

SELECT SAMPLE

Note: If the AWS was created with an EXPLICIT attribute, you can onlyactivate it by explicitly specifying its name with the SELECT command.

■ Relative position, if it was created with the IMPLICIT attribute. For example, todisplay the next or prior AWS, enter:

SELECT AWS NEXT

or

SELECT AWS PREV

To bounce the display between the currently active AWS and the the previouslyactive AWS, enter:

SELECT AWS FLIP

Additional operands of the SELECT command allow you to:

■ Discard the AWS you are currently viewing when you activate a different AWS,as in:

SELECT AWS SAMPLE DISCARD

where the AWS you are currently viewing is discarded, and the AWS namedSAMPLE is activated.

■ Retain the attributes associated with the current AWS when you activate adifferent AWS, as in:

SELECT AWS SAMPLE NOATTR

where the AWS named SAMPLE is activated and its attributes are overridden bythe attributes of the AWS that had been current.

■ Designate which internal pointer is to be used when an AWS is activated. Onepointer is used by the SELECT command; the other pointer marks a line affectedby the execution of a command. By default, the SELECT-related pointer is used.To override this pointer, you would enter:

SELECT SAMPLE NOPOINT

where the resulting display begins with the line at which the command-relatedpointer is positioned.


Chapter 14. AWS: Changing Data Within an AWS


■ Add a character string to one or more lines using the FILL, PREFIX, and SUFFIXprimary commands.

■ Reorder specific records of an AWS.

■ Edit one or more characters within one or more lines using the XLATE primarycommand or the XL, XLB, or XLT line commands.

■ Edit character strings within one or more lines using the EDIT primary commandor an E, EB, EE, or ET line command. (You can also trace lines affected by anedit operation.)

Note: At most sites, data that you add or change in an AWS is automaticallytranslated to its corresponding uppercase characters (the word division istranslated to DIVISION). You can control how the data that you change is tobe treated. See Chapter 3, “Controlling Character Recognition” for additionalinformation.

Chapter 14. AWS: Changing Data Within an AWS 14-1

14.1 Adding Character Strings

14.1 Adding Character Strings

You can add a character string at the beginning (using the PREFIX command),anywhere within (using the FILL command) or at the end (using the SUFFIXcommand) of one or more lines within the active AWS.

14.1.1 Inserting a String Within a Line

The FILL command can be used to insert a character string into specific columns ofone or more lines comprising the active AWS.

To limit the operation to specific columns, include the appropriate column numbersbefore the string, as in:

FILL 73 79 'INVLIST'

where columns 73 through 79 of every line in the active AWS will contain the stringINVLIST. If column numbers are omitted, the column boundaries currently in effectare used. Thus, if the current column boundaries are 1 through 80 and you enter:

FILL 'QQQ'

columns 1 through 80 of every line in the active AWS will contain ***. (If the columnrange is greater than the string, the string is repeated.)

Note: Column boundaries specified with the command effect only the execution ofthe command. See Chapter 4, “Defining Column Boundaries” for additionalinformation.

To limit the operation to specific lines, specify the appropriate line numbers after thestring, as in:

FILL 73 79 'INVLIST' 1== 12==

14.1.2 Prefixing or Suffixing a Line

When using the PREFIX or SUFFIX command, the default is to prefix or suffix everyline within the active AWS with the designated string, as in:

PREFIX 'TESTONLY'

Both PREFIX and SUFFIX allow you to limit their operation to a specific range oflines by including the appropriate line numbers after the string, as in:

SUFFIX 'SAMPLE' 3== 9==

Neither operation is performed if the result would cause a line to exceed 255characters.


14.2 Reordering AWS Records

14.2 Reordering AWS Records

This section describes how you can use the ORDER (AWS) command to reorder thecontents of an AWS.

Use the ORDER command to invoke the CA-Roscoe internal sort routine. Reorderspecific records of the AWS in descending order, as in:

ORDER AWS COL 1 7 DES

If more than one AWS is active, specify the name of the AWS to be reordered, as in:

ORDER AWS TMP2 COL 1 7 DES

You can reorder multiple groups of AWS records. Specify the columns to bereordered, and the sorting order (ASCending or DEScending). If no order is specified,the data will be sorted in ASCending order. You must use the word 'AND' (or itscharacter equivalent) to separate the sorting boundaries, as in:

ORDER AWS COL 1 7 DES AND COL 17 24

Note: The word 'AND' can also be represented by the '&' (ampersand) or '@' (the atsign).

If sites or users set the '&' as a command delimiter, it will override the sortsyntax and function as a delimiter. To use '&' within the ORDER command,the command delimiter must be set to another character. See 6.5, “Synopsis ofSession Attributes” on page 6-15 for information on changing the commanddelimiter.

A maximum of six order criteria are permitted. When sorting multiple column groups,the sort is done in order of the columns specified. So, in the example above, columns1 through 7 are reordered, and then columns 17 through 24 are sorted with respect tothe first sort.


14.3 Editing Characters


This section describes how you can use primary or line commands to change one ormore characters.

Note: If you want to change a string of characters, see 14.4, “Editing CharacterStrings” on page 14-6.

14.3.1 Using a Primary Command

Use the XLATE command to replace one character with another, as in:

XLATE /A/B/

where every occurrence of the character A is replaced with the character B. Multiplecharacters can be specified as search and replacement characters, as in:

XLATE /A1Q/B9 /

where every occurrence of the character A is replaced with a B, every 1 is replacedwith a 9, and every * is replaced with a space.

Note: The search and replacement characters must be delimited by a special characterthat is not one of the search or replace characters.

You can limit an operation to specific columns and/or lines. Specify the columns tobe searched before the character(s). Specify the line numbers to be searched after thecharacter(s), as in:

XLATE 2= 75 /-/ / 1== 92==

where only the data within columns 20 through 75 of lines 100 through 9200 are to beaffected.

Note: Column boundaries specified with the command effect only the execution ofthat command. See Chapter 4, “Defining Column Boundaries” for additionalinformation.



14.3.2 Using Line Commands

The line commands used to perform character replacement are:

XLB Replaces the search character(s) with the replacement character(s) onevery line beginning with the line on which it is entered and continuingthrough the last line in the active AWS.

XLT Replaces the search character(s) with the replacement character(s) onevery line beginning with the first line of the active AWS andcontinuing through the line on which the command is entered.

XL [v] Replaces the search character(s) with the replacement character(s)beginning with the line on which it is entered and continuing for vnumber of lines. If no number is specified, only the line containing thecommand is changed.

Enter the appropriate command in the sequence number field. Then enter the searchand replacement character(s) in the data portion of the same line. As illustrated in thefollowing screen, the strings must be delimited.

7 8

>

> AWS(AAA.DATEFILE) SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72

> <..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....

==61== ORDER NO. DATE REQUESTED DATE DELIVERED

XLB2== '/'- ' ==63== A12984-XX =9/14/91 12/15/91

==64== A23563-XX =1/=4/92 =2/=1/92

==65== A45887-XX =6/2=/92 =9/19/92

The following screen shows the result of the edit.

7 8

>


> <..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....

==61== ORDER NO. DATE REQUESTED DATE DELIVERED

==62==

==63== A12984-XX =9-14-91 12-15-91

==64== A23563-XX =1-=4-92 =2-=1-92

==65== A45887-XX =6-2=-92 =9-19-92

Once search and replacement characters are specified, they are remembered until youchange them. This allows you to selectively change specific occurrences of acharacter.


14.4 Editing Character Strings


You can change a character string within the active AWS using primary or linecommands.

Note: If you want to change one or more single characters, see section 14.3, “EditingCharacters” on page 14-4.


Use the EDIT command to replace one character string with another string. The firststring specified with the command is the original (or search) string. The second stringis the replacement string. For example, to replace every occurrence of the stringINVENTORY-BALANCE with the string INVENTORY-AMOUNT, you wouldenter:

EDIT /INVENTORY-BALANCE/INVENTORY-AMOUNT/

The character strings must be delimited by a special character not found within eitherof the strings.

You can limit an edit operation to specific columns and/or lines. Specify the columnsto be searched before the character strings. Specify the line numbers to be searchedafter the strings. For example:

EDIT 2= 75 /INVENTORY-BALANCE/INVENTORY-AMOUNT/ 1== 92==

causes the command to affect only the data within columns 20 through 75 of lines 100through 9200.

Note: Column boundaries specified with the command affect only the execution ofthat command. See Chapter 4, “Defining Column Boundaries” for additionalinformation.

By default, the search is for any string of characters that match the edit string. Toavoid possible confusion, you can qualify the string with the keyword WORD,BEGIN, PREFIX, EMBED, SUFFIX, or END. (See Chapter 20, “AWS: LocatingData Within an AWS” for additional information about these qualifiers.) For example,if you enter:

EDIT /THE/AN/ WORD

the search is for every occurrence of THE that is preceded and followed by anon-alphanumeric character. If you omitted the qualifier, words such as OTHER andTHERE would match the search string and would be changed.



In addition to replacing a character string, you can also use EDIT to:

■ Delete a character string from one or more lines.

By defining a null replacement string, every occurrence of the search string willbe deleted. For example, to delete every occurrence of the stringINVENTORY-BALANCE from the active AWS, you would specify:

EDIT /INVENTORY-BALANCE//

Lines containing the string are not deleted; only the string is deleted from thoselines.

■ Replace the entire contents of one or more lines.

Defining a null search string, the contents of every line will be overlaid with thereplacement string. For example, to replace the current contents of lines 1800through 2000 with the string FILLER, you would enter:

EDIT //FILLER/ 18== 2===


The edit line commands are:

EB Replaces the search string with the replacement string on every linebeginning with the line on which it is entered and continuing through the lastline in the active AWS.

ET Replaces the search string with the replacement string on every linebeginning with the first line of the active AWS and continuing through theline on which the command is entered.

EE Replaces the search string with the replacement string on every line withinthe block of lines. (An EE must appear in the sequence number field of thefirst and last line of the range.)

E [v] Replaces the search string with the replacement string beginning with the lineon which the string is entered and continuing for v number of lines. If nonumber is specified, only the line containing the command is changed.

Enter the appropriate command in the sequence number field. Then enter the searchand replacement character strings in the data portion of the same line. The stringsmust be delimited.



7 8

>


> <..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+6....+....

...... ============================= T O P =======================

EB 1== /PART-NUMBER-MSTR/PART-NUMBER-OUT/_ ===2== PROGRAM-ID. INVLIST.


Once edit strings are specified, they are remembered until you change them byentering another edit line command. This allows you to selectively change specificoccurrences of a string. For example, assume you only want to change certainoccurrences of the string THIS to THAT. Once you have specified the string, you canscroll through the active AWS, entering the appropriate edit line command whereneeded.

14.4.3 Tracking Edited Lines

You can keep track of lines changed by an edit operation using the SET EDITCHNGcommand or the modifiable STATUS SESSION display.

Using the primary command to illustrate, you can activate the tracking facility byentering:

SET EDITCHNG ON

When the facility is active, any subsequent EDIT primary command or E, EB, or ETline command causes a change indicator to appear in the sequence number field ofaffected lines. The indicator remains in the sequence number field until you:

■ Replace the contents of the active AWS,

■ Issue the RESET line command or SET EDITCHNG RESET command, or

■ Enter the SET EDITCHNG OFF command, or deactivate the facility via theSTATUS SESSION display.

The following examples illustrate how you might use this facility. Notice that thesearch string is qualified as a prefix; thus line 6700 is not affected.



7 8SET EDITCHNG ONEDIT /IN-/INPUT-/ PREFIX >


> <..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+6....+....

==61== WORKING-STORAGE SECTION.

==62== =1 HOLDING-AREA.

==63== =2 IN-NAME PIC X(6) 'ROSCOE'.

==64== =2 IN-ADDR PIC X(9) 'PRINCETON'.

==65== =2 IN-STATE PIC X(2) VALUE 'NJ'.

==66== =1 WORK-AREA.

==67== =2 DATE-IN-PROCESS PIC X(8) 'XX/XX/XX'.

7 8

>


> <..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+6....+....7...

==61== WORKING-STORAGE SECTION.

==62== =1 HOLDING-AREA.

==CHG> =2 INPUT-NAME PIC X(6) 'ROSCOE'.

==CHG> =2 INPUT-ADDR PIC X(9) 'PRINCETON'.

==CHG> =2 INPUT-STATE PIC X(2) VALUE 'NJ'.

==66== =1 WORK-AREA.

==67== =2 DATE-IN-PROCESS PIC X(8) 'XX/XX/XX'.

The change indicators placed in the sequence number field are modifiable. This meansyou can overtype any indicator with a line command. After the command is executed,the indicator is redisplayed.

If you want to track another edit operation, you can remove the change indicators byissuing the RESET line command or:

SET EDITCHNG RESET

To deactivate the facility, either modify the STATUS SESSION display, or issue thecommand:

SET EDITCHNG OFF



When the facility is deactivated, the change indicators remain displayed. To removethese indicators, either:

■ Deactivate the facility by issuing:

SET EDITCHNG OFF RESET or

■ Issue the RESET line command after the facility is deactivated.

If you want to see a non-modifiable display of lines affected by the execution of theEDIT primary command, specify the TRACE command prior to EDIT, as in:

TRACE

EDIT 'FILLER'FILLER'

NOTRACE

TRACE causes all affected lines to be displayed. While this facility is active, eachtime you execute the EDIT command, a list of affected lines is displayed. TheNOTRACE command deactivates this facility.


Chapter 15. AWS: Copying Data Within and Into anAWS

This chapter describes how you can copy data:

■ From one location to another within the active AWS using the COPY primarycommand, copy line commands, or repeat line commands.

■ Into an AWS from another AWS, a screen display, library member, attached dataset object or attached job output file using the COPY, COPYS and COPYXprimary commands.

■ From one split screen to the active AWS in the other split screen using theXCOPY, XCOPYS and XCOPYX primary commands. All copy operations arenondestructive (the lines being copied are not deleted from their original location).

Chapter 15. AWS: Copying Data Within and Into an AWS 15-1

15.1 Copying Data Within the Active AWS


This section explains how you can use primary or line commands to copy data fromone location to another within the active AWS.


When copying data, you must identify the line(s) to be copied and the destination ofthe operation. The destination can be specified as:

v Number of the line at, or after, which the data are to be placed.* After the line at which the AWS pointer is currently positioned.T Before the first line of the active AWS.B or ,, After the last line of the active AWS.



15.1.1.1 To copy a single line:

Enter the COPY command followed by the number of the line to be copied and thedestination line number, as in:

COPY 295= 36==

In this example, the contents of line 2950 is to be copied at or after line 3600. (If thedestination line number exists, the data are inserted after it. If the line number doesnot exist, the data are placed at that line number.)

15.1.1.2 To copy a range of lines:

Enter the COPY command with the number of the first and last line to be copied plusthe destination. For example, to copy lines 2500 through 2700 to the top of the activeAWS, you would enter:

COPY 25== 27== T

15.1.1.3 To duplicate the copied lines at the destination:

Use the Nv operand to duplicate lines, where v is the number of times the data are tobe repeated. For example, to copy lines 700 through 900 at, or after, line 2500 andhave those lines repeated three times, you would enter:

COPY 7== 9== 25== N3


You can use the:

■ Copy line commands to duplicate one or more lines to another location within theactive AWS.

■ Repeat line commands to repeat one or more lines immediately after themselves.

15.1.2.1 Copy Line Commands

As with the primary commands, you must indicate the line(s) to be copied and thedestination of that operation. (The destination line commands are shown in thefollowing table.)

■ To copy a single line:

Type C in the sequence number field of the line to be copied. (Also include adestination line command in the sequence number field of the appropriate line.)



■ To copy a block of lines:

Type CC in the sequence number field of the first and last lines to be copied.(Also include a destination line command in the appropriate sequence numberfield.)

Note: The lines involved in the operation need not appear on the same screen.You can scroll the display forward or backward while the command ispending (waiting for a matching copy or destination line command).

■ To copy a range of lines:

In addition to the appropriate destination line command, type one of the followingline commands in the appropriate sequence number field:

Cv To copy v number of lines (for example, entering C5 causes the linecontaining the command plus the next four lines to be copied).

CB To copy all lines from the line containing the command through the lastline of the active AWS.

CT To copy all lines from the first line in the active AWS through the linecontaining the command.

■ To copy repeatedly:

Type CR (for a single line copy) or CCR (on the first and last lines, for a blockcopy) in the appropriate sequence number field. Then, type a destination linecommand on the appropriate target sequence number field. The destination linecommand that you use will either cause the CR or CCR command(s) to remaindisplayed, allowing you to copy the same line(s) to multiple locations, or removethe commands. (You can also use the RESET line command to remove a pendingCR or CCR command.) The following table shows all of the destination linecommands for Copy.

Command Type Meaning

A [v] Destination Only After this line, insert one or v number ofcopies.

B [v] Before this line, insert one or v numberof copies.

BB [v] After the last line in the active AWSinsert one or v number of copies.

TT [v] Before the first line in the active AWS,insert one or v number of copies.

O [v] Overlay AtDestination

Overlay one or v number of lines withcopied data.

OD [v] Overlay one or v number of lines withcopied data and remove pending CR orCCR line command.




OO Overlay block of lines, where OO isentered on the first and last line of theblock of lines to be overlaid.

OB Overlay all lines from the line containingthe command through the end of theactive AWS with the copied data.

OT Overlay all lines from the first AWS linethrough the line containing the commandwith the copied data.

AD [v] Destination AndRemove Pending CR

After this line, insert one or v number ofcopies.

BD [v] CCR Line Command Before this line, insert one or v numberof copies.

BBD [v] After the last line in the active AWS,insert one or v number of copies.

TTD [v] Before the first line in the active AWS,insert one or v number of copies.



15.1.2.2 Using Overlay Destination Line Commands

The following example illustrates how you can use overlay destination line commands.Only the blank characters in the target lines are overlaid with corresponding data fromthe source lines.

AWS: Copy Line Commands Using Overlay

7 8 >


> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+

C =8== SAMPLE PIC X( ).

O2 9== PART-DESCRIPTION-IN

==1=== INVENTORY-BALANCE-IN

7 8 >


> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+

===8== SAMPLE PIC X( ).

===9== PART-DESCRIPTION-IN PIC X( ).

==1=== INVENTORY-BALANCE-IN PIC X( ).

The number of lines to be overlaid must be equal to or greater than the number oflines being copied. For example, the upper screen in the previous example shows thatone line is to be copied (800) and that two lines are to be overlaid with that data (900and 1000). The lower screen shows the result, where PIC X( ) has overlaid thecorresponding blank positions in the designated lines. (SAMPLE has been ignoredsince its corresponding positions contain data.)



15.1.2.3 Repeat Line Commands

To copy one line immediately after itself, enter the R line command in the appropriatesequence number field. To repeat one line multiple times, use Rv where v is thenumber of times the line is to be repeated. To repeat a block of lines, enter the RRline command in the sequence number field of the first and last line to be repeated.

The following example illustrates the result of entering R4 on line 3200. (Notice thatthe sequence numbers of the repeated lines are incremented by 1, so as to haveminimal impact on preexisting sequence numbers.)

AWS: Repeat Line Command Example

7 8 >


> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+

==3=== PART-DESCRIPTION-IN PIC X(26).

==31== INVENTORY-BALANCE-IN PIC S9(5).

R4 2== FILLER PIC X(3=).

==33== FD INVENTORY-REPORT

7 8 >


> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+

==3=== PART-DESCRIPTION-IN PIC X(26).

==31== INVENTORY-BALANCE-IN PIC S9(5).

==32== FILLER PIC X(3=).

==32=1 FILLER PIC X(3=).






15.2 Copying Data to an AWS


You can use the COPY, COPYS and COPYX commands to bring data from thecurrent screen display, another AWS, a library member, an attached data set object oran attached job output file into an AWS. When using these commands, you mustdesignate the source of the data being copied and its destination within the activeAWS. Optionally, you can direct the data to an AWS other than the currently activeone.

��─ ──┬ ┬─COPY── ─source ...──AWS-destination─ ──┬ ┬───────── ────────��├ ┤─COPYS─ └ ┘──TP name

└ ┘─COPYX─

The source operands that identify the data to be copied are:

AWS name From the designated existing AWS.

DSN From the attached data set object. (Also see Chapter 27, “Data Sets:Performing Data Management Tasks” for information about otherways you can copy a data set object into the active AWS.)

JOB From the attached job output file.

LIB From the attached library member or Selection List. (Also seeChapter 34, “Library: Performing Library Management Tasks” forinformation about other ways you can copy library data into theactive AWS.)

mem Name of the library member to be copied.

SCREEN From the current screen display.

The destination of the copy operation within the active AWS or designated AWS mustbe specified as:

v Number of the line at, or after, which the data are to be inserted in theAWS.

* After the line at which the AWS pointer is currently positioned.

T Before the first line of the AWS.

B or ,, After the last line of the AWS.

R Replace the contents of the AWS.



By default, the commands COPY, COPYS and COPYX bring data into the activeAWS. You can designate a different existing AWS by using the TO name operand.Thus,

COPY DSN T

copies the currently attached data set object to the currently active AWS, while:

COPY AWS SAMPLE1 B TO SAMPLE2

copies the entire contents of the AWS named SAMPLE1 to the bottom of the AWSnamed SAMPLE2.

15.2.1 Alternate Form of Screen Copy

Assuming the CA defaults are in effect, you can also copy the screen when an RPFprogram or another application (like ETSO or CA-eMAIL+) is in control of theterminal by entering:

:C

in any unprotected field and pressing PF12. (The cursor must immediately follow thecommand :C.)

If the CA defaults are not in effect, the STATUS SYSTEM display identifies the:

■ Escape character: The field RCSESCCH identifies the character to use. Thedefault is a colon (:).

■ PF key: The field RCSESCPF identifies the PF key to use. The default is PF12.

The screen is copied to the AWS identified by the SET COPYDEST command.

Note: An AWS destination must be in effect for this type of copy operation to worksuccessfully.



15.2.2 Copying All or a Range of Lines

You can use the COPY command to:

■ Copy all lines:

Enter the COPY command, the keyword indicating the source of the data and thedestination. For example, to copy the currently displayed screen after line 900 ofthe active AWS, enter:

COPY SCREEN 9==

If line 900 does not exist, the data are copied at that line number.

■ Copy a range of lines:

Enter COPY, the appropriate source keyword, the number of the first and last lineto be copied, and the destination, as in:

COPY DSN 12== 25== B TO SAMPLE

where lines 1200 through 2500 from the currently attached data set object are tobe copied to the bottom of the AWS named SAMPLE.

15.2.3 Copying Based on a Character String

You can use the command:

■ COPYS to copy line(s) from the source that contain a particular string into theactive or designated AWS, as in:

COPYS JOB /ADDRESS/ 12==

where every line from the attached job output file containing the string ADDRESSis copied to, or immediately after line 1200 in the active AWS. (A sourcekeyword, the appropriate string and a destination are required.)

■ COPYX to copy line(s) from the source that do not contain a particular string tothe active or a designated AWS, as in:

COPYX DSN /FILLER/ B TO TEST1

where every line from the attached data set object not containing the string FILLis copied to the bottom of the AWS named TEST1.



Both COPYS and COPYX allow you to specify a range of lines to be searched for astring. To do this, include the appropriate line numbers after the string. For example,to copy every line between 1 and 300 that contain the string NAME from the librarymember UPLIST into the active AWS at, or immediately after, line 1200, you wouldenter:

COPYS UPLIST /NAME/ 1 3== 12==

By default, the entire line of the source data are searched for the specified string.

You can limit the search operation to a specific range of columns. To limit the searchoperation when copying from:

■ A library member, attached data set object or attached job output file:

– Use the SET BOUNDS primary command or BOUNDS line command tochange the column boundaries associated with the source data. (SeeChapter 4, “Defining Column Boundaries” for additional information.

– Specify a column range with the command, using the values shown on theScale Line. For example, to copy every line containing the string FILLERwithin columns 10 through 50 of the attached job output file to the bottom ofthe active AWS, you would enter:

COPYS JOB 1= 5= /FILLER/ B

■ The displayed screen or a Selection List:

Assume that the left-most displayed position is column one and include theappropriate numbers, as in:

COPYX SCR 1 3= /QQQ/ R

where every line from the current screen not containing *** in the first thirtypositions of the line is copied to the active AWS and replaces its contents.


15.3 Copying Data Between Screens


When you are working with split screens, you can use the XCOPY, XCOPYS andXCOPYX commands to copy data from one split screen to the other. The data areplaced in the active AWS of the screen that contains the command. As with the othercopy operands, this is a nondestructive operation (the lines being copied are notdeleted from the source destination).

��─ ──┬ ┬─XCOPY── ──┬ ┬──────────── ─AWS-destination─────────────────�� ├ ┤─XCOPYS─ └ ┘─source ...─ └ ┘─XCOPYX─

The source operands allow you to designate the data that is to be copied. The operandsare:

DSN From the data set object attached in the other screen. (Also seeChapter 27, “Data Sets: Performing Data Management Tasks” forinformation about other ways you can copy a data set object into theactive AWS.)

JOB From the job output file attached in the other screen.

LIB From the library member or Selection List attached in the other screen.(See Chapter 34, “Library: Performing Library Management Tasks” forinformation about other ways you can copy library data into the activeAWS.)

mem Name of the library member to be copied.

If no source is specified, the default is the active AWS.

The destination of the copy operation within the active AWS can be specified as:

v Number of the line at, or after, which the data are to be inserted in theactive AWS.

* After the line at which the AWS pointer is currently positioned.

T Before the first line of the active AWS.

B or ,, After the last line of the active AWS.

R Replace the contents of the active AWS.



15.3.1 Copying All or a Range of Lines

You can copy all or part of the data from the other split screen into the AWS of thescreen containing the command.

■ To copy all lines:

Enter the XCOPY command, the optional keyword indicating the source of thedata, and the destination, as in:

XCOPY DSN 9==

where the entire contents of the data set object attached in the other split screen iscopied to, or immediately after, line 900 of the screen containing the command.


Enter XCOPY, the appropriate optional source keyword, the number of the firstand last line to be copied, and the destination, as in:

XCOPY 1== 12== B

Since no source keyword is specified in this example, lines 100 through 1200from the active AWS in the other split screen are copied after the last line of theactive AWS in the screen containing the command.

15.3.2 Copying Based on a Character String

You can use the command:

■ XCOPYS to copy lines containing a particular character string from the othersplit screen into the AWS of the screen containing the command.

■ XCOPYX to copy lines not containing a particular character string from the othersplit screen into the AWS of the screen containing the command.

You can use these commands to copy all or selected lines.

■ To copy all lines containing the string RECORD-NUMBER in the job output fileattached in the other screen to the top of the active AWS in the screen containingthe command:

XCOPYS JOB /RECORD-NUMBER/ T



■ To copy every line between 1 and 300 that contains the string NAME from thedata set object attached in the other split screen to, or immediately after, line 1200of the active AWS in the screen containing the command:

XCOPYS DSN /NAME/ 1 3== 12==

By default, the entire line in the source data are searched for the specified string.

When copying from:

■ A library member, attached data set object or attached job output file. You canlimit the search operation to specific columns by:

– Using the SET BOUNDS primary command or BOUNDS line command tochange the column boundaries associated with the source data. (SeeChapter 4, “Defining Column Boundaries” for additional information.

– Specifying a column range with the command, using the values shown on theScale Line, as in:

XCOPYS JOB 1= 5= /FILLER/ B

where every line containing the string FILLER in columns 10 through 50 ofthe job attached in the other screen is copied to the bottom of the active AWSin the screen containing the command.

■ The displayed screen or a Selection List: You can limit the search to a specificcolumn by assuming that the left-most displayed position is column one andinclude the appropriate numbers, as in:

XCOPYS SCR 1 3= /QQQ/ R

where every line from other screen containing *** in the first thirty positions ofthe line is copied to the active AWS of the screen containing the command andreplaces its contents.

Column numbers and line numbers can be specified together, as in:

XCOPYS JOB 1= 5= /FILLER/ 12== 25== R

where only columns 10 through 50 of lines 1200 through 2500 of the attached job aresearched for the string FILLER. All matching lines are copied to the active AWS,replacing its prior contents.


Chapter 16. AWS: Deleting Data From an AWS

This chapter describes how you can delete data from the active AWS using:

■ The DELETE primary command to delete one or more lines.

■ The DELETES and DELETEX primary commands to delete lines containing (ornot containing) a specific string.

■ The delete line commands.

■ 3270 hardware facilities (for example, ERASE EOF and DELETE keys).

Chapter 16. AWS: Deleting Data From an AWS 16-1

16.1 Using Primary Commands


You can use primary commands to delete one or more lines from the active or aspecific AWS. The deletion can be by line number(s) or by the presence or absence ofa specific character string.

16.1.1 Deleting by Line Number

You can use the DELETE command to delete all or part of the contents of an AWS:

■ To delete the entire contents of the active AWS, enter:

DELETE

■ To delete one line from a specific AWS, include the appropriate line number andthe AWS name, as in:

DELETE AWS SAMPLE 25==

where line 2500 is to be deleted from the AWS named SAMPLE.

■ To delete a range of lines, include the first and last line numbers in the range. Forexample, to delete lines 1600 through 3500 from the active AWS, enter:

DELETE 16== 35==

When deleting a range of lines, you can indicate the last line of the end of theAWS by specifying two consecutive commas (,,). For example, to delete everyline beginning with line 1600 through the end of the AWS named SAMPLE,enter:

DELETE AWS SAMPLE 16== ,,



16.1.2 Deleting by Presence/Absence of a String

Use the DELETES and DELETEX commands to delete lines from the active or aspecific AWS based on the occurrence of a specific character string. (Use the EDITprimary or line commands to delete a string without deleting the line.)

■ Use DELETES to delete lines that contain a particular string. For example, todelete all lines from the active AWS that contain the stringPART-NUMBER-OUT, you would enter:

DELETES 'PART-NUMBER-OUT'

■ Use DELETEX to perform the opposite function - to delete lines not containing aspecified string. For example, to delete all lines from the AWS named SAMPLEthat do not contain the string NEW-RECORD, you would enter:

DELETEX AWS SAMPLE 'NEW-RECORD'

By default, every line in the AWS is searched for the specified string. With bothDELETES and DELETEX, you can limit the number of lines searched. For example,to delete all lines from the active AWS containing the string XYZ within lines 1through 400, enter the line numbers after the string:

DELETES 'XYZ' 1 4==

Also by default, the area within the current (or default) column boundaries is searchedfor the string. To limit the columns involved, enter the number of the starting andending columns searched. For example, to delete only those lines that do not containINVENTORY-BALANCE in columns 1 through 50 of the active AWS, enter thecolumn numbers before the string:

DELETEX 1 5= 'INVENTORY-BALANCE'

You can combine the operands to limit the search to a specific column range withinspecific lines, as in:

DELETEX AWS SAMPLE 1 5== 'NEW RECORD' 1== 12==

where every line within the AWS named SAMPLE not containing NEW RECORD incolumns 1 through 500 of lines 100 through 1200 is deleted.


16.2 Using Line Commands


You can use line commands to delete:

■ A single line:

Enter a D in the sequence number field of each line to be deleted.

■ A block of lines:

Enter DD in the sequence number field of the first and last lines of the block.When deleting a block of lines, the entire range need not appear on one screen.The display can be scrolled forward and backward while a DD command ispending (while waiting for a matching DD command to be entered).

■ A range of lines:

In the sequence number field of the appropriate line, enter:

Dv To delete v number of lines (for example, D5 deletes the linecontaining the command and the next four lines).

DB To delete all lines from the line containing the command through thelast line of the active AWS.

DT To delete all lines from the first line through the line containing thecommand.

■ One or more lines based on the presence or absence of a string:

When using the commands shown in the following table, enter the command inthe sequence number field and the string in the data portion of the same line.Once the string has been specified, it is remembered for any subsequent delete linecommand.



LINECOMMAND

MEANING

DS [v] [/string/] Deletes line (or lines within v number of lines) containingstring.

DSB [/string/] Deletes all lines containing string from this line to end ofactive AWS.

DST [/string/] Deletes all lines containing string from first line throughthis line.

DU [/string/] Deletes all lines from this line until first line containingstring.

DX [v] [/string/] Deletes line (or lines within v number of lines) notcontaining string.

DXB [/string/] Deletes all lines not containing string from this line to endof active AWS.

DXT [/string/] Deletes all lines not containing string from first linethrough this line.


16.3 Using 3270 Hardware Facilities


CA-Roscoe supports the delete facilities available at 3270-type terminals as explainedin the following subsections.

16.3.1 Using the ERASE EOF Key

The current setting of the SET EOF and SET FILL commands determines the extent ofdeletion that is to occur when you use the ERASE EOF key to delete a line, wherewith:

SET EOF DELETE1 If SET FILL BLANK is in effect and the left displaymargin is column one, the entire line is deleted. If theleft display margin is other than column one, databeyond the right display margin is not deleted.

If SET FILL NULL is in effect, the cursor is in columnone and the left display margin is column one, the entireline is deleted. If the cursor is positioned to any othercolumn (regardless of the left display margin), databeyond the right display margin is not deleted.

SET EOF DELETE If SET FILL BLANK is in effect, the entire line isdeleted if all of the data within the current displaymargins is erased.

If SET FILL NULL is in effect, the entire line is deletedif the cursor is in the first displayed position (notnecessarily column one). If the cursor is placedanywhere else, the contents of the line is deleted fromthe cursor position to the end of the display.

SET EOF ERASE If the cursor is in the first displayed position of the line(not necessarily column one) when ERASE EOF ispressed, all of the displayed line is deleted (the lineitself remains). (Data to the right or left of the currentdisplay margins is not deleted.)

If the cursor is in any other position, the data from thecursor location to the right display margin is deleted.



16.3.2 Using the DELETE Key

The DELETE key deletes data one character at a time. To do so, position the cursor tothe first character to be deleted and press the DELETE key. The character is deletedand the displayed data are shifted one position to the left. Any data existing beyondthe right display margins is unaffected by this delete and shift operation.


Chapter 17. AWS: Displaying/Changing AWSInformation

To display information about the active AWS plus all of the AWSs that are currentlyin use, enter the command:

STATUS AWS

Portions of the resulting display are modifiable. To produce a non-modifiable display,include the LIST operand, as in:

STATUS AWS LIST

The following example illustrates the type of information displayed. Note that if thebottom marker (== END OF LIST ==) is not displayed, the number of AWSs exceedsthe screen size. Use PF keys to scroll the display.

STATUS AWS Command: Sample Display

7 8 >

> AWS() SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===79 A<ROS1>+

>....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....

ROSCOE AWS STATUS TOTAL SESSION\SPLIT RECOVERABLE

MAX: 6 CURR: 2 MAX: 2 CURR: 2 M

NAME STATUS ROS MEMBER CHG LINES INCR LAST CURRENT ACT

ASSOCIATED DATASET NAME VOLUME UNIT

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

ROS1 (NONE) CHG 24 1== 24== 24==

(NONE)

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

MYAWS ABC.MYMEM 1137 1== 1137 1

TEST.SOURCE(MYSOURCE) MUROS1 338=

======================= END OF LIST =======================

U V

Chapter 17. AWS: Displaying/Changing AWS Information 17-1

Use the modifiable display to perform one or more of the following functions bytyping the appropriate code in the first field of the display.

A Attach AWS.AT Alter AWS attributes. (Overtype the appropriate field(s) in the display with

the new attribute value(s).)D Delete contents of AWS.DS Discard AWS and delete its contents.S Select AWS. (The AWS is activated but not displayed.)R Rename AWS. (Type the new AWS name in the STATUS field.)X Terminate display.* Position Selection List to begin with the designated AWS.

When appropriate, the second shaded area (the STATUS field) will indicate the resultof the operation after it is performed.

The amount of available information exceeds the width of 80-character screens. Theinformation is, therefore, divided into alternate displays. You can change the display toview different information by entering:

SELECT ALT [v]

where v is the number of the display to be viewed next. If you omit the number, youwill proceed sequentially through the different displays. (The ALT field in thefollowing figures contains the number of the alternate display in which each fieldappears.) The first two lines in the Execution Area remain constant as you scroll thedisplay, and contain the fields:

TOTAL Made up of two fields of information:

1. CURRENT: Number of AWSs currently in effect for theuser session.

2. MAX: Number of AWSs that can be created for the usersession.

SESSION\SPLIT Made up of two fields of information:

1. CURRENT: Number of AWSs with the SESSION orSPLIT attributes that are active for the user session.

2. MAX: Number of AWSs that can be created with theSESSION or SPLIT attributes.

RECOVERABLE Made up of two fields of information:

1. CURRENT: Number of recoverable AWSs in effect.2. MAX: Number of recoverable AWSs that can be created.

Note: See 13.5, “Creating an AWS” on page 13-6 for more information.


The remaining fields are described in the following table. Note that the modifiablefields include information about how their values can be changed.

Field Name Description ALT

NAME Name of the AWS. ALL

ROS MEMBER Name of the last FETCHed, SAVEd orUPDATEd library member or (NONE).

1

CHG Changed data indicator shown if data in AWS isnew or does not match the member identifiedby last FETCH, COPY replace, SAVE orUPDATE.

1

LINES Number of lines in the AWS or 0 if the AWS isempty.

1

INCR Current line number increment or 100 if theAWS is empty.

Change: Use the RENUMBER command.

1

LAST Number of the last line in the AWS or blank ifthe AWS is empty.

1

CURRENT Number of the line at which the pointer ispositioned or blank if AWS is empty.

1

ACT Number of the split screen (1 or 2) in which theAWS is active. If blank, the AWS is availablefor use but not active.

ASSOCIATEDDATASETNAME

Fully-qualified name of the data set COPYed orIMPORTed into the AWS or (NONE).

1

VOLUME Serial number of the volume containing theCOPYed or IMPORTed data set or blank.

1

UNIT Unit name associated with the device on whichthe data set resides or blank.

1

L-BOUNDS-R Current or default left and right columnboundary settings used by any command thatlocates, edits, or shifts data.

Change: Use the AT function code andovertype the appropriate field with the newcolumn boundaries; use the modifiable STATUSDISPLAY screen, SET BOUNDS command orBOUNDS line command.

2



L-SET DIS-R Left and right display margins established bydefault, the last executed SET DISPLAYcommand or the last change made to either theSTATUS DISPLAY or this screen.

Change: Use the AT function code andovertype the appropriate field with the new leftor right display margin; use the SET DISPLAYcommand or the modifiable STATUS DISPLAYscreen.

2

L-CUR DIS-R Left and right display margins temporarily setby the: 1) last command that located dataoutside of the established display margins, or 2)value types in the COLS field.

2

NUMBR Current or default sequence number displaysetting.

Change: Use the AT function code andovertype the field with NUM, NUMX, NUM2or NONUM; use the SET DISPLAY commandor the modifiable STATUS DISPLAY screen.

2

DISP Current or default data display mode.

Change: Use the AT function code andovertype the field with CHAR or HEX; use theSET DISPLAY command or the modifiablescreen STATUS DISPLAY screen.

2

POSTN Current or default screen positioning to occur asa result of executing a FIRST, NEXT, LAST,PREV, INCL or EXCL primary command.

Change: Use the AT function code andovertype the field with CJUST, JUST, CENT orLOCK; use the SET SEARCH command or themodifiable STATUS DISPLAY screen.

2

FILL Current or default trailing character to be usedin the AWS.

Change: Use the AT function code andovertype the field with BLANK or NULL; usethe SET FILL command.

2



MODE Current or default character translation mode.

Change: Use the AT function code andovertype field with BASIC, XTENDED orstandard; use SET MODE command ormodifiable STATUS DISPLAY screen.

2

TABSETTINGS

Current or default tab character followed by thetab positions currently in effect.

Change: Use the AT function code andovertype the:

1. First field with the special character to beused as the tab character; use TABcommand.

2. Remaining fields with one to eight columnnumbers; use TAB command.

2

CHARACTERSET

Language character set code representing thedata that you can enter and display at theterminal.

Change: Use the AT function code andovertype the field with a language code definedat your site; use SET CHARSET command ormodifiable STATUS SESSION screen.

3

RECOVERY Current or default setting indicating whether thecontents of this AWS is to be recovered in theevent of a session or system termination.

Change: Use the AT function code andovertype the field with REC or NREC; useALTER AWS command.

3

DISCARD Current or default setting indicating when thisAWS is to be discarded.

Change: Use the AT function code andovertype the field with SESSION, SPLIT, RPFor LEVEL; use ALTER AWS command.

3

SELECT Current or default setting indicating how thisAWS can be referenced by the SELECTcommand.

Change: Use the AT function code andovertype the field with IMPLICIT orEXPLICIT; use ALTER AWS command.

3



EOF Current or default extent of deletion that is tooccur when the ERASE EOF key is pressed.

Change: Use the AT function code andovertype the field with ERASE, DELETE orDELETE1; use SET EOF command.

3

DSPLY Current or default data protection andhighlighting attribute.

Change: Use the AT function code andovertype the field with U, UH, S or SH; useSET AWSDSPLY.

3

SEQUENCE Current or default AWS sequence numberattribute.

Change: Use the AT function code andovertype the field with NOSEQ, COBOL or twonumeric values where the first is starting valueand the second is the length of the field (forexample, 73 8); use SEQ or NOSEQ command.(This attribute is also changed by the executionof a CHAIN, FETCH, MERGE or SAVEcommand.)

3


Chapter 18. AWS: Entering and Formatting Data inan AWS

This chapter describes the different facilities that you can use to enter data into theactive AWS. It also describes how you can manually or automatically format the datawhile entering it.

Chapter 18. AWS: Entering and Formatting Data in an AWS 18-1

18.1 Entering Data

18.1 Entering Data

This section describes how you can:

■ Use primary and line commands to enter data into the active AWS.■ Define and use a mask to insert data into the active AWS.■ Use a PF key to open the AWS for data entry.■ Add, delete or replace data from the Command Area.

Note: At most sites, data that you enter into the active AWS is automaticallytranslated to its corresponding uppercase characters (for example, if you enterdivision, it is translated to DIVISION). You can control how the data that youenter is to be recognized and treated. See Chapter 3, “Controlling CharacterRecognition” for additional information.

18.1.1 Using Primary Commands

This section describes how you can enter data into an AWS that is either empty orcontains one or more lines by using:

■ INPUT - To open the Execution Area.■ INPUT TEXTENTR - To open the Execution Area for power typing.


18.1 Entering Data

18.1.1.1 Opening the Execution Area

To add data to an empty active AWS, enter the command:

INPUT

As illustrated in the following example, the screen is opened to accept input, thecurrent (or default) increment is used for line number sequencing and the cursor isplaced at the to first line of the Execution Area, ready for data entry.

AWS: INPUT Command Adding Data to Empty AWS

7 8 >


> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....

...... ============================= T O P =================

===1== _

===2==

===3==

===4==

===5==

===6==

===7==

===8==

===9==

==1===

==11==

==12==

==13==

==14==

==15==

========================== B O T T O M ==============

U V

If you fill all lines in the Execution Area and still have more data to enter, press theENTER key. The data you have entered is recorded in the active AWS and a newscreen is displayed. The first line in the Execution Area of the new screen will containthe last line of data that you entered.

To indicate that you have completed data entry, either:

1. Press the ENTER key or any PF key having a scroll function, or2. Move the cursor to the Command Area and enter a command.

Either of these actions causes the screen to close. Any data that had not been recordedin the active AWS is now recorded, all unused lines are deleted from the ExecutionArea, and the beginning and end of the data in that AWS is noted with TOP andBOTTOM markers.


18.1 Entering Data

You can also use the INPUT command to:

■ Insert data between existing lines.

Enter INPUT and the number of the line after which data are to be inserted, as in:

INPUT 38==

The following example illustrates the resulting screen. Notice that line 3800 is thefirst line in the Execution Area. The next existing line, 3900, is displayed as thelast line and is unnumbered to allow for multiple screens of data entry. Theintervening lines are available for data entry. To avoid renumbering the existingcontents, these inserted lines are incremented by one.

If the designated line number (for example, 3800) does not exist, the insertionbegins at that line number. The first AWS line with a number less than thespecified line number is shown as the top line in the Execution Area.

AWS: INPUT Command Inserting Data Between Two Lines

7 8 >


> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....


==38=1 _

==38=2

==38=3

==38=4

...... =5 FILLER PIC X(3=).


18.1 Entering Data

■ Insert data before the first line of the active AWS.

Enter the command as:

INPUT T

The resulting display contains the Execution Area opened for data entry. (Theinserted lines are numbered from 1 and incremented by 1.) The first line of thisAWS is shown as the last line of the Execution Area.

■ Add data to the end of the active AWS.

Enter the command as:

INPUT

or

INPUT B

The resulting display shows the last line of this AWS as the first line in theExecution Area which is opened to accept input.

The current line number increment is used for sequence numbering. If the nextgenerated sequence number will exceed 999999, CA-Roscoe stops accepting input.While this condition rarely occurs, issuing the RENUMBER command with a lowerstarting sequence number and increment value usually resolves the problem.

In all cases, the cursor is automatically positioned to the first line in the ExecutionArea, ready for data entry.

If you fill the Execution Area, press the ENTER key to continue entering data. Theentered data are recorded in the active AWS and a new screen is displayed. The firstline in the Execution Area of the new screen contains the last line of data that youentered. (If the data you inserted generates sequence numbers that overflow intoexisting AWS sequence numbers, the contents is renumbered by 1 until the overflowcondition is rectified.)

To terminate data entry, you can: 1) press the ENTER key, or 2) move the cursor tothe Command Area and enter a command.

Either of these actions causes the screen to close. All unused lines are deleted fromthe Execution Area, any data that has not been recorded in the active AWS is thenrecorded, and the beginning and end of the data in this AWS is noted with TOP andBOTTOM markers.


18.1 Entering Data

18.1.1.2 Using Power Typing Techniques

When you use the TEXTENTR operand of the INPUT command, the format of theExecution Area is different than when this operand is not used.

With INPUT TEXTENTR:

■ The sequence number field is protected and invisible and the right margin isignored. This allows you to enter data in a wrap mode. This means that if youreach the right margin while entering data, the cursor automatically skips over theinvisible sequence number field, allowing continuous data entry. (WithoutTEXTENTR, the right margin marks the end of a word. If you reach the marginin the middle of a word, the cursor is positioned to the next line. The charactersappearing at the end of the previous line are treated as one word. The charactersat the beginning of the new line are treated as another word.)

■ The current column boundaries are recognized when the data are formatted afteryou press the ENTER key. As illustrated in the following example, this allowsyou to establish a left and right margin for your data and then use the entirescreen to enter that data.

Any formatting that you do when entering the data are also remembered. Forexample, to begin a new paragraph, move the cursor to the next line and enter oneor more spaces, then move the cursor to the next line and resume typing. Theblank line separating the paragraphs is remembered when your data are formatted.


18.1 Entering Data

AWS: INPUT With TEXTENTR Operand

7 8SET BOUNDS 1! 5! & INPUT TEXTENTR

>


> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+

...... ========================== T O P ================

===1== THIS IS A SAMPLE.

...... ======================= B O T T O M =============

7 8 >


> ...<....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....>....+


_

7 8 >


> ...<....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....>....+


This sample shows how you can enter data in a wra

p mode and have it formatted for you when you dep

7 8 >


> ...<....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....>....+

...... ========================== T O P ================


===2== This sample shows how you can enter data

===2=1 in a wrap mode and have it formatted for


18.1 Entering Data


You can use line commands:

I or IB To insert one or more empty lines in the active AWS for data entry.TE To allow for power typing techniques.

18.1.2.1 Opening the Execution Area

You can use the I and IB line commands to insert one or more empty lines in theactive AWS. Use:

I To insert one or more lines after the line containing the command.IB To insert one or more lines before the line containing the command.

To insert one line, enter I or IB in the appropriate sequence number field.

To insert multiple lines, enter Iv or IBv in the appropriate sequence number field,where v is the number of lines to be inserted. You can request any number of blanklines to be inserted. If you request more than can be displayed, the resulting screencontains the maximum number of displayable lines.

The following example illustrates how you would insert one line after line 1900 andthree lines before line 2300.

Inserting Lines Using I and IB Line Commands

7 8 >


> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+

I=19== =5 FILLER PIC X(7).

==2=== =5 PART-DESCRIPTION-IN PIC X(26).

==21== =5 INVENTORY-BALANCE-IN PIC S9(5).

==22== =5 FILLER PIC X(3=).

IB33== PROCEDURE DIVISION.

7 8 >


> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+

==19== =5 FILLER PIC X(7).

...... _



==22== =5 FILLER PIC X(3=).

......

......

......

==23== PROCEDURE DIVISION

When you press the ENTER key after entering your data, the Execution Area isexamined. If there are any unused lines, they are removed. Lines containing data areretained and assigned line numbers incremented by one.


18.1 Entering Data

18.1.2.2 Using SET AUTOINSERT

You can use the SET AUTOINSERT command to activate an automatic line insertionfacility. When this facility is active, one or more data entry lines are inserted after youhave used all of the lines provided by an I or IB line command. (If the facility is notactive, the insert operation terminates.) The following examples show how to activatethe facility with a default line insertion value of 1. Once activated, new lines areprovided as long as you continue to enter data.

AWS: Automatic Data Entry Line Insertion

7 8SET AUTOINSERT ON_

>


> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+

I=19== =5 FILLER PIC X(7).



7 8 >


> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+

==19== =5 FILLER PIC X(7).

...... _


7 8 >


> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+

==19== =5 FILLER PIC X(7).

==19=1 =5 filler pic X(1=)._


7 8 >


> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+

==19== =5 FILLER PIC X(7).

==19=1 =5 FILLER PIC X(1=).

...... _


18.1 Entering Data

18.1.2.3 Using Power Typing Techniques

As with the TEXTENTR operand of the INPUT command, the TE line commandcauses:

■ The sequence number field to be protected and invisible and the right margin tobe ignored. This allows you to enter data in a wrap mode. This means that if youreach the right margin while entering data, the cursor automatically skips over theinvisible sequence number field, allowing continuous data entry.

■ The current column boundaries are recognized when the data are formatted afteryou press the ENTER key.

7 8 >


> ...<....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....>....+

...... ========================== T O P ================

TE=1== THIS IS A SAMPLE.

...... ======================= B O T T O M =============

7 8 >


> ...<....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....>....+

...... ========================== T O P ================


_

7 8 >


> ...<....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....>....+

...... ========================== T O P ================


This sample shows how you can enter data in a wra

p mode and have it formatted for you when you dep

7 8AWS: TE Line Command

>


> ...<....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....>....+

...... ========================== T O P ================


===2== This sample shows how you can enter data

===2=1 in a wrap mode and have it formatted for


18.1 Entering Data

18.1.3 Using a Mask

The MASK line command allows you to define a character string mask that can beinserted anywhere in the active AWS using the IM line command.

18.1.3.1 Defining a Mask

To define a mask,

■ Enter the command MASK in the sequence number field of any line in the activeAWS.

■ Then, enter the mask in the data portion of the same line. The mask must be theonly data on the line. Ensure that this is the case by overlaying any other dataon the line with spaces, or by using the DELETE or ERASE EOF keys to deletethe remaining data.

■ Finally, press the ENTER key to establish the mask.

After the MASK command has been executed, the original contents of the line areredisplayed.

Once the mask is defined, it remains in effect until you: 1) replace it with a newmask definition, or 2) eliminate it.

To eliminate a mask, enter the command MASK in the sequence number field of anyline in the active AWS and press the ENTER key.

18.1.3.2 Inserting a Mask

You can insert your data mask in the active AWS by using the:

■ IM (Insert Mask) line command.

To insert one copy of the mask, position the cursor to the sequence number fieldof the line after which you want the line inserted. Type IM in the sequencenumber field and press the ENTER key. A new line containing the mask isinserted immediately after the line that contained the IM command.

To insert multiple copies of the mask, include the appropriate numeric value withthe command, as illustrated in the following figure.

The first screen in the following examples shows the mask being defined on line3200. (Notice that only the mask appears on that line. The original contents arerestored when the command is executed.) The second screen shows how multiplecopies of the mask can be inserted. The third screen shows the resulting display.


18.1 Entering Data

AWS: MASK and IM Line Commands to Define and Insert a Mask

7 8 >


> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+



MASK!! !5 FILLER PIC X(3!). ==33== =1 INVENTORY-REPORT.

7 8 >


> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+

IM2=== =5 PART-DESCRIPTION-IN PIC X(26).


==32== =5 PART-NUMBER-OUT PIC X(6).

==33== =1 INVENTORY-REPORT.

7 8 >


> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+


==3==1 =5 FILLER PIC X(3=).

==3==2 =5 FILLER PIX X(3=).


■ OM (Overlay Mask) line command.

To overlay one line, position the cursor to the sequence number field of theappropriate line. Type OM and press the ENTER key. The mask will overlay thecorresponding blank characters in this line. (Only blank characters are overlaid. Ifthe line contains alphanumeric characters within the area defined by the mask,those characters are not overlaid.)

To overlay multiple lines with the mask, include a numeric value with thecommand. For example, if you enter OM3 on line 3400, the mask will overlay thecorresponding blank characters on line 3400 and the next two lines.

You can also use the OMT and OMB commands to overlay multiple lines. OMToverlays all of the lines from the first line of the active AWS through the linecontaining the command. OMB overlays all of the lines from the line containing thecommand through the end of this AWS.


18.1 Entering Data

The following example illustrates how you can overlay lines with a mask. (It isassumed the mask defined in the previous figure is still in effect.)

AWS: Overlay Line Commands to Insert a Mask

7 8 >


> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+


OM3 == =5 FILLER

==35== =5 OUT-MONTH

==36==

7 8 >


> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+


==34== =5 FILLER PIC X(3=).

==35== =5 OUT-MONTH PIC X(3=).

==36== =5 FILLER PIC X(3=).

18.1.4 Using a PF Key

As distributed, PF12 and PF24 are assigned the INPUT function. If your site is usingthis assignment, you can use either key to insert data into the active AWS. To do so,

■ Position the cursor to the line after which the insertion is to be made.■ Press the appropriate PF key.

The screen is opened for data entry immediately after the line at which the cursor waspositioned. Note that the column position of the cursor has no affect on this operation.

To insert data at the top or bottom of the active AWS, position the cursor before thefirst line, or after the last line, of that AWS and again press the appropriate PF key.


18.1 Entering Data

18.1.5 Using the Command Area

If you only want to insert a few lines of data, you may find it convenient to add thedata from the Command Area. To do this:

1. Type the line number in the form =number, where number is the sequence numberto be assigned to the inserted line.

2. Leave at least one space, then type the data to be associated with that sequencenumber.

3. Press the ENTER key.

If the number you specify already exists within the active AWS, your line replaces theexisting line. If it does not, your line is added to the active AWS. Using the followingexamples to illustrate, when the ENTER key is pressed, the previous contents of line3100 are replaced with the information appearing in the Command Area, while line3101 is added to this AWS.

AWS: Inserting Data From Command Area

7 8 =31== =5 PART-NUMBER PIC X(9).

=31=1 =5 PART-TOTAL-IN PIC X(3).

>


> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+



==32== =5 FILLER PIC X(3=).

7 8 >


> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+


==31== =5 PART-NUMBER PIC X(9).

==31=1 =5 PART-TOTAL-IN PIC X(3).

==32== =5 FILLER PIC X(3=).

All of the lines comprising the Command Area can be used to enter data in thismanner. You can also use the command delimiter to enter more than one line of dataper Command Area line.


18.2 Formatting Inserted Data


This section describes how you can format the data in the active AWS using:

■ An automatic indentation facility when you are inserting data via the I or IB linecommand.

■ A software tab facility with data that is being entered into the active AWS oralready within the active AWS.

18.2.1 Using Automatic Indentation

You can activate the automatic indentation facility by issuing the command:

SET AUTOINDENT ON

When this facility is active, the cursor is automatically positioned under the first datacharacter when you insert data using the INPUT primary command, I or IB linecommand or a PF key to which the INPUT function is assigned.

The following example illustrates how the cursor is positioned when you use the I linecommand.

AWS: Using SET AUTOINDENT Command

7 8 >

> AWS(PRI.INVLIST) SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===8=

> <...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+...

...... ============================= T O P ============

I==1== IDENTIFICATION DIVISION.



7 8 >


> <...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+...

...... ============================= T O P ============


...... _





18.2.2 Using the Software Tab Facility

The software tab facility allows you to define one to eight tab positions within a lineand then position data to those positions.

18.2.2.1 Setting Tabs and Defining a Tab Character

To define tab positions, use the TAB command. You can define a maximum of eightdifferent tab positions. For example:

TAB 12 16 2= 32

sets tab positions at columns 12, 16, 20 and 32.

The default tab character (the special character you include with your data) is thelogical not sign (¬). To change this character, use the TAB command again. Forexample, to establish the percent sign (%) as the tab character, you would enter:

TAB %

As illustrated in the following example, the tab character and tab positions must bedefined in separate executions of the TAB command. When tab positions are in effect,the tab character is used to indicate those positions on the Scale Line.

AWS: Using TAB Command

7 8 TAB % TAB 12 16 2! 32 >


> <...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+...

...... ============================= T O P ============


7 8 >


> <...+....1.%..+%...%....+....3.%:...... ============================= T O P ============

!!!1!! IDENTIFICATION DIVISION.



18.2.2.2 Using Tabs

When the tab character and tab positions are set, you can format your data byincluding the tab character with your data. You can do this when you are:

■ Initially entering data in the active AWS, or■ Formatting data that is already in the active AWS.

To shift the contents of a line to the appropriate location, enter one or more tabcharacters. As illustrated in the following example, entering one tab positions the datafollowing it to the next defined tab position (for example, entering a single tabcharacter at the beginning of line 3800 shifts the line to begin in column 12). To skipone or more tab positions (as illustrated in line 3400), enter contiguous tab characters(that is, not separated by spaces).

AWS: Formatting Data With the Software Tab

7 8 >


> ...1.%..+%...2....+....3....+....%....+....5....+..


==34== %%RECORD CONTAINS 133 CHARACTERS==35== %%LABEL RECORDS ARE OMITTED==36== %%DATA RECORD IS INVENTORY-REPORT-LINE.


==38== %=5 CARRIAGE-CONTROL%PIC X.

==39== %=5 FILLER%PIC X(9).

==4=== %=5 PART-NUMBER-OUT%PIC X(1=).

7 8 >


> ...1.%..+%...2....+....3....+....%....+....5....+..


==34== RECORD CONTAINS 133 CHARACTERS


==36== DATA RECORD IS INVENTORY-REPORT-LINE.



==39== =5 FILLER PIC X(9).

==4=== =5 PART-NUMBER-OUT PIC X(1=).

Note: The tab character will be treated as a data character if either of the followingconditions occur:

■ The data includes the tab character but no tab positions have been defined.

■ The data includes more tab characters than the number of defined tab positions(for example, four tab positions are defined and the data includes five tabcharacters.)


Chapter 19. AWS: Formatting Data Within an AWS

The commands described in this chapter can be used to format data or text that is inthe active AWS. These commands allow you to:

■ Center text lines.■ Control the capitalization of alphabetic characters within the data.■ Reformat text lines.■ Shift one or more lines to the left or right.■ Split and join text lines.

Note that the software tab facility (described in Chapter 18, “AWS: Entering andFormatting Data in an AWS”) can also be used to position data within the activeAWS.

Chapter 19. AWS: Formatting Data Within an AWS 19-1

19.1 Centering Text

19.1 Centering Text

You can center text on a line using either the TXTCENT primary command or the TCline command.


You can use the TXTCENT command to center the text on one or more lines. Bydefault, the text is centered between the default or current left and right columnboundaries. For example, if the default column boundaries are in effect and you enter:

TXTCENT 1==

The contents of line 100 will be centered between 1 and 80.

You can override the default or current column boundaries by including the BOUNDSoperand with the command. The following example shows how you can center the texton multiple lines between columns 9 and 45.

AWS: TXTCENT Command to Center Multiple Lines

7 8TXTCENT 2!! 5!! BOUNDS 9 45

>


> ..<1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+

...... ============================= T O P =============

===1== Q------------------------------------------------

===2== Q THIS PROGRAM PRINTS AN ESTIMATED

===3== Q SHIPPING COST REPORT. RATES

===4== Q DEPEND ON WEIGHT OF ORDER AND

===5== Q DISTRICT TO WHICH ORDER SHIPPED.

===6== Q------------------------------------------------

7 8>


> ..<1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+

...... ============================= T O P =============

===1== Q------------------------------------------------





===6== Q------------------------------------------------


19.1 Centering Text


You can use line commands to center the text on one or more lines. The text iscentered between the default or current left and right column boundaries.

■ To center a single line:

Enter TC in the sequence number field of the appropriate line.

■ To center a block of lines:

Enter TCC in the sequence number fields of the first and last lines to be centered.

■ To center a range of lines:

– Enter TCv in the sequence number field of the first line to be centered, wherev represents the number of lines to be centered (for example, TC5).

– Enter TCB or TCT in the appropriate sequence number field. With TCB,every line from the line containing the command through the end of the activeAWS will be centered. With TCT, every line from the first line of the activeAWS through the line containing the command will be centered.

The text is centered between the default or current column boundaries. To change thecolumn boundaries, use the SET BOUNDS primary command or the BOUNDS in linecommand.

In the following example, the BOUNDS line command is used to change the columnboundaries. The TCC line commands then center the text in the designated block oflines between the boundaries.

AWS: TCC Line Command to Center Multiple Lines

7 8 >


> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+

...... ============================= T O P =============

BOUNDS Q-<----------------------------------->----------

TCC2== Q THIS PROGRAM PRINTS AN ESTIMATED===3== Q SHIPPING COST REPORT. RATES


TCC5== Q DISTRICT TO WHICH ORDER SHIPPED. ===6== Q------------------------------------------------


19.1 Centering Text

The following example shows the results of these commands.

AWS: TCC Line Command Results

7 8 >


> ..<1....+....2....+....3....+....4....>....5....+

...... ============================= T O P =============

===1== Q------------------------------------------------





===6== Q------------------------------------------------



19.2 Controlling Capitalization


At most sites, data that you enter or edit in an AWS is automatically translated to itscorresponding uppercase characters (for example, if you enter the word division, it istranslated to DIVISION). You can control how data that you enter and edit is to berecognized and treated. See Chapter 3, “Controlling Character Recognition” foradditional information.

There may be occasions when you want to retranslate one or more lines within theactive AWS. While you can do this by changing the current translation mode settingand then modifying the appropriate lines, you can also use the primary and linecommands shown in the following table.

None of these commands, however, are text sensitive. When dealing with linescontaining text, you should use the TXTLCASE primary command or TLC linecommand to control capitalization.

Action Primary Command Line

Translate uppercase characters totheir corresponding lowercasecharacters.

LOWCASE LC, LCC, LCB,LCT

Translate lowercase characters totheir corresponding uppercasecharacters.

UPCASE UC, UCC, UCB,UCT


You can use the TXTLCASE command to lowercase the characters in one or morelines while ensuring that the first word of each sentence begins with a capital letter.

For example, to lowercase the characters within the current or default columnboundaries of line 100 through 500, you would enter:

TXTLCASE 1== 5==

You can use the optional BOUNDS operand to override the default or current columnboundaries. For example, to lowercase the characters between columns 9 and 45 oflines 700 through 1200, you would enter:

TXTLCASE 7== 12== BOUNDS 9 45



19.2.2 Using a Line Command

You can use the TLC command to control the capitalization of the lines comprising aparagraph. It lowercases the characters encountered while ensuring that the first letterof each sentence is in uppercase.

To use this command, enter TLC in the sequence number field of the appropriate line.When the ENTER key is pressed, all of the characters on the line containing thecommand through the end of the current paragraph are translated to theircorresponding lowercase characters. The end of a paragraph is indicated by:

■ A blank line,■ A change in indentation, or■ The end of the active AWS.

Note that only the characters found within the default or current column boundaries aretranslated. To change the column boundaries, you can use the SET BOUNDS primarycommand or the BOUNDS line command.


19.3 Reformatting Text Lines


At any point, the TXTFLOW primary command or TF line command can be used toreformat the text within the active AWS.


You can use the TXTFLOW command to reformat the text appearing on one or morelines of the active AWS. For example, to reformat the text comprising lines 2 through7, you would enter:

TXTFLOW 2 7

The resulting display will show the reformatting text comprising those lines. Eachreformatted line will:

■ Begin at the default or current left column boundary. (In these examples, that iscolumn 9.)

EXCEPTION:

If the text within the designated lines begins inside the left column boundary,the reformatted lines will begin at the column which contained the left-mostcharacter comprising those lines. For example, if the left column boundary isset to 9 and all of the text lines begin in column 15, the reformatted lines willbegin in column 15.

■ End at the default or current right column boundary or right display margin,whichever is less. For example, assume that the terminal screen displays a line 72characters in length. If the right column boundary is set at:

– Column 50 - The reformatted text will stop at column 50.

– Column 80 - The reformatted text will stop at column 72.

You can override the right column boundary for the execution of a command byspecifying the COLS operand. In the following example, lines 2 through 7 will bereformatted and the reformatted lines will not extend beyond column 30.



AWS: TXTFLOW Command to Reformat Text Lines

7 8TXTFLOW 2 7 COLS 3=

>


> ..<1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+

...... ============================= T O P =============

=====1 Q------------------------------------------------

=====2 Q THIS PROGRAM PRINTS AN ESTIMATED

=====3 Q SHIPPING COST REPORT. SHIPPING RATES

=====5 Q DEPEND ON WEIGHT OR ORDER AND

=====7 Q DISTRICT TO WHICH ORDER SHIPPED

=====9 Q------------------------------------------------

7 8 >


> ..<1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+

...... ============================= T O P =============

=====1 Q------------------------------------------------

=====2 Q THIS PROGRAM PRINTS AN

=====3 Q ESTIMATED SHIPPING

=====4 Q COST REPORT. SHIPPING

=====5 Q RATES DEPEND ON WEIGHT

=====6 OF ORDER AND DISTRICT

=====7 TO WHICH ORDER

=====8 SHIPPED.

=====9 Q------------------------------------------------

====1= IDENTIFICATION DIVISION.

19.3.2 Using a Line Command

You can use the TF line command to reformat the paragraph you are working with. Aparagraph extends from the line containing the command to:

■ The first blank line,■ A change in indentation, or■ The end of the active AWS.



AWS: TF Line Command to Reformat Text Lines

7 8 >


> ..<1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....>

...... ============================= T O P =============

TF=1== Q THIS PROGRAM PRINTS AN ESTIMATED

===2== Q SHIPPING COST REPORT. SHIPPING RATES

===3== Q DEPEND ON WEIGHT OR ORDER AND


7 8 >


> ..<1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....>

...... ============================= T O P =============

=====1 Q THIS PROGRAM PRINTS AN ESTIMATED SHIPPING COST

=====2 Q REPORT. SHIPPING RATES DEPEND ON WEIGHT OF

=====3 Q ORDER AND DISTRICT TO WHICH ORDER SHIPPED.

As illustrated in the previous example, reformatted lines:

■ Begin at the default or current left column boundary. (See page 19-7 about theTXTFLOW primary command for an exception to this rule.)

■ End at the default or current right column boundary or right display margin,whichever is less.

By specifying a numeric value with the command, you can override the right columnboundary. The following example illustrates how you would reformat the lines withina paragraph so that the text does not extend beyond column 35.

AWS: TF Line Command to Reformat Text Line

7 8 >


> .<.1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....>

...... ============================= T O P =============

TF35=1 Q THIS PROGRAM PRINTS AN ESTIMATED SHIPPING COST=====2 Q REPORT. SHIPPING RATES DEPEND ON WEIGHT OF

=====3 Q ORDER AND DISTRICT TO WHICH ORDER SHIPPED.

7 8 >


> .<.1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....>

...... ============================= T O P =============

=====1 Q THIS PROGRAM PRINTS AN

=====2 Q ESTIMATED SHIPPING COST

=====3 Q REPORT. SHIPPING RATES

=====4 DEPEND ON WEIGHT OF ORDER

=====5 AND DISTRICT TO WHICH ORDER

=====6 SHIPPED.


19.4 Shifting Data

19.4 Shifting Data

You can shift all or part of the contents of one or more lines to the left or right usingeither primary or line commands.


You can use the RSHIFT and LSHIFT command to move the contents of one or morelines in the active AWS to the right or left, respectively. For example, to shift theentire contents of the active AWS five positions to the right, you would enter:

RSHIFT 5

To limit the operation to specific lines, you can include the appropriate line numberswith the command, as in:

LSHIFT 2 1== 5==

where only the contents of lines 100 through 500 are shifted two positions to the left.

By default, the data within the default (or current) column boundaries is shifted. Youcan use the SET BOUNDS command to change the column boundaries for yoursession. To change the boundaries for a single execution of the command, use theBOUNDS operand, as in:

RSHIFT 5 BOUNDS 8 2=

where only the data within columns 8 through 20 are shifted five positions to the right.

Note: SET BOUNDS is described in Chapter 4, “Defining Column Boundaries.”

If you shift the contents of a line beyond right or left column boundary, the data arelost. This may be useful if you want to clear a field. For example, if you enter:

LSHIFT 7

RSHIFT 7

the first seven positions within the default (or current) column boundary of each activeAWS line is blank-filled.


19.4 Shifting Data

To prevent data from being lost by such an operation, include the TEXTSTOP operandwith the command. For example, if you enter:

LSHIFT 3= TEXTSTOP

every line in the active AWS is shifted 30 positions to the left. However, if any linecontains data that would be shifted beyond the left margin, the operation is stopped forthat line when the left margin is reached.


The following table lists the line commands you can use to shift the contents of one ormore lines to the left or right. As with the primary commands, you can shift one ormore lines to the left or right, where:

■ Using the commands beginning with ( or ), the line is shifted the designatednumber of positions, regardless of the current column boundary setting (that is,data may be lost).

■ Using the commands beginning with < or >, the line is shifted the designatednumber of positions or until the appropriate column boundary is reached (that is,data are not lost).

To change the column boundaries that are currently in effect, you can use the SETBOUNDS primary command or BOUNDS line command. See Chapter 4, “DefiningColumn Boundaries” for additional information.

ShiftLine

ShiftUntilData

Meaning

) [v] > [v] Shift right 1 or v spaces.

)) [v] >> [v] Shift block of lines right 1 or v spaces. Enter on firstand last line of block.

)B [v] >B [v] Shift right 1 or v spaces from line containing commandthrough end of active AWS.

)T [v] >T [v] Shift right 1 or v spaces from first line through linecontaining command.

( [v] < [v] Shift left 1 or v spaces.

(( [v] << [v] Shift block of lines left 1 or v spaces. Enter << on firstand last line of block.

(B [v] <B [v] Shift left 1 or v spaces from line containing commandthrough end of active AWS.

(T [v] <T [v] Shifts left 1 or v spaces from first line through linecontaining command.


19.4 Shifting Data

The following example illustrates how you can use these line commands to formatdata. The upper screen contains the unformatted data and appropriate line commands;the lower screen shows the correctly formatted data (how the data will look after theline commands are executed).

Using Line Commands to Shift Data

7 8 >


> <...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5.

...... ================================ T O P ============

>4=1== IDENTIFICATION DIVISION.

<4=2== PROGRAM-ID. INVLIST.

>>43== ENVIRONMENT DIVISION.

>>=4== CONFIGURATION SECTION.

===5== SOURCE-COMPUTER. IBM-37=.

===6== OBJECT-COMPUTER. IBM-37=.

7 8 >

>


<...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5.

...... ================================ T O P ============





===5== SOURCE-COMPUTER. IBM-37=.

===6== OBJECT-COMPUTER. IBM-37=.


19.5 Splitting and Joining Text Lines


You can split one line into two or join two lines together using either primary or linecommands.


19.5.1.1 Splitting Lines

You can split one line into two using the TXTSPLIT primary or TS line command.You can use the TXTSPLIT command to split a line at a specific location. Thefollowing example shows line 300 being split at column 31 (top screen). Everythingfrom that position to the right column boundary is moved to the next line. The textwill begin at the left column boundary of that line. In this case, it means that the wordRATES is moved to line 301 and begins in position 9, which is the current leftboundary (bottom screen).

AWS: TXTSPLIT Command to Split One Line

7 8TXTSPLIT 3!! COLS 31

>


> ..<1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+

...... ============================= T O P =============

===1== Q------------------------------------------------


===3== Q SHIPPING COST REPORT. RATES===4== Q DEPEND ON WEIGHT OF ORDER AND


===6== Q------------------------------------------------

7 8 >


> ..<1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+

...... ============================= T O P =============

===1== Q------------------------------------------------


===3== Q SHIPPING COST REPORT.

===3=1 RATES===4== Q DEPEND ON WEIGHT OF ORDER AND


===6== Q------------------------------------------------




A variation of the example shown in the previous figure uses the CURSOR operand.For example, you could have split the line by positioning the cursor to column 31 online 300 and entering:

TXTSPLIT Q CURSOR TXTSPLIT

This form of TXTSPLIT is especially useful when it is assigned to a PF key. Then,you only need to position the cursor to the appropriate column within the appropriateline and press the PF key. The following example shows how you can use TXTSPLITto split multiple lines. In this case, lines 400 and 500 are split at column 27.Everything from that position through column 45 is moved to the appropriate next line,beginning in column 12.

TXTSPLIT Command to Split Multiple Lines

7 8 TXTSPLIT 4!! 5!! COLS 27 BOUNDS 12 45 >


> ..<1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+

...... ============================= T O P =============

===1== Q------------------------------------------------



===3=1 RATES

===4== Q DEPEND ON WEIGHT OF ORDER AND===5== Q DISTRICT TO WHICH ORDER SHIPPED.

===6== Q------------------------------------------------

7 8 >


> ..<1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+

...... ============================= T O P =============

=====1 Q------------------------------------------------


=====3 Q SHIPPING COST REPORT.

=====4 RATES

=====5 Q DEPEND ON WEIGHT

=====6 OF ORDER AND=====7 Q DISTRICT TO WHICH

=====8 ORDER SHIPPED. =====9 Q------------------------------------------------




19.5.1.2 Joining Lines

You can use the TXTJOIN command to rejoin two lines. In the following example,the modified contents of line 4 are being rejoined to line 3. Since no column numberis specified, the contents of line 4 will begin one space after the current last word online 3.

AWS: TXTJOIN Command to Rejoin Two Lines

7 8 TXTJOIN 3 >


> ..<1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+

...... ============================= T O P =============

=====1 Q------------------------------------------------


=====3 Q SHIPPING COST REPORT. =====4 SHIPPING RATES

=====5 Q DEPEND ON WEIGHT

=====6 OR ORDER AND

=====7 Q DISTRICT TO WHICH

=====8 ORDER SHIPPED.

=====9 Q------------------------------------------------

7 8 >


> .<.1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+

...... ============================= T O P =============

=====1 Q------------------------------------------------


=====3 Q SHIPPING COST REPORT. SHIPPING RATES=====5 Q DEPEND ON WEIGHT

=====6 Q OR ORDER AND

=====7 Q DISTRICT TO WHICH

=====8 Q ORDER SHIPPED.

=====9 Q------------------------------------------------




The following example shows how you can rejoin multiple lines (lines 5 through 8, inthis case). The example also shows how you can have the joined lines begin in aspecific location. When a column number is specified with the command, the joinedtext begins one space after the designated column (in the example, the joined text willbegin one space after column 26).

AWS: TXTJOIN Command to Rejoin Multiple Lines

7 8 TXTJOIN 5 8 COLS 26>


> ..<1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+

...... ============================= T O P =============

=====1 Q------------------------------------------------



=====5 Q DEPEND ON WEIGHT =====6 Q OR ORDER AND =====7 Q DISTRICT TO WHICH =====8 Q ORDER SHIPPED. =====9 Q------------------------------------------------

7 8>


> .<.1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+

...... ============================= T O P =============

=====1 Q------------------------------------------------



=====5 Q DEPEND ON WEIGHT OR ORDER AND =====7 Q DISTRICT TO WHICH ORDER SHIPPED. =====9 Q------------------------------------------------





19.5.2.1 Splitting Lines

To split a text line into two lines:

1. Type the TS line command in the sequence number field of the appropriate line,and

2. Position the cursor to the desired location within the data portion of that line.

You can also insert lines for data entry when you split a line. In the followingexample, TS2 is typed in the sequence number field of line 200 and the cursor ispositioned to column 31. When the ENTER key is pressed, everything from the cursorposition to the right column boundary is moved to begin at the left column boundaryof the new next line. Since a numeric value was specified with the command, theappropriate number of data entry lines will be inserted between the split.

AWS: TS Line Command to Split a Line

7 8 >


> ..<1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+

...... ============================= T O P =============


TS22== Q SHIPPING COST REPORT. RATES -===3== Q DEPEND ON WEIGHT OF ORDER AND


7 8>


> ..<1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+

...... ============================= T O P =============



......

......

===2=1 RATES



If anything is typed on the inserted lines (like text or a space), the lines are retainedwhen the next operation is performed. If nothing is entered, the lines are removed.



19.5.2.2 Joining Lines

You can use the TJ line command to rejoin two lines. When this command isexecuted, the joined line begins one space after the last word on the preceding line.

The following example shows how you can rejoin the modified contents of line 201 toline 200. Since nothing was entered on the inserted lines, they are removed when theoperation is performed.

AWS: TJ Line Command to Join Two Lines

7 8 >


> ..<1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+

...... ============================= T O P =============


TJ=2== Q SHIPPING COST REPORT. ......

......

===2=1 SHIPPING RATES



7 8>


> ..<1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+

...... ============================= T O P =============


===2== Q SHIPPING COST REPORT. SHIPPING RATES



To have the joined line begin in a specific location, include a numeric value with thecommand, where the value represents the column after which the text from thefollowing line is to be placed. For example, entering TJ35 causes the following line tobegin one space after column 35 of the line containing the command.


Chapter 20. AWS: Locating Data Within an AWS


■ Display specific occurrences of a character string using the FIRST, NEXT, LASTand PREV primary and line commands.

■ Display all lines containing (or not containing) a specific character string using theINCL and EXCL primary or line command. (This display is modifiable. Toproduce a non-modifiable display, use the SEARCH or OMIT command.)

■ Customize the operation by: 1) qualifying the search string, and 2) designating theresulting screen positioning.

While the examples in this chapter show strings that are in character format, you canalso locate and display data that is in hexadecimal representation. See 20.3,“Customizing the Operation” on page 20-10 for details.

Chapter 20. AWS: Locating Data Within an AWS 20-1

20.1 Finding Specific Occurrences of a String


In addition to the FIRST, NEXT, LAST and PREV primary and line commands, youcan use the ATTACH command to position data to the first line containing a specificcharacter string. For example, you might want to copy a library member into the activeAWS and then begin the resulting display with the first line containing a specificstring, as in:

FETCH INVLIST

ATTACH /DATA/

The resulting display begins with the first line containing the string DATA.




You can use the following commands to locate and display specific occurrences of astring:

FIRST Locates and displays first occurrence of a string.NEXT Locates and displays the next occurrence of a string.LAST Locates and displays the last occurrence of a string.PREV Locates and displays the previous occurrence of a string.

For example, to locate and position the display to the first line containing the stringTEST-DATA, enter:

FIRST TEST-DATA

To locate and display the next occurrence of the same string, all you need enter is:

NEXT

Once specified, the string is remembered until you specify a different one. It is,therefore, used with any subsequent EXCL, FIRST, INCL, LAST, NEXT or PREVprimary or line command that does not include a string. (The string specified with theATTACH command is also remembered and used with any subsequent EXCL, FIRST,INCL, LAST, NEXT or PREV primary or line command that does not include astring.)

By default, the entire AWS is searched for the string (every column of every line).You can limit the extent of the operation to specific columns or lines. For example, tolocate the last occurrence of TEST-DATA and to limit the search to columns 10through 50, you would enter:

LAST 1= 5= TEST-DATA

where the column numbers are specified before the string. To limit the search to aspecific number of lines, specific the appropriate value after the string. For example,to search the previous 200 lines for the first occurrence of TEST-DATA, enter:

PREV TEST-DATA 2==



Note: Column boundaries specified with the command affect only the execution ofthat command. See Chapter 4, “Defining Column Boundaries” for informationabout changing boundaries for the terminal session.

Finally, you can combine a column range and line limit within a command, as in:

FIRST 1= 5= TEST-DATA 2==




You can use line commands to locate specific occurrences of a string. The linecommands are FIRST, NEXT, LAST and PREV.

To locate a string, enter the appropriate line command in the sequence number fieldand the delimited search string in the data portion of the same line. The followingexample shows how to find the last occurrence of the string PRINT-FILE.

AWS: LAST Line Command

7 8 >


> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....

...... ============================= T O P =================

LAST /PRINT-FILE/TEST-DATA ASSIGN TO S-SYSIN. -

==37== SELECT PRINT-FILE ASSIGN TO S-SYSPRINT.

==38== DATA DIVISION.

==39== FILE SECTION.

==4=== FD TEST-DATA


==42== DATA RECORD IS TEST-RECORD.

==43== =1 TEST RECORD PIC X(8=).

==44== FD PRINT-FILE


U V

If the string was specified with a previously executed ATTACH, EXCL, FIRST,INCL, LAST, NEXT or PREV primary or line command, you need not respecify it.Once a character string is specified, it is remembered and available for use until youchange it.

By default, the entire line is searched. To limit the search to specific columns, you canuse the modifiable STATUS DISPLAY screen, the SET BOUNDS primary commandor the BOUNDS line command. See Chapter 4, “Defining Column Boundaries” foradditional information.


20.2 Including/Excluding Lines Containing a String


You can locate all lines containing a specific string by using the INCL primary or linecommand. The resulting display is modifiable. To produce a non-modifiable display,use the SEARCH primary command.

To locate all lines not containing a specific string, use the EXCL primary or linecommand. Again, the resulting display is modifiable. To produce a non-modifiabledisplay, use the OMIT primary command.


20.2.1.1 INCL and EXCL

The INCL and EXCL primary commands display all lines including or excluding aspecific character string. For example, to display all lines that do not contain the stringTEST-DATA, specify:

EXCL TEST-DATA

To then display all of the lines that contain the same string, all you need enter is:

INCL

When you do not specify a string, the string specified with the previous ATTACH,EXCL, FIRST, INCL, LAST, NEXT or PREV primary or line command is assumed.

To limit the search to specific columns or numbers of lines, specify the columnnumbers before the string and the number of lines after the string. For example,

EXCL 12 4= DATA 4==

limits the search for DATA to columns 12 through 40 of the next 400 lines.

Note: Column boundaries specified with the command affect only the execution ofthat command. See Chapter 4, “Defining Column Boundaries” for informationabout changing boundaries for the remainder of the terminal session.

The following example illustrates the type of display resulting from the execution ofan INCL or EXCL command.



AWS: INCL Command Display

7 8 > AWS!7: LINES 3!!! THRU BOTTOM SEARCHED WITH 5 MATCHES > AWS(PRI.INVLIST) SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72

> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....

...... ======================= INCL/EXCL DISPLAY ===========

==36== SELECT TEST-DATA ASSIGN TO S-SYSIN.

==4=== FD TEST-DATA

=143== OPEN INPUT TEST-DATA.

=147== READ TEST-DATA INTO HOLDING-AREA.

=2=7== CLOSE TEST-DATA.

If the number of lines containing (or not containing) the string exceeds the size of yourterminal screen, you can:

1. Press one of the PF keys to which a scroll function is assigned. The direction ofthe scan depends on the value of the PF key that is pressed, or

2. Enter the INCL or EXCL line command, with no operand, in the sequence numberfield of a line and press ENTER. The scan begins with that line and continuestowards the end of the data.

To see the data that follows a particular line, you can:

■ Type an asterisk (*) in the sequence number field of that line.■ Type the line number in the sequence number field of any line.■ Alter the sequence number field of the line (for example, by deleting a leading

zero).

After pressing the ENTER key, the resulting display begins with the designated line.

Note: While the INCL/EXCL display shows only the appropriate lines within theactive AWS, all of the lines may be affected by the action of a primary or linecommand. If, for example, you delete a range of lines (using either a primaryor line command), all of the displayed and non-displayed lines within thatrange are deleted.

20.2.1.2 SEARCH and OMIT

Use the SEARCH command to produce a non-modifiable display of all occurrences ofa specific string within the active AWS.

Use the OMIT command to produce a non-modifiable display of all lines notcontaining a specific string.

When using these commands, the string must be delimited, as in:

SEARCH 'INVENTORY-BALANCE'



As illustrated in the following example, the resulting display contains the number andcontents of each line containing the string.

AWS: SEARCH Command Display

7 8 _

>

>

> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6


==46== =5 INVENTORY-BALANCE-OUT PIC ZZ,ZZ9.

==75== MOVE INVENTORY-BALANCE-IN

==76== TO INVENTORY-BALANCE-OUT.

With both commands, you can limit the operation to: 1) a specific range of columnsand 2) a specific range of lines. For example,

OMIT 2= 5= 'PIC' 15= 9==

displays all lines that do not contain the string PIC in columns 20 through 50 of lines150 through 900.


The INCL and EXCL line commands are similar to the INCL and EXCL primarycommands. To use the line commands, enter the appropriate command in the sequencenumber field of the first line to be searched. Then, enter the character string (bound bydelimiters) in the data portion of the same line.

The following example shows the display that might result after executing an INCLline command.



AWS: Using INCL Line Command

7 8 >


> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....

...... ============================= T O P ============

INCL /WS-END-OF-FILE-SWITCH./ ===2== PROGRAM-ID. INVLIST.



===5== SOURCE-COMPUTER. IBM-3=81.

7 8 > AWS!7: LINES 51!! THRU BOTTOM SEARCHED WITH 3 MATCHES > AWS(PRI.INVLIST) SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72

> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....

...... ======================= INCL/EXCL DISPLAY ======

==51== =5 WS-END-OF-FILE-SWITCH PIC X(3).

==69== MOVE 'NO ' TO WS-END-OF-FILE-SWITCH.

==82== AT END MOVE 'NO ' TO WS-END-OF-FILE-SWITCH.

If INCL or EXCL retrieve more lines than can be displayed on the screen at one time,you can reposition the display by:

1. Entering the INCL or EXCL line command, with no operand, in the sequencenumber field of a line and pressing ENTER. The scan begins with that line andcontinues towards the end of the data, or

2. Pressing one of the PF keys to which a scroll function is assigned. The directionof the scan depends on the value of the PF key that is pressed.

To see the data that follows a particular line, you can:

■ Type an asterisk (*) in the sequence number field of that line.■ Type the line number in the sequence number field of any line.■ Alter the sequence number field of the line (by deleting a leading zero).

After pressing the ENTER key, the resulting display begins with the designated line.

Note: While the INCL/EXCL display shows only the appropriate lines within theactive AWS, all of the lines may be affected by the action of a primary or linecommand. If, for example, you delete a range of lines (using either a primaryor line command), all of the displayed and non-displayed lines within thatrange are deleted.


20.3 Customizing the Operation


This section describes how you can qualify the search operation.

20.3.1 Translating the Search String

The current setting of the SET MODE command determines how the character stringspecified with the command is to be treated. If SET MODE BASIC is in effect andyou enter the string division, it is treated as though you entered it in uppercase(DIVISION). If SET MODE XTENDED is in effect, the string is not translated touppercase. See Chapter 3, “Controlling Character Recognition” for additionalinformation.

20.3.2 Delimiting the Search String

In all of the examples using primary commands, the search string has not beendelimited. With these primary commands, you only need to delimit the string when it:

■ Includes a space (FIRST /TEST DATA/),■ Is a numeric (LAST /519/), or■ Is the same as a keyword operand (or its abbreviation) of the (INCL /JOB/).

When using a line command, the string must be delimited.

20.3.3 Qualifying the Search String

By default, the search is for any string of characters that match the specified string. Tolimit the search operation, you can include one of the qualifier operands. Theseoperands are WORD, PREFIX, BEGIN, EMBED, END and SUFFIX

For example, assume the active AWS contains the line:

'THE OTHER BROTHER ATE THEIR APPLE DURING THE CONTEST'

and you want to search for the string THE. Without qualification, the words THE,OTHER, BROTHER and THEIR match the search string. By including a qualifier, youcan designate the type of string match that is to occur, as in:

THE WORD Qualifies THE as a word, only THE matches.

THE PREFIX Qualifies THE as beginning a word, only THEIR matches.



THE BEGIN Qualifies THE as beginning or being a word - THE and THEIRmatch.

THE EMBED Qualifies THE as contained within a word - OTHER and BROTHERmatch.

TEST END Qualifies TEST as ending or being a word - only CONTESTmatches.

TEST SUFFIX Qualifies TEST as ending a word - only CONTEST matches.

20.3.4 Specifying the String in Hexadecimal

To designate the hexadecimal representation of a string, use the format:

X'string'

where the string is bound by apostrophes and contains an even number of characters,as in:

FIRST X'C1'

When using:

■ The primary commands FIRST, LAST, NEXT, PREV, INCL or EXCL, you donot need to delimit the hexadecimal string.

When using the comparable line commands, as illustrated in the followingexample, the string must be bound by delimiters.

■ For primary commands SEARCH or OMIT, the string must be bound bydelimiters. (Note that the resulting display is not modifiable and shows only thecharacter format of matching lines.)

The search string itself can be specified in either uppercase or lowercase characters.For the search operation, it is translated to uppercase. Thus, you will have the sameresult if you specify:

FIRST X'C1'

or

first x'c1'



AWS: Using a Hexadecimal String With a Line Command

7 8 >


> <...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5...

...... ============================= T O P =================

LAST== /X'C1'/ THOMAS W

4CDECDC4444444ECDDCE4444E4=4=444444444444444444444444

=866194=======386412====6=1=3========================

-----------------------------------------------------

===2== SMITHSOM SALLY S

4EDCECEDD44444ECDDE44444E4=4=444444444444444444444444

=24938265=====21338=====2=2=1========================

-----------------------------------------------------

===3== WALTERS JOHN

4ECDECDE444444DDCD44444444=4=444444444444444444444444

=6133592======1685========1=3========================

-----------------------------------------------------

To locate a character string that could be interpreted as being in hexadecimalrepresentation, either:

■ Use the LITERAL operand with the primary commands, as in:

FIRST X'C1' LITERAL

■ Specify the string so that it does not conform to hexadecimal notation. Thismethod can be used with both primary and line commands. For example, to findthe character string X'C1' you might specify:

/X'C1/

or

/X'C1' / 2



20.3.5 Positioning the Resulting Display

By default, the first line containing (or not containing) the specified search stringbegins the resulting display. You can change this default for your session using theSET SEARCH command.

By specifying a screen positioning operand with the FIRST, NEXT, LAST, PREV,INCL or EXCL primary command, you can also control how the resulting display is tobe positioned. The screen positioning operands are:

CJUSTIFIED The display margins are to be altered if the entire matching stringdoes not fall within the current margin. (This is the defaultpositioning.)

JUSTIFIED The display margins are always to be altered so that the firstcharacter of the string begins in the left-most position of the line.

CENTERED The display margins are to be altered to center the matching stringon the line. If centering would cause an invalid left margin (lessthan 1), the display is not altered.

LOCKED The display margins are not to be altered even if the matching stringoccurs to the left or right of the current margins.

These operands are specified after the string, as in:

FIRST /WIDGET/ JUSTIFIED

If the string is not found, the display is repositioned to: 1) the end of the active AWSor given range if FIRST or NEXT are specified, or 2) the beginning of the activeAWS or given range if LAST or PREV are specified.


Chapter 21. AWS: Moving Data Within an AWS

This chapter describes how you can use primary and line commands to move one ormore lines within the active AWS.

Note that a move operation (unlike a copy operation) is destructive (the lines beingmoved are deleted from their original location after being inserted in their newlocation).

Chapter 21. AWS: Moving Data Within an AWS 21-1

21.1 Using a Primary Command

21.1 Using a Primary Command

When moving data, you must identify the line(s) to be moved and the destination ofthe operation.

■ To move a single line: enter the MOVE command followed by the number of theline to be moved and the destination line number, as in:

MOVE 295= 36==

In this example, the contents of line 2950 is to be moved at or after line 3600. (Ifthe destination line number exists, the data are inserted after it. If the line numberdoes not exist, the data are placed at that line number.)

■ To move a range of lines: enter the MOVE command with the number of the firstand last line to be moved plus the destination line number. For example, to movelines 2500 through 2700 at, or after, line 1500, you would enter:

MOVE 25== 27== 15==

In addition to a line number, the destination can also be indicated through the keywordoperands:

* After the line at which the AWS pointer is currently positioned.T Before the first line of the active AWS.B or ,, After the last line of the active AWS.

For example, to move lines 1200 through 2800 to the bottom of the active AWS, youwould enter:

MOVE 12== 28== B




As with the primary commands, you must indicate the line(s) to be moved and thedestination of that operation. (The destination line commands are shown in thefollowing table.

■ To move a single line:

Type M in the sequence number field of the line to be moved. (Also include adestination line command in the sequence number field of the appropriate line.)

■ To copy a block of lines:

Type MM in the sequence number field of the first and last lines to be moved.(Also include a destination line command in the appropriate sequence numberfield.)

Note: The lines involved in the operation need not appear on the same screen.You can scroll the display forward or backward while the command ispending (for example, waiting for a matching move or destination linecommand).


In addition to the appropriate destination line command, type one of the followingline commands in the appropriate sequence number field:

Mv To move v number of lines (for example, entering M5 causes the linecontaining the command plus the next four lines to be moved).

MB To move all lines from the line containing the command through thelast line of the active AWS.

MT To move all lines from the first line in the active AWS through theline containing the command.




A Destination Only After this line.

B Before this line.

BB After the last line in this AWS.

TT Before the first line in this AWS.

O [v] Overlay AtDestination

Overlay one or v number of lines.

OB Overlay all lines from the line containingthe command thru the end of this AWS.

OO Overlay a block of lines where OO appearsin the first and last line of the range of linesto be overlaid.

OT Overlay all lines from the first AWS linethrough the line containing the command.



21.2.1.1 Using Overlay Destination Line Commands

The following example illustrates how you can use overlay destination line commands.Notice that only the blank characters in the target lines are overlaid with correspondingdata from the source lines.

AWS: Move Line Commands Using Overlay Destination

7 8 >


> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+

M =8== SAMPLE PIC X( ).

O2 9== PART-DESCRIPTION-IN

==1=== INVENTORY-BALANCE-IN

7 8 >


> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+

===8== SAMPLE PIC X( ).

===9== PART-DESCRIPTION-IN PIC X( ).

==1=== INVENTORY-BALANCE-IN PIC X( ).

The number of lines to be overlaid must be equal to or greater than the number oflines being moved. For example, the upper screen in the previous figure shows thatone line is to be moved (line 800) and that two lines are to be overlaid with that data(lines 900 and 1000). The lower screen in the previous figure shows the result, wherePIC X( ) has overlaid the corresponding blank positions in the designated lines.(SAMPLE has been ignored since its corresponding positions contain data.)


Chapter 22. AWS: Renumbering Data in the AWS

CA-Roscoe stores data in the form of variable length records not exceeding 255characters in length. (There is one record for each line in an AWS). To keep theserecords in their proper order, a six-digit sequence number is assigned to each line.These sequence numbers are maintained by CA-Roscoe and are stored externally to thedata records themselves.

When you begin entering data in the active AWS, default sequence numbering beginswith 100 and is incremented by 100. If you copy, move or insert lines within theexisting data, the new lines are incremented by one (for example, if you insert threelines between lines 200 and 300, the new lines are numbered 201, 202 and 203). Ifyou add lines to the end of the AWS, the current line number increment value is used.If you then delete any lines, a gap is left in the sequence numbers.

22.1.1 Renumbering Lines

You can renumber the contents of the active AWS at any time during your session byissuing the RENUMBER command. For example,

RENUMBER

renumbers the entire contents of the AWS from 100 by 100. You can change thestarting and increment values, as in:

RENUMBER 5= 1=

which renumbers the data in the active AWS from 50 by 10.

You can also renumber a range of lines within the AWS. For example,

RENUMBER FROM 9== TO 25=1 START 9== BY 1=

renumbers only lines 900 through 2501, where the starting line number is 900 and theincrement value is 10.

Finally, you can also renumber data when you bring it into the AWS using the FETCHcommand. For example if you enter:

FETCH INVLIST START 5= BY 5=

the contents of the library member named INVLIST are placed in the active AWS andthat data are then renumbered beginning with 50 and incremented by 50.

Chapter 22. AWS: Renumbering Data in the AWS 22-1

22.1.2 Display Sequence Numbers

By default, the data are displayed with the CA-Roscoe-generated sequence numbers.You can use the SET DISPLAY command to define a display format that includes orexcludes sequence numbers. See Chapter 5, “Defining the Display Format” for adetailed description of the SET DISPLAY command.

22.1.3 Include Sequence Numbers in the Data

You can add the CA-Roscoe-generated sequence numbers to the data in the activeAWS using either the RENUMBER or SEQ command. For example, entering:

RENUMBER START 1== BY 5= IN 1 6

renumbers the AWS from 100 by 50 and places the new line numbers within columns1 through 6 of the data. To place the current line numbers in the data (withoutrenumbering), use the SEQ command, as in:

SEQ IN 73 8

which places the current sequence numbers in the data beginning in column 73 andextending for eight positions.

If you add sequence numbers to the AWS and data exists in the designated columns,the data are overlaid by the sequence numbers.


22.1.4 Set AWS Sequence Number Attribute

The SEQ command can also be used to set the AWS sequence number attribute. Thisattribute designates whether the CA-Roscoe-generated sequence numbers are to beincluded when you PRINT, SAVE or SUBMIT data that is in the active AWS. Forexample, if you enter:

SEQ COBOL

the sequence number attribute is set so that line numbers will be placed in columns 1through 6 when this AWS data are PRINTed or SUBMITted. (If data appears in thedesignated sequence number field, the number is omitted; data are not overlaid.)

To prevent sequence numbers from being included, you can change the attribute byissuing the command:

NOSEQ

Once established, this attribute remains in effect until: 1) you specifically change it byissuing another SEQ/NOSEQ command, or 2) it is overridden by the sequence numberattribute of a library member that is FETCHed or SAVEd.

22.1.5 Including CA-Roscoe Sequence Numbers With PRINT/SUBMIT

The AWS sequence number attribute controls whether the CA-Roscoe generatedsequence numbers are to be included when the data are printed or submitted. You canoverride the current attribute on a per execution basis.

■ When printing data, use the NUM or NONUM operand of the PRINT command tooverride the AWS sequence number attribute. See Chapter 7, “Printing Data” fordetails.

■ When submitting data, use the SET SUBMIT command to override the attribute ifthe attribute is SEQ. (If the attribute is NOSEQ, it cannot be overridden and nosequence numbers will be included.) See 28.1, “Check Syntax” on page 28-2 fordetails.

Chapter 22. AWS: Renumbering Data in the AWS 22-3

Chapter 23. AWS: Saving and Updating a LibraryMember


■ Save the contents of the active AWS as a member in the CA-Roscoe library.■ Replace an existing member with the contents of the active AWS.

An AWS is a temporary work area. Data that is within the active AWS may be savedat any time as a member in the CA-Roscoe library. To modify that member, you mustbring a copy of it back into the active AWS. Once there, you can use any of theprimary or line commands to change the data. The contents of the library memberremains intact until you specifically replace it.

Chapter 23. AWS: Saving and Updating a Library Member 23-1

23.1 Creating a Library Member


Use the SAVE command to create a library member and store the contents of theactive AWS in that member. To do so, enter the command and the name you want toassign to the new member, as in:

SAVE INVLIST

where the entire contents of the active AWS is saved in a member named INVLIST.(The following figure lists the CA-Roscoe member naming conventions.)

23.1.1 A CA-Roscoe library member name MUST:

1. Be unique (it must not already exist in your library).

2. Begin with an alphabetic or national character. (When U.S. English is in effect,the national characters are #, $, and @.) The remainder of the name can be anycombination of alphanumeric and/or national characters.

3. Be one to eight characters in length.

If you do not want to save the entire AWS, you can include line numbers with thecommand. Only the data within the designated range of lines will be saved as themember. For example, if you enter:

SAVE INVLIST 1== 12==

only lines 100 through 1200 of the active AWS are saved in the member namedINVLIST.



23.1.2 Member Name Considerations

The keyword operands (or operand abbreviations) of commands should not beused as library member names. While this restriction specifically includes thefollowing keywords and their abbreviations:

AWS ADSN DJOB JLIB L

it applies to all keyword operands and their abbreviaions. For example, NOW is akeyword operand of the SEND command. If you name a library NOW and thenattempt to send the contents of that member to another user by issuing SEND NOW,CA-Roscoe treats NOW as an operand, not as a member name.

If you do use keyword operands as library member names, you must specify yourprefix when referencing these members. For example, if your prefix is AAA, youwould enter:

ATTACH AAA.JOB

COPY AAA.DSN

SEND AAA.NOW

It is also recommended that you do not use member names beginning with: ZZZZZor SAVAWS. Members created with these characters can be deleted when theCA-Roscoe site administrator runs CA-Roscoe library maintenance.



23.1.3 Assigning a Description and/or Attributes

When you create a library member, you have the option of assigning:

■ a member description,■ a sequence number attribute,and/or■ an access attribute.

For example, you could enter:

SAVE INVLIST 'Inventory List Program' SEQ COBOL RESTRICTED

The following table summarizes the various options you can specify.

DESCRIPTION One to 30 characters bound by a special character not foundwithin the description itself. If omitted, the member has nodescription.

SEQUENCENUMBERATTRIBUTE

SEQ Numbers to be included (beginning incolumn 73) when data submitted forbackground execution.

SEQ COBOL Numbers to be included in columns 1through 6.

SEQ s 1 Numbers to be included, starting in columns for length of 1.

NOSEQ Numbers are not to be included.

If omitted, the default is the current attribute of the activeAWS.

ACCESSATTRIBUTE

SHARED Others allowed to access and/or executeyour member.

EXECONLY Others only allowed to execute yourmember. Meant for members containingRPF programs.

RESTRICTED Others are not allowed to access orexecute your member.

If omitted, the current default is used. (The distributeddefault is SHARED. Site management can set a differentdefault. You can establish your own default through theSET SAVEATTR command.)


23.2 Updating a Member


You can update (replace) the entire contents of a library member with the contents ofthe active AWS at any time. To do so, issue the UPDATE command and the name ofthe member to be changed, as in:

UPDATE INVLIST

To update the contents of a member with specific lines from the active AWS, includethe appropriate line numbers with the command, as in:

UPDATE INVLIST 7== 49==

In this example, the entire contents of the member INVLIST is replaced with lines 700through 4900 of the active AWS.

If you want to update the last member that you FETCHed, SAVEd or UPDATEd, youcan use an asterisk (*) in place of a library member name, as in:

FETCH INVLIST

RENUMBER

UPDATE Q

At the same time you are updating the contents of a member, you can also change itsdescription, sequence number attribute and/or access attribute, as in:

UPDATE INVLIST 'New Inventory List' SHARED

In this example, the member description and access attribute are changed; since nosequence number attribute is specified, that attribute is not changed. (See 23.1.3,“Assigning a Description and/or Attributes” on page 23-4 for additional informationabout member descriptions and attributes.)


Part III. Data Sets (Browsing and Maintaining DataSets)

Chapter 24. Data Sets: Introducing the Data Set Facility . . . . . . . . . . 24-124.1 Attaching the Data Set Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-2

24.1.1 Using Wildcard Characters to Create a Catalog or VTOC SelectionList . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-8

24.1.2 Using Wildcard Characters to Create a CA-Librarian, PDS or VolumeSelection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-9

24.2 Using Data Set Facility Function Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-1024.3 Using Data Set Facility Selection Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-12


Chapter 25. Data Sets: Attaching a Data Set Object at the Terminal . . . 25-125.1 Attaching a CA-Librarian Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-2


25.2 Attaching a Catalog Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-725.2.1 Using a Primary Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-725.2.2 Using the Data Set Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-825.2.3 Selection List Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-9

25.3 Attaching a Generation Data Group Data Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-1425.4 Attaching a PDS Member/CA-Librarian Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-15

25.4.1 Using a Primary Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-1525.4.2 Using the Data Set Facility Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-1625.4.3 Using a Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-1725.4.4 Attached Data Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-17

25.5 Attaching a PDS Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-1825.5.1 Using a Primary Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-1825.5.2 Using the Data Set Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-1925.5.3 Selection List Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-20

25.6 Attaching a Sequential Data Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-2625.6.1 Using a Primary Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-2625.6.2 Using the Data Set Facility Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-2625.6.3 Using a Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-2725.6.4 Attached Data Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-27

25.7 Attaching a Volume Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-2825.7.1 Using a Primary Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-2825.7.2 Using the Data Set Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-2925.7.3 Selection List Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-30

25.8 Attaching a VTOC Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-33



Chapter 26. Data Sets: Browsing Data Set Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-126.1 Detaching Data Set Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-226.2 Locating Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-3

26.2.1 Locating Specific Occurrences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-326.2.2 Including/Excluding List Containing a String . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-426.2.3 Customizing the Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-5

26.3 Positioning the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-826.3.1 Positioning to Specific Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-826.3.2 Positioning to Name Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-8

26.4 Reattaching a Data Set Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-10

Chapter 27. Data Sets: Performing Data Management Tasks . . . . . . . 27-127.1 Allocating a Data Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-2


27.2 Cataloging a Data Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-1127.3 Copying a Data Set Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-13

27.3.1 Using Primary Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-1327.3.2 Using a Function Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-1627.3.3 Using a Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-20

27.4 Compressing a Partitioned Data Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-2127.5 Define Alias . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-22


27.6 Define GDG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-2527.6.1 Using a Primary Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-2527.6.2 Using a Function Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-25

27.7 Delete Data Set/Member/Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-2827.7.1 Using a Primary Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-2927.7.2 Using a Function Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-2927.7.3 Using a Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-3327.7.4 Delete Confirmation Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-33

27.8 Inquiring About a Data Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-3627.9 Inquiring About a Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-4027.10 Printing a Data Set Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-44


27.11 Releasing Allocated Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-5227.12 Renaming Data Sets/Members/Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-53


27.13 Uncataloging a Data Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-58


27.14 Writing to a Data Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-59

Chapter 24. Data Sets: Introducing the Data SetFacility

When working with OS data sets or CA-Librarian master files, you can use primarycommands or the Data Set Facility to:

■ Directly access data that is in a:– Sequential data set.– Partitioned Data Set (PDS) member or CA-Librarian module.– Generation Data Group (GDG) data set.

■ Produce Selection Lists that contain information about:

– All or selected volumes.

– All or selected data sets on a specific volume (for example, the VTOCinformation).

– All or selected entries on a VSAM, ICF or OS CVOL catalog.

– All or selected members/modules on a PDS (like the PDS directory) orCA-Librarian master file (like the master file index).

■ Browse through the attached data or Selection List. While browsing, you canlocate and note the occurrences of specific character strings. You can also browseother types of attached data (like an AWS) and then return to the data you werebrowsing.

■ Perform a variety of data management functions which include:

– Copying all or part of a data set object into an AWS

– Printing all or part of a data set object at a 328x-type printer or a systemprinter.

Note: A data set object can be a sequential data set, PDS member orCA-Librarian module. In the form of a Selection List, it can also be aPDS directory, CA-Librarian index, list of catalog entries, volume table ofcontents or list of volumes.

■ Allocating, deleting, renaming, cataloging, and so on.

You can perform all of these operations using the Data Set Facility or primarycommands. Many can also be performed using Selection Lists that are providedthrough the Data Set Facility.

Chapter 24. Data Sets: Introducing the Data Set Facility 24-1

24.1 Attaching the Data Set Facility


You can attach the Data Set Facility menu (see “Data Set: Data Set Facility Menu” onpage 24-3) by issuing the command:

ATTACH DSN

or

ATTACH VOLUME

If you enter either of these commands with no operand, the menu is displayed.

You can include a function code and data set name with the DSN command.

If you include a function code and that function has a panel associated with it, you canbypass the Data Set Facility menu and display the function panel. For example, if youenter:

DSN AL TEST.NEW

the Allocate Function Panel is displayed with TEST.NEW in the DATA SET field.

If no panel is associated with the function, the Data Set Facility menu is displayedalong with any information that you provided with the command. For example, if youenter:

DSN CT TEST.NEW VOL STOR=1

the Data Set Facility menu will show CT in the FUNCTION field, TEST.NEW in theDATA SET field and STOR01 in the VOLUMES field. To perform this function,press the ENTER key. (The Data Set Facility menu will be redisplayed, allowing youto perform other functions.)

If you are currently viewing a data set object, you can redisplay the menu by entering:

SELECT MENU

When the menu is displayed, you can use the command:

SELECT ALT

to bounce the display between the last available specific and generic data set name.



Data Set: Data Set Facility Menu

7 8

>

> DSN() SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72

....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....

DATA SET FACILITY

FUNCTION ==>

DATA SET ==>

VOLUMES ==>

UNIT NAMES ==>

VOLUME TYPES ==>

ARCHIVE LEVEL ==> PASSWORD ==>

PGMR NAME ==> MCD CODE ==>

MODULE TYPE ==> LANGUAGE ==>

DISPLAY FORMAT ==> (Q,S,L,H) CONFIRM DELETE ==> DSN: Y MEM: Y

A - ATTACH DSN CT - CATALOG DSN P - PRINT DSN

AL - ALLOCATE DSN D - DELETE DSN R - RENAME DSN

AM - SMS MANAGED ALLOC DA - DEFINE ALIAS RL - RELEASE SPACE

C - COPY DSN DG - DEFINE GDG UC - UNCATALOG DSN

CM - COMPRESS DSN I - DATA SET INFO X - TERMINATE DSF

U V

The fields comprising this menu include:

FUNCTION Enter the appropriate code to perform the desired action. Thecodes and their related actions are shown at the bottom of themenu.

DATA SET Enter the one- to 44-character fully qualified name of thedata set to be involved in the designated function. The namemay be composed of one or more wildcard characters.(Wildcards are described later in this section.)

If the name does not include wildcards, it may be qualifiedwith:

dsnmem A one- to eight-character PDS member orCA-Librarian module to be attached. (Thisname may be composed of one or morewildcard characters.)

v Relative generation number of the GDG dataset to be attached, specified as 0 (mostcurrent), a minus number (like -1) or a positivenumber (like +1).



VOLUMES Enter a one- to six-character volume serial number.

If DATA SET contains a specific data set name, one to sixserial numbers can be specified. Only one volume can bespecified if a generic data set name is specified. VOLUMESis required if the data set is not cataloged.

Note: To display a VTOC Selection List, include theappropriate serial number and, optionally, a data setname containing wildcards.

To display a Volume Selection List, the serial numbermust include one or more wildcards cards. If novolume ID is specified, then UNIT NAMES and/orVOLUME TYPES is required. Do not include a dataset name.

UNIT NAMES Enter a one- to eight-character unit name associated with adevice type. It can be either an IBM-defined generic name(like 3350) or a site-defined esoteric name (like SYSDA).

UNIT NAMES is required if the data set is not cataloged andresides on a mass storage device. It is also required by somefunctions (like CATALOG) if the specified volume(s) are notmounted.

Note: To display a Volume Selection List, the unit type canbe specified alone or with VOLUMES or VOLUMETYPES.

VOLUME TYPES Enter any combination of the following:

PRIVATE Include private volumes. (Abbreviate as PRV.)

PUBLIC Include public volumes. (Abbreviate as PUB.)

STORAGE Include storage volumes. (Abbreviate as STG.)

Note: VOLUME TYPES is valid only when displaying aVolume Selection List. It can be used withVOLUMES and UNIT NAMES. If it is omitted, alltypes are included in the Selection List.



ARCHIVE LEVEL Enter the archive level of the CA-Librarian master filemodule to be involved in the operation. (The module mustbe in ARCHIE format.) If omitted, the most current level ofthe module is assumed. The level can be specified in one ofthe following forms:

Lx Absolute level number (between 0 and 65535) asreported on the CA-Librarian Update Report.

-y Relative level number between 0 and 255. Thecurrent level is -0; -1 is one level older than thecurrent.

yymmddhhmmssDate and time when the desired archive level wascurrent. An even number of digits (starting fromthe right) can be omitted. They are assumed tohave the highest values consistent with the valuesof the specified digits.

PASSWORD Enter one or two passwords (established by your site).

If one password is specified, it is treated as the data set orCA-Librarian master file module password.

If two passwords are specified, the first is treated as the dataset password and the second is treated as the CA-Librarianpassword.

If omitted and a password is required, access is denied.

PGMR NAME Enter the one- to 15-character programmer name to be usedwhen selecting modules for inclusion in a CA-LibrarianSelection List. Only those modules marked as owned by thespecified programmer are included in the Selection List. Ifomitted, all appropriate modules (as qualified by the otherfields) are included.

MCD CODE Enter the Management code of the CA-Librarian master file.MCD is only required when the master file contains PROD2modules.



MODULE TYPE Enter one of the following to designate the type of modulesto be included in a CA-Librarian Selection List:

PROD0 Includes only those modules with PROD0security status.



TEST Includes only those modules with TEST securitystatus.

If omitted, all appropriate modules (as qualified by otherfields) are included.

LANGUAGE Enter the language code designating the programminglanguage type of the modules that are to be included in aCA-Librarian Selection List. If omitted, all appropriatemodules (as qualified by other fields) are included.

DISPLAY FORMAT Enter one of the following to designate the extent ofinformation that is to be included in a Selection List:

HIST Only history records for the specifiedCA-Librarian master file module are to bedisplayed.

QUICK, SHORT, or LONGThe amount of information to be included in theinitial Selection List display.

Note: HIST, QUICK, SHORT and LONG are mutuallyexclusive. (Abbreviate as H, Q, S and Lrespectively.) Whichever setting you select isremembered at sign off and is reinstated when yousign back on.

Note: QUICK is ignored if you request a qualifiedCA-Librarian Selection List.



CONFIRM DELETE Designates whether delete operations are to be confirmedprior to execution.

DSN Specify YES or NO to control confirmation atthe data set level. (Abbreviate as Y or N.)

MEM Specify YES or NO to control confirmation atthe member/module level. (Abbreviate as Y orN.)

With YES, a confirmation panel is displayed to allowverification that the designated item(s) are to be deleted.

The settings in effect when you sign off are remembered andreinstated when you sign back on.



24.1.1 Using Wildcard Characters to Create a Catalog or VTOCSelection List

The following table identifies the wildcard characters that can be used with data setnames.

Character Meaning and Examples

+ Any number of trailing characters within a level or any number ofsubsequent levels.

Example: Possible Matches:

TEST1.ABC.+ TEST1.ABC.ALPHATEST1.ABC.BETA.SOURCE

TEST2.ABC+ TEST2.ABC.ALPHATEST2.ABCR.NEXT.LOAD

** Any number of index levels (including none).

TEST3.** TEST3.AAA.SOURCE

TEST3.BBB

TEST4.**.SOURCE TEST4.BBB.SOURCETEST4.BBB.NEXT.SOURCE

* Any single index level.

TEST5.A.* TEST5.A.BASETEST5.A.SAMPLE

TEST6.*.SAMPLE TEST6.A.SAMPLETEST6.BBCCDD.SAMPLE

Any number of leading characters within a level.

TEST7.*AB TEST7.CABTEST7.XYZAB

Any number of trailing characters within a level.

TEST8.AB* TEST8.ABCTEST8.ABXYZ

Any number of embedded characters within a level.

TEST9.A*C.SOURCE TEST9.AAC.SOURCETEST9.ABEFGC.SOURCE



24.1.2 Using Wildcard Characters to Create a CA-Librarian, PDS orVolume Selection

While the examples of the wildcards in the following table use member/module names,these same wildcards can be used with a volume serial number.

Character Meaning and Exanples

? Any single character.


TEST.SOURCE(RO?) ROEROSROW

* None, one or more characters.

TEST.SOURCE(*JCL*)AJCLJCLJCLENDXJCLX

+ None, one or more trailing characters.

TEST.SOURCE(RO+) ROROEROSCOE


24.2 Using Data Set Facility Function Panels


You can use the Data Set Facility to perform a variety of functions. Each function isidentified by a specific code. The codes, shown in in the following table, can bespecified with the DSN command or through the Data Set Facility menu.

The field ACTION in the previous figure indicates whether the function is performeddirectly or requires additional information. For example, the information you providethrough the menu is sufficient to catalog a data set (function code CT) but insufficientto allocate a data set (function code AL).

When additional information is needed, a function-related panel is displayed. Whensuch a panel is displayed, you can move from it to another panel or to the menu byentering in the first panel field:

=[code.code]

■ If you enter only the equal sign (=), you are returned to the menu.

■ If you specify =X, the Data Set Facility is terminated.

Code Function Action

A Attach a data set object. Performed.

AL Allocate a data set. Panel displayed.

AM Allocate an SMS-managed data set. Panel displayed.

C Copy a data set object. Panel displayed.

CM Compress a partitioned data set. Performed.

CT Catalog a data set. Performed.

D Delete a data set, member or module. Panel displayed.

DA Define an alias. Panel displayed.

DG Define a GDG. Panel displayed.

I Inquire about a data set or volume. Performed.

P Print a data set object. Panel displayed.

R Rename a data set, member or module. Panel displayed.

RL Release unused DASD space. Performed.

UC Uncatalog a data set. Performed.

X Terminate the Data Set Facility. Performed.



■ If you specify any other code (like =AL), the appropriate function-related panel isdisplayed. If you include a subfunction code, the appropriate function-related panelis displayed and its OPTION field will contain the subfunction code.

If the function-related panel is displayed while the screens are split, you can use PFkeys to scroll the panel.

Information about attaching a data set object is described in the next chapter. Theremaining Data Set Facility functions are described in Chapter 27, “Data Sets:Performing Data Management Tasks.”


24.3 Using Data Set Facility Selection Lists


You can use the Data Set Facility or a primary command to create and attach:

■ A PDS directory or CA-Librarian master file index.■ The entries in a catalog.■ A volume table of contents (VTOC).

■ Volume information.

The information is displayed as a Selection List in the Execution Area of the screen.This allows you to issue primary commands in the Command Area at any time duringyour session.

The first line of each Selection List contains a top marker (==TOP==). If the bottommarker (==BOTTOM==) is not displayed, the number of entries in the list exceeds thescreen size. You can use PF keys to scroll within the list.

The amount of information available with each Selection List exceeds the width of80-column screens. The information is, therefore, divided into alternate displayformats. To view the different formats sequentially, enter the command:

SELECT ALT

To view a specific format, enter the number of that format with the command, as in:

SELECT ALT 2

See Chapter 25, “Data Sets: Attaching a Data Set Object at the Terminal” forinformation about displaying each type of Selection List. The information includes adescription of the fields comprising each list. The alternate display numbers shownwith the description are for 80-column screens. Additional formats (containingvariations of the information) are available at terminals supporting wider screen sizes.



24.3.1 Entering Function Codes

You can use Selection Lists to perform a variety of functions. Each function isidentified by a specific code. You can enter one or more codes per Selection List. Asillustrated in “Data Set: Selection List Function Hierarchy Example” on page 24-14,the function codes are entered in the area shown at the left of the display.

If you specify the same function code multiple times, they are processed sequentially.If you specify different function codes, the codes are processed sequentially within thefollowing function hierarchy:

X Terminate Data Set Facility.

D Delete data set, member or module.*

DX Delete the members of a PDS without deleting the data set itself.*

UC Uncatalog a data set.

R Rename data set, member or module.*

DA Define an alias for a: 1) PDS member or 2) non-VSAM data set orICF/VSAM user catalog.

DG Define a generation data group.

RL Release unused DASD space.

CM Compress a partitioned data set.

P Print a data set, member or module.

CT Catalog a data set.

I Inquire about data set.*

G Get attributes.

C Copy a data set, member or module.

AL Allocate a new data set.

AM Allocate an SMS-managed data set.

H Attach CA-Librarian module history.

A Attach data set, member or module.*

Note: * This function cannot be performed through a Selection List if the data set ispassword protected. Use the Data Set Facility menu or appropriate primarycommand instead.



The following example illustrates how you can enter multiple functions codes on aSelection List. To qualify a function, specify information in the STATUS field. (SeeChapter 27, “Data Sets: Performing Data Management Tasks” for information abouteach of the functions you can perform through a Selection List.)

Data Set: Selection List Function Hierarchy Example

7 8

>

> DSN() SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72 LINE ====1

....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6..

==================================== T O P ===================

VOLSER UNIT DSNS DSCBS CONTG--CYL--AVAIL CONTG--TRK--AVAIL

STOR=1 673 288 1=17 2 2 116 2

DATA SET NAME STATUS ORG RFM BLKSZ LRECL

ABC.TEST.ASM

A ABC.TEST.LOAD PO U 12288 1

I ABC.TEST.OBJECT PO FB 8==

ABC.TEST1.LOAD

D BASE.TEST.TESTLOAD PO U 13=3=

R DATA.TEST.LOAD PO U 12288 1

U V

The functions in “Data Set: Selection List Function Hierarchy Example” are processedin the following order:

1. The data set BASE.TEST.TESTLOAD will be deleted. (A delete confirmationpanel may be displayed.)

2. A rename panel will then be automatically displayed so that you can change thename of DATA.TEST.LOAD.

3. An information panel for ABC.TEST.OBJECT is then presented and anyremaining unexecuted functions are placed in a pending state. After viewing theinformation, you can:

■ Resume function code execution by entering the command SELECT NEXT.The next function (like attach ABC.TEST.LOAD) will be performed.

■ Terminate execution by entering SELECT PREV (to return to the SelectionList) or SELECT MENU (to return to the Data Set Facility menu). In eithercase, any unexecuted functions are ignored.

4. Finally, the data set ABC.TEST.LOAD is displayed.

Note that all function codes are evaluated before any one is executed. If an invalid orincomplete function is specified, the PG functions are placed in a pending state and amessage is displayed. To resume execution, you must either:

1. Correct the invalid/incomplete function, or2. Remove it by typing a space over it.



If multiple function codes are specified and one of them is X, all of the other functioncodes are ignored -- the Data Set Facility is immediately terminated.

24.3.2 Refreshing a Selection List

After a function is performed, the STATUS field will contain the appropriatecompletion message. (If the Selection List was using the QUICK or SHORT displayformat option, information about the affected data set, member or module is alsodisplayed.)

The following example illustrates how the Selection List might appear after performingthe actions noted in “Data Set: Selection List Function Hierarchy Example” onpage 24-14.

Data Set: Selection List Before REFRESHing

7 8

>


....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6..

==================================== T O P ===================


STOR=1 673 288 1=17 2 2 116 2


ABC.TEST.LOAD )ATTACH PO U 12288 1

ABC.TEST.OBJECT )INFO PO FB 8==

ABC.TEST1.LOAD

BASE.TEST.TESTLOAD )DELETE PO U 13=3=

DATA.TEST.LOAD )RENAME PO U 12288 1

EDU.TEST.OBJECT

U V

The more functions you perform through the same Selection List, the more completionmessages and information will be displayed. At any point, you can redisplay theSelection List with the most current information (for example, the deleted entriesremoved and renamed entries shown with their new names). To do this, enter thecommand:

REFRESH



If you include the QUICK, SHORT or LONG operand with the REFRESH command,you can designate the amount of information you want displayed. For example, toredisplay an updated version of the Selection List shown in the previous figure withoutany of the data set information, you would enter:

REFRESH QUICK


Chapter 25. Data Sets: Attaching a Data Set Objectat the Terminal

This chapter describes how you can display:

■ Data directly. This includes a:– Sequential data set,– PDS member or CA-Librarian module, or– Specific generation of a Generation Data Group (GDG).

■ One of the following Selection Lists:

– Volume Selection List containing information about all or specific volumes.

– VTOC Selection List containing information about all or specific data sets ona volume.

– Catalog Selection List containing all or specific catalog entries.

– CA-Librarian Selection List containing all or specific index entries.

– PDS Selection List containing all or specific directory entries.

To be attached, the data set must:

■ Reside on an online DASD volume or a mass storage volume capable of beingstaged. Tape volumes and offline DASD volumes can be accessed only if therequested data set has been migrated by the IBM Hierarchical Storage Manager(HSM) and HSM is currently active.

■ Not be under exclusive control by another executing task or allocated withDISP=OLD in the CA-Roscoe JCL.

■ Not use the track overflow feature.

■ Not have a variable spanned record format.

■ Not have its access prevented by site specifications made by the systemprogrammer.

Chapter 25. Data Sets: Attaching a Data Set Object at the Terminal 25-1

25.1 Attaching a CA-Librarian Selection List


You can use a primary command, the Data Set Facility menu or a Catalog or VTOCSelection List to display a Selection List containing a CA-Librarian master file index.

Depending on the data set object you are currently viewing, you can also display aCA-Librarian Selection List by entering the command:

SELECT DIR


Using the ATTACH DSN command, you can display a CA-Librarian Selection List byentering the command and the appropriate data set name, as in:

ATTACH DSN LIBR.SOURCE

If the data set is not cataloged or is password-protected, you must include theappropriate volume serial number and password, as in:

ATTACH DSN LIBR.SOURCE VOL STOR!2 PSWD MYPASS

You can also qualify the display to include only those entries that are associated with aspecific programmer, module type or language code. For example, to attach a SelectionList containing only the names of the modules associated with the programmer namedJONES, you would enter:

ATTACH DSN LIBR.TEST PGMR JONES

Finally, you can use wildcard characters to create a Selection List containing onlythose modules that meet specific criteria. For example, if you enter:

ATTACH DSN LIBR.SOURCE(RO+)

the resulting Selection List will contain only those modules whose names begin withRO. (The following table identifies the wildcard characters that can be used withmodule names.)






LIBR.SOURCE(RO?) ROEROSROW


LIBR.SOURCE(*JCL*) AJCLJCLJCLENDXJCLX


LIBR.SOURCE(RO+) ROROEROSCOE

25.1.2 Using the Data Set Facility

To display a CA-Librarian Selection List from the Data Set Facility menu, enter thecode A in the FUNCTION field and the appropriate name in the DATA SET field.The data set name can include a module name which contains one or more of thewildcard characters shown in the previous table.

If the data set is not cataloged or is password protected, you must enter the appropriateinformation in the VOLUMES and/or PASSWORD fields, as illustrated in thefollowing example.

Data Set: Attaching CA-Librarian Selection List

7 8

>


....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....

DATA SET FACILITY

FUNCTION ===> A

DATA SET ===> LIBR.NEWDATA

VOLUMES ===> STOR=1

UNIT NAMES ===>

ARCHIVE LEVEL ===> PASSWORD ===> SECRET



25.1.3 Selection List Description

The following example illustrates the type of information displayed when you requestinformation about the contents of a CA-Librarian master file.

Data Set: CA-Librarian Selection List

7 8 >


....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.

=================================== T O P ===================

DATA SET NAME VOLSER MEMS ORG RECFM BLKSZ LRECL

TEST.LIBR.SOURCE STOR=1 24 PS F 4276 =

MEMBER STATUS PSWD LAST-MODIFIED DESCRIPTION CREATED

AMODULE 8212=1112338 FIRST MODULE 12/

BMODULE 8412=8==45=4 SECOND MODULE =8/

CMODULE 86=4=22=1218 THIRD MODULE =7/

DMODULE 85=5=1233==5 1=/

You can use this Selection List to perform one or more of the following functions:

A - Attach a moduleC - Copy a moduleD - Delete a moduleG - Get module attributesH - Attach module historyP - Print a moduleR - Rename a moduleX - Terminate Data Set Facility* - Position Selection List

To perform one or more of these functions, type the appropriate code(s) in the firstarea shown in “Data Set: CA-Librarian Selection List.” With Copy, Print andRename, you must provide additional information in the STATUS field. (See theappropriate section in Chapter 27, “Data Sets: Performing Data Management Tasks”for details.) After performing the function, the STATUS field will indicate the resultof each operation.

25.1.3.1 Selecting Alternate Displays

The amount of information provided through the Selection List exceeds the width of80-column screens. The information is, therefore, divided into alternate displays. Youcan change the display to view the different information by entering:

SELECT ALT [v]

where v is the number of the display to be viewed next. If you omit the number, youwill proceed sequentially through all of the different displays.



The ALT field in the following table contains the number of the alternate display inwhich each field appears on an 80-column screen. If you are using a terminalsupporting a wider screen, additional displays (containing variations of the sameinformation) are available.

25.1.3.2 Display Format

The extent of information shown when the Selection List is initially displayed dependson whether you requested a QUICK, SHORT or LONG display format. The followingtable lists all of the information that can be provided and identifies the display formatwith which it is associated (Q for QUICK, S for SHORT and L for LONG).

If the list is produced with the QUICK or SHORT display format, you can use the G(Get Attributes) code to fill-in the fields for one or more modules.

25.1.3.3 Field Descriptions

The first two lines in the Execution Area (following the TOP marker) remain constantas you scroll through the list and provide the following information:

DATA SET NAME Name of the CA-Librarian master file about which informationwas requested.

VOLSER Serial number of the volume on which the data set resides.

MEMS Number of modules in the master file.

ORG Data set organization.

RECFM Record format.

BLKSZ Block size of the file.

LRECL Logical record length.

The remaining fields identify the modules comprising a CA-Librarian master file andinclude the information shown in the following table.



Field Name Description ALT Q S L

MODULE Name of the module ALL * * *

PSWD Non-displayed password ALL

LAST-MODIFIED Data and time(yymmddhhmmss) themodule was last changed

ALL * *

DESCRIPTION Description of themodule contents, ifavailable

1 * *

CREATED Date the module wascreated

1 * *

PROGRAMMER Name of the programmerassociated with themodule

2 * *

LANG Code identifying thelanguage contents of themodule

2 * *

SSTAT Security status of themodule

2 * *

BLKS Number of blocksallocated to the module

2 * *

RECS Number of records in themodule

2 * *


25.2 Attaching a Catalog Selection List


You can use a primary command or the Data Set Facility menu to display a SelectionList containing the names of all entries on a VSAM catalog, ICF catalog or OS CVOLthat begin with a specific qualifier.

Depending on the current data set object, you can display a Catalog Selection List byentering the command:

SELECT CAT

SELECT CAT cannot be used if you are currently viewing a CA-Librarian or PDSSelection List for which a Catalog Selection List was not previously requested.


Use the wildcard characters shown in the following table to define the selection criteriathat is to be used to determine which data sets are to be included in the Selection List.For example, if you specified a data set name as:

ATTACH DSN TEST.AQB+

the resulting Selection List might include such entries as:

TEST.ACB.BASE

TEST.AXYZB.PREV.SOURCE








TEST3.BBB






TEST5.A.* TEST5.A.BASETEST5.A.SAMPLE

TEST6.*.SAMPLE TEST6.A.SAMPLETEST6.BBCCDD.SAMPLE






TEST9.A*C.SOURCE TEST9.AAC.SOURCETEST9.ABEFGC.SOURCE


When using the Data Set Facility, type the code A in the FUNCTION field. As withthe primary command, you can use the wildcard characters shown in the previous tablewith the name you specify in the DATA SET field, as shown in the followingexample.

Data Set: Attaching a Catalog

7 8

>


....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.

DATA SET FACILITY

FUNCTION ===> A

DATA SET ===> TEST.AQB.+

VOLUMES ===>




The following example illustrates the format of a Catalog Selection List.

Data Set: Catalog Selection List

7 8 >


....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.

=================================== T O P ===================

SEARCH ARGUMENT MATCHES CATALOG NAME TYPE

TEST.Q.MACLIB 6 CATALOG.UMUROS1 ICF

DATA SET NAME STATUS TYPE VOLUME DEVICE

TEST.AA.MACLIB NONVSAM STOR=2 33

TEST.BA.MACLIB ALIAS

TEST.CC.MACLIB SQ====1 ROOG=4 34

TEST.DDD.MACLIB NONVSAM STOR=2 33

You can use this Selection List to perform the following functions:

A Attach a data setAL Allocate a data setAM Allocate an SMS-managed data setC Copy a data setCM Compress a PDSCT Catalog a data setD Delete a data setDA Define an aliasDG Define a GDGDX Delete members of PDS; keep the data setG Get data set attributesI Display data set informationP Print a data setR Rename a data setRL Release spaceUC Uncatalog a data setX Terminate Data Set Facility* Position Selection List

To perform one or more of these functions, type the appropriate code(s) in the firstarea shown in the previous example. With Copy and Print, you must provideadditional information in the STATUS field. (See the appropriate section inChapter 27, “Data Sets: Performing Data Management Tasks” on page 27-1 fordetails.) After performing the function, the STATUS field will indicate the result ofeach operation.




The amount of information provided through the Selection List exceeds the width of80-column screens. The information is, therefore, divided into alternate displays. Youcan change the display to view different information by entering:

SELECT ALT [v]





If the list was produced with the QUICK or SHORT display format, you can use the G(Get Attributes) code to fill-in the fields for one or more partitioned data sets.




The first two lines in the Execution Area (following the TOP marker) remain constantas you scroll through the list and show:

SEARCH ARGUMENTName of the data set you specified through the ATTACH DSN commandor the Data Set Facility menu.

MATCHESNumber of data set names that matched the specified data set criteria.

CATALOG NAMEName of the catalog(s) in which the data sets are cataloged. (This fieldcontains *MULTIPLE CATALOGS* if the data sets in the List arecataloged in more than one catalog.)

TYPE The type of catalog(s) searched. The types are:

CVOL Control volume.ICF Integrated catalog facility.VSAM VSAM user catalog.N/A More than one catalog and they are different types.

The remaining fields identify the data sets comprising the catalog and include theinformation shown in below.




DATA SETNAME

Name of data set matching theselection criteria

All * * *

TYPE Type of data set, shown as:

AIX Alternate index

ALIAS Alias name

CLUSTER VSAM cluster

DATA Data component

GDGBASE GDG data setbase

INDEX Indexcomponent

MASTCAT Master Catalog

NONVSAM Non-VSAM dataset

PAGESPC Page space dataset

PATH Path

USERCAT User catalog

VOLUME VSAM volumedata set

1 * * *

VOLUME Serial number of volume onwhich the data set resides

1 * *

DEVICE Device type on which the dataset resides

1 * *

ORG Data set organization 2 *

RFM For non-VSAM data sets,block size

For VSAM data sets, recordorganization, shown as: ESDS,KSDS, LSDS or RRDS

2 *

BLKSZ For non-VSAM data sets,block size

For VSAM data sets,maximum record length

2 *



Notes:

■ The STATUS field is not displayed when the CREDT, REFDT and EXTDT aredisplayed.

■ The fields STORCLAS, DATACLAS, MGMTCLAS, and DTYP are displayedonly when the IBM DFSMS is installed at the site.


LRECL For non-VSAM data sets,logical record length. ForVSAM data sets, averagerecord length

2 *

CREDT Data set creation date 3 *

REFDT Date last referenced 3 *

EXPDT Data set expiration date 3 *

TRKS Number of tracks allocated tothe data set

4 *

IN-USE Number of allocated trackscurrently in use

4 *

%USED Percentage of allocated trackscurrently being used

4 *

EXT Number of extents allocated tothe data set

4 *

STORCLAS SMS storage class 5 * *

DATACLAS SMS data class 5 * *

MGMTCLAS SMS management class 5 * *

DTYP SMS data type 5 * *


25.3 Attaching a Generation Data Group Data Set

25.3 Attaching a Generation Data Group Data Set

If you are working with Generation Data Groups (GDGs), you can attach a specificgeneration by including the relative generation number with the data set name. Forexample, to attach the second most current version of the data set TEST.GENSET, youcould enter the ATTACH DSN primary command as:

ATTACH DSN TEST.GENSET(-1)

or, use the Data Set Facility menu, as illustrated in the example below.

Data Set: Attaching a GDG Data Set

7 8 >


....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.

DATA SET FACILITY

FUNCTION ===> A

DATA SET ===> TEST.GENSET(-1)

VOLUMES ===>

When GDG is attached, the data are presented in a format similar to the one shown inthe following example.

Data Set: Sample ATTACHed Data Display

7 8

>

> DSN() SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===78 LINE =====1

> TEST.GENSET(G===1V==)

> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....

...... ============================= T O P =================


=====2 PROGRAM-ID. INVREPT.


=====4 CONFIGURATION SECTION.

=====5 SOURCE-COMPUTER. IBM-3=81.

=====6 OBJECT-COMPUTER. IBM-3=81.

The System Information Line begins with DSN(). Immediately below is the name ofthe attached data set. (As illustrated in preceding example, when a PDS member orCA-Librarian module is attached, its name is included with the data set name.)

The right side of the System Information Line shows the number of the first line in thecurrent display. This is to assist you in keeping track of where you are as you scrollforward and backward through the data.

The attached data are delimited by a top (==TOP==) and bottom (==BOTTOM==)marker. You can position the display by using primary commands or one of the PFkeys to which scrolling functions are assigned.


25.4 Attaching a PDS Member/CA-Librarian Module


You can attach a PDS member or CA-Librarian module using the ATTACH DSNcommand, the Data Set Facility menu or a PDS or CA-Librarian Selection List.

When a CA-Librarian module is attached, you can bounce the display between thesource code and module history records by entering:

SELECT ALT


Using the ATTACH DSN command, specify the name of the member/module inparentheses following the data set name, as in:

ATTACH DSN TEST.SOURCE(INVREPT)

If the member/module is on a data set that is not cataloged, you must specify the serialnumber of the volume on which the data set resides, as in:

ATTACH DSN TEST.SOURCE(INVREPT) VOL SHR=7

If you are working with CA-Librarian master files, you can qualify the informationthat is to be displayed. For example, you can specify which archive level of themodule you want attached, as in:

ATTACH DSN TEST.LIBR(MOD1) ARC -3

If you do not specify an archive level, the most current level of the module is attached.

By default, the display begins with the first line in the member/module. You can usethe LINE operand to begin the display with a specific line, as in:

ATTACH DSN TEST.SOURCE(INVREPT) LINE 12==



25.4.2 Using the Data Set Facility Menu

To attach a PDS member or CA-Librarian module through the menu, specify the codeA in the FUNCTION field and the member/module name in parentheses following thedata set name in the DATA SET field.

As illustrated in the following example, if the data set containing the member/moduleis not cataloged, you must also include the serial number of the volume on which thedata set resides in the VOLUMES field.

Data Set: Attaching a PDS Member through the Menu

7 8 >


....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.

DATA SET FACILITY

FUNCTION ===> A

DATA SET ===> TEST.MASTER(INVREPT)

VOLUMES ===> SHR=7

As with the primary command, you can qualify the information you want displayed.The following example illustrates how you can display the third archive level of theCA-Librarian module MOD1 on TEST.LIBR.

Data Set: Attaching a CA-Librarian Module through the Menu

7 8 >


....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.

DATA SET FACILITY

FUNCTION ===> A

DATA SET ===> TEST.LIBR(MOD1)

VOLUMES ===>

UNIT NAMES ===>

ARCHIVE LEVEL ===> -3 PGMR NAME ===>

If you do not specify an archive level, the most current level of the module is attached.



25.4.3 Using a Selection List

While the format of CA-Librarian and PDS Selection Lists varies based on theinformation displayed, the way you use them to attach data are the same. Thefollowing example illustrates how you would attach the member INVREPT from aPDS Selection List.

Data Set: Attaching a Member/Module through a Selection List

7 8 >


....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.

=================================== T O P ===================


TEST.SOURCE STOR=1 4 PO FB 16== 8=

MEMBER STATUS VV.MM CREATED LAST-MODIFIED SIZE INIT MOD

INVIN =1.== =4/29/85 =4/29/85 14:41 36 36 =

A INVREPT PAY52

TEST1 =1.== 11/=5/84 11/=5/84 11:42 2 2 =

25.4.4 Attached Data Description

The following example illustrates the format of an attached PDS member orCA-Librarian module.


7 8 >


> TEST.SOURCE(INVREPT)

> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....

...... ============================= T O P =================







The System Information Line begins with DSN(). Immediately below is the name ofthe attached data set and member/module name.


The attached data are delimited by a top (==TOP==) and bottom (==BOTTOM==)marker. You can position the display by using primary commands or the PF keys towhich scrolling functions are assigned.


25.5 Attaching a PDS Selection List


You can use a primary command, the Data Set Facility menu or a Catalog or VTOCSelection List to display a Selection List containing a PDS directory.

Depending on the data set object you are currently viewing, you can also display aPDS Selection List by entering the command:

SELECT DIR


Using the ATTACH DSN command, you can display a PDS Selection List by enteringthe command and the appropriate data set name, as in:

ATTACH DSN TEST.SOURCE

If the data set is not cataloged or is password-protected, you must include theappropriate volume serial number and password, as in:

ATTACH DSN TEST.SOURCE VOL STOR=2 PSWD MYPASS

You can also use wildcard characters to create a Selection List containing only thosemembers that meet specific criteria. For example, if you enter:

ATTACH DSN TEST.SOURCE(RO+)

the resulting Selection List will contain only those members whose names begin withRO. (The following table identifies the wildcard characters that can be used withmember names.)






TEST.SOURCE(RO?) ROEROSROW


TEST.SOURCE(*JCL*) AJCLJCLJCLENDXJCLX


TEST.SOURCE(RO+) ROROEROSCOE


To display a PDS Selection List from the Data Set Facility menu, enter the code A inthe FUNCTION field and the appropriate name in the DATA SET field. The data setname can include a member name which contains one or more of the wildcardcharacters shown in the previous table.

If the data set is not cataloged or is password protected, you must enter the appropriateinformation in the VOLUMES and/or PASSWORD fields, as illustrated below.

Data Set: Attaching PDS Selection List

7 8 >


....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....

DATA SET FACILITY

FUNCTION ===> A

DATA SET ===> TEST.NEWDATA

VOLUMES ===> STOR=1

UNIT NAMES ===>

ARCHIVE LEVEL ===> PASSWORD ===> SECRET




This section provides information about PDS Selection Lists for both load libraries andnon-load libraries.

25.5.3.1 Load Library Selection List

The following example illustrates the type of Selection List displayed when yourequest information about a data set that contains a load library.

Data Set: Load Library Selection List

7 8 >


....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.

=================================== T O P ===================


TEST.LOAD STOR=5 14 PO U 12288 12288

MEMBER STATUS --------------- ATTRIBUTES --------------

DOIT1 RENT REUS

DOIT2 RENT REUS

DOIT3 RENT REUS REFR AM=31 RM

DOIT4 RENT REUS REFR AC=1


A Attach a memberC Copy a memberD Delete a memberDA Define an aliasG Get attributesP Print a memberR Rename a memberX Terminate Data Set Facility* Position Selection List

To perform one or more of these functions, type the appropriate code(s) in the firstarea shown in the previous example. With Copy, Print and Rename, you must provideadditional information in the STATUS field. (See the appropriate section inChapter 27, “Data Sets: Performing Data Management Tasks” on page 27-1 fordetails.) After performing the function, the STATUS field will indicate the result ofeach operation.





SELECT ALT [v]




The display format setting (QUICK, SHORT or LONG) is ignored when a PDSSelection List is displayed. The Selection List contains all available information.


The first two lines in the Execution Area (following the TOP marker) remain constantas you scroll through the directory. The information includes:

DATA SET NAME Name of the data set about which information was requested.

VOLSER Serial number of the volume on which the first resides.

MEMS Number of members comprising the data set.

ORG Data set organization of the file.

RECFM Record format of the file.


LRECL Logical record length of the file.

The remaining fields identify the members comprising the data set and include theinformation shown in the following table.




MEMBER Name of the load module oralias.

All * * *

ATTRIBUTES Attributes assigned to the loadmodule by the linkage editor.The possible attributes andtheir meanings are:

RENT ReentrantREUS ReusableREFR RefreshableOVLY Overlay FormatTEST Test symbols

presentNEXC Not executableLOAD Only loadableSCTR Scatter FormatAC=N Authorization

CodeAM=amode Addressing

modeRM=rmode Residency

mode

1 * * *

SIZE Number of bytes of storageneeded to load the module.

2 * * *

EP Offset from the beginning ofthe load module to the entrypoint.

2 * * *

TTR Relative track address atwhich the load module oralias begins.

2 * * *

ALIAS-OF Name of the load modulewhich this name is an alias.

2 * * *

LAST-MODIFIED

Date (mm/dd/yy) and time(hh:ss) the module was lastlink-edited. (Available onlywhen site has applied asystem/release dependent IBMuser mod.)

2 * * *

SSI-DATA System status information 2 * * *



25.5.3.5 Non-Load Selection List

The following example illustrates the type of Selection List displayed when youspecify a data set which contains a source, macro, procedure or object library.

Data Set: PDS Directory Selection List (Non-Load Library)

7 8 >


....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.

=================================== T O P ===================


TEST.SOURCE STOR=1 12 PO FB 16== 8=

MEMBER STATUS VV.MM CREATED LAST-MODIFIED SIZE INIT MOD

INVIN =1.== =4/29/85 =4/29/85 14:41 36 36

INVREPT

TEST1 =1.== 11/=5/84 11/=5/84 11:42 2 2

TEST2 =1.13 =1/=9/85 =1/23/85 16:28 5 4

WORK=

WORK1 =1.=1 =2/2=/85 =5/1=/85 =7:38 51 51

WORK2 =1.== =2/2=/85 =2/2=/85 =8:45 41 41


A Attach a memberC Copy a memberD Delete a memberDA Define an alias

| E Edit a memberG Get attributesP Print a memberR Rename a member

| SU Submit a memberX Terminate Data Set Facility* Position Selection List

To perform one or more of these functions, type the appropriate code(s) in the firstarea shown in the previous example. With Copy, Print and Rename, you must provideadditional information in the STATUS field. (See the appropriate section inChapter 27, “Data Sets: Performing Data Management Tasks” on page 27-1 fordetails.) After performing the function, the STATUS field will indicate the result ofeach operation.





SELECT ALT [v]


The ALT field in the following table contains the number of the alternate displays inwhich each field appears on an 80-column screen. If you are using a terminalsupporting a wider screen, additional displays (containing variations of the sameinformation) are available.


The display format setting (QUICK, SHORT or LONG) is ignored when a PDSSelection List is displayed. The Selection List contains all available information.


The first two lines in the Execution Area (following the TOP marker) remain constantas you scroll through the directory and show:

DATA SET NAME Name of the data set about which information was requested.

VOLSER Serial number of the volume on which the file resides.

MEMS Number of members comprising the data set.

ORG Data set organization of the file.

RECFM Record format of the file.


LRECL Logical record length of the file.

The remaining fields identify the members comprising the data set and include theinformation shown in the following table.




MEMBER Name of the member. 1/2 * * *

VV.MM Version and modificationnumber of the member, ifavailable.

1/2 * * *

CREATED Date (mm/dd/yy) themember was created, ifavailable.

1/2 * * *

LAST-MODIFIED

Date (mm/dd/yy) and time(hh:ss) the member was lastchanged, if available.

1/2 * * *

SIZE Number of recordscurrently in the member, ifavailable.

1/2 * * *

INIT Number of records in themember when it wascreated, if available.

1/2 * * *

TTR Relative track address atwhich the member begins,if available.

1 * * *

MOD Number of records in themember that have beenmodified, if available.

2 * * *

USER CA-Roscoe key or TSOuser ID of the individualthat created the member orlast changed it, if available.

1/2 * * *


25.6 Attaching a Sequential Data Set


You can use the ATTACH DSN primary command, the Data Set Facility menu or aCatalog or VTOC Selection List to view a data set.


To browse the contents of a sequential data set, enter the ATTACH DSN commandand the appropriate data set name, as in:

ATTACH DSN TEST.MASTER

If the data set is not cataloged, you must specify the serial number of the volume onwhich it resides. For example, if TEST.MASTER is not cataloged and resides onvolume SHR07, you could attach it by entering:

ATTACH DSN TEST.MASTER VOLUME SHR=7

By default, the display begins with the first line of the data set. You can use the LINEoperand to begin the display with a specific line, as in:

ATTACH DSN TEST.MASTER LINE 2==

25.6.2 Using the Data Set Facility Menu

To attach data from the Data Set Facility menu, specify A in the FUNCTION field andthe appropriate name in the DATA SET field. As illustrated in the following exampleif the data set is not cataloged, you must enter the serial number of the volume onwhich it resides in the VOLUMES field.

Data Set: Attaching a Data Set Through the Menu

7 8 >

> DSN() SCRL FULL COLS ====1.===72

....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.

DATA SET FACILITY

FUNCTION ===> A

DATA SET ===> TEST.MASTER

VOLUMES ===> SHR=7




To attach a data set through a Selection List, specify the A (for Attach) function codeto the left of the data set name.

Note: You cannot attach password-protected data sets from a Selection List. To doso, use the primary command or return to the Data Set Facility menu.

The following example illustrates how you would attach the data setABC.TEST.LOAD.

7 8 >

> DSN() SCRL FULL COLS ====1.===72 LINE ====1

....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.

==================================== T O P ===================


STOR=1. 673 288 1=17 2 2 116 2


ABC.TEST.ASM PO FB 8= 8=

A ABC.TEST.LOAD PO U 12288 12288

ABC.TEST.OBJECT PO FB 8== 8=

25.6.4 Attached Data Description

When a sequential data set is attached, the data are presented in a format similar to theone shown in the following example.


7 8>


> TEST.SOURCE

> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....

...... ============================= T O P =================







The System Information Line begins with DSN(). Immediately below is the name ofthe attached data set. The right side of the System Information Line shows thenumber of the first line in the current display. This is to assist you in keeping track ofwhere you are as you scroll forward and backward through the data.

The attached data are delimited by a top (==TOP==) and bottom (==BOTTOM==)marker. You can position the display by using primary commands or the PF keys towhich scrolling functions are assigned.


25.7 Attaching a Volume Selection List


You can use a primary command or the Data Set Facility menu to display a SelectionList containing information about all or selected volumes.

If you are currently viewing a data set object, you can display a previously createdVolume Selection List by entering the command:

SELECT VOL


With the ATTACH VOLUME command, you can qualify the type of information youwant included in the Selection List by:

■ Using wildcard characters shown in the following table as part of the volumeserial number, as in:

ATTACH VOL STOR+

The resulting Selection List contains only those volume serial numbers beginningwith STOR.

■ Specifying a unit type, as in:

ATTACH VOL UNIT 338=

The resulting list contains only those volumes that reside on 3380s.

■ Indicating the type of volumes that are to be included, as in:

ATTACH VOL TYPE PRIVATE

The resulting display includes only those volumes defined as private. (The othervalid volume types are PUBLIC and STORAGE. With no qualification, all typesare included.)

You can also combine these qualifiers within a single execution. For example, toproduce a Selection List containing all volumes beginning with STOR that reside on3380s and are defined as private or public, you would enter:

ATTACH VOL STOR+ UNIT 338= TYPE PRIVATE PUBLIC



Ccharacter Meaning and Examples



??ROS1 ADROS1MUROS1


MU*S* MUAS

MURDS1MUROS1


MUR+ MUR

MUROS1


To display a Volume Selection List from the Data Set Facility menu, enter the code Ain the FUNCTION field and the appropriate information in the VOLUMES, UNITNAME, and VOLUME TYPES fields.

The following example shows how you can use the wildcard characters shown inprevious table to request information about all volumes beginning with STOR thatreside on 3380s and are defined as private.

Data Set: Attaching Volume Selection List

7 8 >


....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.

DATA SET FACILITY

FUNCTION ===> A

DATA SET ===>

VOLUMES ===> STOR+

UNIT NAMES ===> 338=

VOLUME TYPES ===> PRIVATE




The following example illustrates the format of a Volume Selection List.

Data Set: Volume Selection List

7 8 >


....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6..

==================================== T O P ===================

VOLUME UNIT TYPE MATCHES

STOR+ 338= ALL 2

VOLUME STATUS UNIT DEVTYPE INDEX SMS DEVSTAT VOLSTAT

STOR=1 4=1 338= ACTIVE NO A PRIV/R

STOR=2 4== 338= ACTIVE NO A PRIV/R


A Attach volume's VTOCC Copy VTOC of volumeG Get volume informationI Display volume informationP Print VTOC of volumeX Terminate Data Set Facility* Position Selection List

To perform one or more of these functions, type the appropriate code in the first areashown in the previous example. With Copy and Print, you must provide additionalinformation in the STATUS field. (See the appropriate section in Chapter 27, “DataSets: Performing Data Management Tasks” on page 27-1 for details.) Afterperforming the function, the STATUS field will indicate the result of each operation.



SELECT ALT [v]






The extent of information shown when the Selection List is initially displayed dependson whether you requested a QUICK, SHORT or LONG display format. The followingtable lists all of the information that can be provided, and identifies the display formatwith which it is associated (Q for QUICK, S for SHORT and L for LONG).

If the list was produced with the QUICK or SHORT display format, you can use the G(Get Information) code to fill-in the fields for one or more volumes.


The first two lines in the Execution Area (following the TOP marker) remain constantas you scroll through the display and show:

VOLUME Search string (including wildcard characters) used to build the SelectionList.

UNIT Unit type used to build the Selection List.

TYPE Device type used to build the Selection List, shown as ALL orPRIVATE, PUBLIC and/or STORAGE.

MATCHES Number of volume matching the selection criteria.

The remaining fields identify the data sets on the volume and include the informationshown below.


VOLUME Volume serial number. ALL * * *

UNIT Channel and unit address ofdevice.

ALL * * *

DEVTYPE Physical device type. 1/2 * * *

INDEX Code showing if device hasindexed VTOC and, if oneexists, its status.

1 * *

SMS SMS status of the device. 1 * *

DEVSTAT Device status wheninformation requested.

1 * * *

VOLSTAT Volume status wheninformation requested.

1 * * *

CYL (CONTG) Number of free contiguouscylinders in largestcontiguous extent.

2 *

CYL (AVAIL) Number of free cylinders. 2 *




TRK (CONTG) Number of free tracks inlargest contiguous extent.

2 *

TRK (AVAIL) Number of free tracks ondevice.

2 *

AV-XT Number of extents not inuse.

2 *

#DSNS Number of data sets definedon device.

3 *

USED-XT Number of extents allocatedto the data set.

3 *

VTOC-TRKS Size of device VTOC intracks.

3 * *

DSCBS(TOTAL)

Number of data set controlblocks in VTOC.

3 *

DSCBS (FREE) Number not in use. 3 *

%USED Amount of space used inVTOC rounded to nearestinteger.

3 *

TRKS (TOTAL) Number of data tracks ondevice.

4 * *

TRKS (USED) Number of tracks in use. 4 *

%USED Amount of space used onthe device rounded tonearest integer.

4 *

MAXBLK Largest valid block size forthis device.

4 * * *

TRKSIZE Physical size of device track. 4 * * *

TRK/CYL Number of tracks per devicecylinder.

4 * * *


25.8 Attaching a VTOC Selection List


You can use a primary command or the Data Set Facility menu to display a SelectionList containing the names and attributes of the data sets on a specific volume.

If you are currently viewing a data set object, you can display a previously createdVTOC Selection List by entering the command:

SELECT VTOC


To obtain information for a specific volume, include the serial number of that volumewith the ATTACH command, as in:

ATTACH VOLUME STOR=1

Using the wildcard characters shown in the following table, you can qualify thedisplayed information. For example, to create a Selection List containing only thosedata sets starting with TEST and ending with SOURCE on STOR02, you would enter:

ATTACH DSN TEST.QQ.SOURCE VOLUME STOR=2








TEST3.BBB






TEST5.A.*TEST5.A.BASETEST5.A.SAMPLE

TEST6.*.SAMPLETEST6.A.SAMPLETEST6.BBCCDD.SAMPLE






TEST9.A*C.SOURCETEST9.AAC.SOURCETEST9.ABEFGC.SOURCE


To display a VTOC Selection List from the Data Set Facility menu, enter the code Ain the FUNCTION field and the appropriate serial number in the VOLUMES field.Optionally, you can specify a data set name with wildcard characters to produce aqualified Selection List.

The following example illustrates how you might request information about the datasets on STOR01.

Data Set: Attaching a VTOC

7 8 >


....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.

DATA SET FACILITY

FUNCTION ===> A

DATA SET ===>

VOLUMES ===> STOR=1




The following example illustrates the format of a VTOC Selection List.

Data Set: VTOC Selection List

7 8 >


....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.

==================================== T O P ===================


STOR=1 673 288 1=17 2 2 116 2


ABC.TEST.ASM PO FB 8=

ABC.TEST.LOAD PO U 12288 1

BASE.TEST.TESTLOAD PO U 13=3=

DATA.TEST.LOAD PO U 12288 1


A Attach a data setAL Allocate a new data setAM Allocate an SMS-managed data setC Copy a data setCM Compress a PDSCT Catalog a data setD Delete a data setDA Define an aliasDX Delete member of PDS; keep the data setG Get attributesI Display data set informationP Print a data setR Rename a data setRL Release spaceUC Uncatalog a data setX Terminate Data Set Facility* Position Selection List

To perform one or more of these functions, type the appropriate code in the first areashown in the previous example. With Copy, Print and Rename, you must provideadditional information in the STATUS field. (See the appropriate section inChapter 27, “Data Sets: Performing Data Management Tasks” on page 27-1 fordetails.) After performing the function, the STATUS field will indicate the result ofeach operation.





SELECT ALT [v]





If the list was produced with the QUICK or SHORT display format, you can use the G(Get Attributes) code to fill-in the fields for one or more partitioned data sets.


The first two lines in the Execution Area (following the TOP marker) remain constantas you scroll through the display and show:

VOLSER Serial number of the volume.

UNIT Unit address associated with the device on which the volume ismounted.

DSNS Number of data sets on the volume.

DSCBS Number of available DSCBs on the volume.

CYL Total number of contiguous free (available) cylinders and the totalnumber of free cylinders.

TRK Total number of free (available) tracks and maximum number ofcontiguous free tracks.

MATCHES Number of data sets on the designated volume.



The remaining fields identify the data sets on the volume and include the informationshown in the following table.

The STATUS field is not displayed when the fields CREDT, REFDT and EXTDT aredisplayed.


DATA SETNAME

Name of the data set. ALL * * *

ORG Data set organization. 1 * * *

RFM For non-VSAM data sets,record format.For VSAM data sets, recordorganization, shown as:ESDS, KSDS, LSDS orRRDS.

1 * * *

BLKSZ For non-VSAM data sets,block size.For VSAM data sets,maximum record length.

1 * * *

LRECL For non-VSAM data sets,logical record length.For VSAM data sets,average record length.

1 * * *

CREDT Creation date. 2 * * *

REFDT Date last referenced. 2 * * *

EXPDT Expiration date. 2 * * *

TRKS Number of tracks allocatedto the data set.

3 *

IN-USE Number of tracks currentlyin use.

3 *

%USED Percentage of allocatedtracks currently in use.

3 *

EXT Number of extents allocatedto the data set.

3 *


25.9 Selecting the Display


You can use the SELECT command to reposition the display between or within a dataset object.

SELECT ALT To position to the next sequential alternate display format.

If the data set object has multiple formats, you can specify anumber with the command to reposition the display that specificformat, as in:

SELECT ALT 3

Entering SELECT ALT with no number positions you to the nextsequential format. If there is no alternate format, the display isunchanged.

SELECT CAT To redisplay a previously displayed Catalog Selection List.

SELECT DIR To display a PDS or CA-Librarian Selection List. Depending onthe current display, it will be either:

1. The previously displayed PDS or CA-Librarian Selection List,or

2. The PDS or CA-Librarian Selection List associated with themember/module you are currently viewing.

SELECT MENU To display the Data Set Facility menu.

SELECT NEXT To perform the next function specified on the last displayedSelection List. For example, assume you indicate on a CatalogSelection List that you want to attach three different data sets.When you press the ENTER key, the first data set is attached.After browsing that data set, you can view the next one byentering SELECT NEXT.

SELECT PREV To display the previous level in the data set processing hierarchy.For example, assume you attach a Catalog Selection List and fromit attach a data set that results in a PDS Selection List and fromthis list you attached a specific member. If you enter SELECTPREV while viewing the member, the PDS Selection List isredisplayed. If you enter SELECT PREV again, the CatalogSelection List is redisplayed.



SELECT string The resulting display depends on the string you specify. If thestring contains:

■ A period (like TEST.ABC), it is treated as a data set name. Ifthe data set appeared on a previously displayed Catalog orVTOC Selection List, the appropriate list is displayed. If itdid not appear in any previous Selection List and a:

1. Catalog Selection List was previously displayed, thecatalog is searched for the data set, or

2. VTOC Selection List was previously displayed, theVTOC is searched for the data set.

■ More than six characters, it is treated as a PDS member orCA-Librarian module name. If the member/module did notappear in a previous Selection List, the currentPDS/CA-Librarian master file is searched for the designatedmember/module.

■ Six or less characters, the name is treated as:

1. A member/module if a PDS or CA-Librarian SelectionList was previously displayed.

2. A volume serial number if a PDS or CA-LibrarianSelection List was not previously displayed.

The appropriate Selection List is then displayed.

SELECT VOL To redisplay a previously displayed Volume Selection List.

SELECT VTOC To display a VTOC Selection List.

Depending on the current display, it will either be the previouslydisplayed Selection List or the Selection List representing thecontents of the volume on which the data set you are currentlyviewing resides.


Chapter 26. Data Sets: Browsing Data Set Objects


■ Detach a data set object.■ Locate specific occurrences of a string with the attached data set object.■ Position the display to a specific line or to a line to which you have assigned a

name.■ Reattach a data set object after viewing other forms of attached data (like an

AWS).

Chapter 26. Data Sets: Browsing Data Set Objects 26-1

26.1 Detaching Data Set Objects

26.1 Detaching Data Set Objects

You can explicitly detach the Data Set Facility by entering the command:

DETACH DSN

The Data Set Facility is also detached by entering the function code X on the menu,any function panel or any selection list. This function code is comparable to theDETACH DSN command. (If you enter X on a Selection List that includes otherfunction codes, those functions will be ignored.)

ATTACHing another data set object causes the current data set object to be implicitlydetached. If you are detaching a sequential data set, PDS member or CA-Librarianmodule and you have assigned NOTE names, those names are deleted when the dataare detached.

If you execute a command that causes output to the Execution Area (like ATTACHingan AWS) or if you press the CLEAR key, the Data Set Facility is placed in a pendingstate and can be reattached at any time.


26.2 Locating Data

26.2 Locating Data

This sections describes how you can use a variety of commands to scan a data setobject for all or specific occurrences of a character string.

While this description assumes you are locating strings that are in character format,you can also locate the hexadecimal representation of a string. See 26.2.3,“Customizing the Operation” on page 26-5 for details.

26.2.1 Locating Specific Occurrences

You can use the following commands to find and display specific occurrences of astring.

FIRST Locate the first occurrence of a string.NEXT Locate the next occurrence of a string.LAST Locate the last occurrence of a string.PREV Locate the previous occurrence of a string.

For example, if you enter:

ATTACH DSN TEST.SOURCE(INVLIST)

FIRST DIVISION

The first occurrence of the string DIVISION in the member/module INVLIST will bethe first line of the resulting display.

To find the last occurrence of the same string, all you need enter is:

LAST

Once you have specified a search string, it is remembered and used with anysubsequent EXCL, FIRST, INCL, LAST, NEXT or PREV command that does notinclude a string.

By default, the full line length is searched for your string. You can include columnnumbers with the command to qualify the search for a single operation. For example:

NEXT 1= 3= SAMPLE

examines columns 10 through 30 for the next occurrence of SAMPLE. After thecommand executes, the defaults are reestablished. To change the column boundariesfor the remainder of your session, use the SET BOUNDS command. (See Chapter 4,“Defining Column Boundaries” for additional information.)

Also, by default, every line in the data set object is searched until it finds the string orreaches the site-defined maximum. You can limit the search to a specific number oflines by specifying the number after the string. For example, to find the lastoccurrence of SAMPLE within the last 200 lines of currently displayed data set object,you would enter:


26.2 Locating Data

LAST SAMPLE 2==

After the command executes, the site-defined value is reestablished. If you want tocontinue searching 200 lines at a time, you can either:

■ Press PF6 or PF18 to reexecute the last command, or

■ Use the SET DSNCNT command to alter the line limit for the rest of your sessionor until you change it with another SET DSNCNT command. (See the descriptionof SET DSNCNT in the CA-Roscoe Command Reference Guide.)

26.2.2 Including/Excluding List Containing a String

You can use the INCL command to display every occurrence of a particular characterstring within a given number of lines. For example, to find every occurrence of thestring TEST-DATA in the next 100 lines of the currently displayed data set object,you would enter:

INCL TEST-DATA 1==

If you do not specify a number, a site-defined maximum number of lines are searched.(You can use the SET DSNCNT command to establish your own search limits. See theCA-Roscoe Command Reference Guide for details.)

You can also limit the search for the character string to particular columns. Forexample, if you want to display every line that does not contain the stringTEST-DATA in columns 30 through 80, you would enter:

EXCL 3= 8= TEST-DATA


If the number of lines to be displayed exceeds the size of your terminal screen, pressone of the PF keys to which a scrolling function is assigned. The INCL or EXCLoperation will resume scanning for the previously specified string (like TEST-DATA).The direction of the scan depends on the value assigned to the PF key. (The searchstring is remembered for subsequent use; column number limits and line number limitsapply only to the command with which they are specified.)

If you determine that you want to see the data that follows a particular line, use:

■ The cursor positioning keys to move the cursor to the appropriate line and thenpress the ENTER key, or

■ The POINT command. For example, if an EXCL display includes line 150 andyou want to display the lines following it, you would enter:

POINT LINE 15=

The resulting display will begin with line 150.


26.2 Locating Data

Doing either of these actions or entering any primary command terminates theINCL/EXCL operation.

Note: When you create an INCL/EXCL display from a Selection List, you can enterany function code(s). If a function results in another display (like attaching anentry in the list), the INCL/EXCL operation is terminated.

26.2.3 Customizing the Operation

This section describes how you can qualify a search operation.

26.2.3.1 Translating the Search String

The current setting of the SET MODE command determines how the string specifiedwith FIRST, NEXT, LAST, PREV, INCL or EXCL is to be treated. See Chapter 3,“Controlling Character Recognition” for additional information.

26.2.3.2 Delimiting the Search String

In all of the examples used thus far, the search string has not been delimited. Withthese commands, you only need to delimit the string when it:

■ Includes a space (like FIRST /TEST DATA/),■ Is a numeric (like NEXT /519/), or■ Is the same as a keyword operand or operand abbreviation of the command (like

INCL /JOB/).


26.2 Locating Data

26.2.3.3 Qualifying the Search String

By default, the search is for any string of characters that match the search string. Tolimit the search operation, you can include the qualifier operands. These operands areWORD, PREFIX, BEGIN, EMBED, END and SUFFIX.

For example, assume the attached data set object contains the line:


and you want to search for the string THE. Without qualification, the words THE,BROTHER and THEIR match the search string. By including a qualifier, you candesignate the type of string match that is to occur, as in:

THE WORD Qualifies the string as a word; only THE matches.

THE PREFIX Qualifies the string as beginning a word; only THEIR matches.

THE BEGIN Qualifies the string as beginning or being a word; THE and THEIRmatch.

THE EMBED Qualifies the string as contained within a word; OTHER andBROTHER match.

TEST END Qualifies the string as ending or being a word; only CONTESTmatches.

TEST SUFFIX Qualifies the string as ending a word; only CONTEST matches.

26.2.3.4 Specifying the Hexadecimal Representation of a String


X'string'


FIRST X'C1'

When using the primary commands FIRST, LAST, NEXT, PREV, INCL or EXCL,you do not need to delimit the hexadecimal string.


■ Use the LITERAL operand with the FIRST, LAST, NEXT, PREV, INCL orEXCL primary commands, as in:

FIRST X'C1' LITERAL


/X'C1/ or /X'C1' /


26.2 Locating Data

26.2.3.5 Screen Positioning

If a line containing (or not containing) the search string is found, it becomes the firstdisplayed line of the resulting display. By specifying a screen positioning operand withthe command, you can control how the display is positioned. The screen positioningoperands are:



CENTERED The display margins are to be altered to center the matching stringon the line. If centering would cause an invalid left margin (forexample, less than 1), the display is not altered.






■ Reposition the currently attached data set object.

■ Assign names to specific lines within a sequential data set, PDS member orCA-Librarian module and then later reposition the display to those namedlocations.


If the data set object that you are viewing exceeds the number of lines in your terminalscreen, you can reposition the display by:


■ Using the POINT command with the LINE operand. For example, to repositionthe display to begin with line 2500, you would enter:

POINT LINE 25==


POINT LINE T or

POINT LINE B

When browsing a Selection List, entering an * (asterisk) in the first unprotected fieldfor a specific entry repositions the display to begin with that entry.

26.3.2 Positioning to Name Lines

When you are browsing data (like a sequential data set, PDS member or CA-Librarianmodule), you can assign a one- to six-character name to the line containing the string;thus enabling you to return to that line later. For example, to assign the name LOC1 tothe first displayed line, you would enter:

NOTE LOC1 or

NOTE Q LOC1

The asterisk (*) is optional. If omitted or specified without qualification, it representsthe first displayed line.



To assign a name to a line that is not the first displayed line, qualify the asterisk. Forexample, to assign the name LOC2 to the line that is five lines after the first displayedline, you would enter:

NOTE Q+5 LOC2

Once you have assigned a name to a specific line, you can return to that line at anytime by using the POINT command. To return to the line noted as LOC1, you wouldenter:

POINT LOC1

If you issue the command:

STATUS NOTES

a list of all the names that you have assigned is displayed.

If you determine that you no longer need to note a specific line, you can eliminate theNOTE name with the DROP command, as in:

DROP LOC2

Any outstanding NOTE names are automatically deleted when you detach the data,attach another data set or go to a higher level (for example, if you display a PDSSelection List after viewing a member of that PDS).


26.4 Reattaching a Data Set Object


While you are working with a data set object, you can attach an AWS, a librarymember or a job, browse that data and then return to your data set object. Thefollowing example illustrates how you can ATTACH the active AWS, browse it andthen reATTACH the data set object you have been viewing.

7 8 ATTACH_

>

> DSN() SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72 LINE ==1


> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+

...... ============================== T O P ============




7 8ATTACH DSN )

> D PENDING

> AWS (PRI.INVREPT) SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72

> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....

...... ======================== T O P =================




7 8 >

> DSN() SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72 LINE ==1


> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+

...... ============================= T O P =============






The center screen in previous example shows D PENDING. This note is provided toremind you that the Data Set Facility can be reattached at any time.

When you reattach the Data Set Facility, the display begins with the first line of theprevious display. To reattach at a different location within the same data set object,you can:

■ Use the LINE operand of ATTACH to specify the desired line number, as in:

ATTACH DSN Q LINE 5==

■ Use the POINT command to begin the display with the line assigned a NOTEname, as in:

POINT DSN NAME1

■ Use the DSN operand with the FIRST, NEXT, LAST and PREV commands tobegin the display with the line containing a specific string, as in:

FIRST DSN /DD/

■ Use the DSN operand with the INCL or EXCL command to begin the displaywith a list of lines containing (or not containing) a specific string, as in:

INCL DSN /DD/


Chapter 27. Data Sets: Performing DataManagement Tasks

This chapter describes how you can perform the following functions at any time duringyour terminal session:

■ Allocating a data set.■ Cataloging a data set.■ Compressing a partitioned data set.■ Copying a data set object into an AWS.■ Defining an alias for:

1. a non-VSAM data set or ICF/VSAM user catalog, or2. member of a partitioned data set.

■ Defining a Generation Data Group.■ Deleting a data set, PDS member or CA-Librarian module.■ Inquiring about a specific data set or volume.■ Printing a data set object.■ Renaming a data set, PDS member or CA-Librarian module.■ Uncataloging a data set.■ Writing to a data set.

These functions can be performed using primary commands, the Data Set Facilitymenu or the appropriate Selection List.

Chapter 27. Data Sets: Performing Data Management Tasks 27-1

27.1 Allocating a Data Set


You can use the ALLOCATE primary command or one of two Allocate FunctionPanels to allocate space for a data set.

When allocating a data set, note that:

■ Data sets can be created only on DASD volumes that are mounted and online oron mass storage volumes that can be staged.

■ VSAM data sets can be allocated only on systems that have IBM DFSMSinstalled. At sites where DFSMS is not installed, use the IBM Access MethodServices DEFINE command to create VSAM data sets.


You can issue the ALLOCATE DSN command at any time during a terminal sessionto allocate space for a data set, as in

ALLOCATE DSN TEST.NEW VOLUME STOR=2

INCR TRK PRIMARY 16 SECONDARY 1= DIR 5

DSORG PO RECFM FB LRECL 8= BLKSIZE 352=

Note: CA-Roscoe commands must be complete within a line (commands cannot becontinued.). While the ALLOCATE command example violates this rule, it isprovided to illustrate the type of information you can specify with thecommand.

If the attributes, space requirements, or device location for your new data set aresimilar to those of an existing data set, you can use the LIKE operand to establish theexisting data set as a model for the new one. For example:

ALLOCATE DSN TEST.NEW VOLUME STOR=2 LIKE TEST.OLD

uses the attributes, space parameters and device location of the existing data(TEST.LOAD) as the model in allocating the new data set (TEST.NEW).

If DFSMS is installed at your site:

■ You can use DFSMS-related operands to further control the allocation of yourdata set. For example, to allocate a data set with the attributes contained in theDFSMS data class DATAF on one of the volumes referred to by the DFSMSstorage class STCLMAIN, you might issue the command:

ALLOCATE DSN TEST.SMSNEW DATACLAS DATAF STORCLAS STCLMAIN ...



■ You can also allocate certain types of VSAM data sets if the proper modelinginformation is established in the DFSMS data classes. For example, assume thatthe DFSMS data class CLUSTER contains the required information to allocate amore commonly used type of VSAM key-sequenced data set. You can allocatesuch a cluster with:

ALLOCATE DSN VSAM.CLUSTER DATACLAS CLUSTER KEYOFF 64 ...

Note that in this example, the KEYOFF operand is used to either overrideinformation in the data class definition or to provide information that is notpresent in it.

27.1.2 Using a Function Panel

From the Data Set Facility menu, a Catalog or VTOC Selection List, or through theDSN command, you can display either:

■ The standard Allocate Function Panel by issuing the function code AL, or

■ The Allocate SMS Function Panel by issuing the function code AM. This panel,which is available only at sites where DFSMS is installed, can be used to allocateVSAM data sets or specify SMS class construct information.

If the name you specify when requesting either panel is:

■ New, that name is shown in the DATA SET field. All other fields in the panel areset to blanks.

■ Existing, that name and all of its allocation information is displayed.

You can then verify the data set name and add or change the appropriate information.When you press the ENTER key, the data set will be allocated using the valuesdisplayed.

The following example assumes you entered the AL function code and that you wantto allocate a new data set with the same attributes as an existing data set namedTEST.OLD. Once the information is displayed, you can change the data set name andmake any other necessary attribute changes. When you press the ENTER key, theallocation is performed.



27.1.2.1 Allocate Function Panel

The following example illustrates the panel displayed when you use the AL functioncode.

Data Set: Allocating Through a Function Panel

7 8 >


....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....

ALLOCATE NEW DATA SET

DATA SET ===> TEST.OLD

VOLUMES ===> STOR=2

UNIT NAMES ===>

UNITS ===> TRK (BLK, TRK, or CYL)

PRIMARY ===> 16 (NUMBER OF ABOVE UNITS)

SECONDARY ===> 1= (NUMBER OF ABOVE UNITS)

DIRECTORY ===> 6 (VALID FOR PDS DATA SETS ONLY)

DSORG ===> PO

RECFM ===> FB

LRECL ===> 8=

BLKSIZE ===> 352=

KEYLEN ===>

EXPDT ===> (MM/DD/YY)

CATALOG ===> YES (Y,N)

U V

The fields comprising this panel include:

DATA SET Enter the one- to 44-character fully qualified name of the data set tobe allocated. The name may be further qualified with:

+v Relative generation number of GDG data set to beallocated, specified as a value between 1 and 255.

VOLUMES Enter the one- to six-character serial number of the volume on whichthe data set is to be allocated. One to six serial numbers can bespecified.

■ If both VOLUMES and UNIT NAMES are specified and thevolume is mounted, UNIT NAMES is ignored. If the volume isnot mounted and the unit name refers to a mass storage device,an MSS mount is attempted.

■ If UNIT NAMES is specified and VOLUMES is omitted, onlythose volumes within the designated generic or esoteric groupthat have a Use attribute of STORAGE are eligible forallocation.



Use the DISPLAY DEVICES command to determine whichvolumes have a Use attribute. The Status field of the resultingdisplay will contain STR if the volume's Use attribute isSTORAGE.

■ If both VOLUMES and UNIT NAMES are omitted, anallocation to the unit name specified in the ETSO PSCB controlblock is attempted. If ETSO is not active, an allocation isattempted using the unit name SYSALLDA.

UNIT NAMES Enter the one- to eight-character unit name associated with thedevice type(s) on which the data set is to be allocated. It can beeither an IBM-defined generic name (like 3350) or a site-definedesoteric name (like SYSDA).

UNITS Enter the type of allocation units as BLK, CYL or TRK.

PRIMARY Enter the number of units to be used for the primary allocation. Ifomitted, the default is 0.

If 0 is specified and there is no secondary allocation, no space isallocated on the designated volume or unit, however a format-1DSCB is created in the VTOC.

SECONDARY Enter the number of units to be used for the secondary spaceallocation. If omitted, the default is 0.

DIRECTORY Enter the number of PDS directory blocks for which space is to bereserved. Valid only when allocating a PDS (like DSORG=PO orDSORG=POU). If omitted, the default is 0.

DSORG Enter the data set organization, specified as DA, DAU, PO, POU,PS or PSU. If omitted, the data set organization is undefined.

RECFM Enter any valid data set record format. If omitted, the record formatis undefined.

LRECL Enter the data set logical record length as a value between 0 and32760. If omitted, the default is 0.

BLKSIZE Enter the data set block size as a value between 0 and 32760. Ifomitted, the default is 0.

■ If UNITS BLK is specified, BLKSIZE is required and the valuemay not exceed 65535.



KEYLEN Enter the data set key length as a value between 0 and 255. Ifomitted, the default is 0.

EXPDT Enter the data set expiration date in the form consistent with theformat displayed on the panel. (This format is established by theSET DATEFORM command.)

If the year is specified with two digits, it is assumed to represent ayear in the twentieth century. Years beyond 1999 can only bespecified at sites with MVS/XA SP2.2.0 or higher. At such sites, theyear must not exceed 2155.

If omitted, the data set has no expiration date.

CATALOG Designates whether the data set is to be cataloged by entering either:

YES Catalog the data set.

If the data set cannot be cataloged (that is, it is alreadycataloged or you have insufficient access authority forthe catalog), the command is rejected. Reexecute thecommand, specifying NO.

NO Do not catalog the data set.

If omitted, the data set is cataloged.



27.1.2.2 Allocate SMS Function Panel

The following example illustrates the panel displayed when you use the AM functioncode.

Data Set: Allocating SMS Through a Function Panel

7 8 >


....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....

ALLOCATE NEW SMS-MANAGED DATA SET

DATA SET ==> ROSCOE.CREATE.PDSE

MGMTCLAS ==> SMS (BLANK FOR DEFAULT MANAGEMENT CLAS

STORCLAS ==> SMS (BLANK FOR DEFAULT STORAGE CLASS)

VOLUMES ==> SMS==1

UNITS ==> TRK (BLK, TRK, CYL, KB, OR MB)

PRIMARY ==> 1 (NUMBER OF ABOVE UNITS)

SECONDARY ==> 1 (NUMBER OF ABOVE UNITS)

DIRECTORY ==> (VALID FOR PDS DATA SETS ONLY)

DATACLAS ==> (BLANK FOR DEFAULT DATA CLASS)

DSORG ==> PO RECORG ==>

RECFM ==> FB KEYLEN ==>

LRECL ==> 8= KEYOFF ==>

BLKSIZE ==> 8== EXPDT ==> MM/DD/YYYY

SECMODEL ==> TEST.SMS.OLD1 GENERIC ==>

DSNTYPE ==> LIB

U V


DATA SET Enter the one- to 44-character fully qualified name of the dataset to be allocated. The name may be further qualified with:

+v Relative generation number of GDG data set to beallocated, specified as a value between 1 and 255.

MGMTCLAS Enter the one- to eight- character DFSMS management classto be assigned to the data set.

STORCLAS Enter the one- to eight-character DFSMS storage class to beassigned to the data set.

VOLUMES Enter the one- to six-character serial number of volume onwhich the data set is to be allocated. One to six serialnumbers can be specified.

■ If both VOLUMES and UNIT NAMES are specified andthe volume is mounted, UNIT NAMES is ignored. If thevolume is not mounted and the unit name refers to a massstorage device, an MSS mount is attempted.



■ If UNIT NAMES is specified and VOLUMES is omitted,only those volumes within the designated generic oresoteric group that have a Use attribute of STORAGE areeligible for allocation.

Use the DISPLAY DEVICES command to determinewhich volumes have a Use attribute. The Status field ofthe resulting display will contain STR if the volume's Useattribute is STORAGE.

■ If both VOLUMES and UNIT NAMES are omitted, anallocation to the unit name specified in the ETSO PSCBcontrol block is attempted. If ETSO is not active, anallocation is attempted using the unit name SYSALLDA.

UNITS Enter the type of allocation units as BLK, CYL, TRK, KB orMB.

With BLK, CYL and TRK, the primary and secondaryquantities are to be used as specified.

With KB, the primary and secondary quantities are to bemultiplied by 1024.

With MB, the primary and secondary quantities are to bemultiplied by 1024576.

PRIMARY Enter the number of units to be used for the primaryallocation. If omitted, the default is 0.

If 0 is specified and there is no secondary allocation, no spaceis allocated on the designated volume or unit, however aformat-1 DSCB is created in the VTOC.

SECONDARY Enter the number of units to be used for the secondary spaceallocation. If omitted, the default is 0.

DIRECTORY Enter the number of PDS directory blocks for which space isto be reserved. Valid only when allocating a PDS (likeDSORG=PO or DSORG=POU). If omitted, the default is 0.

DATACLAS Enter the one- to eight-character DFSMS data class to beassigned to the data set.



DSORG Enter the data set organization, specified as DA, DAU, PO,POU, PS or PSU. If omitted, the data set organization isundefined.

RECFM Enter any valid data set record format. If omitted, the recordformat is undefined.

LRECL Enter the data set logical record length as a value between 0and 32760. If omitted, the default is 0.

BLKSIZE Enter the data set block size as a value between 0 and 32760.If omitted, the default is 0.

■ BLKSIZE is required if UNITS BLK is specified, and thevalue cannot exceed 65535.

RECORG Enter the VSAM data set record organization, specified as:

ES VSAM entry-sequenced data set.KS VSAM key-sequenced data set.LS VSAM linear space data set.RR VSAM relative record data set.

If omitted, a non-VSAM data set is assumed.

KEYLEN Enter the data set key length as a value between 0 and 255. Ifomitted, the default is 0.

KEYOFF Enter the VSAM key-sequenced data set key offset as a valuebetween 0 and 32760. If omitted, the default is 0.

EXPDT Enter the data set expiration date in the form consistent withthe format displayed on the panel. (This format is establishedby the SET DATEFORM command.)

If the year is specified with two digits, it is assumed torepresent a year in the twentieth century. Years beyond 1999can only be specified at sites with MVS/XA SP2.2.0 or higher.At such sites, the year must not exceed 2155.

If omitted, the data set has no expiration date.



SECMODEL Enter the name of a RACF discrete or generic profile that is tobe used in creating a discrete RACF profile for the data set.

DSNTYPE Designate whether the data set to be allocated will be a PDSEby entering the value LIB When other data set types aredefined (non-PDSE), this field is blank.

GENERIC Designate whether the RACF profile identified in theSECMODEL field is a generic profile by entering either:

Y The profile is generic.N The profile is not generic.

If omitted, the profile is assumed to not be generic.


27.2 Cataloging a Data Set


You can catalog a data set using the CATALOG primary command. For example, toadd a catalog entry for the data set TEST.NEW on STOR01, you would enter:

CATALOG DSN TEST.NEW VOL STOR=1

You can also enter the CT function code, data set name and volume serial number onthe Data Set Facility menu, as in the following example.

7 8 >


....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.

DATA SET FACILITY

FUNCTION ===> CT

DATA SET ===> TEST.NEW

VOLUMES ===> STOR=1

UNIT NAMES ===>

Or enter CT before the appropriate name on a VTOC Selection List, as in thefollowing example.

Data Set: Cataloging Through a Selection List

7 8

>


....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6..

==================================== T O P ===================


STOR=1 673 288 1=17 2 2 116 2


TEST.ASM PO FB 8= 8=

TEST.LOAD PO U 12288 12288

CT TEST.NEW PO FB 8== 8=



When using the CATALOG primary command or the Data Set Facility menu, you cancatalog a data set that resides on a maximum of six volumes, as in:

CATALOG DSN TEST.NEW VOL STOR=1 STOR=2 STOR=3

You cannot, however, catalog an SMS-managed data set using this facility.

Note: If the first (or only) volume specified is available for inspection, CA-Roscoeverifies that the designated data set exists. If the data set does not exist, therequest is rejected. No check is made for any other volumes specified.

If the first (or only) volume specified is not available for inspection, no checkis made for the data set's existence; the request is honored. (This permitscatalog entries to be created for tape and DASD data sets residing on volumesthat are only accessible from another system.)


27.3 Copying a Data Set Object


You can use primary commands, the Copy Function Panel (from the Data Set Facilitymenu) or a Selection List to copy all or part of a data set object into an AWS.


You can use a variety of primary commands to copy all or selected portions of a dataset object into an AWS.

One of these commands is COPY DSN, which allows you to copy all or selected linesof the currently attached data or Selection List into the active or a specific AWS. Thefollowing example illustrates how you can copy all of the attached data set object tothe top of the active AWS.

Data Set: Copying Attached Data

7 8COPY DSN T_

>



> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....

...... ============================= T O P =================





You must indicate the appropriate AWS destination by specifying one of thefollowing:

v Copy at or after the line specified by v.T Copy to the top of the AWS.B Copy to the bottom of the AWS.* Copy after the line at which the AWS pointer is currently positioned.R Replace the contents of the AWS with the copied data.

Other primary commands allow you to copy:

■ Lines Containing/Not Containing a Specific String:

COPYS copies line(s) containing a specified character string from a data set objectinto an AWS.

COPYX copies line(s) not containing the specified character string from a data setobject into an AWS.

For example, to copy every line from the currently attached data set object thatcontains the string SAMPLE to the bottom of the active AWS, you would enter:

COPYX DSN /SAMPLE/ B



■ Between Split Screens:

XCOPY copies all or part of a data set object from one split screen into the activeAWS of the screen containing the command.

XCOPYS and XCOPYX copy selected lines from the data set object attached inone split screen into the active AWS of the screen containing the command.

All of these commands allow you to limit the number of lines to be copied, as in:

COPYS DSN /DATE-FIELD/ 9== 18== 1==

which copies every line containing the string DATE-FIELD within lines 900 through1800 of the currently attached data set object at or after line 100 in the active AWS.

27.3.1.1 Copying a Selection List

When a Selection List is displayed, you can:

■ Copy a specific range of lines. Treat the Selection List as though it is numberedfrom 1 by 1, as in:

COPY DSN 1= 5= T

■ Exclude the header portion of the list. By default, the header lines are included ina copy operation. To exclude these lines, use the NOHDR operand, as in:

COPY DSN T NOHDR

■ Include all available information. By default, only the information availablethrough the current display format is included in the operation. To include allavailable information, use the FULL operand, as in:

COPY DSN 1= 5= T FULL

For additional information about using these commands, see Chapter 15, “AWS:Copying Data Within and Into an AWS.”



27.3.1.2 Copying Unattached Data

The IMPORT command can be used to copy all or part of a specific data set into theactive AWS or a designated library member, without accessing the data set first. (Notethat when IMPORTing into the active AWS, the current AWS contents is overlaid bythe IMPORTed data.)

You can use IMPORT to:

■ Copy a sequential data set: enter IMPORT DSN= followed by the data set name,as in:

IMPORT DSN=TEST.MASTER

If the data set is not cataloged, use the VOL= operand to identify the serialnumber of the volume on which it resides, as in:

IMPORT DSN=TEST.MASTER,VOL=SHAR=7

■ Copy a PDS member or CA-Librarian module: specify the appropriate name inparentheses following the file name, as in:

IMPORT DSN=TEST.SOURCE(INVREPT)

■ Copy selected lines to the active AWS or a library member: Use the RECORDS=operand to specify the range of lines that is to be copied, as in:

IMPORT DSN=TEST.MASTER RECORDS=(1==,7==)

To copy those same lines into a specific library member, use the TO= operandwith the appropriate library member name, as in:

IMPORT DSN=TEST.SOURCE(INVREPT) RECORDS=(1==,7==) TO=WORKCOPY

■ Copy a formatted PDS directory or CA-Librarian master file index into the activeAWS:

IMPORT DSN=TEST.LOAD(Q) : PDS or CA-LIBRARIAN.

IMPORT DSN=TEST.LOAD LIBRARIAN-I : CA-LIBRARIAN only.

■ Copy a particular archived version of a CA-Librarian master file module. Specifythe ARC= operand, as in:

IMPORT DSN=TEST.LIBRMSTR(INVREPT), ARC=-3

where the module archived three levels back is copied. (If ARC= is omitted, themost current version is copied.)

■ Copy history records for a module. Use the LIBRARIAN-H operand, as in:

IMPORT DSN=TEST.LIBRMSTR(READSMR),LIBRARIAN-H




The Copy Function Panel is displayed when you specify the C function code on theData Set Facility menu or with the DSN command.

The following example illustrates how you can use this panel to place one copy oflines 1200 through 2500 of the data set TEST.SOURCE after line 500 of the activeAWS.

Data Set: Copying Through the Menu

7 8

>


....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....

COPY DATA SET

OPTION ===> C

DATA SET ===> TEST.SOURCE

VOLUMES ===>

UNIT NAMES ===>

ARCHIVE LEVEL ===> PASSWORD ===>

PGMR NAME ===> MCD CODE ===>

MODULE TYPE ===> LANGUAGE ===>

1ST LINE ===> 12== LAST LINE ===> 25==

AWS TARGET ===> 5== AWS COPY COUNT ===> 1

LIST HEADERS ===> YES

M-DISPLAY MEMBER LIST C-COPY DATASET/INDEX S-COPY SINGLE MEMBER

U V


OPTION Enter the code that is appropriate for the action you want toperform. The codes are:

C Copy a sequential data set or PDS/CA-LibrarianSelection List.

S Copy a single member/module.

M Display a Selection List of members/modules. (Usethe PGMR NAME, MODULE TYPE andLANGUAGE fields to produce a qualifiedCA-Librarian Selection List.)



DATA SETS Enter the one- to 44-character fully qualified name of thedata set to be copied. The name may be further qualifiedwith:

dsnmem One- to eight-character PDS member orCA-Librarian module name.

v Relative generation number of the GDG data setto be copied, specified as 0 (most recent) or aminus number (as in -1).

VOLUMES Enter the one- to six-character serial number of the volumeon which the data set resides. One to six volumes can bespecified. This field is required if the data set is notcataloged.

UNIT NAMES Enter the one- to eight-character unit name associated withthe device type(s) on which the data set resides. It may beeither an IBM-defined generic name (like 3350) or asite-defined esoteric name (like SYSDA). This field isrequired if the data set is not cataloged and resides on a massstorage device.

ARCHIVE LEVEL Enter the archive level of the CA-Librarian master filemodule to be copied. (The module must be in ARCHIEformat.) If omitted, the most current level of the module iscopied. Specify the level using one of the following forms:



yymmddhhmmss 0Date and time the desired archive level wascurrent. An even number of digits (starting fromthe right) can be omitted. They are assumed tohave the highest values consistent with the valuesof specified digits.



PASSWORD Enter one or two passwords (established by the site).


If two passwords are specified, the first is treated as the dataset password and the second is treated as the CA-Librarianpassword.


PGMR NAME Enter a one- to 15-character programmer name. Only thosemodules marked as owned by the specified program areincluded in the resulting CA-Librarian Selection List. Ifomitted, all appropriate modules (as qualified by the otherfields) are included.


MODULE TYPE Enter one of the following to designate the type of modulesto be included in a CA-Librarian Selection List:

PROD0 Includes modules with PROD0 security status.PROD1 Includes modules with PROD1 security status.PROD2 Includes modules with PROD2 security status.TEST Includes modules with TEST security status.

If omitted, all appropriate modules (as qualified by otherfields) are included.

LANGUAGE Enter the language code designating the programminglanguage type of the modules that are to be included in aCA-Librarian Selection List. If omitted, all appropriatemodules (as qualified by other fields) are included.

1ST LINE Enter the number of the first line to be copied. If omitted,the operation begins with the first line.

LAST LINE Enter the number of the last line to be copied. If omitted,the operation ends with the last line.



AWS TARGET Enter the destination of the operation by specifying:

v Number of the line at or after which the data are to becopied within the active AWS.

* After the line at which the AWS pointer is currentlypositioned.


B After the last line in the active AWS.

R Replace the contents of active the AWS with thecopied data.

If omitted, the default is R.

AWS COPY COUNT Enter the number of copies of the attached data that are to beplaced in the AWS. If omitted, the default is 1.

LIST HEADERS Enter YES or NO to designate whether Selection List headerlines are to be included in the copy operation.




If the Selection List is produced Through the Copy Function panel, the only operationyou can perform is a copy. To do this, type a C before the name of each entry to becopied. If you do not specify a destination in the STATUS field, the data replaces thecurrent contents of the active AWS.

If any other form of Selection List is displayed, you can perform any of the functionsthat are valid with that Selection List. When performing a copy operation, type a Cbefore the name of each entry in the list to be copied. Then, tab to the STATUS fieldand enter a destination code. The destination codes are:

* Copy after the line at which the AWS pointer is currently positioned.v Copy at or after the line specified by v.B Copy to the bottom of the active AWS.R Replace the contents of the active AWS with the copied data.T Copy to the top of the active AWS.

The following example illustrates how you can copy multiple data sets from aSelection List.

Data Set: Copying Through a Selection List

7 8

>


....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6..

==================================== T O P ===================


STOR=1 673 288 1=17 2 2 116 2


C TEST.NEW ) PO FB 8=

C TEST.NEW1 T PO U 12288 1

C TEST.NEW2 B PO FB 8==

Note: Password-protected data sets cannot be copied from a Selection List. Use theCopy Function panel or the COPY primary command.


27.4 Compressing a Partitioned Data Set

27.4 Compressing a Partitioned Data Set

You can compress a partitioned data set using the COMPRESS command. If the PDSis not cataloged, include the serial number of the volume containing the PDS, as in:

COMPRESS DSN TEST.SAMPLE VOL STOR=2

or, by entering the CM function code, data set name and volume containing it on theData Set Facility menu, as in the following example.

Data Set: Compressing Through the Menu

7 8

>


....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.

DATA SET FACILITY

FUNCTION ===> CM

DATA SET ===> TEST.SAMPLE

VOLUMES ===>

UNIT NAMES ===>

or, by entering the CM code on a Catalog or VTOC Selection List, as in the followingexample.

Data Set: Compressing Through a Selection List

7 8

>


....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6..

==================================== T O P ===================


STOR=2 673 288 1=17 2 2 116 2


TEST.ALPHA PO FB 8= 8=

TEST.BETA PO U 122 88 12288

CM TEST.SAMPLE PO FB 8== 8=

Your site management has the option of designating the utility program that is toperform the compression processing. (As distributed, the IBM utility IEBCOPY isused.) The designated data set must be eligible for compression processing by thatutility program. (See the description of the COMPRESS command in the CA-RoscoeCommand Reference Guide for a list of requirements.)

When the data set is compressed, messages are directed to a library member namedZZZZZCMP. You can use the SET DSNCMLST command to designate the type ofmessages you want written to that member.


27.5 Define Alias

27.5 Define Alias

You can use a primary command or function panel to define an alias for a:

■ Non-VSAM data set, ICF user catalog or VSAM user catalog, where:

– If an alias is being defined for a non-VSAM data set, the data set must becataloged in an ICF or VSAM catalog accessible to CA-Roscoe.

– The catalog entry created for the alias must be in the same catalog as theentry for the related non-VSAM data set, ICF user catalog or VSAM usercatalog. Attempts to define an alias with a name that causes an entry to becreated in a different catalog are rejected.

■ PDS member, where:

– If the alias is being defined for a non-load module (or is an alias in a loadmodule), the PDS directory record for the alias is created by copying allinformation from the related member's directory record and setting the aliasflag in the new directory record.

– If the related member is a load module, the related member's CESD(Composite External Symbol Directory) records are read to determine if therequested alias name is defined as a symbolic name in the load module.

If it is not defined as a symbolic name, the PDS directory record for the aliasis created by copying all information from the related member's directoryrecord and setting the alias flag in the new directory record.

If the requested alias name is defined as a symbolic name in the load module,the request is rejected if it is not one of the following types:

Control Section Definition,Entry Label Reference,Common Control Section,Resolved External Reference, orResolved Weak External Reference.

Additionally, if the load module is in overlay format, the symbol must refer toa location in the root segment (like segment 1) of the load module.

– If the requested alias name is an eligible symbolic name in the load module,the PDS directory record for the alias is created by first copying allinformation from the related member's directory record, then overlaying thefollowing fields based on the information found in the ESD (External SymbolDictionary) data for the symbol:

Entry Point Offset, Addressing Mode,

Overlay Control Information, andScatter Load Information.


27.5 Define Alias


You can use the DEFINE ALIAS command to:

■ Assign an alias to a PDS member. For example, to assign the alias XYZ to themember ABCDEFGH on the cataloged partitioned data set TEST.ALPHA, youwould enter:

DEFINE ALIAS XYZ RELATE TEST.ALPHA(ABCDEFGH)

■ Assign a data set or catalog alias. For example, to establish TEST as the alias forthe catalog named CATALOG.TEST, you would enter:

DEFINE ALIAS TEST RELATE CATALOG.TEST


To display the Define Data Set Alias Function panel, specify the DA function code onthe Data Set Facility menu, a Catalog Selection List, PDS Selection List or VTOCSelection List or with the DSN command.

The following example illustrates how you might establish SAMPLE as the alias forthe user catalog named CATALOG.TEST.

7 8

>


....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.

DEFINE DATA SET ALIAS

DATA SET ===> CATALOG.TEST

VOLUME ===>

UNIT NAME ===>

PASSWORD ===>

ALIAS NAME ===> SAMPLE


DATA SET Enter the: 1) fully qualified name of the PDS in which the alias is tobe created plus the one- to eight-character name of the member forwhich the alias is to be created; or 2) name of the non-VSAM dataset, ICF user catalog or VSAM user catalog for which the alias is tobe created.

VOLUME Enter the one- to six-character serial number of the volume on whichthe PDS resides. (VOLUME is required if the data set is notcataloged.)

UNIT NAME Specify the one- to eight-character unit name associated with thedevice on which the PDS resides.

■ UNIT NAME is required if the data set resides on a massstorage volume and is not cataloged.


27.5 Define Alias

PASSWORD Enter the site-defined OS password for the PDS.

ALIAS Enter either the: 1) one- to eight-character name of the alias to becreated for the PDS member, or 2) one- to 44-character alias for thenon-VSAM data set, ICF user catalog or VSAM user catalog.


27.6 Define GDG

27.6 Define GDG

You can define a generation data base (for ICF and VSAM catalogs) or a generationdata set index (for CVOL catalogs) using the DEFINE GDG command or the DefineGeneration Date Group Function panel.

Notes:

■ The GDG must be cataloged in a catalog that is accessible to CA-Roscoe.

■ Both the primary command and the function panel allow you to specify a retentionperiod. The retention period may be any date up to the 365th day of the year 2155at sites with MVS/XA SP2.2.0 or higher. At other sites, the maximum retentionperiod is the 365th day of the year 1999.


You can use the DEFINE GDG command to create a GDG. By including the LIKEoperand, it can be modeled on the characteristics of an existing base or index. Forexample, assume you want to create a new GDG named TEST.GDG.NEW and modelit on the existing GDG named TEST.GDG.OLD. The command you would enter mightlook like:

DEFINE GDG TEST.GDG.NEW LIKE TEST.GDG.OLD

If you omit LIKE, other operands of this command can be used to define all of theappropriate characteristics. These operands can also be used to override specificcharacteristics of the model you have specified through LIKE. For example, if youwant to use all of the characteristics of TEST.GDG.OLD except for the number ofgeneration data sets that may be associated with the new GDG, you might enter:

DEFINE GDG TEST.GDG.NEW LIKE TEST.GDG.OLD LIMIT 1=


You can display the Define Generation Data Group Function panel by specifying theDG function code on the Data Set Facility menu or a Catalog Selection List or withthe DSN command.

If you specify the name of an existing GDG when you request the panel, the panelwill contain that name and the characteristics associated with that GDG (as illustratedin the following example). You can then change the GDG name and make any othernecessary changes. When you press the ENTER key, the GDG is defined.


27.6 Define GDG

Data Set: Defining a GDG

7 8

>


....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....

DEFINE GENERATION DATA GROUP

GDG NAME ===> TEST.GDG.OLD

LIMIT ===> 15 (1-255)

EMPTY ===> NO (Y,N)

SCRATCH ===> NO (Y,N)

OWNER ===>

FOR ===> (1-9999)

TO ===> (MM/DD/YYYY)


GDG NAME Enter the one- to 35-character name of the generation data group tobe created.

LIMIT Enter the maximum number of generation data sets that can beassociated with the GDG. The value must be between 1 and 255.

EMPTY Designates the action that is to be taken when the maximum numberof generation data sets have been reached for the GDG and anothergeneration data set is to be cataloged. The action can be specifiedas:

YES Uncatalogs all generation data sets.

NO Uncatalogs only the oldest generation data set when thelimit is reached.

Note: The disposition of the data set's format-1 DSCBin the VTOC is controlled through SCRATCH.


27.6 Define GDG

SCRATCH Designates whether the generation data set's format-1 DSCB in theVTOC is to be deleted when the data set is uncataloged (eitherimplicitly through EMPTY or explicitly through a delete oruncatalog request). The action can be specified as:

YES Deletes the generation data set's format-1 DSCB fromthe VTOC when the data set is uncataloged. (Thisallows the space assigned to the data set to be madeavailable to other users.)

NO Prevents the data set's format-1 DSCB from beingdeleted, causing the space to remain allocated to the dataset.

OWNER Enter the one- to eight-character owner identifier that is to be placedin the GDG's catalog entry. OWNER is ignored if the GDG is to becataloged in a CVOL catalog.

FOR Enter the number of days for which the GDG is to be kept. It mustbe a value between 0 and 9999.

TO Enter the date through which the GDG is to be kept.

■ FOR and TO are mutually exclusive.

They are ignored if a GDG is to be cataloged in a CVOL. If anSMS-managed data set is to be created in an ICF catalog, FORor TO can be overridden by the specifications in the data set'sSMS management class.

The date can resolve to any date up to the 365th day of the year2155 at sites with MVS/XA SP2.2.0 or higher. At other sites,the maximum retention period is the 365th day of the year 1999.


27.7 Delete Data Set/Member/Module


You can use a primary command, the Delete Function Panel (from the Data SetFacility menu) and/or a Selection List to delete:

■ One or more PDS members or CA-Librarian modules.■ All of the members comprising a partitioned data set while retaining the data set

itself.■ An entire data set or CA-Librarian master file.

You can also delete the following types of VSAM objects: ALIAS, AIX, CLUSTER,GDGBASE, PAGESPACE and PATH.

Notes:

■ When deleting a data set or member/module through the Delete Function Panel ora Selection List, you have the option of requesting that a Delete Confirmationpanel be displayed. You can control this option using the ATTACH DSNcommand or the Data Set Facility menu.

– When CONFIRM DELETE is in effect, a Delete Confirmation panel isdisplayed. This panel contains the name of each data set or member/moduleyou marked for deletion. You must confirm this operation before it isperformed.

– When CONFIRM DELETE is not in effect, the designated data set(s) ormember(s)/module(s) are deleted when you press the ENTER key.

Note: CONFIRM DELETE is always in effect when you attempt to delete all ofthe members comprising a PDS.

See 27.7.4, “Delete Confirmation Panels” on page 27-33 for additionalinformation.

■ When deleting a data set, an uncatalog operation is:

– Always performed for an SMS-managed data set.

– Performed for a non-SMS-managed data set if the data set to be deleted iscataloged and the volumes on which it resides match those specified in thecatalog.

■ When deleting from a Selection List, data sets, members, or modules havingunconventional names (for example, member names containing lowercase and/ornon-displayable characters,) will be deleted.




You can use the DELETE DSN command to delete:

■ A data set or CA-Librarian master file, as in:

DELETE DSN TEST.OLD

The next example shows how you can delete a data set regardless of its expirationor retention date:

DELETE DSN TEST.OLD1 PURGE

where, if PURGE is omitted, the data set is deleted only if the expiration date haspassed.

■ A PDS member or CA-Librarian module. For example, to delete themember/module MYMEMBER from the password-protected data set TEST.OLD2,enter:

DELETE DSN TEST.OLD2(MYMEMBER) PSWD MYPASS

If you omit the password, a message is displayed. You must specify theappropriate password to delete a data set or a member/module from that data set.

■ All of the members comprising a PDS while retaining the data set itself, as in:

DELETE DSN TEST.OLD3(Q)


When you specify the D function code on the Data Set Facility menu or with the DSNcommand, the Delete Function panel is displayed.

The following example illustrates how you can use this panel to delete apassword-protected data set named TEST.OLD that has an expiration or retention date.



Data Set: Deleting Through a Function Panel

7 8

>


....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....

DELETE DATA SET

OPTION ===> D

DATA SET ===> TEST.OLD

VOLUME(S) ===>

UNIT NAME(S) ===>

OVERRIDE RETPD ===> YES PASSWORD ===> MYPASS



D - DELETE ENTIRE DATA SET S - DELETE SINGLE MEMBER

M - DISPLAY MEMBER LIST X - DELETE ALL MEMBERS

U V



D Delete and uncatalog, if appropriate, the designated data set.

S Delete the designated member/module.

X Delete all of the members comprising the designated PDS.(The data set itself is not deleted.)

M Display a Selection List of members/modules. (Use the fieldPGMR NAME, MODULE TYPE and LANGUAGE toproduce a qualified CA-Librarian Selection List.)

DATA SETS Enter the one- to 44-character fully qualified name of the data set tobe deleted. The name can be further qualified with:

dsnmem One- to eight-character PDS member or CA-Librarianmodule name.

v Relative generation number of the GDG data set to bedeleted, specified as 0 (most recent) or a minus number(like -1).



DATA SETS

(cont.)

* Deletes all members of the PDS; the data set itself isretained and a compress operation is performed.

VOLUMES Enter the one- to six-character serial number of the volume on whichthe data set resides. One to six volumes can be specified. This fieldis required if the data set is not cataloged.

UNIT NAMES Enter the one- to eight-character unit name associated with thedevice type(s) on which the data set resides. It can be either anIBM-defined generic name (like 3350) or a site-defined esotericname (like SYSDA). This field is required if the data set is notcataloged and resides on a mass storage device.

ARCHIVE LEVELEnter the archive level of the CA-Librarian master file module to becopied. (The module must be in ARCHIE format.) If omitted, themost current level of the module is copied. The level can bespecified as:


-y Relative level number between 0 and 255. The currentlevel is -0; -1 is one level older than the current.

yymmddhhmmss 0Date and time when the desired archive level wascurrent. An even number of digits (starting from theright) can be omitted. Omitted digits are assumed tohave the highest values that are consistent with thevalues of those digits that are specified.

OVERRIDE RETPDDesignates whether the data set's retention or expiration date is to beoverridden by entering either:

YES Delete data set, regardless of its retention or expirationdate.

NO Delete data set only if the retention or expiration date ispassed.

Note: If omitted, the default is NO.





If two passwords are specified, the first is treated as the data setpassword and the second is treated as the CA-Librarian password.


MCD CODE Enter the management code of the CA-Librarian master file. MCD isonly required when the master file contains PROD2 modules.

The following fields only have meaning when you specify the M option to display alist of CA-Librarian module names.

PGMR NAME Enter the one- to 15-character programmer name to be usedwhen selecting modules for inclusion in a CA-Librarian SelectionList. Only those modules marked as owned by the specifiedprogrammer are included in the Selection List. If omitted, allmodules are included.

MODULE TYPE Enter the type of modules to be included in a CA-LibrarianSelection List by specifying one of the following:

PROD0 Includes only those modules with PROD0 securitystatus.




LANGUAGE Enter the CA-Librarian language code designating theprogramming language type of the modules that are to beincluded in a CA-Librarian Selection List.




If the Selection List is produced through the Delete Function panel, the only operationyou can perform is a delete. Do this by typing a D or DX before the name of eachentry to be deleted.

If a Catalog, CA-Librarian, PDS or VTOC Selection List is displayed, you canperform any of the functions that are valid with that Selection List.

The following example illustrates how you can delete multiple data sets from aSelection List.

Data Set: Deleting Through a Selection List

7 8

>


....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6..

=================================== T O P ===================


STOR=1 673 288 1=17 2 2 116 2


D TEST.NEW PO FB 8= 8=

TEST.NEW1 PO U 12288 12288

D TEST.NEW2 PO FB 8== 8=

Note: You cannot delete a password protected data set through a Selection List. Todelete such a data set, use the Data Set Facility menu or the DELETE DSNcommand.

27.7.4 Delete Confirmation Panels

You can use the ATTACH DSN command or the Data Set Facility menu to designatewhether delete confirmation is required at the data set or member/module level. (Notethat a delete confirmation panel is always displayed when you attempt to delete themembers comprising a PDS without deleting the data set itself.)

When CONFIRM DELETE is in effect, a confirmation panel is displayed wheneveryou attempt to delete a data set or member/module via a function panel or SelectionList. (A confirmation panel is not displayed when you use the DELETE DSNcommand.)



The following example illustrates the type of confirmation panel displayed when youattempt to delete a data set.

7 8 >


....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....

CONFIRM ==> ENTER (Y)ES TO CONFIRM DELETE

DATASET NAME CREATED VOLSER

TEST.NEW 12/19/85 STOR=1

TEST.NEXT 1=/3=/84 STOR=2

TEST.LAST 11/12/86 STOR=1

The following example illustrates the type of confirmation panel displayed when youattempt to delete the members comprising a PDS (without deleting the data set itself).

7 8

>


....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....

CONFIRM ==> ENTER (Y)ES TO CONFIRM DELETE OF PDS DIRECTO

DSN: TEST.PDS.SAMPLE

CREATED: 11/=1/88

VOLSER: STOR=2

MEMBERS: 1=

Finally, the following example illustrates the type of panel displayed when you attemptto delete one or more PDS members or CA-Librarian modules.

7 8

>


....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....


TEST.CURRENT CREATED: =9/29/1986 VOLSER: STOR=1

MEMBER LAST MODIFIED

BADJCL =4/=5/88 =9:12

WIDGET =7/2=/86 16:=4



To delete the entries, enter either YES or Y in the CONFIRM field. Entering any othervalue in this field terminates the operation. (You will be returned to the DeleteFunction panel or the previous Selection List. The STATUS field of that Selection Listwill contain *DENYDEL.)

If you enter a primary command when a delete confirmation panel is displayed, theoperation is either terminated or paused. If the command is:

■ Data set related (like SELECT MENU), the operation is terminated and the actionis performed.

■ Not data set related (like ATTACH LIB), the operation is paused. The panel isredisplayed when the Data Set Facility is reattached, allowing you to complete theoperation.


27.8 Inquiring About a Data Set


You can obtain detailed information about a data set that resides on one or morevolumes by issuing the INFO command, as in:

INFO DSN TEST.SAMPLE2.SOURCE

or, specifying the I function code and data set name on the Data Set Facility menu, asin the following example.

7 8 >


....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.

DATA SET FACILITY

FUNCTION ===> I

DATA SET ===> TEST.SAMPLE2.SOURCE

VOLUMES ===>

or, specifying the I function code on a Catalog or VTOC Selection List, as in thefollowing example:

Data Set: Inquiring Through a Selection List

7 8

>


....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.

=================================== T O P ===================

SEARCH ARGUMENT MATCHES CATALOG NAME TYPE

TEST.Q.SOURCE 6 CATALOG.UMUROS1 ICF

DATA SET NAME STATUS TYPE VOLUME DEVICE

TEST.SAMPLE1.SOURCE NONVSAM STOR=1 338=

I TEST.SAMPLE2.SOURCE NONVSAM STOR=1 338=

TEST.SAMPLE3.SOURCE ALIAS

================================ B O T T O M ================

U V



The following example illustrates the type of information displayed. This exampleassumes you are using a terminal that displays more than 24 lines. If you are usingsplit screens or your terminal displays only 24 lines, or if the data set has more extentsthan fit within the screen, you may scroll to see the rest of the information.

7 8 >


....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.

DATA SET INFORMATION

DATA SET ===> ROSCOE.CREATE.PDSE

ENTRY TYPE ===> NONVSAM

MGMTCLAS ===> SMS

STORCLAS ===> SMS

VOLUMES ===> SMS==1

DEVTYPE ===> 338=

SEQ NO ===>

DATACLAS ===>

DSNTYPE ===> LIB

ALLOCATED TRACKS ===> 156 DSORG ===> PO

USED TRACKS ===> 15= RECFM ===> FB

ALLOCATED EXTENTS ===> 5 LRECL ===> 8=

USED EXTENTS ===> 5 BLKSIZE ===> 8==

ALLOCATED DIR BLKS ===> 25 KEYLEN ===> =

USED DIR BLKS ===> 22 KEY OFF ===>

NUMBER OF MEMBERS ===> 127 SECURITY ===> NONE

UNITS ===> TRK CREATED ===> 11/=4/85

1ST EXTENT ===> 1=8 ACCESSED ===> =3/2=/86

SECONDARY EXTENTS ===> 12 EXPIRATION ===>

EXTENT NO. 1ST TRACK (CCHH) LAST TRACK (CCHH) TRACKS

---------- ---------------- ----------------- ------

1 7425 (=1EF====) 7532 (=1F6===2) 1=8

2 12755 (=352===5) 12766 (=353===1) 12

3 12767 (=353===2) 12778 (=353===D) 12

4 12779 (=353===E) 1279= (=354===A) 12

5 12791 (=354===B) 128=2 (=355===7) 12

================================= B O T T O M ==============

U V

The information is divided into two parts. The first describes the data set itself; thesecond provides specific information about each extent.

The data set information includes:

DATA SET Name of the data set about which information is desired.

ENTRY TYPE Catalog entry type. (For cataloged data sets only.)

MGMTCLAS SMS management class.

STORCLAS SMS storage class.



VOLUMES Serial number of the volume(s) on which the data setresides. A maximum of six volumes can be shown.

DEVTYPE Name of the unit on which the data set resides. Amaximum of six units can be shown.

SEQ NO Sequence number of the data set on tape volume.

DATACLAS SMS data class.

DSNTYPE SMS data set type. This field will be LIB when the data setis a PDSE, and will be blank when another data set type(non-PDSE) has been defined.

ALLOCATED TRACKSTotal number of tracks allocated on the first (or only)volume.

USED TRACKS Number of tracks used on the first (or only) volume.

ALLOCATED EXTENTSTotal number of extents allocated on the first (or only)volume.

USED EXTENTS Number of extents used on the first (or only) volume.

ALLOCATED DIR BLOCKSNumber of directory blocks allocated.

USED DIR BLOCKS Number of directory blocks used.

NUMBER OF MEMBERSNumber of members in the PDS or modules in aCA-Librarian master file.

DSORG Data set organization.

RECFM Record format or record organization (if a VSAM data set).

LRECL Logical record length or average record length (if a VSAMdata set).

BLKSIZE Block size or maximum record length (if a VSAM data set).

KEYLEN Key length.



KEYOFF Key offset.

SECURITY Security status of the data set, shown as:

nnnn Name of the site security package (like RACF,ACF2, TOP SECRET).

PWWR Password required for WRITE access.

PWRD Password required for READ access.

UNITS Allocation unit type, shown as: ABS, BLK, BYT, CYL,KB, MB or TRK.

1ST EXTENT Number of allocation units in the first extent.

SECONDARY EXTENTNumber of allocation units for each subsequent extent.

CREATED Creation date.

ACCESSED Date last referenced (for example, data set opened).

EXPIRATION Expiration date.

The information about the extents includes:

EXTENT NO. Extent number or SUL.

SUL appears if the data set has standard user labels. Whenpresent, the fields ALLOCATED TRACKS, USEDTRACKS, ALLOCATED EXTENTS and USED EXTENTSwill not include the space allocated to the user label extent.

1ST TRACK (CCHH) Starting CCHH address of the extent (in hexadecimal) andthe relative number on the volume (in EBCDIC).

LAST TRACK CCHH) Ending CCHH address of the extent (in hexadecimal) andthe relative number on the volume (in EBCDIC).

TRACKS Number of tracks allocated.


27.9 Inquiring About a Volume


You can use the INFO command to obtain detailed information about a volume, as in:

INFO VOL STOR=1

or, specifying the I function code and volume serial number on the Data Set Facilitymenu, as in the following example.

Data Set: Inquiring About Volumes Through a Menu

7 8

>


....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.

DATA SET FACILITY

FUNCTION ===> I

DATA SET ===>

VOLUMES ===> STOR=1

Or specifying the I function code on a Volume Selection List, as in the followingexample.

7 8

>


....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.

=================================== T O P ===================

VOLUME UNIT TYPE MATCHES

STOR+ 338= PRIVATE 2

VOLUME STATUS UNIT DEVTYPE CONTG--CYL--AVAIL CONTG--TRK

I STOR=1 4=1 338= 1 1 15

STOR=2 4== 338= 2 13 31

================================ B O T T O M ================

U V

The following example illustrates the type of information displayed. If you have splitthe screen so that all of the information is not displayed, you can scroll the display.



Data Set: Volume Information Display

7 8

>


....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.

VOLUME INFORMATION

VOLUME ==> STOR=1 ADDRESS ==> 4== DEVTYPE ==> 338=

DEVICE STATUS => A VTOC INDEX => ACTIV

VOLUME STATUS => PRIV SMS CONTROL => NO

TOTAL TRACKS ON VOLUME => 2655= MAXIMUM BLOCK SIZE => 3276=

TOTAL TRAKS USED => 26239 TRACK SIZE => 47968

PERCENT OF VOLUME USED => 96 TRACKS PER CYLINDER => 15

CONTIG. FREE CYLINDERS => 8 DATA SETS => 647

TOTAL FREE CYLINDERS => 49 VTOC TRACKS => 15

CONTIG. FREE TRACKS => 127 TOTAL DSCBS => 795

TOTAL FREE TRACKS => 1311 FREE DSCBS => 117

FREE EXTENTS => 172 PERCENT OF VTOC USED=> 85

U V

The volume information includes:

VOLUME Serial number of the device.

ADDRESS Channel and unit address of the device.

DEVTYPE Physical device type.

DEVICE STATUS Status of the device at the time the information isrequested, shown in the form:

��─ ──┬ ┬─── ──┬ ┬────── ──┬ ┬──── ───────────────────�� └ ┘─x─ └ ┘─-yyy─ └ ┘─-z─

where one or all of the following information may bedisplayed.

x is shown as:

A = Allocated.C = Console.F = Offline.O = Online.S = System Residence Volume.



yyy is shown as:

BOX = Hardware error.BSY = Busy.MTP = Mount pending.NRD = Not readyPND = Offline pending.PUL = Unload pending.RAL = Restricted to allocation.SPD = Suspended due to ASM use.SYS = Allocated to system.

z is shown as:

M = Multi-system assignment.P = Reserve pending.R = Reserved/shared/exclusive control.

VOLUME STATUS Status of the volume at the time the information isrequested, shown in the form:

ttt/uuuuu

where ttt is shown as:

PRIV = Volume mounted PRIVATE.PUB = Volume mounted PUBLIC.STRG = Volume mounted STORAGE.

uuuuu is shown as:

RSDT = Volume is resident.RSERV = Volume is reserved.REMOV = Volume is removable.

TOTAL TRACKS ON VOLUMEMaximum number of data tracks on the device.

TOTAL TRACKS USEDNumber of tracks in use on the device.

PERCENT OF VOLUME USEDAmount of space used on the device rounded to the nearestinteger.

CONTIG. FREE CYLINDERSNumber of free cylinders in the largest contiguous extent.

TOTAL FREE CYLINDERSTotal number of free cylinders on the device.



CONTIG. FREE TRACKSNumber of free tracks in the largest contiguous extent.

TOTAL FREE TRACKSTotal number of free tracks on the device.

FREE EXTENTS Number of extents not in use.

VTOC INDEX Code indicating whether the device has an indexed VTOCand the current status if one exists. The code is shown as:

NONE = Device has no indexed VTOC.

ACTIVE = Device has an indexed VTOC that is inuse.

DISABLED = Device has an indexed VTOC that isinactive.

CREATED = Device has an indexed VTOC that isnever used.

SMS CONTROL SMS status of the device shown as:

NO = Not SMS managed.INIT = SMS managed in initial status.YES = Volume is managed by SMS.

MAXIMUM BLOCK SIZELargest valid block size for this device.

TRACK SIZE Number of bytes per device track.

TRACKS PER CYLINDERNumber of tracks per device cylinder.

DATA SETS Number of data sets defined on the device.

VTOC TRACKS Size of the device VTOC in tracks.

TOTAL DSCBS Maximum number of Data Set Control Blocks in theVTOC.

FREE DSCBS Number of Data Set Control Blocks not used in theVTOC.

PERCENT OF VTOC USEDAmount of space used in the VTOC rounded to the nearestinteger.


27.10 Printing a Data Set Object


You can use a primary command, the Print Function panel (from the Data Set Facilitymenu) or a Selection List to print all or part of a data set object at a 328x-type printeror system printer.

When the data are scheduled for printing, a message is displayed. It contains theprinting location, tag (if specified) and print request number assigned by CA-Roscoe.Once scheduled, all references to a specific print request must be by its tag or number.


You can use the PRINT DSN command to print all or part of the currently attacheddata set object. For example, to print the entire contents of the currently attached anddisplayed data, all you need enter is:

PRINT DSN

All of the operands of the PRINT command can be used when printing attached data.For example, to print only lines 5 through 25 of the currently attached data, you wouldenter:

PRINT DSN 5 25

Note: See Chapter 7, “Printing Data” for additional information about the PRINTcommand, and how requests can be monitored and controlled.



27.10.1.1 Printing a Selection List

When a Selection List is displayed, you can:

■ Print a specific range of lines by treating the Selection List as though it isnumbered from 1 by 1, as in:

PRINT DSN 1= 5=

■ Exclude the header portion of the list. By default, the header lines are included inthe operation. To exclude these lines, use the NOHDR operand, as in:

PRINT DSN NOHDR

■ Include all available information. By default, only the information availablethrough the current display format is printed. To include all available information,use the FULL operand, as in:

PRINT DSN 1= 5= FULL




The Print Function panel is displayed when you specify the P function code on theData Set Facility menu or with the DSN command.

The following example illustrates how you can use this panel to print a copy ofTEST.SAMPLE.SOURCE.

Data Set: Printing a Data Set Object

7 8

>


....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6...

PRINT DATA SET

OPTION ===> P

DATA SET ===> TEST.SAMPLE.SOURCE

VOLUMES ===> MUROS1

UNIT NAMES ===>

ARCHIVE LEVEL ===> PASSWORD ===>



1ST LINE ===> 1 LAST LINE ===> 999999 NOTIFY ===>

TAG NAME ===> SEPARATOR ===> YES FORCEALIGN ===> NO

DEST ===> PR17 COPIES ===> 1 CLASS ===> =

PAGE WIDTH ===> PAGE LEN ===> SEQ NUMBRS ===> YES

TYPE/FORMAT ===> DEF TOP MARGIN ===> BOT MARGIN ===>

1ST COL ===> 1 LAST COL ===> 32767

M-DISPLAY MEMBER LIST P-PRINT DATESET/INDEX S-PRINT SINGLE MEMBER

U V



P Print a sequential data set, PDS/CA-Librarian SelectionList.

S Print a single member/module.

M Display a Selection List of members/modules.

DATA SETS Enter the one- to 44-character fully qualified name of the dataset to be printed. The name can be further qualified with:


v Relative generation number of the GDG data set tobe printed, specified as 0 (most recent) or a minusnumber (as in -1).



VOLUMES Enter the one- to six-character serial number of the volume onwhich the data set resides. One to six volumes can be specified.This field is required if the data set is not cataloged.

UNIT NAMES Enter the one- to eight-character unit name associated with thedevice type(s) on which the data set resides. It can be either anIBM-defined generic name (as in 3350) or a site-defined esotericname (as in SYSDA). This field is required if the data set is notcataloged and resides on a mass storage device.

ARCHIVE LEVEL Enter the archive level of the CA-Librarian master file module tobe printed. (The module must be in ARCHIE format.) Ifomitted, the most current level of the module is printed. Thelevel can be specified as:



yymmddhhmmssDate and time when the desired archive level wascurrent. An even number of digits (starting from theright) can be omitted. Omitted digits are assumed tohave the highest values that are consistent with thevalues of those digits that are specified.



If two passwords are specified, the first is treated as the data setpassword and the second is treated as the CA-Librarianpassword.




PGMR NAME Enter the one- to 15-character programmer name to be usedwhen selecting modules for inclusion in a CA-Librarian SelectionList. Only those modules marked as owned by the specifiedprogrammer are included in the Selection List. If omitted, allappropriate modules (as qualified by the other fields) areincluded.


MODULE TYPE Enter one of the following to designate the type of modules to beincluded in a CA-Librarian Selection List:





If omitted, all appropriate modules (as qualified by other fields)are included.

LANGUAGE Enter the language code designating the programming languagetype of the modules that are to be included in a CA-LibrarianSelection List. If omitted, all appropriate modules (as qualifiedby other fields) are included.

You can use the following fields to customize the print operation.

1ST LINE Enter the number of the line at which the print operation is tobegin. If omitted, the first line is assumed.

LAST LINE Enter the number of the last line to be included in the printoperation. If omitted, the end of the data set object is assumed.

While Selection Lists do not contain line numbers, treat them asthough they are numbered from 1 by 1.



NOTIFY Designate whether you want an RPS notification messagedisplayed when this data are printed by specifying either:

YES Display notification message.NO Do not display message.

If omitted, the site defined value is used. Site management hasthe option of prohibiting the use of NOTIFY.

TAG NAME Enter the name to be assigned to the print request. The namecannot exceed eight characters, must start with an alphabeticcharacter and be bound by apostrophes (').

SEPARATOR Designate whether separators are required by specifying either:

YES Separators are required.NO Separators are not required.

The default is site-defined.

FORCEALIGN Designate whether physical page alignment is required byspecifying either:

YES Physical page alignment is to be forced (forexample, there is to be a page eject for eachseparator and body page).

NO Physical page alignment is not required.

If omitted, the site-defined value is used.

DEST Enter the name of the printing location where the request is toprint. Use this operand to override the current printing locationfor this execution.

COPIES Enter the number of copies of the request to be printed. Themaximum number is a site-defined value between 1 and 255.The default is 1 copy.

CLASS Enter the print class to be used at the location where the requestis to be printed. (Site management will tell you which classes arevalid for 328x-type printers and which are valid for systemprinters.)

PAGE WIDTH Enter the width of the paper in printing columns as a numericvalue between 0 and 255. The default is site-defined.



PAGE LEN Enter the length of the paper in number of print lines as anumeric value between 0 and 99. On printers with the hardwarecapability to set page length, the number must be the samelength as specified to the printer. The default is site-defined.

SEQ NUMBRS Designate whether sequence number are to be printed byspecifying either:

YES Designates that sequence numbers are to be printed.

NO Designates that sequence numbers are not to beprinted.

If omitted, the default is YES.

TYPE/FORMAT Designate the format of the output by specifying either:

DEF (Default.) A top and bottom margin may be set.

ANS ANSI print control characters are recognized.

MCC Machine printer control characters are recognized.

DUMP Format each line with offsets, hexadecimal data andEBCDIC data to the right of the line.

CHEX Format each line with offsets and hexadecimal datato the right of the line.

VHEX Format each line in character data with hexadecimaldata shown vertically below.

TOP MARGIN v (Recognized only with TYPE DEF.) Enter the number of blanklines to be skipped from the top of the page before printingbegins. v can be 0 through 99. The default is site-defined.

BOT MARGIN v (Recognized only with TYPE DEF.) Enter the number of blanklines to be skipped at the bottom of the page. v can be 0through 99. The default is site-defined.



1ST COL Number of the column at which the print operation is to start.The value must be between 1 and the maximum length of theline. If omitted, the default is 1.

LAST COL Number of the column at which the print operation is to stop.The value must be greater than the starting column and notexceed the maximum line length. If omitted, the maximum linelength is assumed. (The maximum line length of data set objectsis 32,767.)


If the Selection List is produced through the Print Function panel, you can onlyperform a print operation.

If a Catalog, CA-Librarian, PDS, Volume or VTOC Selection List is displayed, youcan perform any of the functions that are valid with that Selection List.

To print one or more entries, type a P before the name of each entry. By default, therequest will print at the printing location assigned for the terminal you are using. Toprint at a different location, tab to the STATUS field and enter the appropriatedestination name.

The following example illustrates how you can print multiple entries from a SelectionList.

Printing Through a Selection List

7 8

>


....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6..

==================================== T O P ===================


STOR=1 673 288 1=17 2 2 116 2


P TEST.NEW PO FB 8=

TEST.NEW1 PO U 12288 1

P TEST.NEW2 PR99 PO FB 8==

In the preceding example, the data set TEST.NEW will print at the terminal's defaultprinting location. The data set TEST.NEW2 will print at the location identified (in theSTATUS field) as PR99.


27.11 Releasing Allocated Space

27.11 Releasing Allocated Space

You can release DASD space allocated to one of your data sets using the RELEASEprimary command, as in:

RELEASE DSN ABC.TEST.ASM

or, by entering the RL function code and data set name on the Data Set Facility menu,as in the following example.

7 8 >


....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.

DATA SET SELECTION MENU

FUNCTION ===> RL

DATA SET ===> ABC.TEST.ASM

VOLUMES ===>

or, by entering the RL function code on a Catalog or VTOC Selection List, as in thefollowing example.

Data Set: Release Space Through a Selection List

7 8

>


....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6..

==================================== T O P ===================


STOR=1 673 288 1=17 2 2 116 2


RL ABC.TEST.ASM PO FB 8= 8=


ABC.TEST.OBJECT PO FB 8== 8=


27.12 Renaming Data Sets/Members/Modules


You can use a primary command, the Data Set Facility menu or a Selection List torename a:

■ Data set (sequential or PDS) or CA-Librarian master file.■ PDS member or CA-Librarian module.

You can also rename the following types of VSAM objects: AIX, CLUSTER, DATA,INDEX, PAGESPACE and PATH.

Notes:

■ The volumes on which the data set resides must be mounted and online.

■ A recatalog operation is:

– Always performed for an SMS-managed data set.

– Performed for a non-SMS-managed data set if the data set to be renamed iscataloged and the volumes on which the rename is performed match thosespecified in the catalog.


Use the RENAME command to change the name of a:

■ Data set or CA-Librarian master file, as in:

RENAME DSN TEST.OLD NEWNAME TEST.NEW

■ PDS member or CA-Librarian module, as in:

RENAME DSN TEST.OLD1(MEMOLD) NEWNAME MEMNEW

If the designated data set is password-protected, you must include the password withthe command, as in

RENAME DSN TEST.OLDNAME NEWNAME TEST.NEWNAME PSWD MYPSS

If the password is omitted, a message will be displayed.




If you specify an R function code on the Data Set Facility menu or with the DSNcommand, the Rename Function panel is displayed.

The following example illustrates how you might use this panel to rename a memberof a password-protected data set.

Data Set: Renaming Through the Menu

7 8

>


....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....

RENAME DATA SET

OPTION ===> S

DATA SET ===> TEST.OLD1(MEMOLD)

VOLUME(S) ===>

UNIT NAME(S) ===>

PASSWORD ===> MYPASS



NEW DATA SET ===> MEMNEW

M - DISPLAY MEMBER LIST S - RENAME SINGLE MEMBER

R - RENAME ENTIRE DATA SET

U V


OPTION Enter the code that is appropriate to perform the desired action.The codes are:

R Rename a data set.

S Rename a single member/module.

M Display a Selection List of members/modules. (Use thefield PGMR NAME, MODULE TYPE and LANGUAGEto produce a qualified CA-Librarian Selection List.)

DATA SET Enter the one- to 44-character fully qualified name of the dataset to be renamed. The name may be qualified with:




DATA SET

(cont.)

v Relative generation number of the GDG data set tobe renamed, specified as 0 (most current) or a minusnumber (like -1).

VOLUMES Enter the one- to six-character serial number of the volume onwhich the data set resides. One to six volumes can be specified.VOLUMES is required if the data set is not cataloged.

UNIT NAMES Enter the one- to eight-character unit name associated with thedevice type(s) on which the data set is to be allocated. It can beeither an IBM-defined generic name (like 3350) or a site-definedesoteric name (like SYSDA) This field is required if the data setis not cataloged and resides on a mass storage volume.

ARCHIVE LEVEL Enter the archive level of the CA-Librarian master file module tobe renamed. (The module must be in ARCHIE format.) Ifomitted, the most current level of the module is renamed. Thelevel can be specified as:



yymmddhhmmssDate and time when the desired archive level wascurrent. An even number of digits (starting from theright) can be omitted. Omitted digits are assumed tohave the highest values that are consistent with thevalues of those digits that are specified.

PASSWORD Enter one or two passwords (established by the site). If onepassword is specified, it is treated as the data set orCA-Librarian master file module password.

If two passwords are specified, the first is treated as the data setpassword and the second is treated as the CA-Librarianpassword.




MCD CODE Enter the management code of the CA-Librarian master file.MCD is only required when the master file contains PROD2modules.

The next three fields only have meaning when you specify the M option to display alist of member/module names.

PGMR NAME Enter the one- to 15-character programmer name to be used whenselecting modules for inclusion in a CA-Librarian Selection List.Only those modules marked as owned by the specified programmerare included in the Selection List. If omitted, all modules areincluded.

MODULE TYPEEnter the type of modules to be included in a CA-LibrarianSelection List by specifying one of the following:




TEST Includes only those modules with TEST security status.

LANGUAGE Enter the CA-Librarian language code designating the programminglanguage type of the modules that are to be included in aCA-Librarian Selection List.

NEW DATA SETEnter the new data set or member/module name specified as either:

dsn One- to 44-character fully qualified new name for thedata set.

dsnmem One- to eight-characer new member/module name.

+v Relative generation number to be assigned to GDG(Generation Data Group) data set, specified as a valuebetween 1 and 255.




If the Selection List is produced through the Rename Function panel, the onlyoperation you can perform is a rename.

If a Catalog, CA-Librarian, PDS or VTOC Selection List is displayed, you canperform any of the functions that are valid with that Selection List.

27.12.3.1 Renaming Members/Modules

As illustrated in the following example to rename one or more members/modules usethe R function code and type the member name in the STATUS field. (When theSelection List is redisplayed, the STATUS field will contain *RENAMED, confirmingthat the operation performed successfully.)

7 8 >


....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6..

==================================== T O P ===================


TEST.OLD1 STOR=1 3 PO U 12288 12288

MEMBER STATUS --------------- ATTRIBUTES --------------

R JUNK1 NEW1 RENT REUS

JUNK2 RENT REUS REFR AM=31

R JUNK3 NEW2 RENT REUS REFR AC=1

27.12.3.2 Renaming Data Sets

To rename one or more data sets, use the R function code. Since the STATUS field isnot large enough to hold a 44-character data set name, all of the data sets that youmarked will be presented to you through a subordinate panel (such as the oneillustrated in the following example). To rename a data set, overtype the secondoccurrence of the old name with the new name.

7 8 >


....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....

ENTER NEW DATASET NAME ON LINE FOLLOWING OLD DATA SET NAME

DATASET NAME CREATED VOLSER

TEST.OLD 12/11/84 STOR=2

TEST.NEW TEST.OLD1 1=/3=/86 STOR=1

TEST.NEW1 TEST.OLD2 11/15/85 STOR=1

TEST.NEW2

You cannot rename a password-protected data set from a Selection List. To rename adata set, use the Data Set Facility menu or the RENAME DSN command.


27.13 Uncataloging a Data Set

27.13 Uncataloging a Data Set

You can uncatalog non-VSAM data sets or one of the following types of VSAMobjects: ALIAS and GDGBASE. To do this, you can issue the UNCATLG primarycommand, as in:

UNCATLG DSN TEST.NEW

or, specify the UC function code and data set name on the Data Set Facility menu, asshown in the following example.

7 8

>


....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.

DATA SET FACILITY

FUNCTION ===> UC

DATA SET ===> TEST.NEW

VOLUMES ===>

UNIT NAMES ===>

You can also specify the UC code on a VTOC Selection List, as in the followingexample.

Data Set: Uncataloging Through a Selection List

7 8

>


....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6..

==================================== T O P ===================


STOR=1 673 288 1=17 2 2 116 2


ABC.TEST.ASM PO FB 8= 8=


UC ABC.TEST.NEW PO FB 8== 8=


27.14 Writing to a Data Set


You can update the contents of a data set using:

■ the EXPORT command, or■ the EDSN command and related commands.

Using EXPORT: Use the EXPORT command to write data to an existing data set.If the data are in:

■ The active AWS, you need only specify the name of the data set that is to receivethe data, as in:

EXPORT DSN=TEST.STAT

where the contents of the active AWS will replace the data in the sequential dataset named TEST.STAT.

The following example displays the type of confirmation message you wouldreceive after issuing this command, assuming that SET MSGLEVEL INFO is ineffect.

7 8

>

>

>....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6

EXP6= 25= RECORDS WRITTEN TO DATA SET

TEST.STAT

ON VOLUME STOR=3

EXP69 SUCCESSFUL EXECUTION OF EXPORT

■ A Library Member, use the INPUT= operand to name the desired member, as in:

EXPORT DSN=TEST.STAT INPUT=INDATA

where the contents of TEST.STAT are replaced by the contents of the memberINDATA.



■ The active AWS and one or more library members, use the INPUT= operand andthe *, as in:

EXPORT DSN=TEST.STAT INPUT=INDATA/Q/ABC.MORE

The asterisk (*) indicates where contents from the active AWS are to be placed inthe input. A maximum of ten different input sources can be specified and can beany combination of the AWS contents and library members. Note that if any ofthe members belong to another user, that individual's prefix must be specified.

Other operands of the EXPORT command allow you to:

■ Write to a PDS member by specifying the member name in parentheses after thedata set names, as in:

EXPORT DSN=TEST.SOURCE(PROG5) INPUT=MYPROG5

You can use the SET STATS command to control the SPF directory informationthat is placed in the directory entry whenever a member is added or updated.

■ Write to an uncataloged data set by including the serial number with the VOL=operand, as in:

EXPORT DSN=TEST.SOURCE(PROG5) VOL=SHAR=1

■ Add to the end of an existing data set by specifying MOD with the DISP operand,as in:

EXPORT DSN=TEST.PROJ,DISP=MOD

where the contents of the active AWS is added to the end of the original contentsof the data set.

You can also use the EXPORT command to write data to an existing CA-Librarianmaster file or to an existing CA-Panvalet member. For more information aboutEXPORTing, see the CA-Roscoe Command Reference Guide.



Using EDSN: Use the EDSN command to edit a data set by establishing a data setediting session.

■ If you do not specify any operands, as in:

EDSN

the Edit Data Set Facility, as shown in the following example, will be displayed.

Edit Data Set Facility Display

7 8<...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+..

EDIT DATASET FACILITY

FUNCTION ===>

DATA SET ===>

VOLUME ===> PASSWORD ===>

UNIT ===> ARCHIVE LEVEL ===>

E - EDIT DATASET X - TERMINATE EDIT DATASET

You can only perform two functions from this panel: Edit or Terminate. To edit adata set, specify E in the FUNCTION field and the appropriate data set name inthe DATA SET field. If a volume, unit, password, or archive level are required,you will be prompted accordingly. Edit (E) will begin the data set editing session,and the specified data set will be attached in a modifiable AWS.

■ If you specify a data set name with the command, as in:

EDSN TEST.STAT

the data set will be displayed in your AWS.

Once the data set is displayed, you can edit it using CA-Roscoe editing conventions.(See Chapter 14, “AWS: Changing Data Within an AWS” for information aboutediting and manipulating data within an AWS.)

If there is data in the AWS before the EDSN command is invoked, it is temporarilyreplaced by the data set. That is, the AWS that the data set is placed in becomesactive, and your other AWS(s) is (are) placed in the background. (Use the STATUSAWS command to display information about all AWSs in use. See Chapter 17,“AWS: Displaying/Changing AWS Information” for details.)

Executing a command that causes output to the Execution Area (for example,ATTACH LIB) or pressing the CLEAR key places the Data Set Editing Facility in a'pending' state. The data set can be edited again at any time by issuing:

EDSN Q

When you have completed editing the data set, save the data by entering:

SDSN



The data set will be saved (or updated if it already exists) and the editing session willbe discontinued. If you do not want to save the data set, enter:

CDSN

The Data Set Edit Facility remains active until explicitly deactivated using the SDSNor CDSN commands, selecting X from the Edit Data Set Facility panel, or until theCA-Roscoe session is ended. For complete information about the EDSN, CDSN, andSDSN commands, see the CA-Roscoe Command Reference Guide.


Part IV. Jobs (Submitting and Managing Jobs)

Chapter 28. Jobs: Introducing Job Output Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-128.1 Check Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-2

28.1.1 JCL Syntax Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-228.1.2 COBOL Syntax Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-3

28.2 Submitting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-428.2.1 Controlling Notification Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-428.2.2 Controlling Sequence Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-528.2.3 Expanding +INC Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-628.2.4 Expanding -INC Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-7

28.3 Using the Job Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-928.3.1 Wildcard Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-1128.3.2 Using Job Facility Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-12

28.4 Using Job Selection Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-1328.4.1 Job Facility Operator Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-15

Chapter 29. Jobs: Displaying Job-Related Information . . . . . . . . . . . 29-129.1 Displaying Job Execution Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-229.2 Displaying Class/Destination Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-429.3 Displaying Initiator Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-529.4 Displaying Job Queue Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-629.5 Displaying Job-Specific Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-7

Chapter 30. Jobs: Viewing Job Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-130.1 Attaching Job Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-2

30.1.1 Using a Primary Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-230.2 Browsing Job Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-7

30.2.1 Detaching Job Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-730.2.2 Locating Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-830.2.3 Positioning the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-1230.2.4 Reattaching Job Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-15

30.3 Performing Output Management Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-1730.3.1 Altering File Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-1730.3.2 Copying Job Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-2030.3.3 Displaying File Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-2330.3.4 Printing Job Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-2630.3.5 Canceling a Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-30

Chapter 28. Jobs: Introducing Job Output Facilities

CA-Roscoe provides facilities that allow you to:

■ Syntax check your jobs before submitting them.

■ Submit the contents of the active AWS and/or one or more library members forexecution.

■ Use a menu and selection lists to manipulate jobs and job output.

■ Display information about jobs in execution, job queues and initiators.

■ View jobs at the terminal. Once attached, you can browse the output and performsuch tasks as copying or printing individual files.


■ Syntax check the data you are about to submit for execution.■ Control the submission of that data.■ Use the Job Facility to monitor and process jobs.

Chapter 28. Jobs: Introducing Job Output Facilities 28-1

28.1 Check Syntax

28.1 Check Syntax

CA-Roscoe provides commands that allow you to syntax check JCL and COBOLsource programs.

28.1.1 JCL Syntax Checking

The job control language syntax checker is invoked by the JCK command. It can beused to check JCL statements in the active AWS or a library member.

To check JCL that is in the active AWS, enter:

JCK

JCL in a library member can be syntax-checked by including the RUN command.With RUN, you can define input from a source other than that normally used with acommand. For example, to syntax check JCL statements in the library memberARJOB, enter:

RUN JCK ARJOB

The following example assumes the JCL to be checked is in the active AWS. Theresulting display shows the error messages provided after the JCK command isexecuted.

Jobs: Syntax Checking a Jobstream

7 8 JCK

>

> AWS( ) SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72

> <...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5.

...... ================================ T O P ============

=====1 //STARTJCL JOB ==2=5,ROBERTS,CLASS=X

=====2 // MSGCLASS=A

=====3 //COB EXEC PGM=IKFCBL==

=====4 //SYSLIN DD DSN=&&LOADSET,DISP=(,PASS),

=====5 // UNIT=SYSDA,SPACE=(TRK,(5,5))

=====6 //SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=A

=====7 //SYSUT1 DD UNIT=SYSDA,SPACE=(CYL,4,4)

=====8 //SYSUT2 DD UNIT=SYSDA,SPACE=(CYL,(4,4))

=====9 //SYSUT3 DD UNIT=SYSDA,SPACE=(CYL,(4,4))

====1= //SYSUT4 DD UNIT=SYSDA,SPACE=(CYL,(4,4))

====11 //SYSIN DD Q

============================= B O T T O M ========

U V


28.1 Check Syntax

7 8 >

>

....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....

// MSGCLASS=A

CAY6==6S VERB 'MSGCL' IS UNKNOWN

//SYSLIN DD DSN=&&LOADSET,DISP=(,PASS),

UNIT=SYSDA,SPACE=(TRK,(5,5))

CAY6=87W BLKSIZE NO SPECIFIED FOR NEW OR DUMMY DATA SET -

POTENTIAL S=13 IN EXECUTION

//SYSUT1 DD UNIT=SYSDA,SPACE=(CYL,4,4)

CAY6=48E '4' IS ILLEGAL OPERAND FOR 'RLSE' PARAMETER OF

'SPACE'

CAY6=== 3 STATEMENTS FLAGGED IN JOB 'STARTJCL'. MAXIMUM

SEVERITY IS 12

U V

28.1.2 COBOL Syntax Checking

The COBOL syntax checker is invoked by the COB command. It can check COBOLsource code in the active AWS or in a specified library member.

To check source code that is in the active AWS, enter:

COB

To check source code in a CA-Roscoe library member, enter the command RUN COB,followed by the library member name. For example, to check the contents of thelibrary member INVLIST, enter:

RUN COB INVLIST

Extensions to the COB command allow you to check:

1. The source code against various COBOL language standards. See the CA-RoscoeCommand Reference Guide for a list of the language standards available.

2. A particular division of the program. The codes to check a single division are alsodescribed in the CA-Roscoe Command Reference Guide.


28.2 Submitting Data


You can submit the contents of the active AWS or one or more library members to theoperating system at any time during the terminal session.

■ To submit the contents of the active AWS:

Enter the command SUBMIT with no operands, as in:

SUBMIT

■ To submit one or more CA-Roscoe library members:

Enter the command SUBMIT followed by the name(s) of the member(s) to besubmitted. You can submit a maximum of 21 members in a single execution ofthe command. For example, to submit the library members COBJCL, INVLISTand DATA1, you would enter:

SUBMIT COBJCL INVLIST DATA1

Based on the names of these members, they probably constitute a continuousjobstream. It is valid to submit multiple members where each member represents aseparate job.

■ To submit a mixed jobstream consisting of one or more library members and thecontents of the active AWS:

Use the keyword AWS to indicate where the contents of the active AWS is to beinserted in the jobstream. For example, assume the member COBJCL contains theJCL statements needed to execute a COBOL program, the active AWS containsthe COBOL program, and the member DATA1 contains the test data to be usedby that program. The job submission would look like:

SUBMIT COBJCL AWS DATA1

28.2.1 Controlling Notification Messages

When you submit a job, a message is displayed on the Response Line. It contains thejob name (taken from the JOB statement), job number (assigned by the system) andtime the job was submitted. If you do not want to receive this informational message,you can suppress it by modifying the STATUS SESSION display or issuing thecommand:

SET MSGLEVEL ERROR

By site option, you can receive JES2 or JES3 messages at your terminal when yourjob completes execution. If your site permits this notification, your site managementwill tell you what change needs to be made to the JOB statement in your JCL.



28.2.2 Controlling Sequence Numbers

If the data you are submitting has the sequence number attribute NOSEQ, no sequencenumbers will be included in the data.

If the data has the attribute SEQ, you can use the SET SUBMIT command to controlwhether sequence numbers are included, where:

■ SET SUBMIT NOSEQ excludes sequence numbers.

■ SET SUBMIT SEQ places sequence numbers in the location defined by the data'ssequence number attribute.

If you submit data without specifying the SET SUBMIT command and the data are in:

■ The active AWS; the AWS sequence attribute controls whether sequence numbersare to be included.

Use the SEQ or NOSEQ command to change the sequence attribute of the activeAWS. NOSEQ suppresses the insertion of sequence numbers, while SEQ specifiesthat sequence numbers are to be included and designates the location of thosesequence numbers.

■ A library member; the member's sequence attribute controls whether sequencenumbers are to be included.

The following table summarizes how you can control sequence numbers in submittedjobs.



Data Source Attribute Command Override Action

AWS NOSEQ no command Numbers excluded.

SET SUBMIT NOSEQ No affect

SET SUBMIT SEQ No affect

NOSEQ No affect

SEQ Numbers included atlocation designated bycommand.

SEQ no command Numbers included atlocation designated byatrribute.

SET SUBMIT NOSEQ Numbers excluded.

SET SUBMIT SEQ Numbers included atlocation designated byatrribute.

NOSEQ Numbers excluded.

SEQ Numbers included atlocation designated bycommand.

LibraryMember(s)

NOSEQ no commandSET SUBMIT NOSEQSET SUBMIT SEQ

Numbers excluded.No affect.No affect.

SEQ no command Numbers included atlocation designated byattribute.

SET SUBMIT NOSEQ Numbers excluded.

SET SUBMIT SEQ Numbers included atlocation designated byattribute.

28.2.3 Expanding +INC Statements

You can include one or more +INC statements in the data you submit for execution.This special CA-Roscoe statement identifies where to include the contents of the activeAWS or a library member within the jobstream.

■ Defining +INC Statements:

+INC statements must begin in the first position of the line and be the only dataon that line. The format of this statement is:



��──+INC─ ──┬ ┬─AWS─────────── ────────────────────────────────�� └ ┘── ──┬ ┬────── mem └ ┘─pfx.─

where:

AWS Includes the contents of the active AWS.

mem Name of the library member whose contents is to be included. If themember belongs to another user, that individual's prefix must beincluded.

The data being submitted (like the active AWS and/or library members) cancontain any number of +INC statements. It can even contain only +INCstatements, as in:

+INC LEADJCL

+INC MYPROG

+INC ENDJCL

The included data can contain +INC statements. You are allowed 64 levels of+INC nesting.

■ Enabling Expansion:

The SET SUBMIT command controls whether or not +INC statements are to beexpanded when the job is submitted.

To have +INC statements expanded (for example, to include the library member oractive AWS contents), specify the INCLUDE operand with SET SUBMIT beforeissuing the SUBMIT command, as in:

SET SUBMIT INCLUDE

SUBMIT

Once you have enabled expansion, it remains in effect until you disable it orterminate your session.

You can disable +INC expansion by specifying:

SET SUBMIT NOINCLUDE

28.2.4 Expanding -INC Statements

You can include one or more CA-Librarian -INC statements in the data you submit forexecution.

The SET MASTER command controls whether these statements are to be expandedwhen the job is submitted. For example, you might enter:

SET MASTER ROSCOE.LIBR : Activate and name master fileSUBMIT TEST1 : -INCs in member TEST1 expandedSET MASTER OFF : Deactivate -INC expansionSUBMIT TEST2 : -INCs in TEST2 not expandedSET MASTER ON : Reactivate with same master file



Once you identify the CA-Librarian master file to be used, it remains in effect untilyou:

■ specify another master file,■ disable expansion, or■ terminate your session.


28.3 Using the Job Facility


The CA-Roscoe AJOB command invokes a panel-driven RPF system, similar to theDSN and LIB facilities. It is referred to as the Job Facility. The Job Facility can beused to:

■ attach jobs,■ display a job's execution status,■ display job-related information,■ alter file attributes,

■ copy jobs, ■ print jobs, and ■ cancel jobs.

It can also be used to execute operator commands and check the system console.

You can display the Job Facility by issuing the command:

AJOB

If you enter this command with no operands, the Job Facility primary menu isdisplayed.

You can include a job name and job number with the AJOB command to qualify thejob display.

If a specified job can be found, it is attached and AJOB terminates. If the specifiedjob cannot be found, or if the job name uses a wildcard specification, then a JobSelection list is presented based on the JOB/GRP NAME value.

When you are viewing job output, you can redisplay the primary menu at any time byentering:

SELECT MENU

on the command line.

PA keys will take you back one level.

To end AJOB processing, select the function X (TERMINATE) from the main menu.

The CLEAR key will discontinue AJOB processing from any Job Facility panel ordisplay from which it is pressed (with the exception of a CONSOLE display caused bya command from the OPERATOR COMMAND panel). It will leave the most recentjob attached that had been selected for viewing.

When CLEAR is pressed during a CONSOLE display, it will cause the CONSOLEdisplay to be cleared and will redisplay the OPERATOR COMMAND panel.



Jobs: Job Facility Menu

7 8

<...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+....

JOB FACILITY

FUNCTION ===>

JOB/GRP NAME ===>

JOB NUMBER ===> DEST/CLASS ===>

FILE NUMBER ===> ACTIVE JOB TYPE ===> (ALL,JES,STC,TSO)

PAGE NUMBER ===> CONTROL CHARS ===> NO (Y,N)

LINE NUMBER ===> CONFIRM CANCEL ===> YES (Y,N)

A - ATTACH JOB C - COPY JOB I - INFO JOB OP - OPER CONTROL

AI - ATTACH INITIATORS CN - CANCEL JOB L - SYSTEM LOG P - PRINT JOB

AT - ALTER JOB X - TERMINATE

U V


FUNCTION The job function to be performed. Specify one of the codeslisted on the bottom of the menu. (See 28.3.2, “Using JobFacility Functions” on page 28-12 for a complete descriptionof each function.)

JOB/GRP NAME The specific name or prefix (wildcard) of job(s) to be includedin the selected function.

JOB NUMBER Number of the job. Must be numeric or left blank.

FILE NUMBER Number of the file to qualify the selected display. Must benumeric or Last; if no value is specified, a value of 1 is used.

PAGE NUMBER Number of the page to qualify the selected display. Must benumeric or Last; if no value is specified, a value of 1 is used.

LINE NUMBER Line number of job data to qualify the selected display. Mustbe numeric or Last; if no value is specified, a value of 1 isused.

DEST/CLASS The printer destination used in the PRINT JOB function, orclass of jobs displayed by the ATTACH JOB function.



ACTIVE JOB TYPE The qualification to show active TSO jobs (TSO), active taskssubmitted through JES (JES), active started tasks (STC), or allactive jobs (ALL) displayed for the ATTACH JOB function.A value here causes the JOB/GRP NAME value to be ignored.

CONTROL CHARS Specifies whether control characters are included when a job isattached, copied, or printed. A default of NO is used when theAJOB facility is initially invoked.

CONFIRM CANCEL Specifies whether a confirmation panel is displayed for anyjobs selected for cancel. A default of YES is used when theAJOB facility is initially invoked.

28.3.1 Wildcard Characters

The following table contains the wildcard characters that may be used to create thecriteria for an entry's inclusion in a Job Selection list. The job name used to create aselection list may use the asterisk (*), plus sign (+), or wildcard characters, but notboth in the same wildcard.

Code Meaning and Examples


ROS*JCL* ROSAJCLROSJCLROSJCLENDROSXJCLX


DROS+ DROSDROSCOEDROSTSO



28.3.2 Using Job Facility Functions

You can use the Job Facility to perform a variety of job functions. (Each function islisted on the bottom of the AJOB menu. See “Jobs: Job Facility Menu” onpage 28-10) Some functions are performed explicitly. Many functions display acorresponding panel on which you must enter information specific to that function.

The following table lists each function code and its corresponding description andaction.


A Attach a job. Performed, if job found. Ifjob not found, displaysselection list.

AI Request active initiatorinformation.

Panel displayed.

AT Alter a job. Panel displayed.

C Copy a job. Panel displayed.

CN Cancel a job. Confirmation panel displayedif CONFIRM CANCEL isYES; or cancel the job withno confirmation if CONFIRMCANCEL is NO.

I Inquire about job information. Panel displayed

L Attach the System log. Panel displayed

OP Send OPERATOR commands. Panel displayed

P Print a job. Panel displayed

X Terminate AJOB processing. Performed


28.4 Using Job Selection Lists


When a job name (with or without wildcards) is specified with the AJOB commandand no job number accompanies it, a Job Selection list will be displayed. Thefollowing example shows the selection list for all jobs beginning with the lettersSAMP:

Jobs: Job Facility Selection List

7 8 FUNCTION ===> (M - MENU; F - FORWARD; B - BACK; X - EXIT) 14.36.=8

JOB NAME ===> SAMPQ FILE ===> PAGE ===> LINE ===>

LINE ===1 OF ==13 HELD/

JOBNO JOBNAME STATUS C PTY SID ORIGIN STEP/LINES CPU TIME

----- -------- ------------------- - --- ---- --------- ---------- --------

__ 284 SAMPCSTT AWAITING PRINT (H) 1 ANY LOCAL

__ 283 SAMPDSTT AWAITING PRINT (H) 1 ANY LOCAL

__ 411= SAMPSTR1 AWAITING PRINT (H) 1 ANY LOCAL

__ 6843 SAMPLOGP AWAITING PRINT (H) 1 ANY LOCAL

__ 2993 SAMPDSTT AWAITING PRINT (H) 1 ANY LOCAL

__ 7158 SAMPETC EXECUTING 24:42:53 3 11 XAD1 LOCAL SAMPETC 298.45

__ 716= SAMPCICS EXECUTING 24:42:48 3 11 XAD1 LOCAL SAMPCICS 63.13

__ 4596 SAMPCCCS EXECUTING 8:4=:5= 3 11 XAD1 SYSTEMC SAMPCCCS 18.79

__ 5477 SAMPDSTT EXECUTING 5:39:45 3 11 XAD1 LOCAL MUF8= 8.45

__ 7667 SAMPCSTT EXECUTING 3:24:35 3 11 XAD1 LOCAL CICS 36.23

---------------------------------------------------------------------------

A - ATTACH C - COPY L - LAST FILE S - STATUS

AT - ALTER CN - CANCEL P - PRINT NN - NTH FILE

PF1/13: MENU PF3/15: EXIT PF7/19: BACK

U V

The fields comprising the job selection list can be used to change or further qualify thedisplay, and include:

FUNCTION requires M, F, B, or X; M invokes the Primary Menu; X willdiscontinue AJOB processing (exits to CA-Roscoe); F will cause ascroll forward for a large display; B will cause a scroll backwardfor a large display; F and B are retained in this slot for subsequentscrolling by hitting the ENTER key; Any other value redisplays thescreen with new information (beginning with the first job).

The PF key numbers listed at the bottom of the display willachieve the same result as the functions.

JOB NAME The name or prefix of jobs shown in the display. It can include awildcard character. Users can change this value to show jobs witha different job name or job prefix. (This slot shows no value andis unmodifiable if the ATTACH INITIATORS selections was madefrom the Primary Menu.)

FILE Number of the file within the job to qualify the function request.Must be numeric or Last; if no value is specified, a value of 1 isused.



PAGE Number of the page within the job to qualify the function request.Must be numeric or Last; if no value is specified, a value of 1 isused.

LINE Line number within the job to qualify the function request. Mustbe numeric or Last; if no value is specified, a value of 1 is used.

You can manipulate the jobs in the selection list by using the line commands displayedat the bottom. Specify the following codes in the field to the left of a job to invokethe corresponding service (multiple selections may be made):

A ATTACH this job using the FILE, PAGE, or LINE values appearing in theirrespective locations.

AT Present the ALTER JOB panel for the corresponding job.

C Present the COPY JOB panel for the corresponding job.

CN Present the CANCEL JOB confirmation panel for the corresponding job ifCONFIRM CANCEL is YES on the Primary Menu; or cancel the job with noconfirmation if CONFIRM CANCEL is NO on the Primary Menu.

L ATTACH JOB LAST FILE for this job using PAGE, and/or LINE valuesappearing in their respective locations. The value appearing in the FILE ===>slot is ignored, and is reset to LAST for subsequent displays of this panel.

P Present the PRINT JOB panel for the corresponding job.

S ATTACH the corresponding job using the STATUS JOB display.

NN ATTACH JOB FILE NN for the corresponding job using PAGE or LINEvalues appearing in their respective locations; The value appearing in the FILEfield is ignored, and is reset to this value for subsequent displays of this panel.

Notes:

When you issue selections A, L, S, and NN, the AJOB facility is placed in asuspended display state (you will see PGM(xx.AJOB) appearing on the CA-Roscoestatus line) and the following is true:

■ The job is attached and CA-Roscoe commands can be issued on the command lineto do any job or non-job processing.

■ RPFs are NOT SUPPORTED while AJOB is in this state.

■ The SCREEN command is NOT SUPPORTED while AJOB is in this state.

■ PF keys set to SPLIT, SWAP, and END will not be recognized, however, issuingthe corresponding :S or :W commands on the command line and pressing PF12will cause the SPLIT and SWAP functions to take place.



■ Any PA key or any of the following commands cause a suspended AJOB tocontinue:

AJOB SELect MENU SELect NEXT SELect PREV Next Job PREV Job FIRST Job LAST Job

DETach Job (job is detached first)

28.4.1 Job Facility Operator Control

The Job Facility contains an option that enables you to issue operator commands andcheck the system console from a panel environment. If you have user privilegeswhich enable you to execute system and operator commands, you can use the OperatorControl function on the Job Facility primary menu.

To invoke the Operator Control display from the Job Facility menu, enter the code OPin the FUNCTION field. The following example illustrates this.

Jobs: Job Facility Menu

7 8

<...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+....

JOB FACILITY

FUNCTION ===> OP

JOB/GRP NAME ===>

JOB NUMBER ===> DEST/CLASS ===>







U V

When you select the OPER CONTROL function, the Operator Control panel will bedisplayed. From this panel, you can:

■ Execute CONSOLE commands using the CMD and CMM subcommands.

■ Execute CONSOLE commands you may have in a CA-Roscoe library member.



■ Display the MVS Master Trace Table using the CONSOLE MTT command.

■ Display the UCB address of defined consoles currently active in the system.

■ Display messages written to a designated console.

This panel consists of four fields, as shown in the following example.

Jobs: Operator Control Display

7 8

<...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+....

OPERATOR CONTROL

OPTION ===> (CMD, CMM, LIB, MTT, STA, UCB, X - EXIT)

COMMAND ===>

- OR -

LIB MEMBER ===>

UCB ADDRESS ===>

Fill in the fields with the following information:

OPTION requires CMD, CMM, LIB, MTT, STA, UCB, or X.

X returns to Job Facility Primary Menu; CMD causes a CONSOLECMD command to be issued using the command in theCOMMAND slot; CMM causes a CONSOLE CMM command tobe issued using the command in the COMMAND slot; LIB causesa RUN CONSOLE command to be issued using the library membernamed in LIB MEMBER slot; MTT causes a CONSOLE MTTcommand to be issued; STA causes a CONSOLE STATUScommand to be issued; UCB causes a CONSOLE UCB commandto be issued using the UCB address specified in UCB ADDRESSslot; Any other value is diagnosed as an error.

COMMAND An operator command to be issued. Required with option CMD orCMM.

LIB MEMBER A CA-Roscoe member containing operator command to be issued.Required with option LIB.

UCB ADDRESS A UCB address of a console to be displayed. Required with optionUCB.

Note: CONSOLE is a Monitor command. For more information about theCONSOLE command and the CMD and CMM subcommands, see theCA-Roscoe System Commands Guide.


Chapter 29. Jobs: Displaying Job-RelatedInformation

This chapter describes how to monitor the status of a job using the AJOB command orthe DISPLAY command.

■ AJOB enables you to display a job menu or selection list. From these displaysyou can select functions to determine the status of a job and obtain informationregarding it.

■ DISPLAY can be used to directly monitor the status of a job.

AJOB and DISPLAY allow you to determine:

■ the job's execution status (awaiting execution, executing, awaiting print, and soon),

■ the job's position in the job queue,

■ what initiators are assigned to each job class, and

■ how many jobs are associated with a specific job class or remote destination.

| Note: CA-Roscoe supports the six-digit job number support added with z/OS| JES2/JES3 1.2.

Chapter 29. Jobs: Displaying Job-Related Information 29-1

29.1 Displaying Job Execution Status


You can determine job execution status for:

■ All jobs with the same job name. For example, entering:

DISPLAY COMPILE

might result in the display shown below.

7 8

>

>

....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+...

JOBNO JOBNAME STATUS C PRTY SID ORIGIN STEP/LINE HELD CPUTIME

----- ------- ------------ - ---- ---- ------ --------- ---- -------

2=85 COMPILE AWAIT PRT(H) 1 SYSH R1=

4678 COMPILE EXEC =:==:2= X 6 SYSH R1= LINKMOD =1.44

5232 COMPILE AWAIT EXEC X 6 SYSH R1= QPOS(18) YES

The information displayed above can be displayed using the Job Facility. Enter:

AJOB COMPILE

The following example is displayed.

Jobs: AJOB Execution Status


JOB NAME ===> COMPILE FILE ===> PAGE ===> LINE ===>



----- -------- ------------------- - --- ---- --------- ---------- --------

__ 2=85 COMPILE AWAITING PRINT(H) 1 SYSH R1=

__ 4678 COMPILE EXECUTING =:==:2= X 6 SYSH R1= LINKMOD =1.44

__ 5232 COMPILE AWAITING EXECUTION X 6 SYSH R1= QPOS(18) YES

---------------------------------------------------------------------------




U V

■ All jobs containing your prefix in the site-designated location of the job name.Enter:



DISPLAY or AJOB

If your site requires your CA-Roscoe prefix to be part of the job name, theresulting display shows the status of all jobs that contain your prefix in thedesignated location.

■ All jobs beginning with specific characters. For example,

DISPLAY ROS+ or AJOB ROS+

displays status information about all job names beginning with ROS. (The plussign (+) indicates that additional characters may follow those specified.

■ All jobs that contain specific characters in a specific location. For example,entering:

DISPLAY MASK=R*SC*E or AJOB R*SC*E

might display the status of jobs named ROSCOE or RASCAE. (The asterisk (*)represents any character that is valid in a job name. See 28.3.1, “WildcardCharacters” on page 28-11 for information on using wildcard characters in jobnames.)

■ Any job whose name matches a DISPLAY subcommand, as in:

DISPLAY JOB=QUEUE


29.2 Displaying Class/Destination Status

29.2 Displaying Class/Destination Status

Use the NAME subcommand to display the names of jobs directed to a specific jobclass or destination. For example, to display the names and status of each job in class0, enter:

DISPLAY NAME =


29.3 Displaying Initiator Status

29.3 Displaying Initiator Status

Use the INIT subcommand, as in:

DISPLAY INIT

to display information about all initiators used by the operating system and the namesand number of executing jobs.

You can also specify: AJOB INIT and receive the same result.


29.4 Displaying Job Queue Status


Use the QUEUE subcommand to display the number of jobs waiting to execute in aparticular job class. For example, to display the number of jobs waiting to execute inclass X, enter:

DISPLAY QUEUE X



29.5 Displaying Job-Specific Information

Use the Job Facility Job Information panel to display accurate updates of data relatedto a specific job. Specify the AJOB command to invoke the Job Facility. From themain menu, specify I in the FUNCTION field, and the name of the job to bereferenced, as shown in the following example.

7 8 <...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+....

JOB FACILITY

FUNCTION ===> I

JOB/GRP NAME ===> COMPILE JOB NUMBER ===> DEST/CLASS ===>





U V

Information about the specified job will be displayed in the format shown in thefollowing example.

Jobs: Information Display (Job Facility)

7 8

<...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+....

JOB INFORMATION

OPTION ===> I (I - INFO; R - AUTOREFRESH; X - EXIT)

JOB NAME ===> COMPILE

JOB NUMBER ===> 1234

REFRESH INTERVAL ===> =4 (=1 - 6=)

JOB STATUS : EXECUTING 27:49:5= STEP/LINES : CICS

JOB CLASS : 3 CPU TIME : 1=.56

PRIORITY : 11 HELD :

SYSID : XXX1 ORIGIN : SYSTEMX

The first four fields of the Job Information panel are variable. They will contain thename and number of the job you entered on the primary menu. If you would like todisplay a different job, you must change the following job information:


29.5 Displaying Job-Specific Information

OPTION requires I, R, or X; X returns to Primary Menu; I indicates to showcurrent information for this job; R indicates to begin autorefreshmode; Any other value redisplays the Job Information screen.

JOB NAME The name of the job for which information is required.

JOB NUMBER The job number corresponding to the job name specified.

REFRESH INTERVALThe number of seconds to wait during autorefresh mode beforeshowing updated information. Must be a number from 1 to 60; thedefault is 4.

The remaining fields display information specific to the job you have indicated. Thescreen will be automatically refreshed according to the value you specify in theREFRESH INTERVAL field.

To exit this panel, select the option X (EXIT). You will be returned to the JobFacility main menu.


Chapter 30. Jobs: Viewing Job Output


■ Attach a job at your terminal.

■ Browse the job output to:

– Locate and note the specific occurrences of a string.

– Position the display to a specific line or to a line to which you have assigneda name.

– Reattach the job after viewing an AWS, data set object or library member.

– Finally, detach the job.

■ Perform such tasks as copying all or part of a file into an AWS, changing fileattributes, controlling the printing of the files comprising the job, and cancelling ajob.

Chapter 30. Jobs: Viewing Job Output 30-1

30.1 Attaching Job Output


You can use a primary command, the Job Facility menu, or a job selection list toattach job output.


Use the ATTACH JOB command to view the files comprising a job at your terminal.

To attach the job named SAMPLE, enter:

ATTACH JOB SAMPLE

If there are multiple jobs with the same name, include the number of the job you wantto examine, as in:

ATTACH JOB SAMPLE 2=85

| Note: CA-Roscoe supports the six-digit job number support added with z/OS| JES2/JES3 1.2.

If you do not include a job number, the first available job is selected and attached.

You can also attach a job by specifying just its job number, as in:

ATTACH JOB 2=85

When a job is attached, the display begins with the first line of the first file. The filesare presented to you in a format that is similar to a hard-copy listing. For example,assume that the job SAMPLE compiles, link-edits and executes a COBOL program inan MVS/JES2 environment. Its output is divided into the following files:

File 1 JES2 job log.File 2 Listing of JCL statements.File 3 Allocation and condition code messages.File 4 Listing produced by the COBOL compiler.File 5 Listing produced by the linkage editor.File 6 Output produced by the COBOL program.

You can begin the display at any location within the job by including the number ofthe appropriate file, page and/or line with the ATTACH JOB command. For example,to begin the display of the job SAMPLE with the tenth line on the second page of thethird file, enter:

ATTACH JOB SAMPLE FILE 3 PAGE 2 LINE 1=



30.1.1.1 Using the Job Facility

To attach a job from the Job Facility menu, enter the code A in the function field andthe appropriate job name in the JOB/GRP NAME field. The following exampleillustrates this.

Jobs: Attaching Through the Job Facility

7 8

<...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+...

JOB FACILITY

FUNCTION ===>A

JOB/GRP NAME ===> SAMPLE JOB NUMBER ===> DEST/CLASS ===>







U V



30.1.1.2 Using a Job Selection List

To attach a job from a job selection list, enter the code A in the command field on thefar left, next to the job to be attached. The following example illustrates this.

Jobs: Attaching Through a Job Selection List


JOB NAME ===> SAMPLE FILE ===> PAGE ===> LINE ===>



----- -------- ------------------- - --- ---- --------- ---------- --------

A_ 284 SAMPLE AWAITING PRINT (H) 1 ANY LOCAL

__ 283 SAMPLE AWAITING PRINT (H) 1 ANY LOCAL


__ 5=41 SAMPLE EXECUTING 27:38:11 3 11 XAD1 SYSTEMC $$$$$$@ 1=.53

__ 7158 SAMPLE EXECUTING 24:42:53 3 11 XAD1 LOCAL SAMPLE 298.45

---------------------------------------------------------------------------




U V

30.1.1.3 When Can a Job be Viewed?

If your site is:

JES2 The output files of your job can be attached at any time. (If an output file'sattributes are to be modified, you must submit the job with a specialsite-defined SYSOUT class.) If your job is:

AWAITING EXECUTION: The JCL and all SYSIN data can be viewed.(This is the only time this information is displayed.)

EXECUTING: The JCL and that much of the job log and SMB that iscurrently written to the spool can be viewed, plus all available files. (If afile is open and empty, only the end of file message is presented when thatfile is displayed.)

AWAITING PRINT: All SYSOUT files that have not been printed orpurged can be viewed.

JES3 If an output file exists, you can examine it at any time. You can only modifyattributes of files routed to a SYSOUT class held for an external writer(when ETSO is not active) or TSO (when ETSO is active). (A specialsite-defined SYSOUT class designates that the output is to be held.)



30.1.1.4 What is the SYSOUT class?

Your site management will tell you what special SYSOUT class(es) they haveestablished.

The following example assumes the site has defined T and H as special SYSOUTclasses. As illustrated, you can specify one of the special SYSOUT classes with theindividual DD statements or with the MSGCLASS= operand on the JOB statement.(DD statements containing SYSOUT=* use the SYSOUT class specified withMSGCLASS=.) Notice that two of the SYSPRINT files are directed to class T whilethe third is directed to class H.

Jobs: Sample Jobstream Using MSGCLASS Parameter:

7 8 >


>....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6

==================================== T O P =================

//SAMPLE JOB (account-info),CLASS=X,PRTY=6,MSGCLASS=T

//COB EXEC PGM=IKFCBL==

...

//SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=H

//SYSIN DD Q

COBOL program inserted here

//LKED EXEC PGM=LINKEDIT

...

//SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=Q

//GO EXEC PGM=Q.LKED.SYSLMOD,...

//SYSOUT DD SYSOUT=A

//SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=Q

//SYSIN DD Q

test data

U V



30.1.1.5 What Is the Current Status of the Submitted Job?

To determine your job's status, you can:

1. Receive notification at your terminal when your job completes execution. (If youcan use this facility, your site management will tell you what change needs to bemade to your JCL to receive the JES2/JES3 messages.)

2. Use the DISPLAY command. For example, to determine the status of a job namedSAMPLE, you would enter:

DISPLAY SAMPLE

30.1.1.6 Who Can Attach a Job?

Unless restricted by site management, any user can attach any job.

Also, the same job can be attached by multiple users.

■ If you are the first person to attach the job, you have control over the:

– File Disposition: You can use the modifiable STATUS display or the ALTERcommand to change the attributes of the files comprising the job.

– Job Disposition: If you issue the DETACH JOB command, the job is released.Other users will be notified the next time they press the ENTER key or use aPF key to scroll.

■ If you are not the first person to attach the job, you cannot change the dispositionof the job's files or release the job.

If you attempt to change the disposition of a file, you will receive a messageindicating the user who has control. If the message does not identify a specificuser and you detach and then attach the job, you may get control of the job.


30.2 Browsing Job Output


This section describes how, while browsing a job, you can:

■ Detach the job.

■ Locate the specific occurrences of a string in a file.

■ Position the display to a specific line or to a line to which you have assigned aname.

■ Reattach the job after browsing an AWS, data set object or library member.

30.2.1 Detaching Job Output


You can explicitly detach a job by entering the command:

DETACH JOB

With this form of the command, all files from the hold queue are released and alluser-assigned NOTE names are deleted. Each file is disposed of according to itsPRINT/NOPRINT status. (Files marked PRINT are routed to the appropriate printer;files marked NOPRINT are deleted.)

Other forms of this command include:

■ DETACH JOB HOLD

Releases the job and deletes all files marked NOPRINT. (Those files markedPRINT are kept on the hold queue and can be viewed again at a later time. NOTEnames associated with these files are retained.)

■ DETACH JOB NOACT

Releases a job without deleting any files. (In addition to retaining the files on thehold queue for later viewing, all associated NOTE names are retained.)

If you are the first person to attach the job and you release it, the job is released.Other users will be notified the next time they press the ENTER key or use a PF keyto scroll.

If you execute a command that causes output to the Execution Area (like ATTACHingan AWS) or if you press the CLEAR key, the attached job is placed in a pending stateand can be reattached at any time.




If you are using the Job Facility, you can detach a job from the Alter Job/FileAttributes panel. Select the function AT from either the Job Facility menu, or from ajob selection list. This will display the Alter Job/File Attribute panel.

Note: See 30.3.1.2, “Using the Job Facility” on page 30-18 for more informationabout the Alter Job panel.

From the Alter Job display, you can select the options DETACH (DJ) or DETACHHOLD (DH). Enter the appropriate code in the OPTION field and the correspondingjob name in the JOB NAME field and press ENTER. The request will then be issued.

The DETACH commands can also be issued while the Job Facility is in a suspendedstate.

30.2.2 Locating Data

This section describes how you can use a variety of commands to scan a job for all orspecific occurrences of a string.

While this description assumes you are locating strings that are in character format,you can also locate the hexadecimal representation of a string. See the section,30.2.2.3, “Customizing the Operation” on page 30-10 for details.

30.2.2.1 Locating Specific Occurrences

You can use the following commands to find and display specific occurrences of astring within the currently attached file.



FIRST DIVISION

The first occurrence of the string DIVISION in the currently attached file will be thefirst line of the resulting display.


LAST




By default, the entire file (for example, the full length of every line) is searched foryour string. You can include column and/or line numbers with the command to qualifythe search for a single operation. For example:

NEXT 1= 3= SAMPLE

examines columns 10 through 30 for the next occurrence of SAMPLE. After thecommand executes, the defaults are reestablished. To change the column boundariesfor the remainder of your session, use the SET BOUNDS command. (See Chapter 4,“Defining Column Boundaries” for additional information.)

By including a value after the string, you can limit the search to a specific number oflines. For example, to find the last occurrence of SAMPLE within the last 200 lines ofcurrently displayed data, you would enter:

LAST SAMPLE 2==

30.2.2.2 Including/Excluding Lists Containing a String

You can use the INCL command to display every occurrence of a particular stringwithin a given number of lines. For example, to find every occurrence of the stringTEST-DATA in the next 100 lines of the currently displayed data, you would enter:

INCL TEST-DATA 1==

If you do not specify a number, the site-defined number of lines are searched. (Youcan use the SET JOBCNT command to establish your own search limit. See theCA-Roscoe Command Reference Guide for details.)

You can also also limit the search for the character string to particular columns. Forexample, if you want to display every line that does not contain the stringTEST-DATA in columns 30 through 80, you would enter:


If the number of lines to be displayed exceeds the size of your terminal screen, pressone of the PF keys to which a scrolling function is assigned. The INCL or EXCLoperation resumes scanning for the previously specified string (for example,TEST-DATA). The direction of the scan depends on the value assigned to the PF key.(The search string is remembered for subsequent use; column number limits and linenumber limits apply only to the command with which they are specified.)







POINT LINE 15=



30.2.2.3 Customizing the Operation

Translating the String


Delimiting the Search String

In all of the examples used thus far, the search string has not been delimited. Withthese commands, delimit the string only when it:


INCL /JOB/).

Qualifying the Search String

By default, CA-Roscoe searches for any set of characters and/or spaces that exactlymatch the specified string. To limit the search operation, you can include the qualifieroperands. These operands are WORD, PREFIX, BEGIN, EMBED, END and SUFFIX.For example, assume the attached file contains the line:


and you want to search for the string THE. Without qualification, the words THE,BROTHER and THEIR match the search string.

By including a qualifier, you can designate the type of string match that is to occur, asin:











X'string'


FIRST X'C1'




FIRST X'C1' LITERAL


/X'C1/ or /X'C1' / or /X'C1'/









30.2.3 Positioning the Display


■ Position between the files comprising a job.■ Position to a specific line within a file.■ Assign names to specific lines within a file and then later reposition the display to

begin with a named location.

30.2.3.1 Positioning Between Multiple Files

The files comprising your job are presented to you individually. For example, assumeyou are currently viewing a file and now want to view the next sequential file, you cando this by entering:

NEXT FILE

Note: You can display a list of the files in your job by issuing the STATUS JOBcommand.

When using these commands to locate a string, once you have specified the object ofyour search (like FILE in this case), it is remembered. To return to the previous file,you only need enter:

PREV

To view the last file, you would enter:

LAST

To then return to the first file, you would enter:

FIRST

You can also use the POINT command to position to a specific file. For example, toview the fifth file in your job, enter:

POINT FILE 5

If you want to begin the display with the second page of the fifth file, you wouldenter:

POINT FILE 5 PAGE 2

Caution:

The number of the currently displayed file and page are shown above the ScaleLine to assist you in keeping track of your location within your job output.



30.2.3.2 Positioning Within a File

If the contents of the file you are viewing exceeds the number of lines in your terminalscreen, you can position the display within the file by:


■ Using the FIRST, NEXT, LAST and PREV commands with the PAGE or LINEkeyword operand. For example, to position the display to begin with the last pageof the currently displayed file, you would enter:

LAST PAGE

While to position to the first line of that file, you would enter:

FIRST LINE

■ Using the POINT command with the PAGE or LINE operands. For example, toposition the display to begin with line 500 of the currently attached file, youwould enter:

POINT LINE 5==

To position to the first or last line, you would enter:

POINT LINE T or

POINT LINE B

30.2.3.3 Positioning to Named Lines

When you are browsing a file, you can assign a one- to six-character name to the linecontaining the string; thus enabling you to return to that line later. For example, toassign the name LOC1 to the first displayed line, you would enter:

NOTE LOC1 or

NOTE QLOC1



NOTE Q+5 LOC2


POINT LOC1


STATUS NOTES



the resulting display shows each assigned name and the file, page and line to which itis assigned.


DROP LOC2

Any outstanding NOTE names are automatically deleted when you detach the member,attach another member or return to the menu.



30.2.4 Reattaching Job Output

Using Primary Commands: While you are working with job output, you canattach an AWS, a data set object or a library member/list, browse that data and thenreturn to your data. The following example illustrates how you can ATTACH theactive AWS, browse it and then reATTACH the data you have been viewing using theATTACH JOB command.

Jobs: Reattaching Job Output

7 8 ATTACH_

>

> JOB(INVREPT,5283) SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===73 F 4 P 1

> <....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+...

============================== T O P ============




7 8ATTACH JOB )

> J PENDING

> AWS(PRI.INVREPT) SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72

> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....

...... ======================== T O P =================




7 8>

> JOB(INVREPT,5283) SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===73 F 4 P 1

> <....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+...

============================= T O P =============




The center screen in the previous examples shows J PENDING. This note isprovided to remind you that the job may be reattached at any time.



When you reattach the job, the display begins with the first line of the prior display.To reattach at a different location within the same data, you can:

■ Use the FILE, PAGE and/or LINE operands of ATTACH to specify the desiredstarting location, as in:

ATTACH JOB Q FILE 3

ATTACH JOB Q FILE 3 LINE 12==

ATTACH LIB Q FILE 3 PAGE 2

■ Use the POINT command to begin the display with a specific location, as in:

POINT JOB FILE 4

POINT JOB FILE 4 LINE 12==

POINT JOB FILE 4 PAGE 2

or with the line assigned a NOTE name, as in:

POINT LIB NAME1

■ Use the JOB operand with the FIRST, NEXT, LAST and PREV commands tobegin the display the the line containing a specific string, as in:

FIRST JOB /DD/

■ Use the JOB operand with the INCL or EXCL command to begin the display witha list of lines containing (or not containing) a specific string, as in:

INCL JOB /DD/


If you are working with jobs using AJOB and the Job Facility, you can also attach anAWS, a data set object or a library member/list, browse that data and then return tojob output. AJOB will be suspended while you process other data. You can issue anyof the following commands to return to the job data and continue AJOB processing:

Note: You can enter the commands shown above as listed, or you can use theirabbreviations which are shown in uppercase (for example, SEL MENU).

AJOBELect MENUSELect NEXTSELect PREVNext Job

PREV JobFIRST JobLAST JobDETach Job


30.3 Performing Output Management Tasks


This section describes how you can perform such tasks as:

■ Altering the attributes of one or more files comprising a job.■ Copying all or part of a file into an AWS,■ Display information about the files comprising the currently attached job.■ Printing the currently displayed file.■ Canceling a job.

These tasks can be performed using primary commands, the Job Facility menu, or ajob selection list.

30.3.1 Altering File Attributes


Multiple users can attach the same job. If you are not the first person to attach the job,you cannot change the attributes of its files.

If you are the first person to attach the job, you can change the attributes of its files byusing:

■ The modifiable STATUS JOB display.

The display produced by STATUS job can be used to control the printing of a fileat a system or 328x-type printer. (See section, 30.3.3, “Displaying File Attributes”on page 30-23 for additional information.)

■ The ALTER command.

Use ALTER to change the system printer attributes associated with one or morefiles, as in:

ALTER JOB PRINT CLASS A

which changes the SYSOUT class for the currently displayed job to A. If the fileis not currently displayed, you must identify it, as in:

ALTER JOB FILE 3 NOPRINT

which prevents the third file in the job from being printed.

To mark all files to be printed, use the ALL operand. (Use of this operand maybe restricted by site management.) For example, to mark all files to be printed inClass V, enter:

ALTER JOB ALL PRINT CLASS V

Other operands permit you to change the printer ID (DEST), the number of copiesto be printed (COPIES), and the output form number (FORM).




To alter file attributes from the Job Facility menu, enter the code AT in theFUNCTION field and the appropriate job name in the JOB/GRP NAME field. Thefollowing example shows how to alter a job from the Job Facility menu.

Jobs: Alter Job Through the Job Facility

7 8

<...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+...

JOB FACILITY

FUNCTION ===> AT








U V

When you select the ALTER JOB function, the Alter Job panel will be displayed. Itwill contain the name of the job which was entered on the primary menu, as shown inthe following example.

Jobs: Alter Job Panel Display

7 8

<...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+...

ALTER JOB/FILE ATTRIBUTES

OPTION ===> (AT - ALTER; DJ - DETACH; DH - DETACH HOLD; X - EXIT)

JOB NAME ===> SAMPLE JOB NUMBER ===> 1234 FILE NUMBER ===> (NN, ALL)

PRINT STATUS ===> (P, NOP) CLASS ===>

DESTINATION ===> FORM ===>

COPIES ===>

Select one of the four OPTIONs listed on the screen and fill in all appropriate fields,which consist of the following:

OPTION Requires AT, DJ, DH, or X; X returns to invoking PrimaryMenu or Job Selection display; AT will issue an ALTER JOBrequest; DJ will issue the DETACH JOB request; DH will issue



the DETACH JOB HOLD request; Any other value redisplaysthe Alter Job screen.

JOB NAME The specific job name to be altered.

JOB NUMBER The specific job number to be altered.

FILE NUMBER File to be altered; must be numeric or ALL.

PRINT STATUS Must be P for PRINT or NOP for NOPRINT. Required only ifchanging the print status is desired.

DESTINATION The printer destination used in the PRINT JOB function, or classof jobs displayed by the ATTACH JOB function.

COPIES Must be numeric or left blank. Required only if altering thenumber of copies desired.

CLASS Print class to be assigned to a job file.

FORM Form to be assigned to a job file.


To alter file attributes from a job selection list, enter the code AT in the commandfield to the left of the appropriate job(s). More than one job may be selected. Thefollowing example shows how to alter a job from a job selection list.

Jobs: Alter Job Through Selection List





----- -------- ------------------- - --- ---- --------- ---------- --------


AT 283 SAMPLE AWAITING PRINT (H) 1 ANY LOCAL

AT 411= SAMPLE AWAITING PRINT (H) 1 ANY LOCAL

__ 4596 SAMPLE EXECUTING 8:4=:5= 3 11 XAD1 SYSTEMC SAMPLECS 18.79

__ 5477 SAMPLE EXECUTING 5:39:45 3 11 XAD1 LOCAL MUF8= 8.45

__ 7667 SAMPLE EXECUTING 3:24:35 3 11 XAD1 LOCAL CICS 36.23

---------------------------------------------------------------------------




U V

When you select the ALTER function, the Alter Job/File Attributes panel will bedisplayed. It will contain the name of the first job which was selected from theselection list. See the Alter Job panel and its description in “Jobs: Alter Job PanelDisplay” on page 30-18.



30.3.2 Copying Job Output


You can use a variety of commands to copy all or part of the currently attached joboutput file into the AWS. These commands include:

COPY JOB Copies all or part of a file into an AWS, as in:

COPY JOB T [TO SAMPLE]

which copies all of the currently attached job to the top of the AWSnamed SAMPLE. (If an AWS name is not included, the data arecopied to the active AWS.)

COPYS JOB Copies one or more lines containing the specified string from theattached file into an AWS, as in:

COPY JOB /DD/ 28== 53== 1==

which copies every line containing the string DD between line 2800and 5300 to (or after) line 100 in the active AWS.

COPYX JOB Copies one or more lines not containing the specified string from theattached file into an AWS.

XCOPY JOB Copies all or part of the attached file from one split screen into theactive AWS of the screen containing the command.

XCOPYS JOB Copies one or more lines containing the specified string from theattached file in one split screen into the active AWS of the screencontaining the command.

XCOPYX JOB Copies one or more lines not containing the specified string from theattached file in one split screen into the active AWS of the screencontaining the command.

For additional information about these commands and how they may be used, seeChapter 15, “AWS: Copying Data Within and Into an AWS.”


You can use the Job Facility menu to copy all or part of a job into the AWS. Enterthe code C in the FUNCTION field and the appropriate job name in the JOB/GRPNAME field. The following example shows how to copy a job from the primarymenu.



Jobs: Copy Job Through Job Facility Menu

7 8

<...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+...

JOB FACILITY

FUNCTION ===> C








U V

When you select the COPY JOB function, the Copy Job panel will be displayed. Itwill contain the name of the job which was entered on the primary menu and itscorresponding job number, as shown in the following example.

Jobs: Copy Job Display

7 8

<...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+...

COPY JOB

OPTION ===> C (C - COPY; X - EXIT)

JOB NAME ===> SAMPLE JOB NUMBER ===> 1234 FILE NUMBER ===>

FIRST LINE ===> AWS TARGET ===>

LAST LINE ===> AWS NAME ===>

COPIES ===> CONTROL CHARS ===> NO (Y, N)

Select the Copy option and fill in all appropriate fields, as listed below:

OPTION requires C or X; X returns to invoking Primary Menu or JobSelection display; C indicates to issue a COPY JOB request;Any other value redisplays the Copy Job screen.

JOB NAME The specific job name to be copied.



JOB NUMBER The specific job number to be copied.

FILE NUMBER File to be copied; Must be numeric.

FIRST LINE First line of file to be copied. Must be numeric or left blank.

LAST LINE Last line of file to be copied. Must be numeric or left blank.

COPIES Number of times to copy file to AWS. Defaults to 1.

AWS TARGET Location in the AWS to which the file is copied. Must be aline number, T (Top), B (Bottom), or R (Replace).

AWS NAME Name of AWS to receive the copied file. It must be thename of an existing AWS.

CONTROL CHARS Specifies whether control characters are included when thefile is copied. Value is initially set to that specified on thePrimary Menu.


To copy a job from a job selection list, enter the code C in the command field to theleft of the appropriate job(s). More than one job may be selected. The followingexample shows how to copy a job from a selection list.

Jobs: Copy Job Through Selection List





----- -------- ------------------- - --- ---- --------- ---------- --------


C_ 283 SAMPLE AWAITING PRINT (H) 1 ANY LOCAL

C_ 411= SAMPLE AWAITING PRINT (H) 1 ANY LOCAL




---------------------------------------------------------------------------




U V

When you select the COPY function, the Copy Job panel will be displayed. It willcontain the name of the first job which was selected from the selection list. See theCopy Job panel and its description in “Jobs: Copy Job Display” on page 30-21.



30.3.3 Displaying File Attributes

30.3.3.1 Using a Primary Command

You can display information about the currently attached job by entering:

STATUS

If your job is attached but not currently displayed, you can display the sameinformation by including the JOB keyword, as in:

STATUS JOB

The following example shows the type of information that is displayed using eithermethod.

Jobs: STATUS JOB Display

7 8 >

> STA(SAMPLE,2=85) SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72 JOB PENDING

....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+

ROSCOE ALTER/STATUS PROCESSOR

JOB NAME NO FILE LINE PAGE/ LINE FIND LIMIT I/O COUNT

SAMPLE 2=85 1 1 1 1 2== 1=

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

A FILE STA C DEST LINES FORM CPY NOTES

1 NOP T R1! 5 STD. 2 NOP T R1! 36 STD. 3 NOP T R1! 1=4 STD. 4 NOP T R1! 263 STD. 5 NOP T R1! 18 STD. 6 NOP T R1! 6 STD.

===================== END OF OUTPUT FILES ======================

U V

The status information includes:

JOB NAME Name of the job currently attached.

NO Number of the job currently attached.

FILE Number of the file currently pointed to.

LINE Number of the line within the file currently pointed to.

PAGE/ Number of the page currently pointed to.

LINE Number of the line within the page currently pointed to.



FIND LIMIT Current search limit (the number of lines to be searched).

This value is used when an EXCL, FIRST, INCL, LAST,NEXT or PREV command is entered with no search limit. Itis either the site default or the number you specified with theSET JOBCNT command.

I/O COUNT Current number of blocks read from the system spool. (Thisfield is meaningless at JES3 sites.)

A (Modifiable) Use this field to:

1. Redisplay the job beginning with a specific file byentering, before the appropriate file.

A or S Attach file.

2. Alter the printing status of a file by entering:

P Print file at system or 328x-type printer.D or N Do not print the file.

FILE CA-Roscoe-assigned file number.

STA Printing status (disposition) of each file. (The disposition canbe modified as noted with A.)

C (Modifiable) Use this field to change the SYSOUT class of a file byovertyping the character with any class valid for thedesignated system or 328x-type printer.

DEST (Modifiable) Use this field to change the printing destination of a file byovertyping with:

1. A system printer ID.2. A 328x-type printer destination.

To use the default destination associated with yourterminal, enter an R. (Erase any other charactersappearing in the field.)

If there is a name conflict between a 328x-type printer and asystem printer, the system printer is assumed. To force the328x-type printer to be used, precede the name with an R. Forexample, if LOCAL is the name of both a system and328x-type printer, enter R LOCAL to direct the file to the328x-type printer.

LINES Number of print lines in each file or N/A if the number isunavailable.

FORM (Modifiable) Use this field to indicate the FORMAT or TYPE status of afile by entering ANS, MCC, DUMP, CHEX or VHEX. For afile directed to a system printer, this field can be used tochange the output form number.



CPY (Modifiable) Use this field to change the number of copies of a file to beprinted.

NOTE CA-Roscoe-assigned file description.

If you change one or more of the modifiable fields and then decide that these changesshould not be applied, you can:

1. Overtype the appropriate field(s), or2. Press PA1 or the CLEAR key to refresh the display.

30.3.3.2 Using the Job Selection List

To display the status of a job from a job selection list, enter the code S in thecommand field to the left of the appropriate job(s). More than one job may beselected. The following example shows how to display status information from a jobselection list.

Jobs: Job Status Through Job Selection List





----- -------- ------------------- - --- ---- --------- ---------- --------


S_ 283 SAMPLE AWAITING PRINT (H) 1 ANY LOCAL

S_ 411= SAMPLE AWAITING PRINT (H) 1 ANY LOCAL




---------------------------------------------------------------------------




U V

When you select the STATUS function, the first job selected will be ATTACHed tothe STATUS JOB display. See the STATUS Job display and its description in “Jobs:STATUS JOB Display” on page 30-23.



30.3.4 Printing Job Output


There are a variety of commands you can use to request that one or more files beprinted at a system or 328x-type printer.

■ Use the PRINT command to direct all or the currently attached file to a system or328x-type printer. For example, if you enter:

PRINT JOB

All of the currently attached file is printed at the 328x-type printer associated withyour terminal.

For a detailed description of the PRINT command and how requests can bemonitored and controlled, see Chapter 7, “Printing Data.”

Use the ALTER command to change a file's print status and alter its systemprinter destination. When the job is released, the file will be printed.

■ Use the modifiable STATUS JOB display or a Job List 'A' panel to designatewhether a file is to print at a system or 328x-type printer.

■ Use the CK function of the Job List Facility. The job is terminated, and a listingof the job output is produced.


You can use the Job Facility menu to print a job. Enter the code P in the FUNCTIONfield and the appropriate job name in the JOB/GRP NAME field. The followingexample shows how to print a job from the primary menu.



Jobs: Print Job Through Job Facility Menu

7 8

<...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+...

JOB FACILITY

FUNCTION ===> P








U V

When you select the PRINT JOB function, the Print Job panel will be displayed. Itwill contain the name of the job which was entered on the primary menu, as shown inthe following example.

Jobs: Print Job Display

7 8

<...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+...

PRINT JOB

OPTION ===> P (P - PRINT; X - EXIT)

JOB NAME ===> SAMPLE JOB NUMBER ===> 1234 FILE NUMBER ===>

DESTINATION ===> TAG ===> COPIES ===>

CLASS ===> OUTPUT TYPE ===> NOTIFY ===> (Y, N

FIRST LINE ===> TOP MARGIN ===> SEPARATOR ===> (Y, N

LAST LINE ===> BOT MARGIN ===> ALIGN ===> (Y, N

FIRST COLUMN ===> PAGE LENGTH ===> SEQ NUMS ===> (Y, N

LAST COLUMN ===> PAGE WIDTH ===>

U V



Select the PRINT option and fill in all appropriate fields, which consist of thefollowing:

OPTION requires P or X; X returns to invoking Primary Menu or JobSelection display; P indicates to issue a PRINT JOB request;Any other value redisplays the Print Job screen.

JOB NAME The specific job name to be printed.

JOB NUMBER The specific job number name to be printed.

FILE NUMBER File to be printed; Must be numeric.

DESTINATION The printer destination used to print the job file.

CLASS Print class to be assigned to the job file.

FIRST LINE First line of file to be printed. Must be numeric or leftblank.

LAST LINE Last line of file to be printed. Must be numeric or left blank.

FIRST COLUMN First column of file to be printed. Must be numeric or leftblank.

LAST COLUMN Last column of file to be printed. Must be numeric or leftblank.

TAG Name to be assigned to print request. Defaults to user'sCA-Roscoe ID.

OUTPUT TYPE Specification of print format. Must be DEF, ANS, or MCC,or left blank (defaults to DEF).

TOP MARGIN Number of blank lines to be skipped from the top of the pagebefore printing begins. Must be numeric or left blank.(Applicable only when OUTPUT TYPE is specified DEF).

BOTTOM MARGIN Number of blank lines to be skipped at bottom of page.Must be numeric or left blank. (Applicable only whenOUTPUT TYPE is specified DEF).

PAGE LENGTH Length of paper in number of print lines. Must be numericor left blank. (Applicable only when OUTPUT TYPE isspecified DEF).

PAGE WIDTH Width of paper in printing columns. Must be numeric or leftblank.

COPIES Number of times to print file. Defaults to 1.

NOTIFY Specifies whether a notification message is displayed whenthe request is printed. Must be YES, NO, or left blank.

SEPARATOR Specifies whether separator pages are included. Must beYES, NO, or left blank.

ALIGN Specifies whether a physical page alignment is forced. Mustbe YES, NO, or left blank.



SEQ NUMS Specifies whether sequence numbers are included when thedata are printed. Must be YES, NO, or left blank.


To print a job from a job selection list, enter the code P in the command field to theleft of the appropriate job(s). More than one job may be selected. The followingexample shows how to print a job from a job selection list.

Jobs: Print Job Through Selection List





----- -------- ------------------- - --- ---- --------- ---------- --------


P_ 283 SAMPLE AWAITING PRINT (H) 1 ANY LOCAL

P_ 411= SAMPLE AWAITING PRINT (H) 1 ANY LOCAL




---------------------------------------------------------------------------




U V

When you select the PRINT function, the Print Job panel will be displayed. Fill in theappropriate fields there to print the job. See the Print Job display and its descriptionin “Jobs: Print Job Display” on page 30-27.



30.3.5 Canceling a Job


The PURGE monitor command can be used to cancel a job from the system queue.

Note: Sites have the option of restricting the use of this command; check with yoursite system programmer for more information about using PURGE.

For example, to cancel the job named SAMPLE, enter:

PURGE SAMPLE

If there are multiple jobs with the same name, you must specify the number of the job,as in:

PURGE SAMPLE 1234


You can use the Job Facility menu to cancel a job. Enter the code CN in theFUNCTION field and the appropriate job name in the JOB/GRP NAME field. Checkthe value displayed in the CONFIRM CANCEL field to see whether a confirmationpanel will be presented. The default, YES, will present the Cancel Job Confirmationpanel from which you can confirm the job information. If you do not want to confirmjob cancellations, overtype this value with NO. The following example illustrateshow to cancel a job from the Job Facility menu.

Jobs: Cancel Job Through Job Facility Menu

7 8

<...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+...

JOB FACILITY

FUNCTION ===> CN








U V



When you select the CANCEL JOB function, and the CONFIRM CANCEL value isYES, the Cancel Job Confirmation panel will be displayed:

Jobs: Confirm Job Cancel

7 8

<...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+...

CANCEL JOB CONFIRMATION

CONFIRM CANCEL ===> N (Y - YES, N - NO)

JOB INFORMATION:

1234 SAMPLE AWAITING PRINT (H) 15 ANY LOCAL

From this screen, select Y (YES) to cancel the job listed under JOB INFORMATION.If you do not want to cancel the job, select N (NO) and you will be returned to the jobmenu.


To cancel a job from a job selection list, enter the code CN in the command field tothe left of the appropriate job(s). More than one job may be selected. The followingexample shows how to cancel a job from a job selection list.

Jobs: Cancel Job Through Selection List





----- -------- ------------------- - --- ---- --------- ---------- --------


CN 283 SAMPLE AWAITING PRINT (H) 1 ANY LOCAL

CN 411= SAMPLE AWAITING PRINT (H) 1 ANY LOCAL




---------------------------------------------------------------------------




U V

When you select the CANCEL function, the Cancel Job Confirmation panel will bedisplayed. Select YES to cancel the job. See the confirmation display and itsdescription in “Jobs: Confirm Job Cancel.”


Part V. The Library System (Browsing and ManagingLocal Data)

Chapter 31. Library: Introducing the Library Facility . . . . . . . . . . . 31-131.1 Notes About the Library System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-231.2 Attaching the Library Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-331.3 Using Library Facility Function Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-631.4 Using the Library Facility Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-7


Chapter 32. Library: Attaching Library Data at the Terminal . . . . . . 32-132.1 Attaching a Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-2

32.1.1 Using a Primary Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-232.1.2 Using the Library Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-532.1.3 Format of Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-632.1.4 Reordering the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-9

32.2 Attaching a Member Directly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-1032.2.1 Using a Primary Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-1032.2.2 Using the Library Facility Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-1132.2.3 Using a Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-1132.2.4 Format of Member Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-12


Chapter 33. Library: Browsing Attached Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-133.1 Detaching the Library Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-233.2 Locating Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-3

33.2.1 Locating Specific Occurrences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-333.2.2 Including/Excluding Lists Containing a String . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-433.2.3 Customizing the Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-5

33.3 Positioning the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-833.3.1 Positioning to Specific Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-833.3.2 Positioning to Named Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-8

33.4 Reattaching the Library Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-10

Chapter 34. Library: Performing Library Management Tasks . . . . . . 34-134.1 Altering Member Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-2


34.2 Copying a Member/Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-534.2.1 Using Primary Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-534.2.2 Using a Function Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-8

34.2.3 Using a Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-934.3 Delete a Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-11

34.3.1 Using a Primary Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-1134.3.2 Using a Function Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-1234.3.3 Using a Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-1334.3.4 Delete Confirmation Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-14

34.4 Inquiring About a Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-1534.5 Printing a Library Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-17


34.6 Renaming Library Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-2234.6.1 Using a Primary Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-2234.6.2 Using a Function Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-2234.6.3 Using a Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-23


Chapter 31. Library: Introducing the Library Facility

The CA-Roscoe library system provides a permanent storage area for data that is in anAWS. The data are stored in a library member that you create through the SAVEcommand. This chapter describes how you can:

■ Attach a library member or Selection List of members.

■ Browse through the attached member or Selection List. While browsing, you canlocate and note the occurrences of specific character strings. You can also browseother types of attached data (like an AWS) and then return to the data you werebrowsing.

■ Perform a variety of library management functions which include:

– Copying all or part of a library member or Selection List into an AWS.

– Printing all or part of a library member or Selection List at a system or328x-type printer.

– Renaming or deleting a library member.

– Changing library member attributes.

You can perform all of these operations using the Library Facility or primarycommands. Many of these operations can also be performed using the Selection Listprovided through the Library Facility.

Note: See Chapter 23, “AWS: Saving and Updating a Library Member” foradditional information.

Chapter 31. Library: Introducing the Library Facility 31-1

31.1 Notes About the Library System

31.1 Notes About the Library System

■ When you attach a library member, the contents of that member is not modifiable.To modify it, you must first bring a copy of it into an AWS. When you havefinished modifying the copy in that AWS, you must explicitly update the memberto alter its contents.

■ You need not attach a member to:

– Submit the contents of one or more members to the operating system forexecution.

– Write the content of one or more members to a data set.

– Copy one or more members into an AWS.

– Print one or more members.

■ When you create a library member, your CA-Roscoe prefix is associated with it. Itis this prefix that guarantees your library member name is unique. For example, ifyou and another user each create a member named TESTJCL, the names areunique because of the addition of your unique prefixes.

You do not need to specify your prefix when working with your library members.When working with members belonging to another user, you must include thatperson's prefix, as in:

ATTACH TESTJCL : attach your own member

ATTACH ABC.TESTJCL : attach another user's member

■ CA-Roscoe provides a multi-level security system which allows:

– you to assign an access attribute to your members. For example, if you assignthe access attribute EXECONLY to a member containing an RPF program,other users can execute your member but cannot access it in any other way.

– site management to assign you to a security group. These security groupsdefine the type of access people have to members that you have defined asshareable.

This system thus ensures the integrity of your library members from deletion ormodification by unauthorized users.


31.2 Attaching the Library Facility


You can attach the Library Facility menu by issuing the command:

ATTACH LIB or

LIBRARY

You can include a function code and library name with this command.

If you include a function code and that function has a panel associated with it, you canbypass the Library Facility menu and display the function panel. For example, if youenter:

LIBRARY C COBTEST

the Copy Function Panel is displayed with COBTEST in the MEMBER field.

If you are currently using the Library Facility, you can redisplay the menu by entering:

SELECT MENU

The variable information shown on the menu is determined by the format of the menu.To change the format, you can use the command:

SELECT ALT [v]

If you omit the number v, you will proceed sequentially through the different formats.If you specify a number, it can be:

1 To show the last specific member name.2 To show the last executed RPF program name.3 To show the last generic member name.4 To show the last prefix or key.



Library: Library Facility Menu

7 8 >

> LIB() SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===79

....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7

LIBRARY FACILITY

FUNCTION ==>

PREFIX ==> LIB ALTER ===> EXPLICIT

MEMBER ==>

SIGNON KEY ==>

FORMAL KEY ==>

SEARCH ==> (SHR,RES,EXE,NOD)

CONFIRM DELETE ==>

A - ATTACH LIBRARY D - DELETE MEMBERS P - PRINT MEMBER

C - COPY MEMBERS I - INFO MEMBERS R - RENAME MEMBERS

X - TERMINATE LIB

U V


FUNCTION Enter the appropriate code to perform the desired action. Thecodes and their related actions are shown at the bottom of themenu.

PREFIX Enter the two- or three-character prefix associated with theindividual whose members are to be involved in theoperation.

MEMBER Enter the one- to eight-character name of the member to beinvolved in the operation. (This name may be composed ofone or more wildcard characters.)

SIGNON KEY Enter the sign-on key associated with the individual whosemembers are to be involved in the operation.

FORMAL KEY Protected field containing the formal key associated with theindividual identified through the PREFIX or SIGNON KEYfield.



SEARCH Enter one or more of the following codes to qualify thesearch operation. If omitted, all members are included in theoperation. The codes are:

SHR Members with a shared access attribute.RES Members with a restricted access attribute.EXE Members with an execute-only access attribute.NOD Members that have no description.

CONFIRM DELETE Designate whether delete operations are to be confirmed priorto execution by specifying:

YES Operation should be confirmed. (Can beabbreviated as Y.)

NO Operation should not be confirmed. (Can beabbreviated as N.)

The first time you use the Library Facility, this field is set toYES. The setting in effect when you sign-off is rememberedand reinstated when you sign back on.

LIB ALTER Designate whether altering the DESCRIPTION, ATtRibute,or sequence number(SEQNO) fields of the Library SelectionList is to be done explicitly. Specify:

EXPLICIT Changes are made on the Selection List, usingthe AT line command and overtyping the datato be altered.

IMPLICIT Changes are made on the Selection List bydirectly overtyping the data to be altered.


31.3 Using Library Facility Function Panels

31.3 Using Library Facility Function Panels

You can use the Library Facility to perform a variety of functions. Each function isidentified by a specific code. The codes can be specified with the LIBRARYcommand or through the Library Facility menu.

The field ACTION in indicates whether the function is performed directly or requiresadditional information. For example, the information you provide through the menu issufficient to attach a member (function code A) but is insufficient to rename a member(function code R).

When additional information is needed, a function-related panel is displayed. Whensuch a panel is displayed, you can move from it to another panel or to the menu byentering in the first panel field:

=[code.code]

■ If you enter only the equal sign (=), you are returned to the menu.

■ If you specify =X, the Data Set Facility is terminated.

■ If you specify any other code (like =C), the appropriate function-related panel isdisplayed.

If the function-related panel is displayed while the screens are split, you can use PFkeys to scroll the panel.

All of the Library Facility functions are described in detail in Chapter 34, “Library:Performing Library Management Tasks.”


A Attach a member or Selection List. Performed.

C Copy a member or Selection List. Panel displayed.

D Delete a member. Panel displayed.

I Inquire about a member. Performed.

P Print a member or Selection List. Panel displayed.

R Rename a member. Panel displayed.

X Terminate the Library Facility. Performed.


31.4 Using the Library Facility Selection List


You can use the Library Facility or a primary command to create and attach:

■ A list of all or selected members that you own.■ A list of all or selected members belonging to another user.

The information is displayed as a Selection List in the Execution Area of the screen.This allows you to issue primary commands in the Command Area while working withthe Selection List.

The first line of a Selection List contains a top marker (==TOP==). If the bottommarker (==BOTTOM==) is not displayed, the number of members in the list exceedsthe screen size. You can use PF keys to scroll within the List.

The information displayed in the Selection List is separated into specific fields. Somefields contain Library information and remain constant as you scroll through theSelection List (for example, the SIGNON KEY and MEM fields.) There are alsofields which contain member-specific information. By default, these fields aredisplayed alphabetically by member name, or by the order designated by the SET LIBORDER command.

To designate a specific Selection List order, enter the field and order criteria, as in:

SET LIB ORDER LINES ASC

See the CA-Roscoe Command Reference Guide for more information about using theSET LIB ORDER command.

The amount of information available with each Selection List exceeds the width of80-column screens. The information is, therefore, divided into alternate displayformats. To view the different formats sequentially, enter the command:

SELECT ALT

To view a specific format, enter the number of that format with the command, as in:

SELECT ALT 2

See Chapter 32, “Library: Attaching Library Data at the Terminal,” for informationabout displaying each type of Selection List. The information includes a description ofthe fields comprising each list. The alternate display numbers shown with thedescription are for 80-column screens. Additional formats (containing variations of theinformation) are available at terminals supporting wider screen sizes.



31.4.1 Entering Function Codes

You can use the Selection List to perform a variety of functions. Each function isidentified by a specific code. You can enter one or more codes per Selection List. Asillustrated in the following figure the function codes are entered in the shaded areashown at the left of the display.

If you specify the same function code multiple times, they are processed sequentially.

If you specify different function codes, the codes are processed sequentially within thefollowing function hierarchy:

X Terminate Library Facility.D Delete member.R Rename member.AT Alter member attributes/description.P Print a member.I Inquire about member.C Copy a member.A Attach member.

| E Edit a member| SU Submit a member

The following example illustrates how you can enter multiple functions codes on aSelection List. You can further qualify any function by specifying information in theSTATUS field (the second shaded area). (See Chapter 34, “Library: PerformingLibrary Management Tasks” for information about each of the functions you canperform through a Selection List.)

Library: Selection List Function Hierarchy Example

7 8 >

> LIB() SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72 LINE ====1

....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6..

==================================== T O P ===================

SIGNON KEY MEM EXCL BLOCKS M-LINES LINES

SMITH 82 = 223 2==== 117=1

MEMBER STATUS DESCRIPTION LINES ATR SEQNO

XYZ.ABLE 1 SHR N

A XYZ.BEGINJCL JCL: Link-Edit 1=

I XYZ.COBTEST1 Sample COBOL Prog. 193 SHR =

XYZ.COBTEST2 4=3 SHR =

D XYZ.JUNK 87 SHR N

R XYZ.MYRPF DOJCL RPF: Builds JCL 519



Using the example in “Library: Selection List Function Hierarchy Example” onpage 31-8, the functions are processed in the following order:

1. The member JUNK will be deleted. (A delete confirmation panel may bedisplayed.)

2. The member MYRPF will then be renamed using the name specified in theSTATUS field (for example, DOJCL).

3. An information panel for COBTEST1 is then presented and any remainingunexecuted functions are placed in a pending state. After viewing the information,you can:

■ Resume function code execution by entering the command SELECT NEXT.The next function (for example, attach BEGINJCL) will be performed.

■ Terminate execution by entering SELECT PREV (to return to the SelectionList) or SELECT MENU (to return to the Library Facility menu). In eithercase, any unexecuted functions are ignored.

4. Finally, the member BEGINJCL is displayed.

Notes:

■ All function codes are evaluated before any one is executed. If an invalid orincomplete function is specified, the functions are placed in a pending state and amessage is displayed. To resume execution, you must either:

1. Correct the invalid/incomplete function, or2. Remove it by typing a space over.

■ If multiple function codes are specified and one of them is X, all of the otherfunction codes are ignored. The Library Facility is immediately terminated.



31.4.2 Refreshing a Selection List

After a function is performed, the STATUS field contains the appropriate completionmessage. The following example illustrates how the Selection List might appear afterperforming the actions noted in the previous figure.

Library: Selection List Before REFRESHing

7 8 >


....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6..

==================================== T O P ===================


SMITH 82 = 223 2==== 117=1


XYZ.ABLE 1 SHR NOSEQ

XYZ.BEGINJCL )ATTACH JCL: Link-Edit 1= SHR =73,8

XYZ.COBTEST1 )INFO Sample COBOL Prog. 193 SHR ==1,6

XYZ.COBTEST2 4=3 SHR ==1,6

XYZ.JUNK )DELETE 87 SHR NOSEQ

XYZ.MYRPF )RENAME RPF: Build JCL 519 SHR NOSEQ

U V

The more functions you perform through the same Selection List, the more completionmessages will be displayed. At any point, you can redisplay the Selection List with themost current information (for example, the deleted members removed and renamedmembers shown with their new names). To do this, enter the command:

REFRESH


Chapter 32. Library: Attaching Library Data at theTerminal

This chapter describes how you can display:

■ A Library Member Selection List, or■ A library member directly.

Chapter 32. Library: Attaching Library Data at the Terminal 32-1

32.1 Attaching a Selection List


You can use a primary command or the Library Facility menu to display a SelectionList containing information about all or selected members that either belong to you orto another CA-Roscoe user.


You can use the ATTACH LIB command to produce a Selection List containinginformation about:

■ All Members:

To display a list of all of your own members, enter:

ATTACH LIB +

To display a list of all members associated with another individual, enter:

ATTACH [LIB] KEY SMITH

where SMITH is the sign-on key assigned to the individual whose members are tobe listed, or

ATTACH [LIB] XYZ.

where XYZ is the prefix assigned to the individual whose members are to belisted. (When specifying a prefix, you must include the terminating period.)



■ Selected Members:

You can use wildcard characters to produce a qualified Selection List containingspecific information about members that belong to you or another user. Forexample, to display a Selection List containing only those names that include thecharacters JCL, you would enter:

ATTACH LIB QJCLQ or ATTACH LIB XYZ.QJCLQ

or

ATTACH LIB XYZ.QJCLQ

The following table shows the wildcard characters that you can specify throughthe primary command or the Library Facility menu.

These wildcards can be used in the same search string, as in:

ATTACH [LIB] S?AQJCL+

where the member names STARTJCL1 would match. Note that consecutiveasterisks (**) or an asterisk and plus sign (*+) are invalid.

You can further qualify the list by using:

– Access attributes (like SHARED, EXECONLY and RESTRICTED) to limitthe Selection List to members assigned specific access attributes. For example,to limit the List to only those members with an EXECONLY access attribute,enter:

ATTACH LIB + EXECONLY or

ATTACH [LIB] XYZ. EXECONLY

(Site management can limit the amount of information you receive aboutanother user's members.)

Code Meaning and Examoles


Example: Matches:

RO? ROEROSROW


*JCL* AJCLJCLJCLENDXJCLX


RO+ ROROEROSCOE



– NODESC to limit the display to those members that have no descriptions, asin:

ATTACH LIB + NODESC or

ATTACH [LIB] XYZ. NODESC

– The ORDER operand to sort the display by specific criterion. You can sort aLibrary Selection List by fields or parts of fields (prefixes, suffixes, or partsof dates) in ascending or descending order. For example, to attach a LibrarySelection List and order it by member name suffixes in descending order, andby their attributes, enter:

ATTACH LIB + ORDERED BY MEMBER COL 7 9 DESCENDING AND ATR or

ATTACH [LIB] XYZ. ORDERED BY MEM COL 7 9 DES AND ATR

Finally, you can combine several qualifiers, as in:

ATTACH LIB QJCLQ SHARED EXECONLY NODESC or

ATTACH [LIB] XYZ.QJCLQ SHARED EXECONLY NODESC

where only these members whose names contain the characters JCL are initiallyselected. This group is then further qualified so that only those matching memberswith a shared or execute-only access attribute or no description are included in theresulting Selection List.

Using the LIB Operand:

As illustrated in the preceding examples, LIB is required only when the selectioncriteria begins with a wildcard character.



32.1.2 Using the Library Facility

To attach a Selection List containing all members that you or another user own, typethe code A in the FUNCTION field. Then, enter the appropriate prefix or sign-on key,as illustrated in below.

Library: Attaching a Selection List (All Members)

7 8 >


....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.

LIBRARY FACILITY

FUNCTION ===> A

PREFIX ===> XYZ

MEMBER ===>

SIGNON KEY ===>

To create a qualified Selection List, type an A in the FUNCTION field and theappropriate prefix in the PREFIX field. Then use wildcard characters with the nametyped in the MEMBER field.

As illustrated in the following example, you can use the SEARCH field to further limitthe members that are to be included in the List.

Library: Attaching a Qualified Selection List

7 8 >


....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.

LIBRARY FACILITY

FUNCTION ==> A

PREFIX ==> XYZ

MEMBER ==> RO+

SIGNON KEY ==>

FORMAL KEY ==>

SEARCH ==> SHR (SHR,RES,EXE,NOD)



32.1.3 Format of Selection List

The following example illustrates the format of the Library Facility Selection List.

Library: Selection List Description

7 8 >


....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6..

==================================== T O P ===================


SMITH 82 = 223 2==== 117=1


XYZ.ABLE 1 SHR NO

XYZ.BEGINJCL JCL: Link-Edit 1= SHR =7

XYZ.COBTEST1 Sample COBOL Prog. 193 SHR ==

XYZ.COBTEST2 4=3 SHR ==

XYZ.JUNK 87 SHR NO

XYZ.MYRPF RPF: Builds JCL 519 SHR NO

U V

You can use this Selection List to perform one or more of the following function:

A Attach a memberAT Alter attributesC Copy a memberD Delete a memberI Display member informationP Print a memberR Rename a memberX Terminate Library Facility* Position Selection List

Type the appropriate code(s) in the first shaded area shown in the previous figure.

With Alter, Copy, Print and Rename, you must provide additional information in theSTATUS field. (See the appropriate sections for details.) After performing a function,the STATUS field will indicate the result of the operation.

Screens which do not contain STATUS fields are not modifiable.





SELECT ALT [v]




The first two lines in the Execution Area (following the TOP marker) remain constantas you scroll through the Selection List and show:

SIGNON KEY Sign-on key associated with the individual whose members areincluded in the display.

MATCH Optional field included only when selection criteria was used toproduce the List.

MEM Number of library members included in the Selection List.

EXCL Number of library members that site management excluded from thedisplay.

BLOCKS Number of library blocks used by the members included in the List.

M-LINES Maximum number of lines the owner of these members may save inthe library or N/A if the owner has no limit.

LINES Number of lines contained within all of the members included in thedisplay.

The remaining fields identify the individual members comprising the List, and includethe information shown in the following table.



If your terminal screen displays more than 80 characters, you can issue SELECT ALT4 to view all of the preceding information. At all terminals, you can place all of thisinformation into an AWS by using the FULL operand of the COPY (LIB) command.

An additional field is provided when you view or copy all of the library information.The field is named CRT and indicates how the member was created. It will contain:

■ Blanks, if the member was created online.■ BCH, if the member was created by a batch program.■ MON, if the member was created by a Monitor command.■ POS, if the member was created by an obsolete post-processor.

Field Name Description Alt Attrib.

MEMBER Name of the member matching theselection criteria

All Asc

DESCRIPTION Description of the member, if available ALL Asc

LINES Number of lines the member contains 1 Des

ATR Member's access attribute 1 Asc

SEQNO Member's sequence number attribute 1 Asc

CREATED Date the member was created 1 Des

UPDATED Date the last member was updated 2/3 Des

ACCESS Date the member was last accessed 3 Des



32.1.4 Reordering the Display

The fields listed in the previous table can be used to qualify the Library Selection Listdisplay. Each field has a default sorting attribute (ascending or descending). Bydefault, a Selection List is sorted by member names, in ascending order. Use theORDER command to change the display and order it by any one (or more) of thefields. For example, to reorder a Selection List by the number of lines in members, indescending order (default), enter:

ORDER LIB LINES

The 'LIB' operand is required if the Library Facility is not active. For example, tosort a displayed Selection List by year of member creation date, in ascending order,enter:

ORDER CREATED COL 7 8 ASC

Notice that the CREATED field is on the second alternate screen. The list will bereordered even if the CREATED field is not displayed. Use the SELECT ALTcommand to display the CREATED field.

You can also reorder more than one field at a time. For example, to reorder aSelection List by sequence attributes and ascending line count, enter:

ORDER LIB SEQNO LINES ASC

Sorting is done in order of the operands specified. So, in the last example, theSelection List is reordered by sequence attributes, and then by line counts.

Note: A maximum of six order criteria are permitted.

You can set the default order of a Library Selection List to a specific field. Everytime you attach a Library Selection List, it will be sorted by that criterion. Use theSET LIB ORDER command, as in:

SET LIB ORDER LINES

Any subsequent order commands will override this setting. To reset the LibrarySelection List display to the site default, specify:

SET LIB ORDER DEFAULT


32.2 Attaching a Member Directly


You can use the ATTACH primary command, the Library Facility menu or theSelection List to view a library member.


You can attach a library member by entering the ATTACH command and theappropriate library member name, as in:

ATTACH TESTJCL

To browse a member that belongs to another user, you must include that user's prefix.For example, to attach the member COBPROG that belongs to the individual assignedthe prefix ABC, you would enter:

ATTACH ABC.COBPROG

Operands of this command allow you to control the display. For example, you can:

■ Begin the display with a specific line, as in:

ATTACH TESTJCL LINE 12==

■ Begin the display with the first line containing a specific string, as in:

ATTACH TESTJCL /SYSOUT=/

Additional operands allow you to qualify the string. For example, to begin the displaywith the first line containing a word that begins with SYS, you would enter:

ATTACH TESTJCL /SYS/ PREFIX

All of these operands can be used together, as in:

ATTACH TESTJCL /SYS/ PREFIX LINE 12==

which will start at line 1200 of the member TESTJCL to search for the first wordbeginning with the prefix SYS.



32.2.2 Using the Library Facility Menu

As illustrated in the following example, to attach a member from the Library Facilitymenu, type an A in the FUNCTION field and the appropriate name in the MEMBERfield. (If the member belongs to another individual, that person's prefix must bespecified in the PREFIX field.)

7 8 >


....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.

LIBRARY FACILITY

FUNCTION ===> A

PREFIX ===> ABC

MEMBER ===> COBPROG

SIGNON KEY ===>


To attach a member through a Selection List, specify the A (for Attach) function codeto the left of the member name, as illustrated below.

Library: Attaching a Member Through a Selection List

7 8 >


....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6..

==================================== T O P ===================


SMITH 352 = 971 2==== 117=1



XYZ.BEGINJCL JCL: Link-Edit 1= SHR =73,8

A XYZ.COBTEST1 Sample COBOL Prog. 193 SHR ==1,6



32.2.4 Format of Member Display

The following example illustrates the display format used when a library member isattached.

7 8

>

> LIB(XYZ.COBTEST1) SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===73 LINE =====1

> <....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5..

============================= T O P ================


=====2 PROGRAM-ID. COBTEST.





The System Information Line begins with LIB and is followed by the prefixed name ofthe currently attached library member.


The attached data itself is delimited by a top (==TOP==) and bottom (==BOTTOM==)marker. You can position the display by using primary commands and/or the PF keysto which scrolling functions are assigned.




When you are viewing either attached data or a Selection List, you can use theSELECT command to reposition the display between various levels of the LibraryFacility. You can enter:

SELECT MENU To display the Library Facility menu.

SELECT DIR To display the Library Selection List.

SELECT mem To display a specific library member. The name must haveappeared in a previously displayed Library Selection List.

SELECT PREV To display the previous level in the processing hierarchy.

SELECT NEXT To perform the next function specified on the Selection List. Forexample, suppose you indicated on the Selection List that youwanted to attach three members. If you are now browsing one ofthose members, you can see the next one by entering SELECTNEXT.

When you are browsing a Selection List, you can use the SELECT command tochange the display by entering:

SELECT ALT To position to the next sequential alternate display format. Toposition to a specific alternate format, specify a number with thecommand, as in:

SELECT ALT 3


Chapter 33. Library: Browsing Attached Data

This chapter describes how, while browsing the contents of a library member orSelection List, you can:

■ Detach the Library Facility.

■ Locate the specific occurrences of a string within the attached member orSelection List.

■ Position the display to a specific line, or to a line to which you have assigned aname.

■ Reattach the library member or Selection List after browsing an AWS, a data setobject or job output file.

Chapter 33. Library: Browsing Attached Data 33-1

33.1 Detaching the Library Facility

33.1 Detaching the Library Facility

You can explicitly detach the Library Facility by entering the command:

DETACH LIB

The Library Facility is also detached by entering the function code X on the menu,any function panel or the Selection List. (If you enter X on the Selection List withother function codes, those functions will be ignored.)

ATTACHing another library member implicitly detaches the currently attachedmember. If you have assigned NOTE names to the member, those names are deletedwhen the member is detached.

If you execute a command that causes output to the Execution Area (like ATTACHingan AWS) or if you press the CLEAR key, the Library Facility is placed in a pendingstate and can be reattached at any time.


33.2 Locating Data

33.2 Locating Data

This section describes how you can use a variety of commands to scan a member orSelection List for all or specific occurrences of a string.

While this description assumes you are locating strings that are in character format,you can also locate the hexadecimal representation of a string. See 33.2.3,“Customizing the Operation” on page 33-5 for details.

33.2.1 Locating Specific Occurrences

When you initially attach a library member, you can cause the display to begin withthe first line containing a specific string by including that string with the command, asin:

ATTACH COBTEST1 /PROCEDURE/

In this example, the first line containing the string PROCEDURE in the memberCOBTEST1 will be the first displayed line.

Once attached, you can use the following commands to find and display specificoccurrences of a string.



FIRST DIVISION

The first occurrence of the string DIVISION in the currently attached member will bethe first line of the resulting display.


LAST


By default, the entire member (for example, the full length of every line) is searchedfor your string. You can include column and line numbers with the command toqualify the search for a single operation. For example:

NEXT 1= 3= SAMPLE

examines columns 10 through 30 for the next occurrence of SAMPLE.


33.2 Locating Data

After the command executes, the defaults are reestablished. To change the columnboundaries for the remainder of your session, use the SET BOUNDS command. (SeeChapter 4, “Defining Column Boundaries” for additional information.)

By including a value after the string, you can limit the search to a specific number oflines. For example, to find the last occurrence of SAMPLE within the last 200 lines ofcurrently displayed data, you would enter:

LAST SAMPLE 2==

33.2.2 Including/Excluding Lists Containing a String

You can use the INCL command to display every occurrence of a particular characterstring within a given number of lines. For example, to find every occurrence of thestring TEST-DATA in the next 100 lines of the currently displayed data, you wouldenter:

INCL TEST-DATA 1==

If you do not specify a number, every line is searched. You can also limit the searchfor the character string to particular columns.


For example, if you want to display every line that does not contain the stringTEST-DATA in columns 30 through 80, you would enter:


If the number of lines to be displayed exceeds the size of your terminal screen, pressone of the PF keys to which a scrolling function is assigned. The INCL or EXCLoperation will resume scanning for the previously specified string (like TEST-DATA).

The direction of the scan depends on the value assigned to the PF key. (The searchstring is remembered for subsequent use; column number limits and line number limitsapply only to the command with which they are specified.)




POINT LINE 15=




33.2 Locating Data

Note: When you create an INCL/EXCL display from a Selection List, you can enterany function code(s). If a function results in another display (that is, attachingan entry in the list), the INCL/EXCL operation is terminated.

33.2.3 Customizing the Operation

This section describes how you can qualify a search operation.

33.2.3.1 Translating the Search String


33.2.3.2 Delimiting the Search String

In all of the examples used thus far, the search string has not been delimited. Withthese commands, you only need to delimit the string when it:


INCL /JOB/).


33.2 Locating Data

33.2.3.3 Qualifying the Search String

By default, CA-Roscoe searches for any set of characters or spaces that exactly matchthe specified string. To limit the search operation, you can include the qualifieroperands. These operands are WORD, PREFIX, BEGIN, EMBED, END and SUFFIX

For example, assume the attached member contains the line:


and you want to search for the string THE. Without qualification, the words THE,BROTHER and THEIR match the search string. By including a qualifier, you candesignate the type of string match that is to occur, as in:









X'string'


FIRST X'C1'



33.2 Locating Data



FIRST X'C1' LITERAL

■ Specify the string so that it does not conform to hex notation. This method can beused with both primary and line commands. For example, to find the characterstring X'C1' you might specify:

/X'C1/

or

/X'C1' /











■ Position to a specific line within a library member.

■ Assign names to specific lines within a library member and then later repositionthe display to begin with a named location.


If the contents of the member or Selection List you are viewing exceeds the number oflines in your terminal screen, you can position the display by:


■ Using the POINT command. For example to position the display to being withline 500 of the currently attached data, you would enter:

POINT LINE 5==


POINT LINE T or POINT LINE B

When browsing the Selection List, entering an * (asterisk) in the first unprotected fieldfor a specific entry repositions the display to begin with that entry.

33.3.2 Positioning to Named Lines

When you are browsing a member, you can assign a one- to six-character name to theline containing the string; thus enabling you to return to that line later. For example, toassign the name LOC1 to the first displayed line, you would enter:

NOTE LOC1 or NOTE Q LOC1

or

NOTE Q LOC1





NOTE Q+5 LOC2


POINT LOC1


STATUS NOTES

a list of all the names that you have assigned is displayed.


DROP LOC2

Any outstanding NOTE names are automatically deleted when you detach the member,attach another member or return to the menu.


33.4 Reattaching the Library Facility


While you are working with a member or Selection List, you can attach an AWS, dataset object or a job, browse that data and then return to your data. The followingexample illustrates how you can ATTACH the active AWS, browse it and thenreATTACH the data you have been viewing:

7 8 ATTACH_

>

> LIB() SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===73 LINE ==1

> <...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....

============================== T O P ============




7 8ATTACH LIB )

> L PENDING> AWS(PRI.INVREPT) SCRL FULL COLS !!!!7 !!!72> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5.... ...... ======================== T O P ================= !!!1!! IDENTIFICATION DIVISION. !!!2!! PROGRAM-ID. INVREPT. !!!3!! ENVIRONMENT DIVISION.

7 8 >

> LIB() SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===73 LINE ==1

> <...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....

============================= T O P =============




The center screen above shows L PENDING. This note is provided to remind you thatthe Library Facility may be reattached at any time.



When you reattach the Library Facility, the display begins with the first line of theprior display. To reattach at a different location within the same data, you can:

■ Use the LINE operand of ATTACH to specify the desired line number, as in:

ATTACH LIB Q LINE 5==

■ Use the POINT command to begin the display with the line assigned a NOTEname, as in:

POINT LIB NAME1

■ Use the LIB operand with the FIRST, NEXT, LAST and PREV commands tobegin the display the line containing a specific string, as in:

FIRST LIB /DD/

■ Use the LIB operand with the INCL or EXCL command to begin the display witha list of lines containing (or not containing) a specific string, as in:

INCL LIB /DD/


Chapter 34. Library: Performing LibraryManagement Tasks

This chapter describes how you can perform any of the following functions duringyour terminal session:

■ Alter a member's access attribute, sequence number attribute or description.■ Copy all or part of the attached member or Selection List.■ Delete one or more library members.■ Inquire about a member.■ Print all or part of the attached member or Selection List.■ Rename one or more members.

These functions can be performed using primary commands, the Library Facility menuor the appropriate Selection List.

You cannot modify the contents of a library member. To change a member's contents,you must place a copy of it in an AWS. When you have finished making yourchanges, you must use the UPDATE command to update the original member contentswith the contents of the active AWS. For example, to renumber the contents of themember SAMPLE, you might enter:

FETCH SAMPLE

RENUMBER

UPDATE Q

Chapter 34. Library: Performing Library Management Tasks 34-1

34.1 Altering Member Attributes


You can change the attributes and description of a library member through a primarycommand, the INFO panel or the Selection List.


You can use the ALTER command to change the description, sequence numberattribute and/or access attribute of a library member, as in:

ALTER COBTEST2 /Test COBOL Prog./ NOSEQ

ALTER does not affect any attributes that are not specified with the command.

The following table summarizes the values you can specify with this command. Thesevalues can also be used when using a primary command to rename a library member.

DESCRIPTION 1 to 30 characters bound by a special character not foundwithin the description itself.

SEQUENCENUMBERATTRIBUTE

SEQ Include sequence number in columns 73through 80 when the data are submitted.

SEQ COBOL Include sequence numbers in columns 1through 6.

SEQ s l Include sequence numbers, starting incolumn s for a length of l.

NOSEQ Do not include sequence numbers.

ACCESSATTRIBUTE

SHARED Allow anyone to access and/or executeyour member.

EXECONLY Allow anyone to execute your member.(Meant for members containing RPFprograms.)

RESTRICTED Prevent anyone from accessing orexecuting your member.




You can use the Library Member Information panel to change a member's descriptionor attributes. To do so, overtype the currently displayed values of the fields with avalue listed below.

ATTRIBUTE The access attribute can be set to: SHR (for SHARED), EXE (forEXECONLY) or RES (for RESTRICTED).

SEQUENCE The sequence number attribute can be set to: NOSEQ (to omitsequence numbers) or s,l (to include sequence numbers in thedesignated location), where:

s One to three digits indicating the starting position of thefield. (Leading zeros may be omitted).

l One digit between 1 and 8 indicating the length of the field.

DESCRIPTION The description can be one to 30 characters in length.


You can use a Library Selection List to change a member's description or attributes.The LIB ALTER field of the Library Facility Main Menu determines how listmembers are to be altered. As illustrated in the following example, it will containeither EXPLICIT or IMPLICIT.

EXPLICIT Changes are made on the Selection List using the AT line commandand overtyping the field to be altered.

IMPLICIT Changes are made on the Selection List by directly overtyping.

7 8 >


....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7

LIBRARY FACILITY

FUNCTION ==>

PREFIX ==> LIB ALTER ===> EXPLICIT MEMBER ==>

SIGNON KEY ==>

FORMAL KEY ==>

SEARCH ==> (SHR,RES,EXE,NOD)



The following example illustrates how you can use the Selection List to change thedescription and attributes of a member EXPLICITly.

7 8 >


....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6..

==================================== T O P ===================


SMITH 82 = 223 2==== 117=1




XYZ.COBTEST1 Sample COBOL Prog. 193 SHR ==1,6

AT XYZ.COBTEST2 test cobol prog._ 4=3 SHR =

After typing an AT before the name of the appropriate member, tab to theDESCRIPTION, ATR or SEQNO field and overtype the current values. (You can usethe values described in the table in the first subsection of 34.1, “Altering MemberAttributes” on page 34-2.


34.2 Copying a Member/Selection List


You can use primary commands, the Copy Function panel or a Selection List to copyall or part of a member or Selection List into an AWS.


You can use a variety of primary commands to copy all or portions of the currentlyattached data into an AWS. The following example illustrates how the COPY LIBcommand can be used to copy lines 1 through 200 to the top of the active AWS.

Note: See Chapter 15, “AWS: Copying Data Within and Into an AWS” foradditional information about these commands.

Library: Copying Attached Data

7 8COPY LIB 1 2!! T

>

> LIB(XYZ.COBTEST) SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===73 LINE =====1

> <...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5..

============================= T O P ================


=====2 PROGRAM-ID. COBTEST.





If no line numbers are included, all of the attached data are copied to the designateddestination within the active AWS.

You must indicate the appropriate AWS destination by specifying one of thefollowing:

v Copy at or after the line specified by v.T Copy to the top of the AWS.B Copy to the bottom of the AWS.* Copy after the line at which the AWS pointer is currently positioned.R Replace the contents of the AWS with the copied data.



Other primary commands that you can use include:

COPYS Copies line(s) that contain a specified character string from amember or Selection List into the active or a specific AWS.

COPYX Copies line(s) not containing the specified character string fromlibrary data into the active or a specific AWS.

XCOPY Copies all or part of attached library data from one split screen intothe active AWS of the screen containing the command.

XCOPYS and XCOPYXCopies selected lines from attached data in one split screen into theactive AWS of the screen containing the command.

Each of these commands allows you to limit the number of lines to be copied, as in:

COPYS LIB /DATE-FIELD/ 9== 18== 1==

which causes every line containing the string DATE-FIELD within lines 900 through1800 of the currently attached data to be copied at or after line 100 in the AWS.

When copying from a Selection List, you can designate whether you want the headerportion of the list included with the data. (By default, the header is included.) Forexample, if a Selection List is displayed:

COPYX LIB /JCL/ T NOHDR

copies every line not containing the string JCL within the currently attached SelectionList to the top of the AWS. No header information is included in the copied data.



34.2.1.1 Copying Unattached Data

You can also use these same commands to copy a library member that is not currentlyattached into an AWS. To do so, specify the member name with the command, as in:

COPY COBTEST1 ... or

COPYS COBTEST1 /DATE-FIELD/ ...

Other commands that you can use to bring one or more library members into theactive AWS include:

FETCH Brings all or part of a library member into the active AWS, as in:

FETCH INVLIST or

FETCH INVLIST 5== 27==

where all (or lines 500 through 2700) of the member named INVLIST arecopied into the active AWS. If the active AWS contained data, that dataare overlaid by the contents of the member.

To bring in data from a library member owned by another individual,include the person's CA-Roscoe prefix with the member name, as in:

FETCH RLM.LISTSEQS

Optionally, you can renumber the data that you bring into the AWS, as in:

FETCH INVLIST START 1== BY 5=

where the data, after being placed in the AWS, is renumbered starting with100 and incremented by 50.

CHAIN Brings one or more members into the active AWS in the order specified inthe command, as in:

CHAIN MEM1 MEM2 MEM3

MERGE Brings one or more members into the active AWS and merges the contentsof those members by their line numbers.

A library member's access attribute determines the extent of access (like ATTACH,COPY, and so on) other CA-Roscoe users have to that member. If a member has anEXECONLY or RESTRICTED access attribute, only the owner of that member canaccess it. While site management has the option of changing the extent of access theirusers have to SHARED members, the default is that any CA-Roscoe user can accessmembers with this attribute.




The Copy Function panel is displayed when you specify the C function code on theLibrary Facility menu or with the LIBRARY command.

The following example illustrates how you might use this panel to place one copy oflines 900 through 1800 of the member COBTEST1 at the top of the active AWS.

Library: Copying Through the Menu

7 8

>


....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....

COPY LIBRARY MEMBER

OPTION ===> S

PREFIX ===> XYZ

MEMBER ===> COBTEST1

1ST LINE ===> 9== LAST LINE ===> 18==

AWS TARGET ===> T AWS COPY COUNT ===> 1

LIST HEADERS ===> NO

M-DISPLAY MEMBER LIST S-COPY SINGLE MEMBER

U V



S Copy a single member.

M Display a Selection List. (If only a prefix is specified,the Selection List will contain all members associatedwith that prefix. If the MEMBER field contains aname that includes wildcard characters, a qualifiedSelection List is displayed.)

PREFIX Enter the two- or three-character prefix assigned to theindividual whose member is to be copied. (Required only ifthe displayed prefix is inappropriate.)

MEMBER Enter the name of the member to be copied. (Required onlyif the displayed member name is inappropriate.)



1ST LINE Enter the number of the first line to be copied. If omitted,the operation begins with the first line.

LAST LINE Enter the number of the last line to be copied. If omitted,the operation ends with the last line.

AWS TARGET Enter the destination of the operation by specifying:

v Number of the line at or after which the data are to becopied within the active AWS.

* After the line at which the AWS pointer is currentlypositioned.


B After the last line in the active AWS.

R Replace the contents of the active AWS with thecopied data.

Unless changed, the default is R.

AWS COPY COUNT Enter the number of copies of the attached data are to beplaced in the active AWS. If omitted, the default is 1.

LIST HEADERS Enter YES or NO to designate whether Selection List headerlines are to be included in the copy operation.


If the Selection List is produced through the Copy Function panel, the only operationyou can perform is a copy.

If the Selection List is not provided through the Copy Function panel, you canperform any of the functions that are valid with the Selection List.

To copy members, place a C before the name of each appropriate member. Then, tabto the STATUS field and enter a destination code. (If the Selection List is producedthrough the Copy Function Panel and you omit a destination code, the memberreplaces the current contents of the active AWS.)



The destination codes are:

* Copy after the line at which the AWS pointer is currently positioned.v Copy at or after the line specified by v.B Copy to the bottom of the active AWS.R Replace the contents of the active AWS with the copied data.T Copy to the top of the active AWS.

The following example illustrates how you can copy multiple library members from aSelection List.

Library: Copying Through a Selection List

7 8 >


....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6..

==================================== T O P ===================


SMITH 82 = 223 2==== 117=1


XYZ.A 1 SHR NOSEQ

C XYZ.BEGINJCL B JCL: Link-Edit 1= SHR =

C XYZ.COBTEST1 T Sample COBOL Prog. 193 SHR =

XYZ.COBTEST2 4=3 SHR =

XYZ.JUNK 87 SHR N

C XYZ.MYRPF T RPF: Builds JCL 519 SHR N

U V


34.3 Delete a Member


You can use a primary command, the Delete Function panel (from the Library Facilitymenu) or the Selection List to delete a member.

Notes:

■ If you delete a member and then determine that you need it, contact your sitemanagement. As long as the member has been saved on a library system backup,it can be restored.

■ When deleting a member through the Delete Function panel or the Selection List,you have the option of requesting that a Delete Confirmation panel be displayed.You can control this option using the ATTACH LIB command or the LibraryFacility menu.

– When CONFIRM DELETE is in effect, a Delete Confirmation panel isdisplayed. This panel contains the name of each member you marked fordeletion. You must confirm this operation before it is performed.

– When CONFIRM DELETE is not in effect, the designated data members aredeleted when you press the ENTER key.

See 34.3.4, “Delete Confirmation Panel” on page 34-14 for additional information.


You can use the DELETE command to delete a member, as in:

DELETE JUNK




Type the D function code on the Library Facility menu or with the LIBRARYcommand to display the Delete Function panel.

The following example illustrates how you might use this panel to delete the membernamed JUNK.

Library: Deleting Through the Menu

7 8

>


....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....

DELETE LIBRARY MEMBER

OPTION ===> S

PREFIX ===> XYZ

MEMBER ===> JUNK


OPTION Enter the code that is appropriate for the action you want to perform.The codes are:

S Delete the designated member.

M Display a Selection List. (If only a prefix is specified, theSelection List will contain all members associated with thatprefix. If the MEMBER field contains a name that includeswildcard characters, a qualified Selection List is displayed.)

PREFIX Enter the two- or three-character prefix assigned to the individual whoowns the member. (Required only if the displayed prefix isinappropriate.)

MEMBER Enter the name of the member to be deleted. (Required only if thedisplayed name is inappropriate.)




If the Selection List is produced through the Delete Function panel, the only operationyou can perform is a delete. If the Selection List is not produced through the DeleteFunction panel, you can perform any of the functions that are valid with that SelectionList.

As illustrated in the following example, you can delete one or more members bytyping a D before each appropriate member name.

Library: Deleting through a Selection List

7 8 >


....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6..

==================================== T O P ===================


SMITH 82 = 223 2==== 117=1


D XYZ.COBTEST1 Sample COBOL Prog. 193 SHR ==1,6


D XYZ.JUNK 87 SHR NOSEQ



34.3.4 Delete Confirmation Panel

You can use the ATTACH LIB command or the Library Facility menu to designatewhether delete confirmation is required.

The following example illustrates the confirmation panel that might be displayed whenCONFIRM DELETE is in effect and you attempt to delete one or more membersthrough a Selection List.

7 8 >


....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....


MEMBER CREATED UPDATED ACCESS DESCRIPTION

COBTEST1 =6/=4/87 11/=9/88 11/=9/88 Sample COBOL Prog.

JUNK 12/=1/85 =6/=6/86 =6/=6/86

To delete the entries, enter either YES or Y in the CONFIRM field. Entering any othervalue in this field terminates the operation. (You will be returned to the DeleteFunction panel or the previous Selection List. The STATUS field of that Selection Listwill contain *DENYDEL.)

If you enter a primary command when a delete confirmation panel is displayed, theoperation is either terminated or paused. If the command is:

■ Related to the Library Facility (for example, SELECT MENU): the operation isterminated and the action is performed.

■ Not related to the Library Facility (for example, ATTACH DSN): the operation ispaused. The panel is redisplayed when the Library Facility is reattached, allowingyou to complete the operation.


34.4 Inquiring About a Member


You can obtain detailed information about a library member by issuing the INFOcommand, as in:

INFO LIB COBTEST1

or, specifying the I function code and member name on the Library Facility menu, asin the following example.

7 8 >


....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.

LIBRARY FACILITY

FUNCTION ===> I

PREFIX ===> XYZ


or, specifying the I function code on the Selection List, as in the following example.

Library: Inquiring Through a Selection List

7 8

>


....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6..

==================================== T O P ===================


SMITH 82 = 223 2==== 117=1


XYZ.A 1 SHR NOSEQ


I XYZ.COBTEST1 Sample COBOL Prog. 193 SHR ==1,6


The following example illustrates the type of information displayed.



Library: Member Information Display

7 8

>


....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.

LIBRARY MEMBER INFORMATION

PREFIX ===> XYZ


LAST ACCESS ===> 11/=4/88

LAST UPDATE ===> =5/29/87

CREATION ===> =5/23/86

RECORD COUNT ===> 193

BLOCK COUNT ===> 3

ATTRIBUTE ===> SHR

SEQUENCE ===> ==1,6

DESCRIPTION ===> Sample COBOL Prog.

U V

The member information includes:

PREFIX Prefix assigned to the individual who owns the member.NAME Name of the library member.LAST ACCESS Date the member was last accessed.LAST UPDATE Data the member was last updated.CREATION Date the member was created.RECORD COUNT Number of lines in the member.BLOCK COUNT Number of library blocks used by the member.ATTRIBUTE Member's access attribute.SEQUENCE Member's sequence number attribute.DESCRIPTION Member's description, if available.

The last three fields are unprotected. See 34.1, “Altering Member Attributes” onpage 34-2 for information about changing these fields.


34.5 Printing a Library Member


You can use a primary command, the Print Function panel (from the Library Facilitymenu) or the Selection List to print all or part of a member or Selection List at asystem or 328x-type printer.

When the data are scheduled for printing, a message is displayed. It contains theprinting location, tag (if specified) and print request number assigned by CA-Roscoe.Once scheduled, all references to a specific print request must be by its tag or number.


To print all of the currently attached member or Selection List, enter:

PRINT LIB

All of the operands of the PRINT command can be used when printing attached data.For example, to print only lines 500 through 2500 of the currently attached data, youwould enter:

PRINT LIB 5== 25==

While Selection Lists do not include line numbers, you can treat them as though theyare numbered from 1 by 1.

Note: See Chapter 7, “Printing Data” for additional information about the PRINTcommand and how requests can be monitored and controlled.


When you specify the P function code on the Library Facility menu or with theLIBRARY command, the Print Function panel is displayed.

The following example illustrates how you might use this panel to print a copy of themember named MYPROG.



Library: Printing a Member

7 8 >


....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6...

PRINT LIBRARY MEMBER

OPTION ===> S

PREFIX ===> XYZ

MEMBER ===> MYPROG

1ST LINE ===> 1 LAST LINE ===> 999999 NOTIFY ===>

TAG NAME ===> SEPARATOR ===> YES FORCEALIGN ===> NO

DEST ===> PR17 COPIES ===> 1 CLASS ===> =

PAGE WIDTH ===> PAGE LEN ===> SEQ NUMBRS ===> YES

TYPE/FORMAT ===> DEF TOP MARGIN ===> BOT MARGIN ===>

1ST COL ===> 1 LAST COL ===> 32767

M-DISPLAY MEMBER LIST S-PRINT SINGLE MEMBER

U V



S Print a single member.

M Display a Selection List. (If only a prefix is specified, theSelection List will contain all members associated withthat prefix. If the MEMBER field contains a name thatincludes wildcard characters, a qualified Selection List isdisplayed.)

PREFIX Enter the two- or three-character prefix assigned to the individualwho owns the member. (Required only if the displayed prefix isinappropriate.)

MEMBER Enter the member name. (Required only if the displayed name isinappropriate.)

You can use the following fields to customize the print operation.

1ST LINE Enter the number of the line at which the print operation is tobegin. If omitted, the first line is assumed.

LAST LINE Enter the number of the last line to be included in the printoperation. If omitted, the end of the member/Selection List isassumed.

While Selection Lists do not contain line numbers, treat them asthough they are numbered from 1 by 1.



NOTIFY Designate whether you want an RPS notification messagedisplayed when this data are printed by specifying either:

YES Display notification message.NO Do not display message.

If omitted, the site-defined value is used. Site management hasthe option of prohibiting the use of NOTIFY.

TAG NAME Enter the name to be assigned to the print request. The namecannot exceed eight characters, must start with an alphabeticcharacter and be bound by apostrophes (').

SEPARATOR Designate whether separators are required by specifying either:

YES Separators are required.NO Separators are not required.

The default is site-defined.

FORCEALIGN Designate whether physical page alignment is required byspecifying either:

YES Physical page alignment is to be forced (forexample, there is to be a page eject for eachseparator and body page).

NO Physical page alignment is not required.

If omitted, the site-defined value is used.

DEST Enter the name of the printing location where the request is toprint. Use this operand to override the current printing locationfor this execution.

COPIES Enter the number of copies of the request to be printed. Themaximum number is a site-defined value between 1 and 255.The default is 1 copy.

CLASS Enter the print class to be used at the location where the requestis to print. (Site management will tell you which classes arevalid for 328x-type printers and which are valid for systemprinters.)

PAGE WIDTH Enter the width of the paper in printing columns as a numericvalue between 0 and 255. The default is site-defined.

PAGE LEN Enter the length of the paper in number of print lines as anumeric value between 0 and 99. On printers with the hardwarecapability to set page length, the number must be the samelength as specified to the printer. The default is site-defined.

SEQ NUMBRS Designate whether sequence numbers are to be printed byspecifying either:

YES Designates that sequence numbers are to be printed.



NO Designates that sequence numbers are not to beprinted.

If omitted, the default is YES.

TYPE/FORMAT Designate the format of the output by specifying either:

DEF (Default.) A top and bottom margin may be set.

ANS ANSI print control characters are recognized.

MCC Machine printer control characters are recognized.

DUMP Format each line with offsets, hexadecimal data andEBCDIC data to the right of the line.

CHEX Format each line with offsets and hexadecimal datato the right of the line.

VHEX Format each line in character data with hexadecimaldata shown vertically below.

TOP MARGIN v (Recognized only with TYPE DEF.) Enter the number of blanklines to be skipped from the top of the page before printingbegins. v can be 0 through 99. The default is site-defined.

BOT MARGIN v (Recognized only with TYPE DEF.) Enter the number of blanklines to be skipped at the bottom of the page. v may be 0through 99. The default is site-defined.

1ST COL Number of the column at which the print operation is to start.The value must be between 1 and the maximum length of theline. If omitted, the default is 1.

LAST COL Number of the column at which the print operation is to stop.The value must be greater than the starting column and notexceed the maximum line length. If omitted, the maximum linelength is assumed. (The maximum line length of a librarymember is 255.)




If the Selection List is produced through the Print Function panel, you can onlyperform a print operation. Otherwise, you can perform any of the functions that arevalid with that Selection List.

To print one or more members, type a P before the name of each member. By default,the request will print at the printing location assigned for the terminal you are using.To print at a different location, tab to the STATUS field and enter the appropriatedestination name.

The following example illustrates how you can print multiple entries from theSelection List.

7 8 >


....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6..

==================================== T O P ===================


SMITH 82 = 223 2==== 117=1


P XYZ.BEGINJCL JCL: Link-Edit 1= SHR

XYZ.COBTEST1 Sample COBOL Prog. 193 SHR

P XYZ.COBTEST2 PR99 4=3 SHR

In this example, the member BEGINJCL will print at the terminal's default printinglocation. The member COBTEST2 will print at the location identified as PR99.


34.6 Renaming Library Members


To change the names of one or more library members, you can use a primarycommand, the Library Facility menu or the Selection List.


You can use the RENAME command to change the name of a library member. Forexample, to change the member name from TESTJCL to PRODJCL, you would enter:

RENAME TESTJCL PRODJCL

Optionally, you can also change the description or attributes of the member, as in:

RENAME TESTJCL PRODJCL /Production JCL/ SHARED SEQ

See 34.1, “Altering Member Attributes” on page 34-2 for additional information.


Function Panel If you specify an R function code on the Library Facility menu or withthe LIBRARY command, the Rename Function panel is displayed.

Library: Renaming Through a Function Panel

7 8

>


....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....

RENAME LIBRARY MEMBER

OPTION ===> S

PREFIX ===> ABC

NAME ===> TESTJCL

NEW PREFIX ===> ABC

NEW MEMBER ===> PRODJCL

M - DISPLAY MEMBER LIST S - RENAME SINGLE MEMBER

U V

This example illustrates how you can use this panel to change a member name fromTESTJCL to PRODJCL.

The fields comprising the panel include:



OPTION Enter the code that is appropriate to perform the desired action. Thecodes are:

S Rename a single member.

M Display a Selection List. (If only a prefix is specified, theSelection List will contain all members associated with thatprefix. If the MEMBER field contains a name that includeswildcard characters, a qualified Selection List is displayed.)

PREFIX Enter the two- or three-character prefix assigned to the individualwho owns the member. (Required only if the displayed prefix isinappropriate.)

MEMBER Enter the member's current name. (Required only if the displayedname is inappropriate.)

NEW PREFIX Enter the two- or three-character prefix assigned to the individualwho owns the member. (Site management may allow users torename members belonging other users.)

NEW NAME Enter the new member name. The name must comply with theCA-Roscoe member naming conventions and must not currentlyexist in your library.


If the Selection List is produced through the Rename Function Panel, the onlyoperation you can perform is a rename. If the Selection List is not produced throughthe Rename Function panel, you can perform any of the functions that are valid withthe Selection List.

To rename one or more members, use the R function code and type the member namein the STATUS field. (When the Selection List is redisplayed, the STATUS field willcontain *RENAMED - confirming the operation performed successfully.)

Library: Renaming Through a Selection List

7 8

>


....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6..

==================================== T O P ===================

SIGNON KEY MEM EXCL BLOCKS LINES

SMITH 352 = 971 5=984


XYZ.A 1 SHR N

XYZ.BEGINJCL JCL: Link-Edit 1= SHR =

XYZ.COBTEST1 Sample COBOL Prog. 193 SHR =

R XYZ.COBTEST2 INVREPT 4=3 SHR =

XYZ.JUNK 87 SHR N

XYZ.MYRPF RPF: Builds JCL 519 SHR N


Part VI. Additional Facilities

Chapter 35. BBS - BulletinBoard System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-135.1 Beginning a Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-2

35.1.1 What can you do? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-235.2 Message Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-335.3 Viewing a Thread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-5

35.3.1 Viewing a Thread Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-635.4 Create a Thread or Thread Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-835.5 BulletinBoard Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-11

35.5.1 The Utility Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-1235.5.2 Setting BulletinBoard Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-1335.5.3 View News Announcements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-1535.5.4 Prune a BBS Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-16

| 35.5.5 Deleting an Unwanted Thread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-1635.5.6 Print a Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-1735.5.7 Print a Thread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-18

35.6 CA-Roscoe User Dialog Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-2035.6.1 Send a Message to Another CA-Roscoe User . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-2035.6.2 The ZMsg Mode and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-2135.6.3 ZMsg Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-2235.6.4 Viewing Messages on ZMsg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-2435.6.5 Sending a Message to a CA-Roscoe User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-2535.6.6 Set ZMsg Message Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-2735.6.7 Locate Another CA-Roscoe User VIA CA-SysView Interface . . . . 35-28

Chapter 36. CA-Roscoe and DB2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-1

Chapter 37. DMF - Dialog Management Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37-1

Chapter 38. ETSO - Application Execution System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-138.1 Determining Executable Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-238.2 Executing Applications Under ETSO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-3

38.2.1 Allocating Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-438.2.2 Querying and Freeing Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-738.2.3 Initiating Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-8

38.3 Executing Distributed Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-938.4 Executing TSO Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-10

Chapter 39. RPF - Roscoe Programming Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-1

Chapter 40. SKETCH - CICS/IMS Panel Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-1

Chapter 35. BBS - BulletinBoard System

The BulletinBoard System is an online message system, established to support theinterchange of technical information between CA-Roscoe users.

The facilities provided with BulletinBoard System can be used by all CA-Roscoeusers, and can be performed in conjunction with other CA-Roscoe activities.

You can use the BulletinBoard System to:

■ view general news announcements that are broadcast by your site,■ view posted message threads and any thread entries they contain,■ create new threads,■ add entries(replys) to existing threads,■ send messages to other CA-Roscoe users.

The BulletinBoard System follows CUA standards. It is a mode dependent system, soyou must move from one mode to another to perform each task. All tasks associatedwith a BulletinBoard component are PF-key functions, and are listed on the bottom ofeach screen.

Chapter 35. BBS - BulletinBoard System 35-1

35.1 Beginning a Session

35.1 Beginning a Session

To begin a BulletinBoard System session, enter: pfx.BBSX.

where:

pfx is the prefix of the profile containing the panels and programs comprisingthis facility. The default is RBX.

This is the distributed RPF program that invokes the BulletinBoard System.

At initial sign-on, the BBS (BulletinBoard System) News Announcement screen willbe presented. After you view this screen, it will not be presented again unless youspecifically request it (using PF2/14 for NEWS or through UTILITY.) If any newannouncements are posted, this screen will be presented automatically at your nextsign-on.

35.1.1 What can you do?

After viewing the announcements, press ENTER, and you will be placed into theMessage Selection List. This screen contains all existing message threads. From here,you can view any message, create a new message thread, or send another CA-Roscoeuser a message.

Note: Sending another CA-Roscoe user a message makes use of the CA-RoscoeSEND command. The message goes only to the specified user (or ID) anddoes not get posted on the BulletinBoard system.

All tasks available in each mode are PF-key functions and are displayed at the bottomof each screen. To send a message or perform any function, use the correspondingPF-key. Some screens have functions which are specific to one task only. Manyscreens have the same PF-key options. This means that a particular PF-key numbermay have several different functions, changing from screen to screen, according to themode level. If a PF-key is blank, it has no function.

The following PF-keys have the same function on every screen (or are disabled):

PF7/19 Backward Scrolls the display backward, toward the top of the member.PF8/20 Forward Scrolls the display forward, toward the bottom of the member.PF10/22 Top Makes the base entry for the thread the first line of the screen.PF11/23 Bottom Displays the bottom of the message text.

And on every screen except the one that is used to create a thread title,

PF3/15 Exit Returns to the previous mode level. (On the "create a thread title"screen, PF3/15 CANCEL cancels the thread that was just created.)


35.2 Message Selection List


The Message Selection List is the first screen you will see once you have signed onand viewed the BBS News Announcement screen.

Message Selection list

7 8

-- BBS -----------------------------------------------------------------------

Thread Titles

New Message Thread Entry-2 ZZB New Message Thread Entry-1 ZZC

No Threads------------------ ZZD

------------------------------------------------------------------------------

PF1 Utility 2 Ignore! 3 Exit 4 Lastread 5 Firstnew 6 Addmsg

7 Backward 8 Forward 9 Refresh 1= Top 11 Bottom 12 Zmsg

U V

The top line, containing hyphens, is the Error/Status line. It contains the currentprocessing RPF ID. In this case, it will be BBS, for BulletinBoard System. Anymessages returned from BBS will appear on this line.

The portion of the screen just below the Error/Status line contains the titles of allmessage threads. A thread is a series of one or more related messages. The threads,as listed here, are the initial message topics. All related responses are threaded to thismessage entry.

Each thread can contain 999 messages. All threads have prefix codes, beginning withZZZ, through AAA. Each new thread is given a corresponding code. This can beused as a quick reference, to associate the thread by code instead of its title. Thiscode will be the prefix of all of the thread's entries.



By default, the threads that have not been viewed will be in high intensity. If youhave already viewed the thread and all of its corresponding messages, the thread willbe in low intensity.

Note: The threads are highlighted following CA-Roscoe standard panel attributecoding. The Utility function (PF1/13) allows the changing of these threadattributes. By default, unread threads and messages are unprotected and highintensity (UH), and the threads and messages that have been read areunprotected and low (normal) intensity (UL).

All of the possible tasks a user can perform from the Message Selection list are listedat the bottom of the screen as PF-key functions. The PF-keys that are specific to thisscreen are:

PF1/13 Utility Brings up the BulletinBoard Utility menu from which options maybe set, messages and threads can be printed, the News can beviewed, or the user profile can be condensed.

PF2/14 Ignore! Marks a selected thread in low (normal) intensity, as if it wasread. If there are any new entries added, they will not be markedby high intensity. No entries will be highlighted, so the entirethread can be "ignored."

If Ignore! is already active, PF2 will deactivate Ignore!

PF4/16 Lastread Brings up the last message you read.

PF5/17 Firstnew Brings up the first new message you have not read. (NEWdenotes not yet viewed).

PF6/18 Addmsg Adds a thread or a message to a thread, using the AddMsg panel.

PF9/21 Refresh Refreshes the screen with any new information.

PF12/24 Zmsg Sends another CA-Roscoe user a message, using the Zmsg panel.

Many of these functions are duplicated throughout BBS.


35.3 Viewing a Thread


To view any of the threads listed on the Message Selection list, place the cursor in thefield containing the thread title and press ENTER. This is the same as using thefunction PF5 FIRSTNEW, if you have not previously viewed a message in that thread.This will take you to the screen containing all messages composing the thread. TheMessage Thread Selection List is shown below.

Message Thread Selection list

7 8 -- BBS -----------------------------------------------------------------------

New Message Thread Entry-1 Prefix:

New Message Thread Entry-1 === This will be entry #1 =>ZZC ==1

This will be entry #2 =>ZZC ==2 This will be entry #3 =>ZZC ==3



This will be entry #8 =>ZZC ==8

------------------------------------------------------------------------------

PF1 Utility 2 Ignore! 3 Exit 4 Prevnew 5 Nextnew 6 Addmsg

7 Backward 8 Forward 9 Refresh 1= Top 11 Bottom 12 Zmsg

U V

The first line following the error/status line is the title of the thread you selected fromthe previous screen. The prefix of that thread is on the far right of the same line.

The title is also the first thread of the list, and will have the code 000. Eachsubsequent entry is given a code incremented by one. This code is added to the prefixto create a member name for the thread entry. Each thread entry can be associated byits member name, and its title.

This screen also has PF-key functions listed on the bottom. The PF-keys specific tothis screen are:

PF4/16 Prevnew Displays the first new message that precedes the thread you arecurrently displaying. (NEW is the same as not yet viewed.)



PF5/17 Nextnew Displays the next new message that follows the thread you arecurrently displaying.

Note: If there are no new (unviewed) messages within thatthread, Prevnew and Nextnew will not execute. Youshould receive a message on the Error/Staus line that willtell you there are "no new messages that way," (wherethat way will either be before the message - Prev, orfollowing the message- Next). Use Enter to view themessage.

35.3.1 Viewing a Thread Entry

To view one of the listed thread entries, place your cursor on the desired entry andpress ENTER. The following panel displays the text of the selected thread.

A Message Thread Entry

7 8 -- BBS -----------------------------------------------------------------------

Title: This will be entry #7 =>ZZC LAST Name: ZZC==7 Date&co

------------------------------------------------------------------------------

From: RO, ROSCOE.CONTROL

Date: Tuesday August 6, 1991 Time: 16.2=.27

This will be message number 7

------------------------------------------------------------------------------

PF1 Utility 2 Ignore! 3 Exit 4 Prevmsg 5 Nextmsg 6 Addmsg

7 Backward 8 Forward 9 1= Top 11 Bottom 12 Zmsg

U V

The fields of this panel are:

Error/Status line This is the line of hyphens at the top. It contains themode BBS on the left. Any messages issued byBBS will be displayed on the right.

Title This is the thread title that appeared on the previousscreen.



Conditional data fieldThe field to the right of the title will contain conditional data.This data can be FIRST, LAST, or ONLY. If the thread entryyou are viewing is the first, last, or only thread entry, thecorresponding word will be displayed. If the entry is not one ofthe above items, this field will be blank. Note that on the screenabove, the word LAST is in this field. This thread entry is thelast entry under the thread ZZC.

Name field This field contains the member name of the thread entry you areviewing, made up of the prefix and thread code. You canassociate each thread entry by name.

Date This is the date the member was created.

Entry Text The thread entry text follows the second line of hyphens. Thetext consists of:

■ the ID and key that created the message, listed in the Fromfield,

■ the date and time the message was created, and ■ the message.

The PF-key functions specific to this screen are the same as the previous screen,except for PF4, PF5, and PF9:

PF4/16 Prevmsg Displays the thread entry that precedes the currently displayedentry.

PF5/17 Nextmsg Continues to the next sequential message.

PF9/21 Is not used.


35.4 Create a Thread or Thread Entry


Note: Only users having Library Administration privileges may create or updatethreads.

You can add a new thread to the Message Selection List or a new thread entry to anexisting thread from any screen that has PF6/18 Addmsg.

With the cursor on any thread or entry, press PF6/18. You will be placed in the Replymode; the error/status line will have Reply in the left corner.

Create a New Thread -- Insert Mode

7 8 -- Reply ---------------------------------------------------------------------

New Message Thread Entry-2


Date: Tuesday August 6, 1991 Time: 16.==.=4

This will be a new message number 2

Insert Mode 7 lines

Seq . ----+----¬----+¬---2----+----3----+----4----¬----5----+----6----+----7-¬

--- Q

--- Q

--- Q

--- Q

--- Q

--- Q

--- Q

--- Q

--- Q

------------------------------------------------------------------------------

PF1 Help 2 CopyMem 3 Exit 4 Bwd (Top) 5 Fwd (Top) 6

7 Backward 8 Forward 9 1= Top 11 Bottom 12 ZMsg

U V

As shown in the above panel, Reply is a split screen mode. The top half of the screendisplays the thread or entry your cursor was on (when you press PF6/18). This part ofthe screen is protected. It contains:

■ the original thread or message title,■ the CA-Roscoe ID and key the message was sent from,■ the date the original thread or message was created,■ the time the original thread or message was created,■ the original thread or message text.

The bottom half of the screen is in the Insert mode, and is open for entering text.There is a sequence line number at the top of the insert area. It is much like thesequence line number in your CA-Roscoe Edit session. All of the parameters youhave set for CA-Roscoe editing are propagated in the BBS Editor session (that is, tabsettings and the tab character).



The line just above the sequence line number will display the Insert Mode, and thenumber of lines that are available for entering data. To the left of the insert area is thesequence number field and a one character command area. This single character fieldwill contain asterisks when you are in the insert mode. Once you press ENTER or aPF-key, you will be in the Edit mode, and this field will contain a period that isUnprotected Low-intensity.

Enter the text of the message you want to create. You can then edit the messageeither by typing over the existing text of the message, or by issuing line commands inthe single character command area. There are two edit commands that can be used inthis field:

d deletes any line it is placed next to.

i opens the lower portion of the screen to the insert mode, just after the lineon which it was entered.

Create a New Thread -- Edit Mode

7 8 -- Reply ---------------------------------------------------------------------

New Message Thread Entry-2




Seq . ----+----¬----+¬---2----+----3----+----4----¬----5----+----6----+----7-¬

==1 . This is the message text.

==2 . It can be any message.

==3 . It can be as long as you want.

==4 . End of message.

------------------------------------------------------------------------------

PF1 Help 2 CopyMem 3 Exit 4 Bwd (Top) 5 Fwd (Top) 6


U V

After you have completed entering the text, you can select one of the commands listedat the bottom of the Reply screen. The functions specific to this screen are:

PF1/13 Help Invokes the Help facility.PF2/14 CopyMem Copies a member you specify into the message text.PF4/16 Bwd (Top) Scrolls the top half of the screen backward one screen.PF5/17 Fwd (Top) Scrolls the top half of the screen forward one screen.



If you do not want to use any of the functions, and the thread or message text iscomplete, Exit from the Reply panel using PF3/15. This will take you to a screen thathas only one open field. This is the thread title panel of the BBS.

Enter the title of your thread or message. The title field will accept up to 30characters.

Create a Thread Title

7 8

-- BBS -----------------------------------------------------------------------

Thread Prefix: ZZB - title: New Message Thread Entry-2

Message title: New Message Thread Entry-2

Your message title: <

------------------------------------------------------------------------------

PF1 2 NewThread 3 Cancel 4 5 6 EditAgain

7 8 9 1= 11 12

U V

There are only four functions you can perform from this screen.

1. If you created a new thread, use PF2/14 NewThread. This will add your thread tothe Message Selection list, under the title you issue on this screen.

2. If you do not want to add a thread or message at this time, you can use PF3/15Cancel, and cancel the entire message. You will return to the panel you were onbefore using PF6/18 Addmsg.

3. If you want to go back to the message text and edit it, use PF6/18 EditAgain.You will return to the Reply panel, and will be in Edit Mode.

4. If you want to create the thread or message that will be added to an existingthread, press ENTER. This will add your thread or message, and you will returnto the panel you were at when you selected PF6/18 Addmsg.


35.5 BulletinBoard Utilities


The BulletinBoard System includes a Utilities panel that provides access to basicBulletinBoard functions, such as:

■ setting session specific options.■ redisplaying the BBS News Announcements.■ printing an entire thread (thread and all entries).■ printing a single message entry.■ pruning (or condensing) your profile.

Each utility is described further on the following pages.



35.5.1 The Utility Screen

The BulletinBoard utilities are listed in a menu format. To display this menu, pressPF1/13 UTILITY from any BBS mode screen. To select a Utility, place the cursor on

that utility and press ENTER.

The Utility Menu

7 8

-- BBS ----------------------------------------------------- Press PF3 to exit

Current message: ZZB=== - New Message Thread Entry

Place the cursor on the desired utility and press ENTER.

Set Options Show News Prune Profile Print Message

Print Thread

Note: The BBS index data are NOT refreshed after any of these functions.

U V

The Utility display has several fields:

Error/Status As seen previously, this is the line of hyphens at the top. It willcontain any messages issued by Utility.

Current message: This is the thread entry you were viewing or pointing to when youentered the Utility panel. The display will contain the membername of the message (thread prefix + code), and the message title.

Utilities The five BBS utilities:

1. Set Options 2. Show News 3. Prune Profile 4. Print Message 5. Print Thread



35.5.2 Setting BulletinBoard Options

To set up BulletinBoard parameters that will be specific to your session, select the firstUtility option: Set Options. This will place you in the BBSOpt mode. The BBSOptpanel ( shown below) contains seven BBS options. The default values are initiallylisted. As noted on the panel, entering a null field will restore the default values.

The parameter values you set will be saved from one BulletinBoard session to thenext. They will remain in effect until you change them again.

BBS Options Panel

7 8

-- BBSOpt -------------------------------------------------- Press PF3 to exit

Save AWS on entry (Y/N)? Y

Saved AWS name prefix: BBSAWS Panel member name prefix: ZZZZZP

Unread messages attribute: UH Read messages attribute: UL

ROSCOE printer name: DEFAULT. Message editor: BBM.REX.....

Note: Enter a null field to restore the default values.

U V

The BBSOpt fields are:

■ Save AWS on entry(Y/N)?

Before entering the BBS, the AWS can be saved so that you can resumeprocessing when you exit. This is important if you do not want to lose the datain your active AWS. The default is set to 'Y', to save the AWS.

■ Saved AWS name prefix:

This is a prefix you can give to the saved AWS that was saved on entry to theBBS. You can give the AWS a six-character prefix so you will know it wascreated by BBS. The default prefix is BBSAWS.



■ Unread messages attribute:

All threads and thread entries you have not read will have a high intensity setting.This allows you to easily select those entries you have not seen. The defaultattribute for unread messages is UH. This will make all unread messagesUnprotected and Highlighted.

■ Read message attribute:

All threads and thread entries that you have read will be highlighted according tothis setting. This helps you to identify the messages you have already viewed.The default attribute for read messages is UL. This makes all messages you haveread Unprotected and Low (normal) Intensity.

Note: The attributes follow CA-Roscoe standard panel attribute coding.BBSOpts accepts the following attributes:

UH Unprotected, High IntensityUL Unprotected, Low (normal) IntensitySH Skip protected, High IntensitySL Skip protected, Low Intensity

BBS will accept the same attribute for both read and unread messages.

■ CA-Roscoe printer name:

Specify the name of the printer that you want to print all requested threads andentries. The default will be set by your site.



35.5.3 View News Announcements

The BBS News Announcement screen allows a site to broadcast news and informationto all BulletinBoard System users. It can contain whatever data your site chooses tobe relevant to BBS users.

The BBS News panel is displayed to you the very first time you sign onto theBulletinBoard System. You will not be presented with the announcements againunless you specifically request it or new announcements are posted. When thisinformation is updated, you will be presented with the BBS News screen when yousign-on BBS.

There may be times when you need to refer to this information again. The ShowNews utility will allow you to specifically request to view the announcements.

You can redisplay the BBS News Announcement panel from the Utility Option menu.The field Show News will place you in the ZAnn mode. This is the Announcementmode. The screen will contain all current BBS news and information that is posted byyour site. Shown below is a sample of the information that a site can 'Broadcast.'

BBS News Announcements -- Show News

7 8

-- ZAnn ----------------------------------------------------------------------

more =>

Current BBS News

============== S T A R T O F A N N O U N C E M E N T S =============

91/=6/27 - This BulletinBoard System System has been established

to support interchange of technical information within

the L1== Technical Group.

You may view messages on the bulletin board, add messages

to existing threads, and create new threads.

===> You will not be presented with this 'news' again unless

you request it or it changes.

Now, PRESS PF3 to Exit this 'news' and enter the Bulletin

Board System.

------------------------------------------------------------------------------

PF1 Help 2 3 Exit 4 5 6


U V



35.5.4 Prune a BBS Profile

A BBS session can accumulate too much data and it may be necessary to clean up aprofile. All information stored in your BBS profile will be revised to include only thelast thread viewed and the date of the last News Announcement. The Utility to do thisis Prune Profile. No user input is required; just select Prune Profile, and you willreceive the message:

PRUNING IN PROGRESS

on the Error/Status line, on the right side. After BBS has finished the Pruningfunction, you will remain in the initial BBS Utility menu panel.

| Note: Pruning deletes all but the last viewed thread entry.

| 35.5.5 Deleting an Unwanted Thread

To delete specific unwanted threads, you must manually delete the thread numbersfrom the BBS library.



35.5.6 Print a Message

To print one of the message entries listed on the BBS, select the Print MessageUtility. The message entry your cursor was on when you pressed PF1/13 UTILITY willbe the Current message. The Current message field must contain the member nameand title of the message you want to print. If this member is incorrect, EXIT theUtility screen and select the correct message entry.

The Print Message Utility will put you in DoPrint mode, and will display the screenshown in the panel below.

Print a Thread Entry

7 8

-- DoPrint -------------------------------------------------------------------

Destination: DEFAULT. PRINT Tag: ZZB===..

------------------------------------------------------------------ Line 1 of 9

=================================== T O P ====================================

--------------------------------------------- New Message Thread Entry-2




================================ B O T T O M =================================

------------------------------------------------------------------------------

PF1 Help 2 3 Exit 4 Print 5 6


U V

The Print Message screen contains the following fields:

Error/Status As seen previously, this is the line of hyphens at the top. The modeon the left will be DoPrint. The right side of the line will display anymessages issued by DoPrint.

Destination: The destination output is sent to. If this is blank, the default set withthe Set Options utility will be used.

PRINT Tag The name that will identify the printed output.

Message text The text of the message you want to print will be displayed in thebottom portion of this screen. The first line of the message willcontain its title.

To print the message, fill in the two fields listed on the top of the screen, and pressPF4/16 PRINT. You will receive a response on right side of the Error/Status line thatwill tell you if the print request was successful.



35.5.7 Print a Thread

You can print an entire thread; this includes the thread and all of its entries. To dothis, invoke the last utility on the menu, Print Thread. The thread your cursor wason when you pressed PF1/13 UTILITY will be selected. Or, if you are viewing only amessage entry, the thread that the entry is listed under will be selected for printing.

The Print Thread Utility will put you in DoPrint mode, shown in the following panel.

Print Entire Thread

7 8

-- DoPrint -------------------------------------------------------------------

more =>

Destination: DEFAULT. PRINT Tag: ZZB.....

----------------------------------------------------------------- Line 1 of 36

=================================== T O P ====================================

Thread title: New Message Thread Entry-2

--------------------------------------------- New Message Thread Entry-2




-------------------------------------------- This will be entry #1 =>ZZB


Date: Tuesday August 6, 1991 Time: 16.19.36

Add this the zzc Thread

-------------------------------------------- This will be entry #2 =>ZZB

------------------------------------------------------------------------------

PF1 Help 2 3 Exit 4 Print 5 6


U V

The Print Thread screen contains the following fields:

Error/Status As seen previously, this is the line of hyphens at the top. Themode on the left will be DoPrint. The right side of the line willdisplay any messages issued by DoPrint.

Destination: The printer destination the output will be sent to. If this is blank,the default set with the Set Options utility will be used.



PRINT Tag The name that will identify the printed output. The thread prefixcode will be the first three characters.

<= more => This field will be displayed if the threads comprise more that onescreen.

Thread entries The rest of the display will contain the thread and all the threadentries comprising it. Each thread will be separated by a line ofhyphens; the thread entry title will be on the right side and thethread it defines will be below.

To print the thread, fill in the two fields listed on the top of the screen, and pressPF4/16 PRINT. You will receive a response on right side of the Error/Status line tellingyou if the print request was successful.


35.6 CA-Roscoe User Dialog Capabilities


35.6.1 Send a Message to Another CA-Roscoe User

The CA-Roscoe/BulletinBoard contains a feature that allows you to send messages toother CA-Roscoe users, and still remain in your BulletinBoard session. Thesemessages are like any other CA-Roscoe SEND messages. This is done through theZMsg Mode. ZMsg functions include:

■ Sending and/or receiving one-line messages to and from other CA-Roscoe users.

■ Viewing all of the messages in your ZZZZZMSG member.

■ Viewing an account of all of the messages you have sent.

■ Deleting all ZZZZZMSG messages; clearing this file allows you to keep daily,weekly, etc., accounts of messages sent and received.

■ Checking to see if another CA-Roscoe user is signed on, and what command theylast executed.

Note: To inquire about another CA-Roscoe user requires that the CA-Roscoe/CA-SysView interface be active.



35.6.2 The ZMsg Mode and Functions

ZMsg is a facility that allows you to carry on a conversation with one or moreCA-Roscoe users. The ZMsg panel displays the current contents of your ZZZZZMSGmember in a full-screen environment. It also records any messages you send to otherusers and puts them in the same member as your messages. This gives you acomplete record of the conversation(s) you have. Because the display is yourZZZZZMSG member, you can receive all of your CA-Roscoe console messages to thissame member.

To view all messages in your ZZZZZMSG member, or to send another CA-Roscoeuser a message while you are in the BulletinBoard System, use the following function:

PF12/24 ZMSG.

This function is listed on all screens, in all modes (except when already within theZMsg mode), and is always PF12/24. Issuing the ZMsg command will place you inthe ZMsg mode.

Some other information regarding ZMsg:

■ ZMsg requires a screen which contains at least 13 lines.

■ Sending another CA-Roscoe user a message through ZMsg makes use of theCA-Roscoe SEND command. The message(s) you send does not get posted onthe BulletinBoard, but goes only to the CA-Roscoe prefix or ID you specify.

■ The first time you enter ZMsg mode, you will be presented with the latest ZMsgNews Announcements. After you view this screen, press ENTER to continue toyour messages. This announcement screen will not be presented to you again,unless you specifically request it (using PF2/14 News). If any new ZMsgannouncements are posted, this screen will be issued the next time you enter theZMsg mode.

■ ZMsg will run in split screen mode; you may keep it active in one screen whileyou work in another.

■ If you have suppression set, it is possible (but not likely) that you will miss amessage between the time you press PF3/15/CLEAR to exit ZMsg and the timeZMsg restores your original SEND option.



35.6.3 ZMsg Function

The ZMsg Mode Screen

7 8 -- ZMsg ------------------------------------------------------------- 11.14.44

Enter prefix: or key:

Message:

GetMsgs active ------------------------------------------------------ Column 1

=================================== T O P ==================================

JOB NOTI: JES REQUEST =====3 SUBMITTED TO DEST ADRPMVS3

================================ B O T T O M ===============================

------------------------------------------------------------------------------

PF1 Help 2 News 3 Exit 4 Swap 5 Delete 6 FindUser

7 Backward 8 Forward 9 SetOpts 1= Top 11 Bottom 12 Refresh

U V

The ZMsg display shown above has several fields:

Error/Status The first line of hyphens at the top. If you request an invalidfunction, ZMsg will issue a highlighted error message in thisfield. Otherwise, the field will contain the time the screen waslast updated.

Prefix/Key Enter the 2- or 3- character CA-Roscoe prefix, or the CA-Roscoekey of the user to which you are sending a message. If youenter data in both fields, only the prefix is used. ZMsg thenchecks that a valid prefix or key was entered. If it is invalid,you will be notified in the Error/Status line.

<= more => This field and its arrows are displayed when there are moremessages to be viewed, but do not fit on the screen. If '<=' isshown, press PF7/19 to scroll backward to view more messages.If '=>' is shown, press PF8/20 to scroll forward.

Message The line on which you enter the text of the message to be sent toanother CA-Roscoe user.



Options This is the second line of hyphens. It has two fields:

1. on the far left: GetMsgs active and/or Suppress active

2. on the far right: COLUMN N.

GetMsgs active Indicates that the GetMsgs processing isactive. The contents of ZZZZZMSG areprocessed to make them easier to read. IfGetMsgs is not active, the message text willnot be modified.

Suppress active Indicates the Suppress (CA-Roscoe message)processing is active. This will prevent anymessages you receive, while in ZMsg, frombeing redisplayed to you when you exit theBBS.

Note: The function PF9/21 SETOPTS willallow you to set GetMsgs andSuppress on or off.

Column n The columns to be displayed on the screen.This number will be either 1 to displaycolumns 1 through 40, or 40 to displaycolumns 40 through 80.

The displayed columns can be changed usingthe SWAP function (PF9/21).

The current messagesThis area contains all of the messages you sent, received, andthose which are in your ZZZZZMSG member. They aresurrounded by the TOP and BOTTOM file markers.



35.6.4 Viewing Messages on ZMsg

When you invoke ZMsg, you are presented with all of the messages currently in yourZZZZZMSG member. This message display is updated every time you press ENTERor a PF-key. The time posted in the left corner of the Status/Error line will containthe time of the last screen update.

If you want to begin your ZMsg message communications with a clear messagedisplay, use PF5/17 Delete. This will delete all messages contained in the display (theZZZZZMSG member).

About the messages:

■ If GetMsgs processing is not active, the contents are shown exactly as they appearin the member. The newest messages are displayed first.

■ If GetMsgs is in effect, messages are shown in chronological order, with theoldest shown first.

■ You can distinguish which messages you received from those you sent by thecharacter notation that precedes the message, as well as the highlighting of themessage.

– The messages you send have a low intensity attribute setting (default) and aredenoted by the following characters: *>> . These characters are directlyfollowed by the prefix of the recipient, and then the message text. Forexample, if you send a message to the prefix USR, you will see the followingin your ZMsg member:

*>>USR : THIS IS THE MESSAGE I SENT TO USR.

If GetMsgs is not active, the date, time, and your key will be on the linedirectly above the message(the message will be in ZZZZZMSG format):

MM/DD/YY HH:MM:SS MYKEY

(*>>USR) THIS IS THE MESSAGE I SENT TO USR.

– The messages you receive are highlighted, and contain the first eightcharacters of the sender's CA-Roscoe key, followed by the message text (andthe date and time if GetMsgs is inactive.)



35.6.5 Sending a Message to a CA-Roscoe User

To send a one-line message to another CA-Roscoe user, fill in the ZMsg fields. Enterthe CA-Roscoe prefix or the key of the user you are sending the message to. If thekey or prefix does not exist, you will receive an error message on the Error/Status line.Enter the message text in the Message field.

To send the message, press ENTER. The message will be sent, and your messagefield will be immediately updated to include this information. The following paneldisplays this activity.

Message Sent Results

7 8

-- ZMsg ----------------------------------------------- Message sent to pfx=ro

Enter prefix: RO or key:

Message: send this message to myself

GetMsgs active ------------------------------------------------------ Column 1

=================================== T O P ==================================

JOB NOTI: JES REQUEST =====3 SUBMITTED TO DEST ADRPMVS3

ROSCOE.C: send this message to myself

Q>>RO : send this message to myself

================================ B O T T O M ===============================

------------------------------------------------------------------------------

PF1 Help 2 News 3 Exit 4 Swap 5 Delete 6 FindUser

7 Backward 8 Forward 9 SetOpts 1= Top 11 Bottom 12 Refresh

U V

You can see that the Status line on the top of the screen tells you that the message wassent, and to what prefix. Because GetMsgs is active, you see only the message andkey or prefix. Notice that the new messages are added after the existing message fromthe Console. In this example, the user sent a message to himself, so the displaycontains both messages sent and received.

From this ZMsg panel, you can also choose any of the PF-key functions listed on thebottom. The following functions are specific to this ZMsg screen:

PF1/13 Help Displays Help for ZMsg.

PF2/14 News Displays the current News Announcements specific to the ZMsgmode.

PF4/16 Swap Switches text display from column 1 to 40, and back.



PF5/17 Delete Deletes your ZZZZZMSG member.

PF6/18 FindUser Checks if a specified CA-Roscoe user is signed on.

PF9/21 SetOpts Invokes ZMsgOpts, to set up specific ZMsg options.

PF12/24 Refresh Updates the display.

ENTER Sends a message to a specified user.

CLEAR Exits ZMsg.



35.6.6 Set ZMsg Message Options

You can set up your ZMsg environment to support your processing needs orpreferences. Use PF9/21 SETOPTS, to display the ZMsgOpts panel.

ZMsg Options Panel

7 8

-- ZMsgOpts ------------------------------------------------------ PF3 to exit

Suppress ROSCOE messages when exiting ZMsg? (Y/N): N

GetMsgs processing active? (Y/N): Y

Save AWS on entry to ZMsg for ROSCOE 5.6 and lower (Y/N)? N

U V

The above panel shows the ZMsg options:

1. Suppress CA-Roscoe messages when exiting ZMsg? (Y/N):

This controls whether you receive all of the messages that were sent to you whileyou were in the BBS. If this is set to 'Y', or YES, the words "Suppress active"will appear on the right side of the Options line. When Suppress is active, aCA-Roscoe SET SEND OPR command is issued. This command permits only thosemessages sent by the operator to be displayed at your terminal, and thereforesuppresses all other messages. When you exit the BBS, you will not receive theCA-Roscoe messages you already viewed in the ZMsg member.

If it is set to 'N', all CA-Roscoe messages will be redisplayed on the Responseline, one at a time, after you exit the BBS.

2. GetMsgs processing active? (Y/N):

This controls how the ZMsg member is displayed. When this is set to 'Y'(default),the words "GetMsgs active" will appear on the right side of the Options line. Thecontents of ZZZZZMSG are processed to make them easier to read. The messagetext will only contain the key you sent the message to or received the messagefrom, a colon, and the message text. If GetMsgs is not active, the message textwill not be modified. It will contain the time and date, and will be in the originalZZZZZMSG format.

Note: When GetMsgs is active, ZMsg will be slower, especially if there aremany messages.



35.6.7 Locate Another CA-Roscoe User VIA CA-SysView Interface

If the CA-SysView interface for CA-Roscoe is active at your site, you can check ifanother CA-Roscoe user is signed on. From any of the ZMsg panels, press PF6/18FindUser. This will display the FindUser mode. Enter the CA-Roscoe prefix or keyfor the user. You will receive the information shown in the following panel/

Find User Information

7 8

-- FindUser ------------------------------------------------------------------

Enter the prefix: djh or the key:

Job name Status Time S Last command, if any

-------- ------------------------- - --------------------

ROSCOE1 TERM IO WAIT ==:==:=8.86 1 A L+ (COMM)

ROSCOE2 DSN SUBTASK ==:==:=3.31 1 A D ROSCOE.+ (COMM)

ROSCOE3 TERM IO WAIT ==:=1:57.64 1 i b (COMM)

------------------------------------------------------------------------------

PF1 Help 2 News 3 Exit 4 5 6


U V

The information provided through FindUser is the same as the data you receive whenyou issue the following command.

LOO D ROS ST Key(or PFx)=Id

All other functions that can be executed from this panel have been previouslydescribed.


Chapter 36. CA-Roscoe and DB2

CA-Roscoe supports the IBM program product DATABASE2 (DB2). This means thatyou can execute the DB2 Command Processor. (This is controlled by site management.See your site management to determine if this facility is available and how you canexecute the DB2 Command Processor.)

The option CA-Roscoe/DB2 may also be available at your site. It provides facilitiesthat can be used by application developers and data base administrators for the creationof DB2 applications and objects. With this interface, these DB2 activities can beperformed during your CA-Roscoe session with other CA-Roscoe activities.

DB2: Sample Menu

7 8ROSCOE TO DB2

1. ROSCOE USING SQL TERMINAL INPUT (RUSTI)

2. SOURCE LANGUAGE DECLARES (DECLGEN)

3. CREATE APPLICATION PLAN (BIND)

4. REPLACE APPLICATION PLAN (REBIND)

5. REMOVE APPLICATION PLAN (FREE)

6. ISSUE DB2 COMMANDS (CMNDS)

7. EXECUTE PROGRAM UNDER ETSO (RUN)

DESIRED FUNCTION ===> _ DB2 SYSTEM ===> ____

<CLEAR> PFK3

REFRESH EXIT

U V

As illustrated by this sample menu, you can use this facility to execute the followingDB2 services:

■ Dynamic SQL Execution:

SQL statements entered into the active AWS or saved in a CA-Roscoe librarymember can be executed and the results displayed at the terminal.

Chapter 36. CA-Roscoe and DB2 36-1

■ High-Level Language Structure Definition:

COBOL, COBOL2, C or PLI language structures and SQL table declares can becreated from existing DB2 table or view definitions.

■ Application Plan Services:

Data Base Request Modules (DBRM) created through the DB2 pre-compiler canbe bound to create an application plan. Application plans can also be replacedand removed.

■ DB2 Command Execution:

Authorized DB2 commands can be executed to request the DB2 subsystem toperform an operator function.

■ User-Program Execution:

User-written DB2 application programs can be executed under theCA-Roscoe/DB2 execution environment.

For detailed information about using this facility, see the CA-Roscoe/DB2 User Guide.


Chapter 37. DMF - Dialog Management Facility

DMF (Dialog Management Facility) is an application subsystem written in the RPFlanguage. It is designed to assist you in creating and maintaining applications that areheavily panel-oriented.

When developing an application, you are presented with a series of prompt panels thatallow you to:

■ Paint the panels that you want to use in the application.

DMF takes the information you supply and builds a panel which it then saves as amember in your library. It places no restriction on the type of panel you candefine.

■ Designate the sequence in which the panels are to be used.

All you have to do is provide the name of the member containing the next panelto be displayed. DMF generates the linkage between the panels to ensure that theyare displayed in their proper sequence.

■ Designate how the panel information is to be processed.

When creating a panel, you can specify validation criteria for the input fields.DMF generates an RPF program to verify those fields and invokes the programwhen appropriate.

You can preset a panel field while defining the panel or through an initializationRPF program. This flexibility means that you can include, for example, specificdefault values (such as account numbers) when defining the panel or writing aninitialization program that provides variable values (such as a user's sign-on key).

The only RPF program you need to write is the execution program that evaluatesand processes the contents of the panel. Once you have associated this programwith your panel, DMF ensures that it is invoked at the appropriate point during theexecution of your application.

Since DMF builds the panels, you only have to be concerned with formatting theinformation unique to each panel. DMF provides each panel with a title line, errormessage line and lines for displaying PF key assignments.

Chapter 37. DMF - Dialog Management Facility 37-1

DMF also provides a set of basic functions that you can assign to any of the PF keys.Once you have made the assignments, DMF includes them in every generated panel. Ifthe terminal user presses a PF key to which you have assigned a function, DMFhandles the processing.

One of the PF key functions is a Help facility. To use this facility, all you need do istell DMF which DMF Help panel to use. If the individual executing the applicationrequests Help, DMF will display the appropriate Help panel.

With these features, DMF frees you from doing the repetitive or routine portions ofyour panel-driven application.

For additional information, see the CA-Roscoe RPF Language Guide.


Chapter 38. ETSO - Application Execution System

ETSO (Extended Time-Sharing Option) is an application execution system that isdistributed as part of CA-Roscoe. You can use it to execute online under CA-Roscoemost purchased or site-developed applications without modification.

Chapter 38. ETSO - Application Execution System 38-1

38.1 Determining Executable Applications

38.1 Determining Executable Applications

The types of applications that can be executed include:

■ Applications that provide an interactive environment of their own. For example,applications that use the Statistical Analysis System (SAS) from the SAS Institute.

■ Applications for data entry/inquiry against a data base.

■ Applications to handle site-specific tasks that extend CA-Roscoe capabilities. Forexample, an application might be written that uses a batch program to process datain an AWS.

■ Applications that use CLISTs and REXX execs. Both explicit (EXEC) andimplicit (%) invocations are supported.

ETSO can also be used to execute interactive applications. Many of the applicationsthat currently run under TSO execute successfully under ETSO.

If you are interested in executing a specific application, you should contact your sitemanagement to determine:

1. If the application is already defined to ETSO.

2. If not, what procedures should be followed to have the site evaluate theapplication for execution under ETSO.

If you are interested in executing an application containing CLISTs or REXX execs,you should contact your site management to determine if the TSO command issupported at your site. A requirement to execute those facilities is TSO/E 2.1 orabove.


38.2 Executing Applications Under ETSO


Conceptually, there is little difference between executing an application in backgroundthrough CA-Roscoe or online through ETSO. In both cases, you must allocate the filesused by the application and then initiate execution of that application.

Frequently, sites provide RPF programs that handle file allocation and applicationinvocation. Thus, all you need to do is execute the RPF program. The sample RPFprograms shown in the following example illustrate two methods of executing the IBMutility IEBCOPY.

ETSO: Application Execution Comparison

7 8 IEBCOPY1

>


> <...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5...

...... ================================ T O P ==============

===1== <<IEBCOPY1>> : Execute Via ETSO

===2== ALLOCATE SYSPRINT SYSOUT=T

===3== ALLOCATE INDD DSN=SAMPLE.INPUT,DISP=SHR

===4== ALLOCATE OUTDD DSN=SAMPLE.OUTPUT,DISP=SHR

===5== ALLOCATE SYSUT3 UNIT=SYSDA,SPACE=(CYL,2)

===6== ALLOCATE SYSUT4 UNIT=SYSDA,SPACE=(CYL,2)

===7== ALLOCATE SYSIN DSN=SAMPLE.CONTROL,DISP=SHR

===8== CALL IEBCOPY

) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) IEBCOPY2

>


> <...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5...

...... ================================ T O P ==============

===1== <<IEBCOPY2>> : Execute Batch Job

===2== WRITE AWS T

===3== '//BATCHJOB JOB . . . '

===4== '// EXEC PGM=IEBCOPY'

===5== '//SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=T'

===6== '//INDD DD DSN=SAMPLE.INPUT,DISP=SHR'

===7== '//OUTDD DD DSN=SAMPLE.OUTPUT,DISP=SHR'

===8== '//SYSUT3 DD UNIT=SYSDA,SPACE=(CYL,2)'

===9== '//SYSUT4 DD UNIT=SYSDA,SPACE=(CYL,2)'

==1=== '//SYSIN DD DSN=SAMPLE.CONTROL,DISP=SHR'

==11== ENDWRITE

==12== SUBMIT

U V

As illustrated in the upper portion of the screen, the ALLOCATE command allocatesthe needed files and assigns them DD names that will be referenced by the applicationduring execution. The CALL command is then used to identify and initiate executionof the application.



38.2.1 Allocating Files

ETSO dynamically allocates the files that you designate (through the ALLOCATEcommand) for use by the application.

Note that the term file has a special meaning to ETSO. With ETSO, you can allocatedata sets and CA-Roscoe-managed files (like an AWS, a library member, or theterminal).

38.2.1.1 Allocating an AWS

You can allocate one or more AWSs. An AWS can be used as either an input oroutput file or it can be both. To allocate the active AWS, use the AWS keyword withthe command, as in:

ALLOCATE SYSIN AWS

To allocate a specific AWS, use the AWS= keyword to identify the appropriate AWS,as in:

ALLOCATE SYSIN AWS=SAMPLE

If an AWS is defined as an input file, the application will read from that AWS untilthe end of the AWS is reached.

If an AWS is defined as both an input and output file, the input data in that AWS isoverlaid by the output data written to it when the application ends (either successfullyor unsuccessfully) or the application closes the output file.

38.2.1.2 Allocating a Library Member

A library member can also be used as both an input and output file. To allocate alibrary member, include the member name with the keyword MEM=. If the librarymember belongs to another user, include that user's prefix, as in:

ALLOCATE SYSIN MEM=XYZ.CONTROL

If a library member is designated as an input file, the contents will be read until theend of the member is reached.

If you designate a library member as an output file and that member does not currentlyexist, the member is created when data are written to it. (If the non-existent member isdefined as an input file, the application will terminate.)



38.2.1.3 Allocating the Terminal

To designate that the terminal is to be used as an input and/or output file, include anasterisk (*) with the command, as in:

ALLOCATE SYSIN Q

When the terminal is used as an input or output file, you should determine whatescape sequence you want before executing the application. You need the escapesequence to:

■ Indicate the end of input. When the application begins executing, the keyboard islocked. The keyboard unlocks when the application requests input. To force anend-of-input condition, enter the escape sequence in response to a prompt forinput.

■ Terminate an application. If the terminal is defined as an output file, the keyboardis unlocked when output exceeding a screen is written to the terminal. At thattime, you can terminate the application by entering the escape sequence.

While site management has the option of changing the default, it is usually twoconsecutive periods (..). To change the escape sequence, use the SET ESCAPEcommand, as in:

SET ESCAPE //

which changes the escape sequence to two consecutive slashes.

38.2.1.4 Allocating Data Sets

Any sequential data set, PDS member or temporary data set can be designated by theALLOCATE command. For example:

■ To designate that all read/write operations to a file are to be ignored, follow theDD name with the keyword DUMMY, as in:

ALLOCATE IGNOREDD DUMMY

■ To designate an output file, include the appropriate SYSOUT information, as in:

ALLOCATE SYSPRINT SYSOUT=(W,,LTRH) DEST=ABCD COPIES=2

■ To allocate space for a data set that is to be referenced by the application, youmight specify:

ALLOCATE SAMPLE DSN=ROSCOE.TEST

DISP=SHR VOL=STOR=2 UNIT=338= SPACE=(TRK,(2=,2=))

RECFM=FB LRECL=122 BLKSIZE=798

This example illustrates the type of information you can specify with thecommand. It does, however, violate the rule that a command entered from theterminal cannot exceed the width of the screen (it cannot be continued).

■ To use the attributes associated with a previously defined data set, use the LIKE=operand. If the IBM DFSMS is not installed at the site, the existing data set'sDCB parameters are used. If DFSMS is installed, the attributes copied from the



existing data set are AVGREC, KEYLEN, KEYOFF, LRECL, RECORG (orRECFM) and SPACE.

ALLOCATE SAMPLE2 DSN=ROSCOE.TEST2@LIKE=ROSCOE.TEST

SPACE=(TRK,(1=,5))

In this example, the SPACE= operand is used to override the space allocation inthe existing data set.

■ To allocate a data set that is defined in the CA-Roscoe JCL, use the JCLDD=operand, as in:

ALLOCATE MYDD JCLDD=SITEDD

where SITEDD is the DD name associated with the data set. This form ofallocation is useful for data sets that are frequently referenced by one or moreusers.

■ To concatenate data sets, list the data set object names in the appropriate order.You can concatenate a maximum of ten names. They must be bound byparentheses.

ALLOCATE SITELIB DSN=(ROSCOE.TEST1, ROSCOE.TEST2)...

■ To allocate a temporary data set, omit the keywords DUMMY, SYSOUT= andDSN=, as in:

ALLOCATE SYSUT3 UNIT=SYSDA,SPACE=(CYL,2)



38.2.2 Querying and Freeing Files

By default, you can allocate a maximum of 19 files during your session. (Your sitemanagement has the option of defining the maximum number of files that a user mayallocate.) This includes any combination of CA-Roscoe-managed files and data sets.If, during the course of your session, you want to find out what files are allocated, youcan use the command:

QUERY ALLOCATE

The following example illustrates the type of information that might be displayed.

ETSO: Sample QUERY ALLOCATE Display

7 8 >

>

....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.

DDNAME TYPE DISP MEMBER DATA-SET NAME

------ ---- ---- ------ -------------

SYSIN AWS

SYSIN1 LIBRARY pfx.CONTROL

IGNOREDD DUMMY

SYSPRINT SYSOUT CLASS=W FORM NAME=LTRH

DATASET NEW ROSCOE.TEST

DATASET NEW ROSCOE.TEST2

SYSUT3 DATASET NEW

When your application completes its execution, you should release all of the files thatyou allocated. You can use the FREE command to release these files. For example, torelease the file with the DD name SYSIN, you would enter:

FREE SYSIN

To release all of the files you have allocated, enter:

FREE ALL

If any of your files are still allocated when your terminal session ends, they areautomatically released. Also, if your application dynamically allocates any files, theyare freed when your application ends.



38.2.3 Initiating Execution

To initiate execution of an application under ETSO, enter the CALL command and theapplication name, as in:

CALL IEBCOPY

You can pass information to the application through the CALL command. Forexample, if the application TEST expects an inventory number to be passed, you mightinvoke the application by entering:

CALL TEST /SR2O5==/

If, after initiating execution, you decide to end the program, you can do so by pressingthe Attention key.

You also have the option of suspending application execution when it is promptingyou for input. To do so, enter:

:U

in any unprotected field and press PF12. The cursor must immediately follow thecommand. (Note that the colon and PF key assignment are the CA-Roscoe defaults.Use the STATUS SYSTEM display to determine if your site management has changedthese defaults.)

When an application is suspended, an E is displayed at the right of the Response Line.

If you originally initiated application execution by entering a CALL command, youcan resume execution by entering:

RESUME ETSO

If you initiated execution through an RPF program, that program will tell you how toresume execution.


38.3 Executing Distributed Application

38.3 Executing Distributed Application

One of the sample applications distributed with CA-Roscoe is named MORTGAGE.This application, written in FORTRAN, computes the rate, life, amount borrowed ormonthly payment of a mortgage loan. If your site has made this application available,you can perform the following steps to execute it.

1. Allocate the necessary input and output files.

MORTGAGE uses three files. To assign FT05F001 and FT06F001 to the terminaland FT07F001 to the active AWS, enter:

2. ALLOCATE FT=5F==1 Q

3. ALLOCATE FT=6F==1 Q

4. ALLOCATE FT=7F==1 AWS

where:

■ FT05F001 is the DD name of the input file.

■ FT06F001 is the DD name of an output files that writes the prompts andcomputed results.

■ FT07F001 is the DD name of a second output file that writes the computedmortgage tables.

5. Initiate execution of the application.

The CALL command initiates execution of applications defined to ETSO.Therefore, to execute MORTGAGE, enter:

CALL MORTGAGE

Because of the allocations, MORTGAGE writes prompts to the terminal requesting thenecessary input and reads your responses from the terminal. After you have entered allof the information, MORTGAGE performs its calculations and writes the results to theterminal and the active AWS.

When the applications end, you should use the FREE command to deallocate the files.If you do not, your allocated files are automatically released when you sign offCA-Roscoe.

If you want to change an allocation or execute another application that uses a file withthe same DD name, you must release it before reallocating it. For example, toreexecute MORTGAGE and have the output written to the terminal instead of theactive AWS, you would enter:

FREE FT=7==1

ALLOCATE FT=7==1 Q

CALL MORTGAGE


38.4 Executing TSO Commands

38.4 Executing TSO Commands

An extension to ETSO has been created to allow you to easily switch between the useof TSO facilities and native CA-Roscoe facilities. You can execute CLISTs andREXX execs. These procedures are executable directly from the CA-Roscoe commandline, from within each other (nesting), and from within ISPF dialogs. Both explicit(EXEC) and implicit (%) invocations are supported.

Use the TSO command to execute TSO commands from within an RPF or from theCA-Roscoe command line. The TSO command can be used in place of or inconjunction with a CALL command. For example, to allocate files necessary forlogging onto ISPF, enter:

TSO EXEC 'TSTPRN.TSTPRN)=1.CLIST(LOGTSO)'

Or, to execute the CLIST MYEXEC from your TSO CLIST library, enter:

TSO %MYEXEC

If the TSO command invokes a full-screen process, that process will take over thescreen. If the process is a line-mode TSO command, output will be written to theexecution area.


Chapter 39. RPF - Roscoe Programming Facility

RPF is a high-level, interactive structured programming language. It supports a fullarithmetic capability, built-in functions and a variety of variables that are assignedvalues by RPF and the user. Its commands can be used to:

■ Converse with the terminal user by issuing line-by-line and/or full-screen displays.

■ Validate data entered by the user against specified criteria.

■ Choose among several possible courses of action based upon the data entered bythe user.

■ Transfer control to another location within the same program or to other programs.

Perhaps its most important feature is that RPF is designed to take full advantage of allCA-Roscoe commands and facilities. All of the commands can be incorporatedwithout modification into RPF programs. By using CA-Roscoe commands with RPF'sinteractive language, error-prone and complicated tasks can be simplified so that itbecomes easy to:

■ Enter, verify and edit data.

■ Create, save, access and modify library members.

■ Build, verify, submit and track jobs.

■ Retrieve, examine and, optionally, save resulting output.

■ Control utility functions and housekeeping tasks performed against OS data sets.

RPF programs are stored in the CA-Roscoe library, with names that follow standardCA-Roscoe naming conventions.

Chapter 39. RPF - Roscoe Programming Facility 39-1

To execute an RPF program, enter its name in the Command Area and press theENTER key. For example, assume the RPF program that updates a customer masterfile is saved as the member CUSTOMER. To execute this program, you would enter:

CUSTOMER

It might prompt for information by displaying a full-screen panel such as the oneshown in the following example.

RPF: Sample Full-Screen Panel

7 8

U P D A T E C U S T O M E R M A S T E R F I L E

COMPANY NAME: _ TELEPHONE:

CONTACT: ADDRESS:

TITLE:

CONTRACT NO: LAST ORDER DATE:

ENTER "X" IF NO MORE UPDATES:

U V

If the RPF program you wish to execute belongs to another user, you must precede thename with that user's prefix (for example, AAA.CUSTOMER).

Occasionally, an RPF program may be given a name that is also the name of aCA-Roscoe command (SAVE, for example). When this occurs, more explicitinvocation of the program is required to avoid executing the CA-Roscoe command. Toexplicitly execute an RPF program, precede the program name with the EXECcommand. For example, to execute an RPF program named SAVE, you would enter:

EXEC SAVE

For additional information about the RPF language and how to write RPF programs,see the CA-Roscoe RPF Language Guide. You can also use TRAINING, which is aninteractive application that introduces RPF. For information about using this learningaid, enter:

HELP TRAINING


Chapter 40. SKETCH - CICS/IMS Panel Generator

SKETCH is a menu-driven RPF application that simplifies the generation of panelsused by programs running under:

■ CICS. SKETCH generates BMS (Basic Mapping Support) macros that definepanels to CICS applications.

■ IMS. SKETCH generates the MFS (Message Format Services) statements thatdefine panels to IMS applications.

Using just a few prompt panels, you can use SKETCH to:

■ Design a BMS or MFS map. The input can be from: 1) your responses toSKETCH prompts, 2) an RPF panel, or 3) an existing map.

■ Specify individual fields within a map. Default values for the fields (for example,attributes and colors) are automatically supplied by SKETCH.

You have the option of modifying the site-defined default values that are used ingenerating the macros/statements defining: 1) all maps and map fields, or 2) aparticular map.

■ Generate the macros/statements used in creating the map(s).

Before generating the macros, you have the option of displaying a prototype map,thus ensuring that the map you are about to generate is correct.

■ Generate the JCL to:

– Assemble and link-edit the BMS macros. You can also designate whether theresulting output is to be used in an Assembler, COBOL or PL/I applicationprogram.

– Create the online blocks for the MFS statements. You can designate whetherthe resulting output is to be placed in the production or test library.

While a familiarity with BMS or IMS is helpful, it is not essential when defining thepanels and then generating them to create maps. SKETCH allows you to create andmaintain panels by using the WYSIWYG (What You See Is What You Get) method.

For additional information, see the CA-Roscoe Extended Development Tools Guide.

Chapter 40. SKETCH - CICS/IMS Panel Generator 40-1

Appendixes

Appendix A. Using Typewriter Devices With CA-Roscoe . . . . . . . . . . . A-1A.1 Beginning a Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2A.2 Establishing Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3A.3 Signing On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4A.4 Ending a CA-Roscoe Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6A.5 Using a Typewriter Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7A.6 Using CA-Roscoe Commands and Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9A.7 Using the Data Set Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10A.8 Viewing Job Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-11A.9 Non-Executable Commands and Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12

Appendix A. Using Typewriter Devices WithCA-Roscoe

To CA-Roscoe, a 'typewriter device' is an IBM 3767 or any device that operates in amanner similar to a Teletype terminal.

Appendix A. Using Typewriter Devices With CA-Roscoe A-1

A.1 Beginning a Session

A.1 Beginning a Session

Before signing on to CA-Roscoe, you must first establish connection between yourtypewriter device and your site's computer.

A-2 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

A.2 Establishing Connection

A.2 Establishing Connection

Your site management will tell you what telephone number to dial to establishconnection with the computer. After dialing the number, the computer 'answers' with ahigh-pitched tone. Turn the terminal on. Place the hand set in the acoustic coupler(located by, or as a part of, the terminal), or put the mode on data mode, depending onthe type of terminal connection. When the green terminal connection light lights up, orthe terminal clicks the keyboard open, depress the RETURN key one or more timesuntil CA-Roscoe responds with a sign-on prompt message.


A.3 Signing On

A.3 Signing On

At typewriter devices, CA-Roscoe issues a sign-on prompt like the one below:

SON03 ENTER KEY FOR CA-Roscoe version - date time

To sign on, type the sign-on key given to you by your site management and depressthe RETURN key.

If RACF protection is in effect at your site and group codes are used, the group codeshould be entered with the sign-on key (separated by a slash), as in:

sign-on key/group code

If the account has previously been assigned a password (either by you or sitemanagement), the following prompt is issued:

SON04 ENTER PASSWORD

After this prompt is issued, the terminal types meaningless characters in the fieldwhere the password is to be entered. This provides a mask, so that other users will notbe able to see your password as you enter it.


A.3 Signing On

A new password can be entered at the same time as the current password. The twopasswords must be separated by a slash, as follows:

current password/new password

Once you have signed on, CA-Roscoe responds in a manner identical to that found at3270-type terminals (that is, sign-on procedures are executed, the sign-on message isdisplayed, and so forth.).


A.4 Ending a CA-Roscoe Session

A.4 Ending a CA-Roscoe Session

To sign off of CA-Roscoe, enter:

OFF

To sign off of CA-Roscoe and redisplay the sign-on prompt, enter:

OFFON


A.5 Using a Typewriter Device


Teletype terminals operate in half-duplex mode (that is, the terminal can either send orreceive data but not both at once). When CA-Roscoe is reading data from theterminal, the terminal is locked. It is unlocked when CA-Roscoe is either writing to theterminal or waiting for a response from the terminal. CA-Roscoe normally notifies youthat the terminal is unlocked and ready for input by typing the prompt character, thebackarrow (<-). On some terminals, the backarrow is replaced by an underscore (_).

If a line sent from the terminal to CA-Roscoe cannot be received due to noise on thephone line, CA-Roscoe displays the following message:

CMD27: TERMINAL I/O ERROR - DATA LOST

Retype and resend the line. If such an error occurs while the terminal is executing anRPF program, the program is terminated. If the error occurs while CA-Roscoe isattempting to send data to the terminal, retry procedures are executed. In the rare casethat errors are found during the retry procedures (indicating severe communicationproblems), CA-Roscoe signs the terminal off. Attempt to reestablish connection fromanother terminal.

Signoff procedures may be forced by CA-Roscoe in response to any of the followingconditions:

■ The operator requests CA-Roscoe to sign you off.

■ You turn the power off or hang up the phone.

■ Unrecoverable error conditions occur on the phone line, leaving the lineinoperable.



When any of these conditions occur, your are signed off. Any data in an AWS issaved in your library as the member SAVAWSnn where 'nn' is a unique identifier.

Teletype Terminal Keyboard:

CTRL-E Keys Depressing the CTRL and E keys in unison cancels an input line,causing CA-Roscoe to reissue a sequence number prompt.

CTRL-I Keys Depressing the CTRL and I keys in unison simulates a hardwareTAB key. This action is recognized only if tab positions havebeen defined through the TAB command. On most Teletypeterminals, the carrier or cursor is not moved by this action.

CTRL-S Keys Depressing the CTRL and S keys in unison simulates a RETURNkey, transmitting data from the terminal to CA-Roscoe.

RETURN Key (or CR)Transmits data from the terminal to CA-Roscoe.

Backslash Key Erases the last character entered. It can also be used to eraseentire words. (On some models, this function is handled by theshift-L keys.)

In addition to the above, the software BREAK feature is supported as follows:

■ To terminate output, depress the RETURN key.■ To resume listing after a pause, depress the CTRL-S keys.


A.6 Using CA-Roscoe Commands and Facilities

A.6 Using CA-Roscoe Commands and Facilities

The following commands are available only at typewriter devices:

BREAK Controls the number of lines written to the terminal before pausing.BREAK should only be used if the terminal does not have a hardwareBREAK key. Output is continued upon receiving a CTRL-S. Output isterminated upon receiving a carriage return.

SCALE Writes a Scale Line identical in function to the Scale Line displayed at3270-type terminals.

TTY Sets the speed characteristics for the terminal. Site management will tellyou of the value associated with each terminal type and the site defaults.

WIDTH Physically changes the width of the print line from the default value to avalue between 72 and 132 characters.


A.7 Using the Data Set Facility

A.7 Using the Data Set Facility

Primary commands (such as READ DSN) that do not cause a full-screen display aresupported. Commands that require interaction through a panel (for example, DSN) maynot be used at a typewriter device.

If a PAUSE state is entered without a DETACH command being issued, one isassumed. This means that Selections Lists and data cannot be displayed at the terminalbut may be processed by commands such as COPY DSN or READ DSN. Note thatthe DETACH need not be an explicit DETACH DSN. This permits the data setprocess to be suspended over a pause and allows a future RPF program or primarycommand to continue to access the data/Selection List.


A.8 Viewing Job Output

A.8 Viewing Job Output

Use the SET DISPLAY command to designate the length of the line to be printed (forexample, SET DISPLAY 1 80 causes the first 80 characters of the line to be printed).If the device supports lines longer than 80 characters, you can set the appropriate linelength (for example SET DISPLAY 1 132). (The maximum line length you canspecify is 150.) If the line is longer than 132 characters, characters in excess of 132are wrapped to the next line.

Use the ATTACH JOB command to begin printing the output. After the number oflines specified by the BREAK command have printed, the carriage stops at the rightside of the device. To continue listing the job, enter:

ATTACH JOB *


A.9 Non-Executable Commands and Facilities

A.9 Non-Executable Commands and Facilities

The following commands are not executable at typewriter devices:

■ All line commands and SET DISPLAY NUMX.

■ INCL and EXCL. (SEARCH and OMIT may be used.)

■ SET

■ All SET-related commands used to control the 3270-type terminal display (forexample, SET AWSDSPLY and SET SCROLL).

The following facilities are not available at typewriter devices:

■ The split-screen facility■ PF/PA key support■ RPF panel facility


Index

Special Characters- (Reexecuting Last Command) 2-6-INC Statement Expansion

Changing 6-16Using 28-7

,, (Representing Last Line) 2-5:C (To Copy Screen)

Using 15-9:E (To End Split Screens)

Using 8-11:L (To Lock Screen)

Using 8-14:P (To Print Screen)

Using 7-2:S (To Split Screen)

Using 8-8:SK (PRINT Formatting Pseudo-Command) 7-4:TOP (PRINT Formatting Pseudo-Command) 7-4:W (To Swap Split Screens)

Using 8-11.SK (PRINT Formatting Pseudo-Command) 7-4.TOP (PRINT Formatting Pseudo-Command) 7-4< (Less Than Sign)

As Special Character 4-5* (Asterisk)

As Reserved Character 2-6Deferring Command Execution 2-6Representing

Name of Last FETCHed, SAVEd, UPDATEdMember 23-5

&Change Command Delimiter 6-15

+INC Statement ExpansionChanging 6-17Using 28-6

+ (Plus Sign)As Reserved Character 2-7Redisplaying Last Executed Command 2-13, 2-14

> (Greater Than Sign)As Special Character 4-5

Numerics3270-Type Devices

DELETE Key 16-7ERASE EOF Key

Control Use Of 6-16, 16-6Screen Components

Command Area 8-3Execution Area 8-6System Control Area 8-3—8-5

Screen FormatChange 8-12Full/Partial 8-7Terminal Lock 8-13, 8-14

Signing Off 10-13Signing On 10-2—10-3

AA (Destination) Line Command 15-4

With Move 21-4Access Attribute, Library Member

Changing Default 6-17AD (Destination/Drop) Line Command

With COPY 15-5Addmsg Function (BBS) 35-4AJOB Command

Job Execution Status 29-2Job Facility

Menu 28-9Selection List 28-13

Job Information 29-7ALLOCATE Command

Data SetsUsing 27-2, 27-3

Under ETSO 38-4—38-5

Index X-1

Allocate Function PanelDescription Of 27-4Using 27-3

Allocate SMS Function PanelDescription Of 27-7Using 27-3

Allocating FilesData Set Under ETSO 38-5Data Sets 27-2, 27-3Library Member 38-4Terminal 38-5

ALTER CommandAWS Attributes 13-5Job File Attributes 30-17Library Member Attributes 34-2, 34-3

AlteringAWS Attributes 13-5Job File Attributes

Commands 30-17Job Facility 30-18Selection List 30-19STATUS JOB Display 30-23—30-24

Library Member AttributesCommand 34-2, 34-3Function Panel 34-15, 34-16Selection List 34-3, 34-4

Arithmetic symbols (syntax diagrams) xxviATTACH Command

AWS 13-3Controlling Pausing 6-15Data Set Facility

Catalog Selection List 25-7, 25-8, 25-9—25-12Data Set 25-26, 25-27GDG 25-14LIBRARIAN Module 25-15—25-17LIBRARIAN Selection List 25-2Menu 24-2PDS Member 25-15—25-17PDS Selection List 25-18, 25-19Volume Selection List 25-28

Job Output 30-2—30-6Library Facility

Member 32-10, 32-11Menu 31-3—31-5Selection List 32-2

VTOC Selection List 25-33—25-34Attributes

Job Output FileChange Using Command 30-17Change Using Job Menu 30-18Change Using Selection List 30-19Change Using STATUS JOB

Display 30-23—30-24

Attributes (continued)Job Output File (continued)

Displaying 30-23—30-24Library Member

Changing Default Access 6-17Automatic

IndentationControlling 6-15Using 18-15

Line InsertionControlling 6-15Using 18-9

SignoffControlling 6-15Site Defaults 6-12

Terminal LockControlling 6-17Site Defaults 6-12

AWSAdding String To Line

At Beginning 14-2At End 14-2Between Specific Columns 14-2

Attaching 13-3Bringing Data Into 13-4Creating 13-6, 13-7Deleting Contents

Using Line Commands 16-4Using Primary Commands (By Line

Number) 16-2Using Primary Commands (Lines Containing

String) 16-3Detaching 13-8Discarding

Change Attribute 13-5Display/Change Attributes 17-5Explicit 13-9

Display/Change Attributes 17-1—17-6Editing Data

Changed Line Indicator (Controlling) 6-16Controlling Column Boundaries 4-1—4-5

Editing Data (Character Strings)Tracking Changes 14-8—14-10Using Line Commands 14-7Using Primary Command 14-6, 14-7

Editing Data (Characters)Using Line Commands 14-5Using Primary Command 14-4

Entering DataControlling Number of Inserted Lines 6-15From Command Area 18-14Using a Mask 18-11—18-12

X-2 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

AWS (continued)Entering Data (continued)

Using Automatic Line Insertion 18-9Using I and IB Line Commands 18-8Using PF Key 18-13Using Primary Commands 18-2—18-7Using TE Line Command 18-10With Automatic Indentation 18-15

Fill Character, Trailing 6-16introduction 13-1Keyword on System Information Line 8-3Locate/Display Data

All Occurrences (Modifiable Display) 20-6—20-9All Occurrences (Non-Modifiable Display) 20-7,

20-8By Occurrence, Line Commands 20-5By Occurrence, Primary Command 20-3Contents in HEX 5-7, 5-8Customizing Display 20-10Non-Matching Occurrence (Modifiable

Display) 20-6Non-Matching Occurrence (Non-Modifiable

Display) 20-8Positioning Display

By Pointer Position 13-10Using Line Commands 13-12Using Primary Command 13-11

Print Contents of 7-2Reattaching 13-13Recovery

Change Attribute 13-5Display/Change Attributes 17-5Set Attributes 13-6

Renaming 13-5Renumber Contents of

Any Time 22-1—22-3Reorder Contents 14-3Save Contents of 23-2Selecting 13-14

AWS AttributesChange 13-5Display/Change 17-1—17-6Establish 13-6, 13-7

AWS DisplayDisplay Format 5-7, 5-8Display/Change 17-1—17-6Sequence Number Display 5-6

BB (Destination) Line Command 15-4

With Move 21-4BASIC Mode

Character Translation/Recognition 3-3BB (Destination) Line Command 15-4

With Move 21-4BBD (Destination/Drop) Line Command

With COPY 15-5BBS

Overview 35-1, 35-2BBSOpt Mode 35-13BBSSAV 35-13BD (Destination/Drop) Line Command

With COPY 15-5Boundaries

See Column BoundariesBOUNDS Line Command 4-5BulletinBoard System

Addmsg Function 35-8, 35-9Create Message Threads 35-8, 35-9Create Thread Entries 35-8, 35-9deleting unwanted thread 35-16Edit Mode 35-9, 35-10Error/Status Line 35-3GetMsgs Processing 35-23Locate CA-Roscoe Users 35-28Message Display Description 35-24Message Selection List 35-3News Announcements 35-2Overview 35-1Print

Message Thread 35-18, 35-19Thread Entry 35-17

Prune Profile 35-16Reply/Insert Mode 35-8, 35-9Send Messages 9-5Sending Messages to CA-Roscoe Users

Description 35-20Using ZMsg 35-25—35-27

Session parameters, Set 35-13Set Defaults

Options (Utility) 35-13Printer 35-14Read Message Attribute 35-14Unread Message Attribute 35-14

Signing On 35-2Suppress Message Processing 35-23Utility (PF1/13) 35-11—35-19View News Announcements 35-15

Index X-3

BulletinBoard System (continued)Viewing Message Thread 35-5Viewing Thread Entries 35-6, 35-7ZMsg Function (PF12/24) 35-21—35-27ZMsg Mode 9-5

CC Line Command 15-3CA-Librarian

-INC Statement ExpansionControlling 6-16

Attaching Module 25-15Attaching Selection List 25-2Using EXPORT Command 27-60

CA-PanvaletEXPORT Command

Using 27-60CA-Roscoe

Controlling Info Messages 6-16Documentation, User 12-2HELP Facility 12-3—12-5Online Tutorial 12-6Sign On

From CA-Roscoe 10-4, 10-5From CICS 10-6From TSO 10-7From VTAM 10-3Sign-on Screen 10-2—10-3

CA-SysView Interface (BBS) 35-28CALL Command 38-8Cancel Function (BBS) 35-10Cancel Job

Using Job Facility 30-30Using Selection List 30-31

Capitalize TextInitial Cap

Using Line Commands 19-6Using Primary Command 19-5

Lowercase AllUsing Line Commands 19-5Using Primary Command 19-5

Printing 7-3Uppercase All


CATALOG Command 27-11, 27-12Catalog Selection List

Attaching 25-7, 25-8Description Of 25-9—25-12Detaching 26-2

Catalog Selection List (continued)Function Codes

List Of 25-9—25-12Reattaching 26-10, 26-11Search for String

All Occurrences 26-4By Occurrence 26-3Non-Matching Occurrences 26-4

Selecting Different Level 25-38CB Line Command 15-4CC Line Command 15-4CDSN Command 27-62Center Text

Using Line Commands 19-3, 19-4Using Primary Command 19-2

CHAIN Command 34-7Character Set

Description Of 2-5Display/Change Using STATUS AWS 17-5Language

Changing 6-15Defining 3-2

Reserved Characters 2-5, 2-6Translation Mode

Changing 6-16Defining 3-3

Character TranslationDisplay/Change 17-5

Character, ReplaceUsing Line Command 14-5Using Primary Command 14-4

CICSSigning On Via 10-6

COB Command 28-3COBOL Syntax Checker 28-3COLS

Field on System Information Line 8-6Column Boundaries

Display/Change 6-2, 6-3Using STATUS AWS 17-3

Session ChangeUsing BOUNDS Line Command 4-5Using SET BOUNDS 4-4Using STATUS AWS 4-3Using STATUS DISPLAY 4-3

Temporary Change 4-2Comma

repeat symbol, use in xxixCommand Area

Change Size of 6-15Description 8-3


Command Area (continued)Use To Enter AWS Data 18-14

CommandsCorrecting Invalid/Incomplete 2-10Defaults, Site-defined 6-12, 6-13Deferring Command Execution 2-6Delimiter


Evaluation Hierarchy 2-9Execution Hierarchy 2-9Redisplaying Executed

In Command Area 2-13, 2-14In Execution Area 2-13

Reexecuting 2-6Types Of 2-2, 2-3

COMPRESS Command 27-21Compress PDS 27-21COPY Command

From Data Set Facility 27-13Into AWS

From AWS 15-8—15-10From Job Output 30-20From Library Facility 34-5, 34-6From Screen 15-8—15-10Specific Information 15-8—15-10

Within AWS 15-2, 15-3Copy Function Panel

Data Set FacilityDescripiton 27-16Displaying 27-16

Library FacilityDescription 34-8, 34-9Displaying 34-8, 34-9

Copying DataBetween Screens

All or Range 15-12, 15-13Based on String 15-13, 15-14

Into AWSAll or Range 15-8—15-10Based on String 15-10, 15-11From AWS 15-8—15-10From Data Set Facility (Commands) 27-13From Data Set Facility (Function Panel) 27-16From Data Set Facility (Selection List) 27-20From Job Output 30-20From Screen 15-8—15-10Using :C 15-9Using Commands 34-5, 34-6Using Function Panel 34-8, 34-9Using Selection List 34-9, 34-10

Copying Data (continued)Within AWS

Description 15-2, 15-3Using Line Commands 15-3, 15-4Using Repeat Line Command 15-7

CopyMem Function 35-9COPYS Command

From Data Set Facility 27-13From Library Facility 34-6Into AWS

From AWS 15-8—15-10From Screen 15-8—15-10

COPYX CommandFrom Data Set Facility 27-13From Library Facility 34-6Into AWS

From AWS 15-8—15-10From Screen 15-8—15-10

Create AWS 13-6, 13-7CREATE Command 13-6CSR (SCRL Field Value) 8-5CT Line Command 15-4Cursor Positioning

After Command ExecutionChanging 6-15

After Lines InsertedChanging 6-15

DD

Line Command 16-4DASD Space, Release Unused 27-52Data Set Display

Display Format 5-7, 5-8Sequence Number Display 5-6

Data Set FacilityAttaching

Catalog Selection List 25-7, 25-8, 25-9—25-12Data Set 25-26, 25-27GDG 25-14LIBRARIAN Module 25-15—25-17LIBRARIAN Selection List 25-2—25-6Menu 24-2, 24-3PDS Member 25-15—25-17PDS Selection List 25-18, 25-19Volume Selection List 25-28VTOC Selection List 25-33—25-34

Cataloging 27-11, 27-12Define GDG

Function Panel 27-25

Index X-5

Data Set Facility (continued)Defining Alias 27-22Detaching 26-2Function Panels 24-10Inquiring About

Data Set (Selection List) 27-36Volume 27-40

Menu Description 24-3—24-7Printing 27-44Releasing Space 27-52Renaming 27-54Search for String


Selecting Display 25-38Selection Lists

Function Code Hierarchy 24-13Overview 24-12Refreshing 24-15

Uncataloging 27-58Data Sets

AllocatingCommand 27-2, 27-3

Attaching 25-26, 25-27Cataloging 27-11, 27-12COMPRESS Message Control

Changing 6-16Compressing PDS

Description 27-21Copying

Using Command 27-13Using Function Panel 27-16Using Selection List 27-20

Define AliasUsing Command 27-22Using Function Panel 27-23

Define GDGUsing Command 27-25Using Function Panel 27-25

DeletingUsing Command 27-28, 27-29Using Function Panel 27-29Using Selection List 27-33

Display Contents in HEX 5-7, 5-8DSCB Empty Control 6-16Editing 27-61Function Panel 27-4Inquiring About 27-36Migration Recall Control 6-16Printing

Using Command 27-44

Data Sets (continued)Printing (continued)

Using Function Command 27-46Using Selection List 27-51

Releasing Space 27-52Renaming


Searching For StringLines Limit, Changing 6-16Lines Limit, Site Default 6-13

Uncataloging 27-58Writing To

Controlling Directory Updates 6-17Description 27-59, 27-60Using EDSN 27-61Using EXPORT 27-59

Date FormatChanging 6-15Display Current 6-14Site Defined 6-13

DB Line Command 16-4DB2 and CA-Roscoe 36-1DD Line Command 16-4Default values (syntax diagrams) xxixDEFINE ALIAS Command 27-23DEFINE GDG Command 27-25Defining

Alias Function PanelDescription 27-23Displaying 27-22Using 27-22

GDG Function PanelDescription 27-25Displaying 27-25

DELETE CommandAWS Contents 16-2Data Set Object 27-28, 27-29Library Member 34-11

Delete Confirmation PanelData Set Facility 27-33Library Facility

Description Of 34-14Detaching 34-14

Delete Function PanelData Set Facility 27-29Library Facility 27-29

DELETE Hardware Key 16-7DELETES Command 16-3


DELETEX Command 16-3Deleting

AWS ContentsUsing ERASE EOF Key (Controlling

Extent) 6-16Using Line Commands 16-4Using Primary Commands (By Line

Number) 16-2Using Primary Commands (Lines Containing

String) 16-3Data Set/Member/Module

Using Command 27-28, 27-29Using Function Panel 27-29Using Selection List 27-33

Library MemberFunction Panel 34-12Selection List 34-13Using Command 34-11

Print Request 7-13Deleting thread entries 35-16Delimiter

Command 6-15PF/PA Keys 6-17String 2-8

Delimiterssyntax diagrams, use in xxvii

DETACH CommandJob Output 30-7Library Facility 33-2

DetachingAWS 13-8Data Set Facility 26-2Job Output

Using Commands 30-7Using Job Facility 30-7

Library Facility 33-2Dialog Management Facility (DMF)

Description Of 37-1Discarding AWS

Display/Change Attributes 17-5Explicitly 13-9

DISPLAY CommandJob Execution Status 29-2Number of Jobs in Class 29-6Status of Initiators 29-5Status of Jobs in Class 29-4

Display FormatDisplay Data in HEX 5-7, 5-8Display Information About 6-2, 6-3Sequence Numbers

Display Margins 5-6

Display MarginsDisplay/Change

Description 6-2, 6-3Using SET DISPLAY 5-5Using STATUS AWS 17-4Using STATUS DISPLAY 5-4

Temporary Change 5-3, 5-4Display Mode

Display/Change Using STATUS AWS 17-4Displaying

Data in HEX 5-7, 5-8DMF, Description Of 37-1Documentation, Description of User 12-2DoPrint Mode (BBS) 35-17—35-19DROP Command

With Data Set, Member, Module 26-9DS Line Command 16-5DSB Line Command 16-5DSN

Keyword on System Information Line 8-4DST Line Command 16-5DT Line Command 16-4DU Line Command 16-5DX Line Command 16-5DXB Line Command 16-5DXT Line Command 16-5

EE Line Command 14-7EB Line Command 14-7Edit Messages (BBS) 35-9, 35-10EditAgain Function (BBS) 35-10Editing Data

BulletinBoard System Messages 35-9, 35-10Changing Indicator Option 6-16Character

Using Line Commands 14-5, 14-7Using Primary Command 14-4, 14-6, 14-7

Track Changes 14-8—14-10EDSN Command 27-61EE Line Command 14-7Entering Data In AWS

From Command Area 18-14Using a Mask 18-11—18-12Using Automatic Line Insertion 18-9Using Line Commands

I and IB 18-8TE 18-10

Using PF Key 18-13Using Primary Commands

INPUT Command 18-2—18-5

Index X-7

Entering Data In AWS (continued)Using Primary Commands (continued)

INPUT TEXTENTR Command 18-6, 18-7With Automatic Indentation 18-15

ERASE EOF KeyControlling Extent of Deletion 6-16Using to Delete (AWS Data) 16-6

ET Line Command 14-7ETSO

AllocatingData Sets 38-5Files 38-4—38-5Terminal 38-5

ApplicationsExecuting 38-3

Change Escape Sequence 6-16Determining Executable Applications 38-2Executing

Applications 38-3, 38-8TSO Procedures 38-10

Freeing Files 38-7Overview 38-1Querying Files 38-7Release Allocated Files 38-7Resume Application Execution 38-8Suspend Application Execution 38-8

EXCL CommandAWS 20-6, 20-7Job Output 30-9Library Facility 33-4

EXCL Line Command 20-8, 20-9Execution Area 8-6Exit Function (BBS) 35-2EXPLICIT

LIB ALTER Operand 34-3, 34-4EXPORT Command 27-59, 27-60Extended Time-Sharing Option

See ETSO

FFETCH Command 34-7Fill Character

AWS 6-16Display/Change 17-4

FILL Command 14-2FindUser Function (BBS) 35-28FIRST Command

AWS 20-3Job Output

Locate String 30-8Position Within 30-12

FIRST Command (continued)Library Facility 33-3, 33-4

FIRST Line Command 20-5Firstnew Function (BBS) 35-4, 35-5Forced Signoff

3270-Type DevicesSTATUS DISPLAY Information 6-15

FormattingData

Using Automatic Indentation 6-15Using Line Commands 19-11, 19-12Using Primary Command 19-10, 19-11Using TAB Facility 18-16, 18-17

FRAM (SCRL Field Value) 8-4FREE Command 38-7FULL (SCRL Field Value) 8-4

GGeneration Data Group (GDG)

See Data Set FacilityGetMsgs Processing (BBS) 35-23GROUP CODE Field on Sign-on Screen 10-3

HHALF (SCRL Field Value) 8-4HELP Command 12-3—12-5HELP Facility 12-3—12-5Hex

Locate String In 20-11, 20-12Hexadecimal Display

Setting 5-7, 5-8Hierarchy

Command Evaluation 2-9HLP Keyword on System Information Line 8-4

II Line Command 18-8IB Line Command 18-8Ignore! Function (BBS) 35-4IM Line Command 18-11IMPLICIT

LIB ALTER Operand 34-3, 34-4INCL Command

AWS 20-6, 20-7Job Output 30-9Library Facility 33-4

INCL Line Command 20-8, 20-9


Initial Cap TextUsing Line Commands 19-6Using Primary Command 19-5

INPUT CommandEntering Data 18-3—18-5Using Power Typing 18-6, 18-7

Insert Data In AWSFrom Command Area 18-14Using a Mask 18-11—18-12Using Automatic Line Insertion 18-9Using Line Commands

I and IB 18-8TE 18-10

Using PF Key 18-13Using Primary Commands

INPUT Command 18-2—18-5INPUT TEXTENTR Command 18-6, 18-7

With Automatic Indentation 18-15Internal Pointer Positioning

AWS 13-10

JJCK Command 28-2, 28-3JCL Syntax Checker 28-2, 28-3JES Printers

Change LocationFor Request 7-10For Session 7-10

Displaying Locations 7-11Print At 7-2

JOBKeyword on System Information Line 8-4

Job FacilityAlter Job

Display Description 30-18Using 30-18

Cancel Job 30-30Copy Job


Detaching Job 30-7Displaying

Menu 28-9Selection List 28-13

Operator Control 28-15Print Job


Job InformationAJOB Command 29-7

Job OutputAttaching 30-2—30-6Cancel Job

Using Commands 30-30Using Job Facility 30-30, 30-31

Copy to AWSJob Menu 30-20Primary Commands 30-20Selection List 30-22

Description 30-5Detaching

Using Commands 30-7Using Job Facility 30-7

Display Format 5-7, 5-8Displaying

Data in HEX 5-7, 5-8Execution Status 29-2File Attributes 30-23—30-24Sequence Number Displaying 5-6

File AttributesChange Using Command 30-17Change Using Job Menu 30-18Change Using Modifiable Display 30-23—30-24Change Using Selection List 30-19

Positioning DisplayBetween Files 30-12To String 30-8

Printing FilesUsing Commands 30-26Using Job Menu 30-26Using Job Section List 30-29

Reattaching 30-15Searching For String

All Occurrences 30-9Line Limit, Changing 6-16Lines Limit, Site Default 6-13Non-Matching Occurrences 30-9Specific Occurrence 30-8

SYSOUT Class Requirements 30-5Job Selection List

Alter Job 30-19Copy Job 30-22Job Status 30-25Print Job 30-29

Join LinesUsing Line Commands 19-18Using Primary Command 19-15, 19-16

Index X-9

KKEY Field on Sign-on Screen 10-2Keywords (syntax diagrams) xxvi

LLanguage Character Set

Changing 6-15LAST Command

AWS 20-3Job Output


Library Facility 33-3, 33-4LAST Line Command 20-5Lastread Function (BBS) 35-4LC Line Command 19-5LCB Line Command 19-5LCC Line Command 19-5LCT Line Command 19-5LIB

Keyword on System Information Line 8-4LIBRARIAN Selection List

Detaching 26-2Reattaching 26-10, 26-11Search for String


Selecting Different Level 25-38LIBRARY Command 31-3—31-5Library Facility

Alter Member Attributes 34-2, 34-3Attaching

Member 32-10, 32-11Selection List 32-2

Copying 34-5, 34-6Deleting 34-11Detaching 33-2Function Panels Description 31-6Inquiring About Member 34-15, 34-16Library System 31-1Menu 31-3—31-5Printing 34-17Reattaching 33-10, 33-11Selection List

Function Code Hierarchy 31-8, 31-9Refresh 31-10Using 31-7

Wildcard Characters 32-3

Library MemberAttaching 32-10, 32-11Copying

Using Command 34-5, 34-6Using Function Panel 34-8, 34-9Using Selection List 34-9, 34-10

Creating 23-2Deleting


Display Format 5-7Displaying

Data in HEX 5-7, 5-8Format of Display 32-12HEX display 5-7, 5-8Inquiring About 34-15, 34-16Position Display

To Named Line 33-8To Specific Line 33-8

PrintingUsing Command 34-17Using Function Panel 34-17Using Selection List 34-21

RenamingUsing 34-22Using Command 34-22Using Function Panel 34-22Using Selection List 34-23

Save AWS Contents As 23-2Search for String

All Occurrences 33-4Non-Matching Occurrences 33-4Specific Occurrence 33-3, 33-4

Update Contents 23-5Library Member Display

Display Format 5-8Sequence Number Display 5-6

Library System, Description 31-1Line Commands

Correcting Invalid/Incomplete 2-10Description of Use 2-3, 2-4Display Format Description 2-2Evaluation Hierarchy 2-9

Locate CA-Roscoe Users (BBS) 35-28Locate/Display Data

All OccurrencesIn AWS (Modifiable Display) 20-7, 20-8, 20-9In AWS (Non-Modifiable Display) 20-7, 20-8

By OccurrenceIn AWS (Line Commands) 20-5In AWS (Primary Command) 20-3


Locate/Display Data (continued)Change Search Boundaries (For Command) 4-2Change Search Boundaries (For Session)

Using BOUNDS Line Command 4-5Using SET BOUNDS 4-4Using STATUS AWS 4-3Using STATUS DISPLAY 4-3

Customizing Display 20-10Non-Matching Occurrence

In AWS (Modifiable Display) 20-6In AWS (Non-Modifiable Display) 20-7, 20-8

Position Display 20-13Qualify String 20-10Translate Search String 20-10Using HEX String 20-11, 20-12

Logical Not (¬)Change Tab Character 17-5

LOWCASE Command 19-5Lowercase Data

All CharactersUsing Line Commands 19-5Using Primary Command 19-5

With Initial CapUsing Line Commands 19-6Using Primary Command 19-5

LSHIFT Command 19-10, 19-11

MM Line Command 21-3Manipulate Text

CenterUsing Line Commands 19-3, 19-4Using Primary Command 19-2

Initial CapUsing Line Commands 19-6Using Primary Command 19-5

Join LinesUsing Line Commands 19-18Using Primary Command 19-15, 19-16

Lowercase AllUsing Line Commands 19-5Using Primary Command 19-5

ReformatUsing Line Command 19-8—19-9Using Primary Command 19-7, 19-8

Shift LinesUsing Line Commands 19-11, 19-12Using Primary Command 19-10, 19-11

Split LineUsing Line Commands 19-17Using Primary Commands 19-13, 19-14

Manipulate Text (continued)Uppercase All


Margins, DisplayChange Using SET DISPLAY 5-5Change Using STATUS DISPLAY 5-4Temporary Change 5-3, 5-4

MASK Line Command 18-11—18-12MAX (SCRL Field Value) 8-5MB Line Command 21-3MERGE Command 34-7Message Selection List(BBS)

Description 35-3PFKey Functions 35-4

Message Thread Entry (BBS)Create 35-8, 35-9Description 35-6PFKey Functions 35-7

Message Thread Selection List(BBS)Description 35-5PFKey Functions 35-5

Message Threads (BBS)Create 35-8, 35-9Description 35-3Print 35-18, 35-19Viewing 35-5

Message Title (BBS), Create 35-10Messages

CA-Roscoe Info Messages 6-16Controlling Display

SEND Messages (Received) 9-2, 9-3Submit Confirmation 28-4

Monitor Error Messages 6-16Monitor Info Messages 6-16PRINT Completion 7-8Transmit Via BulletinBoard System 9-5Transmit Via SEND 9-4, 9-5View Using BulletinBoard System 35-21—35-24

MM Line Command 21-3Monitor Commands

Controlling MessagesError 6-16Informational 6-16

Deferring Command Execution 2-6Reexecuting 2-6

MOVE Command 21-2Moving Lines Within AWS

Using Line Commands 21-3, 21-4Using Primary Command 21-2

Index X-11

MT Line Command 21-3

NName

Field on System Information Line 8-3Print Request

Assigning 7-6Displaying 7-13

News Announcements (BBS)Description 35-2View 35-15

NewThread Function (BBS) 35-10NEXT Command

AWS 20-3Job Output


Library Facility 33-3, 33-4NEXT Line Command 20-5Nextnew Function (BBS) 35-6NONUM

Define Sequence Number Display 5-6NOPRESERVE Mode

Character Translation 3-4NOTE Command

With Data Set, Member, Module 26-8, 26-9With Job Output 30-13With Library Member 33-8, 33-9

Note NamesLibrary Member 33-8, 33-9

Notification MessagesPRINT Completion 7-8

NUMDefine Sequence Number Display 5-6

NUM2Define Sequence Number Display 5-6

NUMXDefine Sequence Number Display 5-6

OO (Destination/Overlay/Drop) Line Command

With COPY 15-4O (Destination/Overlay) Line Command

With COPY 15-4With Move 21-4

OB (Destination/Overlay) Line CommandWith COPY 15-5With Move 21-4

OM Line Command 18-12OMB Line Command 18-12OMIT Command 20-7, 20-8OMT Line Command 18-12OO (Destination/Overlay) Line Command


OperatorJob Facility 28-15

ORDER Command 14-3ORDER Operand, Library Facility 32-9Ordering Library Selection List 32-9OT (Destination/Overlay) Line Command


Overlay Line CommandsWith COPY 15-6With Move 21-5

PParentheses

syntax diagrams, use in xxviiPassword

Changing UserDuring Session 10-8, 10-9When Signing On 10-3, 10-8

PASSWORD Field on Sign-on Screen 10-2PAU Keyword on System Information Line 8-4PDS Member 25-15—25-17PDS Selection List

Attaching 25-18, 25-19Description Of 25-20Detaching 26-2Function Code List 25-20—25-22Inquire About

Load Module 25-20—25-22Source Module 25-23—25-25

Reattaching 26-10, 26-11Search for String


Selecting Different Level 25-38PF/PA Keys

BulletinBoard System 35-2Changing Assignment

Description 11-8, 11-9Fixed Assignment 11-10, 11-11Scroll Functions 11-13Special Functions 11-15Variable Assignment 11-11, 11-12


PF/PA Keys (continued)Command Delimiter 11-11

Changing 6-17Default Assignments 11-2Processing Hierarchy 11-7Using 11-4

PFv (SCRL Field Value) 8-5PGM Keyword on System Information Line 8-4Plus sign

Redisplaying last executed command 2-13POINT Command 13-11

Library Facility 33-4With Data Set, Member, Module 26-8With Job Output

Position Within 30-12To Noted Line 30-13

Power Typing (Data Entry)Using Line Command 18-10Using Primary Command 18-6, 18-7

PREFIX Command 14-2PRESERVE Mode

Character Translation 3-4PREV Command

AWS 20-3Job Output


Library Facility 33-3, 33-4PREV Line Command 20-5Prevnew Function (BBS) 35-5Primary Commands

Controlling Info Messages 6-16Correcting Invalid/Incomplete 2-10Deferring Command Execution 2-6Description of Use 2-2Reexecuting 2-6Using With Line Commands 2-2

PRINT CANCEL Command 7-13PRINT Command

Data Set 27-44Description 7-2Job Output

Commands 30-26Job Facility 30-26Selection List 30-29

With Library Facility 34-17PRINT DEVICE Command 7-12Print Function Panel

Data Set Facility 27-46Library Facility 34-17

PRINT HOLD Command 7-14PRINT LOCATION Command 7-11Print Message Utility (BBS) 35-17—35-19PRINT RELEASE Command 7-14PRINT ROUTE Command 7-14PRINT STATUS Command 7-13Printing (At 328x/System Printer)

ANSI Controlled 7-4Cancelling Request 7-13Changing Priorities 7-14Designating Location 7-10Display Information About

Printers 7-12Printing Locations 7-10Request Status 7-13

Formatting Request 7-3—7-5Holding Requests 7-14Naming Requests 7-6Notification Messages, Requesting 7-8Partial Requests 7-7Referencing Requests 7-6Releasing Requests 7-14Requesting Copies 7-6Rerouting Requests 7-14System Printer Controls 7-9Using

:P 7-2PRINT Command 7-2

Printing DataMessage Thread (BBS) 35-18, 35-19Notification Messages

Setting Default 6-17Thread Entry (BBS) 35-17Using

Data Set Facility 27-46Printing Location

ChangingFor Request 7-10For Session 7-10

DisplayingAll 7-11Current 6-4

Profile Cleanup (BBS) 35-16Program Access Keys

See PF/PA KeysProgram Attention Keys

See PF/PA KeysProgram Function Keys

See PF/PA KeysPrograms

commarepeat symbol, use in xxix

Index X-13

Programs (continued)parentheses

syntax diagrams, use in xxviipunctuation

syntax diagrams, use in xxviPrune Profile Utility (BBS) 35-16Punctuation marks (syntax diagrams) xxviPURGE Command

Job Output 30-30

RR Line Command 15-7RBX Prefix 35-2Read Message Attribute (BBS) 35-14Reattaching

AWS 13-13Data Set Object 26-10, 26-11Job Output 30-15Library Facility 33-10, 33-11

Reexecuting Last Command/RPF 2-6Reformat Lines

Using Line Command 19-8—19-9Using Primary Command 19-7, 19-8

REFRESH CommandData Set Facility 24-15Library Facility 31-10

Refresh Function (BBS) 35-4Refreshing Selection List

Data Set Facility 24-15Library Facility 31-10

RELEASE Command 27-52RENAME Command

AWS 13-5Data Set Object 27-53Library Member 34-22

Rename Function PanelData Set Facility 27-54

RenamingAWS

Using Command 13-5Using STATUS AWS 17-3

Data Set ObjectUsing Command 27-53Using Function Panel 27-54Using Selection List 27-57

Renumber AWS ContentsAny Time 22-1—22-3

RENUMBER Command 22-1—22-3Reserved

Characters 2-5, 2-6

RESET Line Command 2-11Response Line 8-3RPF Programs

Description Of 39-1Execution Library, Control Use Of 6-16Looping

Change Limit 6-17Limit Defaults 6-13

Write LimitChange Setting 6-17Site Defaults 6-13

RR Line Command 15-7RSHIFT Command 19-10, 19-11

SSAVE Command

Assigning Attributes 23-4Assigning Description 23-4Creating Library Member 23-2

Saving AWS Contents 23-2Scale Line 8-6Screen

ChangeCopy Destination 6-15Size 8-12

Components ofCommand Area 8-3Description 8-2Execution Area 8-6Response Line 8-3Scale Line 8-6System Control Area 8-3—8-5System Information Line 8-3

Copy 15-9Print 7-2Split

Full 8-7—8-8Overview 8-7Partial 8-9Resplit 8-10Swap 8-10, 8-11Terminate 8-11

Types ofFull/Half 8-7Terminal Lock 8-13, 8-14

SCREEN Command 8-12Screen Types of 10-2—10-3

Sign-on 10-3Sign-on' 10-2


SDSN Command 27-62SEARCH Command 20-7, 20-8SELECT Command (CA-Roscoe)

With AWS 13-14With Library Facility 32-13

Selection ListsCopying From 27-20Data Set Facility

Catalog 25-7, 25-8, 25-9—25-12Data Set 25-26, 25-27Function Code Hierarchy 24-13LIBRARIAN 25-2—25-6Overview 24-12PDS Load 25-20—25-22PDS Source 25-23—25-25Printing From 27-51Refreshing 24-15Source 25-23—25-25Volume 25-30—25-31VTOC 25-35—25-37

Library FacilityAttach Member 32-11Copy 34-9, 34-10Description 31-7, 32-2Detaching 33-2Function Code Hierarchy 31-8, 31-9Refreshing 31-10Sorting Display (ORDER Command) 32-9

SEND CommandControlling Message Display 6-17Receiving Messages 9-2, 9-3Transmitting Messages 9-4, 9-5

Sequence Number AttributesAWS

Change Using STATUS AWS 17-4Change When Printing 7-3

Change When Submitting 28-5Sequence Numbers

Display 5-6Printing 7-3Renumbering 22-2

SESSIONduplicate commands

saving 6-16Session Attributes

:C (COPY) DestinationChanging 6-15

+INC Statement ExpansionChanging 6-17

ATTACH Pause Setting 6-15Automatic

Indentation, Display/Change 6-15

Session Attributes (continued)Automatic (continued)

Line Insertion, Display/Change 6-15Signoff, Site Defaults 6-12Terminal Lock, Site Defaults 6-12

AWSData Protection 6-15Edit Indicator 6-16ERASE EOF Key Control 6-16Fill Character (Trailing Blanks) 6-16Highlighting 6-15Recovery, Change 17-5Selection, Change 17-5Sequence Number Attribute, Change 17-6Tab Character/Positions, Change 17-5

CA-Librarian -INC ExpansionChanging 6-16

Character SetChanging 6-15Using 3-2

Character TranslationChanging 6-16Using 3-3

Column Boundaries 6-15Command Area

Changing 6-15Command Delimiter (CA-Roscoe)


Command Delimiter (PF/PA Key)Changing 6-17

Cursor Positioning 6-15, 6-16Data Set Objects

COMPRESS Message Control, Changing 6-16Directory Update Setting 6-17DSCB Empty Setting 6-16Migration Recall 6-16Search Limits, Changing 6-16

Date Format 6-15Display

CA-Roscoe ID 6-17List of All 6-4User ID 6-17

Display FormatChange All 6-15Change Display Format 5-7, 5-8Change Display Margins 5-5Change Sequence Number Display 5-6

DSCB Setting, Change 6-16ETSO Escape Sequence

Changing 6-16

Index X-15

Session Attributes (continued)Jobs

-INC Expansion Control, Changing 6-16+INC Expansion Control 6-17Data Width Control 6-17Search Limits, Changing 6-16

List Of 6-4Messages, Controling Display

From CA-Roscoe 6-16From Monitor 6-16

PRINT Completion Notification Changing 7-8Printing Destination

Changing 6-17Printing Location

Establish 7-10Printing Notification

Changing 6-17RPF

Control Execution Library Use 6-16Control Loop Limit 6-17Control Write Limit 6-17

Screen Copy DestinationChanging 6-15

Screen Positioning When String Located 6-17SCRL Field Value

Changing 6-17Search Column Boundaries

Changing 6-15Sequence Number Display 6-17Signoff

Changing Option 6-15SET ATTACH Command 6-15SET AUTOFF Command

Site Defaults 6-12STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-15

SET AUTOINDENT CommandInserting Lines 18-15STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-15

SET AUTOINSERT CommandInsert Additional Lines 18-9STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-15

SET AWSDSPLY Command 6-15SET BOUNDS Command

Change Column Boundaries 4-4STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-15

SET CHARSET CommandChanging Language Code 3-2STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-15

SET CMDLINES CommandSTATUS DISPLAY Information 6-15

SET CommandSTATUS DISPLAY Information 6-15

SET COPYDEST CommandSTATUS DISPLAY Information 6-15

SET CURSOR Command 6-15SET DATEFORM Command 6-15SET DISPLAY Command

Change Display Format 5-7, 5-8Change Display Margins 5-5Change Sequence Number Display 5-6STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-15

SET DSNCMLST CommandSTATUS DISPLAY Information 6-16

SET DSNCNT CommandSite Default 6-13STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-16

SET DSNEMPTY Command 6-16SET DSNRECALL command 6-16SET DUPCR command 6-16SET EDITCHNG Command

STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-16Tracking Changed Lines 14-8—14-10

SET EOF CommandControl ERASE EOF Use 16-6STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-16

SET ESCAPE CommandSTATUS DISPLAY Information 6-16

SET EXECPFX command 6-16SET FILL Command

STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-16SET JOBCNT Command

Site Default 6-13STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-16

SET MASTER CommandSTATUS DISPLAY Information 6-16

SET MODE CommandControl Character Recognition/Translation 3-3Control Non-Displayable Character Translation 3-4STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-16

SET MONLEVEL command 6-16SET MONTRAP command 6-16SET MSGLEVEL Command

STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-16With Job Submission 28-4

Set Options Utility (BBS) 35-13SET PFKDELIM Command

STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-16SET RPSDEST Command

STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-9SET RPSNOTIFY Command

For PRINT Completion Notification 7-8


SET RPSNOTIFY Command (continued)STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-17

SET SAVEATTR CommandSTATUS DISPLAY Information 6-17

SET SCROLL CommandSTATUS DISPLAY Information 6-17

SET SEARCH Command 6-17SET SEND Command

Controlling Display 9-2, 9-3STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-17

SET STATS Command 6-17SET STMTCNT Command 6-17

Site Default 6-13SET SUBMIT Command

Controlling Sequence Numbers 28-5Expanding +INC Statements 28-7STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-17

SET SYSID Command 6-17SET TLOCK Command

Activating Terminal Lock 8-13Site Defaults 6-12STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-17

SET USERID Command 6-17SET WRITECNT Command 6-17SetOpts Function (ZMsg BBS) 35-27Shifting Data

DescriptionUsing Line Commands 19-11, 19-12Using Primary Command 19-10, 19-11

Using TAB Facility 18-16, 18-17Show News Utility (BBS) 35-15Sign On

BulletinBoard System 35-2From CA-Roscoe 10-4, 10-5From CICS 10-6From Sign-on Screen 10-2—10-3From TSO 10-7Using VTAM 10-3

Sign-on ProgramCreating 10-10, 10-11

Sign-on Screen 10-2—10-3Signoff

AutomaticDescription 10-12Site Defaults 6-12

Explicit 10-13SKETCH

Description Of 40-1SMS-Managed Data Set

AllocatingUsing Function Panel 27-7

SMS-Managed Data Set (continued)Cataloging 27-11, 27-12

SMS-Managed Data SetsAllocating

Using Command 27-2, 27-3Special Characters

Asterisk (*) 2-6Double Comma (,,) 2-5Minus Sign (-) 2-6Plus Sign (+) 2-7Wildcard Characters 2-5

Split LineUsing Line Commands 19-17Using Primary Commands 19-13, 19-14

Split Screen FacilityFull 8-7—8-8Overview 8-7Partial 8-9Resplitting 8-10Swapping 8-10, 8-11Terminating 8-11

Split screen setting 6-10STA Keyword on System Information Line 8-4STANDARD Mode

Character Translation/Recognition 3-3STATUS AWS Command 17-1—17-6STATUS COMMAND Command 2-13STATUS DISPLAY Command

ChangingColumn Boundaries 4-3Display Format 5-7, 5-8Sequence Number Display 5-6

Description 6-2, 6-3STATUS SESSION Command 6-4STATUS SYSTEM Command 6-12, 6-13String Handling

AddingAt Beginning 14-2At End 14-2

Changing Character WithinUsing Line Commands 14-5Using Primary Command 14-4

Changing StringTracking Changes 14-8—14-10Using Line Commands 14-7Using Primary Command 14-6, 14-7

Delimiter Characters 2-8HEX

Display In 5-7, 5-8Locate All Occurrences

In AWS (Modifiable Display) 20-7, 20-8, 20-9In AWS (Non-Modifiable Display) 20-7, 20-8

Index X-17

String Handling (continued)Locate Non-Matching Occurrence

In AWS (Modifiable Display) 20-6, 20-7, 20-8In AWS (Non-Modifiable Display) 20-7, 20-8

Locating By OccurrenceIn AWS (Line Commands) 20-5In AWS (Primary Command) 20-3

TranslateOn Input/Edit 3-3With Command 3-3

SUBMIT Command 28-4Submitting Data

Changing Defaults 6-17Description 28-4

SUFFIX Command 14-2Suppress Message Processing (BBS) 35-23Syntax Checking

COBOL 28-3JCL 28-2, 28-3

Syntax diagramsreading (how to) xxvi—xxx

SYSOUT Class Requirements 30-5System Control Area 8-3—8-5System Information Line 8-3System Printers

Changing LocationsFor Request 7-10For Session 7-10

Displaying Locations 7-11Setting Parameters 7-9Using 7-2

TTab Character

Change Via STATUS AWS 17-5TAB Command 18-16, 18-17TC Line Command 19-3TCB Line Command 19-3TCC Line Command 19-3TCT Line Command 19-3TE Line Command 18-10Terminal Lock Facility

Changing Options 6-17Invoking 8-13, 8-14Site Defaults 6-12Terminating 8-13, 8-14

TerminateSplit Screens 8-11Terminal Lock Screen 8-13

TEXTENTR (Operand of INPUT Command) 18-6, 18-7TF Line Command 19-8—19-9Thread entries, deleting 35-16Thread Entry (BBS)

Create 35-8, 35-9Print 35-17View 35-6

Thread Title (BBS), Create 35-10TIME Command 6-14Time, Display 6-14Title, Message/Thread (BBS) 35-10TJ Line Command 19-18TRACE Command 14-10Tracking Changed Lines 14-8—14-10Translation, Character

Non-display 3-4When Entering/Editing Data 3-3When Searching For String 3-3When Specified with CA-Roscoe Commands 3-3

TS Line Command 19-17TSO

Command 38-10Procedure Execution 38-10Signing on to CA-Roscoe 10-7

TSO Command 38-10TT (Destination) Line Command 15-4

With Move 21-4TTD (Destination/Drop) Line Command

With COPY 15-5TUTORIAL, CA-Roscoe

Description 12-6TXTCENT Command 19-2TXTFLOW Command 19-7TXTJOIN Command 19-15, 19-16TXTLCASE Command 19-5TXTSPLIT Command 19-13, 19-14Typewriter Devices

Establishing Communications A-2Non-Executable Commands A-12Signing Off A-6Signing On A-4Using The Data Set Facility A-10Viewing Job Output A-11

UUC Line Command 19-5UCB Line Command 19-5UCC Line Command 19-5UCT Line Command 19-5


Uncataloging Data Set 27-58UNCATLG Command 27-58Unread Message Attribute (BBS) 35-14UPCASE Command 19-5UPDATE Command 23-5Uppercase Data


Using PF/PA KeysInserting Data In AWS 18-13

Utility Function (BBS) 35-4, 35-12Utility Menu (BBS) 35-12

VVariables (syntax diagrams) xxviViewing Message Thread (BBS) 35-5Viewing Message Thread Entries (BBS) 35-6, 35-7Volume Selection List

Attaching 25-28Description Of 25-30—25-31Detaching 26-2Function Code List 25-30—25-31Reattaching 26-10, 26-11Search for String


Selecting Different Level 25-38Wildcard Characters 25-29

VTAM Sign-onInitial 10-3Signing Off 10-13

VTOC Selection ListAttaching 25-33—25-34Description Of 25-35—25-37Detaching 26-2Function Code List 25-35—25-37Reattaching 26-10, 26-11Search for String


Selecting Different Level 25-38Wildcard Characters 24-8, 25-33

WWildcard Characters

With Data Set FacilityFor Catalog/VTOC Selection List 24-8For LIBRARIAN/PDS/Volume Selection

List 24-9

Wildcard Characters (continued)With Library Facility 32-3

XXCOPY Command

Between Screens 15-12—15-14XCOPYS Command

Between Screens 15-12—15-14XCOPYX Command

Between Screens 15-12—15-14XL Line Command 14-5XLB Line Command 14-5XLT Line Command 14-5XTENDED Mode

Character Translation/Recognition 3-3XTPM

Signing On CA-Roscoe 10-4

ZZAnn Mode (BBS) 35-15ZMsg (BBS)

Function 35-4Mode, Using 35-21—35-27PFKey Functions 35-25Set Options 35-27

ZMsgOpts Display (BBS) 35-27ZZZZZMSG Member

View Using BulletinBoard System 35-21—35-24

Index X-19

ca roscoe ver6

Documents